REJ09B0301-0400 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 16 H8S/2138 Group, H8S/2134 Group, H8S/2138F-ZTAT™, H8S/2134F-ZTAT™, H8S/2132F-ZTAT™ Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family/H8S/2100 Series H8S/2138 H8S/2137 HD6432138S HD6432138SW HD64F2138 HD64F2138V HD64F2138A HD64F2138AV HD6432137S HD6432137SW H8S/2134 H8S/2133 H8S/2132 H8S/2130 Rev. 4.00 Revision Date: Jun 06, 2006 HD6432134S HD64F2134 HD64F2134V HD64F2134A HD64F2134AV HD6432133S HD6432132 HD64F2132R HD64F2132RV HD6432130 Keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials 1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or a third party. 2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means, including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page ii of liv General Precautions on Handling of Product 1. Treatment of NC Pins Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins. The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the operation of the LSI is not guaranteed. 2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. Processing before Initialization Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined. The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page iii of liv Configuration of This Manual This manual comprises the following items: 1. General Precautions on Handling of Product 2. Configuration of This Manual 3. Preface 4. Main Revisions for This Edition The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions. This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this manual. 5. Contents 6 Overview 7. Description of Functional Modules • CPU and System-Control Modules • On-Chip Peripheral Modules The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the module. However, the generic style includes the following items: i) Feature ii) Input/Output Pin iii) Register Description iv) Operation v) Usage Note When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the final part of each section. 8. List of Registers 9. Electrical Characteristics 10. Appendix Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page iv of liv Preface The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group comprise high-performance microcomputers with a 32-bit H8S/2000 CPU core, and a set of on-chip supporting functions required for system configuration. The H8S/2000 CPU can execute basic instructions in one state, and is provided with sixteen internal 16-bit general registers with a 32-bit configuration, and a concise and optimized instruction set. The CPU can handle a 16-Mbyte linear address space (architecturally 4 Gbytes). Programs based on the high-level language C can also be run efficiently. Single-power-supply flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) and mask ROM versions are available, providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full-scale volume production, even for applications with frequently changing specifications. On-chip peripheral functions include a 16-bit free-running timer (FRT), 8-bit timer (TMR), watchdog timer (WDT), two PWM timers (PWM and PWMX), a serial communication interface (SCI, IrDA), host interface (HIF), D/A converter (DAC), A/D converter (ADC), and I/O ports. An 2 I C bus interface (IIC) can also be incorporated as an option. An on-chip data transfer controller (DTC) is also provided, enabling high-speed data transfer without CPU intervention. The H8S/2138 Group has all the above on-chip supporting functions, and can also be provided with an IIC module as an option. The H8S/2134 Group comprises reduced-function versions, with fewer TMR channels, and no PWM, HIF, IIC, or DTC modules. Use of the H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group enables compact, high-performance systems to be implemented easily. The comprehensive PC-related interface functions and 16 × 8 matrix key-scan functions are ideal for applications such as notebook PC keyboard control and intelligent battery and power supply control, while the various timer functions and their interconnectability (timer 2 connection), plus the interlinked operation of the I C bus interface and data transfer controller (DTC), in particular, make these devices ideal for use in PC monitors. In addition, the combination of F-ZTAT™* and reduced-function versions is ideal for applications such as system units in which on-chip program memory is essential to meet performance requirements, product start-up times are short, and program modifications may be necessary after end-product assembly. This manual describes the hardware of the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series and H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Note: * F-ZTAT (Flexible-ZTAT) is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page v of liv On-Chip Supporting Modules Group H8S/2138 Group H8S/2134 Group Product names H8S/2138, 2137 H8S/2134, 2133, 2132, 2130 Bus controller (BSC) Available (8 bits) Available (8 bits) Data transfer controller (DTC) Available — 8-bit PWM timer (PWM) ×16 — 14-bit PWM timer (PWMX) ×2 ×2 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) ×1 ×1 8-bit timer (TMR) ×4 ×3 Timer connection Available — Watchdog timer (WDT) ×2 ×2 Serial communication interface (SCI) ×3 ×3 I C bus interface (IIC) ×2 (option) — Host interface (HIF) ×2 — D/A converter ×2 ×2 A/D converter ×8 (analog input) ×8 (analog input) 2 ×8 ×8 (expansion A/D inputs) (expansion A/D inputs) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page vi of liv Main Revisions for This Edition Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) All — • Notification of change in company name amended (Before) Hitachi, Ltd. → (After) Renesas Technology Corp. • Product naming convention amended (Before) H8S/2138 Series → (After) H8S/2138 Group (Before) H8S/2134 Series → (After) H8S/2134 Group Description amended (Before) Serial/timer control register → (After) Serial timer control register 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 12 Pin Name Pin No. Table 1.2 H8S/2138 Group Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 2.6.1 Overview Table 2.1 Instruction Classification Table amended FP-80A TFP-80C 28 42 Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 Flash Memory Programmer Mode VSS Table amended Function Instructions Size Types Arithmetic operations ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG BWL 19 ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS B INC, DEC BWL Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page vii of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 9.3.1 Correspondence between PWM Data Register Contents and Output Waveform 251 Table amended Upper 4 Bits 0000 Basic Pulse Waveform (Internal) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 0001 Table 9.4 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 .. . 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 10.1.3 Pin configuration 255 Channel deleted Table 10.1 Input and Output Pins 12.1 Overview 305 Description amended The H8S/2138 Series also has two similar 8-bit timer channels (TMRX and TMRY). These channels can be used in a connected configuration using the timer connection function. TMRX and TMRY have greater input/output and interrupt function related restrictions than TMR0 and TMR1. TMRX has a built-in H8S/2138, but does not have a built-in H8S/2134. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page viii of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 16.4 Usage Notes 514 to 521 • Notes on WAIT Function • Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode • Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode • Notes on Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode • Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception Description added 17.1.3 Input and Output 525 Pins Table 17.1 Host Interface Input/Output Pins 19.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time 566 Note * amended Note: * Selection of CS2 or ECS2 is by means of the CS2E bit in SYSCR and ... Figure 19.5 amended (1) φ Figure 19.5 A/D Conversion Timing Address (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL tCONV 19.6 Usage Notes 572 Note added Note: Values are reference values. Figure 19.11 Example of Analog Input Circuit 21.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) 590 21.6.1 Boot Mode 597 Description amended Bits 6 to 2Reserved: Always write 0 when writing to these bits. Description amended ... H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF (3968 bytes) in the 128-kbyte versions including H8S/2132, except for H8S/2132R or H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF (1920 bytes) in the 64-kbyte versions including H8S/2132R, except for H8S/2132. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page ix of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 21.6.1 Boot Mode 597 Figure 21.10 amended 1 Programming control* program area (3,968 bytes) Figure 21.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode Boot program area* (128 bytes) 2 (a) 128-kbyte versions (including H8S/2132) (b) 64-kbyte versions (except for H8S/2132) Note 1 added Note: 1. In H8S/2132 F-ZTAT (Mask ROM version), H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)E87F is a reserved area that is used only for boot mode operation. Do not use this area for other purpose. 598 Description amended · Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H'(FF)E080 (128-kbyte versions including H8S/2132, except for H8S/2132R or H'(FF)E880 (64-kbyte versions, including H8S/2132R, except for H8S/2132)), ... 22.4.5 Register Configuration 632 Table 22.4 amended 3 3 (Before) * → (After) R/W* 23.7 Subclock Input Circuit 678 "Note on Subclock Usage" description added 24.1 Overview 682 Table 24.1 amended Table 22.4 Flash Memory Registers Table 24.1 H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group Internal States in Each Mode Function On-chip RAM supporting module I/O operation HighSpeed MediumSpeed Sleep Software Subactive Subsleep Standby Hardware Standby Functioning Functioning Function- Functioning (DTC) ing Retained Functioning Retained Retained Retained Functioning Functioning Functioning Retained Functioning Functioning Retained High impedance 24.12 Usage Notes 702 Section 24.12 added 25.2.2 DC Characteristics 709 Note *4 amended Module Stop Functioning Watch Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. Table 25.3 DC Characteristics (1) Table 25.3 DC Characteristics (2) 712 Table 25.3 DC Characteristics (3) 715 Note *4 amended Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. Note *4 amended Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page x of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 25.2.7 Usage Note 732 Description amended Figure 25.3 Connection of External Capacitor (Mask ROM Type Incorporating Step-Down Circuit and Product Not Incorporating Step-Down Circuit) 25.3.2 DC Characteristics <Products incorporating internal step-down circuit> HD6432138S, HD6432138SW, HD6432137S, HD6432137SW, HD6432134S, HD6432133S, HD64F2138A, HD64F2134A 735 Table 25.16 DC Characteristics (1) 736 Table 25.16 (1) amended Item Symbol Min Typ Max Test Unit Conditions Output high All output pins voltage (except P97, and 4 5 P52* )* 4 P97, P52* VOH VCC –0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA 3.5 — — V IOH = –1 mA 2.0 — — V IOH = –200 µA, VCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V Note *4 amended Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. Table 25.16 DC Characteristics (2) 738 Table 25.16 (2) amended Item Symbol Min Typ Max Test Unit Conditions Output high All output pins voltage (except P97, and 4 5 P52* )* VOH VCC –0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA 3.5 — — V IOH = –1 mA, VCC= 4.5 V to 5.5 V 3.0 — — V IOH = –1 mA, VCC < 4.5 V 1.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA, VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V 4 P97, P52* 739 Note *4 amended Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xi of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 25.3.2 DC Characteristics 740 Table 25.16 (3) amended Table 25.16 DC Characteristics (3) Item Symbol Min Typ Max Test Unit Conditions Output high All output pins (except P97, and voltage 4 5 P52* )* VOH VCC –0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA VCC –1.0 — — V IOH = –1 mA 0.5 — — V IOH = –200 µA, VCC = 2.7 to 3.5 V P97, P52* 742 4 Note *4 amended Note: 4. P52/SCK0/SCL0 and P97/SDA0 are NMOS push-pull outputs in H8S/2138. ... P52/SCK0 and P97 (ICE = 0) high levels are driven by NMOS in H8S/2138. 25.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics 756 Table 25.27 amended Item Table 25.27 Flash Memory Characteristics (Programming/Erasing Operating Range) Reprogramming count Data retention time*10 757 Symbol Min 100*8 Typ Max 10000*9 — Unit tDRP — Years NWEC 10 — Test Condition Times Notes 8 to 10 added Notes: 8. Minimum number of times for which all characteristics are guaranteed after rewriting (Guarantee range is 1 to minimum value). 9. Reference value for 25C° (as a guide line, rewriting should normally function up to this value). 10. Data retention characteristics when rewriting is performed within the specification range, including the minimum value. 25.4.2 DC Characteristics 761 Table 25.29 (1) amended Item Table 25.29 DC Characteristics (1) Three-state leakage current (off state) Ports 1 to 6, 8, 9 Input pull-up Ports 1 to 3 MOS current Port 6 Table 25.29 DC Characteristics (3) 766 Table 25.40 DC Characteristics (1) 782 Typ Max Test Unit Conditions ITSI — — 1.0 µA Vin = 0.5 to VCC –0.5 V –IP 50 — 300 µA 60 — 500 µA Vin = 0 V, VCC = 5 V ±10% Note *5 added to test conditions for input pull-up MOS current 5 V = 0 V, V = 2.7 V* to 3.6 V in 25.5.2 DC Characteristics Symbol Min CC Table 25.40 (1) amended Item Input pull-up MOS current Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xii of liv Ports 1 to 3 Port 6 Symbol Min Typ Max Test Unit Conditions –IP 30 — 300 µA 60 — 600 µA Vin = 0 V, VCC = 5 V ±10% Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 25.5.6 Flash Memory Characteristics 797 Table 25.49 amended Item Table 25.49 Flash Memory Characteristics (Programming/Erasing Operating Range) Reprogramming count Data retention time*10 798 Symbol Min 100*8 Typ Max 10000*9 — Times tDRP — Years NWEC 10 — Unit Test Condition Notes 8 to 10 added Notes: 8. Minimum number of times for which all characteristics are guaranteed after rewriting (Guarantee range is 1 to minimum value). 9. Reference value for 25C° (as a guide line, rewriting should normally function up to this value). 10. Data retention characteristics when rewriting is performed within the specification range, including the minimum value. B.3 Function 906 SYSCR2 H'FF83 HIF Figure amended Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KWUL1 KWUL0 P6PUE — SDE CS4E CS3E HI12E Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W Host interface enable 0 Host interface function disabled 1 Host interface function enabled CS3 enable 0 Host interface pin channel 3 functions disabled 1 Host interface pin channel 3 functions enabled CS4 enable 907 0 Host interface pin channel 4 functions disabled 1 Host interface pin channel 4 functions enabled EBR1, 2 H'FF82, H'FF83 Flash memory Note *2 amended Note: 2. Bits EB8 and EB9 are not present in the 64-kbyte versions; these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xiii of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) B.3 Function 938 STCR H'FFC3 System Figure amended Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0*1 Reserved Flash memory control register enable I2C 0 Flash memory control register not selected 1 Flash memory control register selected master enable 0 CPU access to SCI0, SCI1, and SCI2 control registers is enabled 1 CPU access to I2C bus interface data, PWMX data registers and control registers is enabled I2C transfer select 1 and 0*2 Reserved 939 SYSCR H'FFC4 System Figure amended Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W RAM Enable 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled Host interface enable 0 Addresses H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF are used for access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers 1 Addresses H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF are used for access to host interface data registers and control registers, and keyboard controller and MOS input pull-up control registers NMI edge select 0 Falling edge 1 Rising edge External reset 0 Reset generated by watchdog timer overflow 1 Reset generated by an external reset Interrupt control selection mode 1 and 0 Bit 5 Bit 4 Interrupt INTM1 INTM0 control mode 0 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xiv of liv Description 0 0 Interrupts controlled by I bit 1 1 Interrupts controlled by I and UI bits, and ICR (Initial value) 0 2 Cannot be used in the LSI 1 3 Cannot be used in the LSI Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) B.3 Function 942 WSCR H'FFC7 Bus Controller Figure amended 7 6 RAMS RAM0 Bit Initial value 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W Reserved Note: Always write 0 when writing to these bits in the A-mask version. 959 STR1, 2 H'FFF6, H'FFFE HIF Figure amended Bit 1 0 IBF OBF Initial value 0 0 Slave R/W R R/(W) Host R/W R R Output data register full 0 [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR or the slave writes 0 in the OBF bit 1 [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR Input data register full 0 [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR 1 [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xv of liv Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) Appendix G Package Dimensions 1002 Figure replaced 1003 Figure replaced Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (FP-80A) Figure G.2 Package Dimensions (TFP-80C) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xvi of liv Contents Section 1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 1 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 7 Pin Arrangement and Functions........................................................................................ 9 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement .................................................................................................. 9 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................... 11 1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 18 Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 25 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Overview........................................................................................................................... 2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................ 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... CPU Operating Modes ...................................................................................................... Address Space................................................................................................................... Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.4.2 General Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes ..................................................................... 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions ................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ..................................................... 2.7.1 Addressing Mode................................................................................................. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. Processing States............................................................................................................... 2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.8.2 Reset State............................................................................................................ 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 2.8.4 Program Execution State...................................................................................... 25 25 26 27 27 28 33 34 34 35 36 38 39 39 41 42 42 43 44 53 54 55 55 58 62 62 63 64 65 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xvii of liv 2.8.5 Bus-Released State............................................................................................... 2.8.6 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... 2.9 Basic Timing ..................................................................................................................... 2.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) ......................................................................... 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing .............................................................. 2.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 2.10.1 TAS Instruction.................................................................................................... 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction ......................................................................................... 65 65 66 66 66 68 69 70 70 70 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 71 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Overview........................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 3.2.3 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................ 3.2.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3.3.1 Mode 1 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.2 Mode 2 ................................................................................................................. 3.3.3 Mode 3 ................................................................................................................. Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ Memory Map in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ 71 71 72 72 72 73 75 76 78 78 78 78 79 79 Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 91 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................... 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation............................................................................. 4.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table ................................................................... Reset.................................................................................................................................. 4.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 4.2.2 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. Notes on Use of the Stack ................................................................................................. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xviii of liv 91 91 92 92 94 94 94 96 97 98 99 100 Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 101 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 Overview........................................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 5.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 5.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 5.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 5.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC)............................................ 5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)..................................... 5.2.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... 5.2.6 Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Register (KMIMR) ......................................... 5.2.7 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR)....................................................... 5.2.8 Break Address Registers A, B, C (BARA, BARB, BARC)................................. Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 5.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts................................................................................................. 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table ........................................................................ Address Breaks ................................................................................................................. 5.4.1 Features................................................................................................................ 5.4.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 5.4.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 5.4.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................... Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................ 5.5.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation ................................................ 5.5.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 ..................................................................................... 5.5.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 ..................................................................................... 5.5.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 5.5.5 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 5.6.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 5.6.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts ...................................................................... 5.6.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... DTC Activation by Interrupt............................................................................................. 5.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 5.7.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 5.7.3 Operation ............................................................................................................. 101 101 102 102 103 104 104 105 106 106 107 109 111 112 113 113 115 115 118 118 118 119 119 121 121 124 126 129 131 132 132 133 133 134 134 134 135 Section 6 Bus Controller ................................................................................................... 137 6.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 137 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xix of liv 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 6.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 6.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 6.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 6.2.1 Bus Control Register (BCR) ................................................................................ 6.2.2 Wait State Control Register (WSCR) .................................................................. Overview of Bus Control .................................................................................................. 6.3.1 Bus Specifications................................................................................................ 6.3.2 Advanced Mode................................................................................................... 6.3.3 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 6.3.4 I/O Select Signal .................................................................................................. Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 6.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment............................................................................. 6.4.3 Valid Strobes........................................................................................................ 6.4.4 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.4.5 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ Burst ROM Interface......................................................................................................... 6.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.5.2 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 6.5.3 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ Idle Cycle .......................................................................................................................... 6.6.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.6.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle ........................................................................................ Bus Arbitration.................................................................................................................. 6.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 6.7.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 6.7.3 Bus Transfer Timing ............................................................................................ 137 138 139 139 140 140 141 143 143 144 144 145 146 146 146 147 148 151 153 153 153 155 155 155 156 157 157 157 158 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group]............................................ 159 7.1 7.2 Overview........................................................................................................................... 7.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 7.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 7.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 7.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................ 7.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB)............................................................................. 7.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR).................................................................. 7.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR).......................................................... 7.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) .............................................................. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xx of liv 159 159 160 161 162 162 164 165 165 165 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)............................................................... 7.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) ......................................................................... 7.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)........................................................................ 7.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 7.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.3.2 Activation Sources ............................................................................................... 7.3.3 DTC Vector Table................................................................................................ 7.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space ............................................ 7.3.5 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 7.3.6 Repeat Mode ........................................................................................................ 7.3.7 Block Transfer Mode ........................................................................................... 7.3.8 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 7.3.9 Operation Timing................................................................................................. 7.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States........................................................................ 7.3.11 Procedures for Using the DTC............................................................................. 7.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC ............................................................................... Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 166 166 167 168 169 169 171 173 175 176 177 178 180 181 182 184 185 187 187 Section 8 I/O Ports .............................................................................................................. 189 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Overview........................................................................................................................... Port 1................................................................................................................................. 8.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................ 8.2.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... Port 2................................................................................................................................. 8.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.3.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................ 8.3.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... Port 3................................................................................................................................. 8.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.4.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode ................................................................................ 8.4.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... Port 4................................................................................................................................. 8.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.5.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 189 195 195 197 199 201 201 201 203 205 207 208 208 209 211 212 213 213 213 214 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxi of liv 8.6 Port 5................................................................................................................................. 8.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.6.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.6.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 8.7 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 8.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.7.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.7.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 8.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function............................................................................... 8.8 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 8.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.8.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.8.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 8.9 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 8.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.9.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 8.10 Port 9................................................................................................................................. 8.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 8.10.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 8.10.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 218 218 218 220 221 221 222 225 227 228 228 228 229 230 230 230 231 234 234 235 236 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group]...................................................... 241 9.1 9.2 9.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... 9.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 9.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 9.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 9.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 9.2.1 PWM Register Select (PWSL)............................................................................. 9.2.2 PWM Data Registers (PWDR0 to PWDR15) ...................................................... 9.2.3 PWM Data Polarity Registers A and B (PWDPRA and PWDPRB).................... 9.2.4 PWM Output Enable Registers A and B (PWOERA and PWOERB) ................. 9.2.5 Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) ............................................................ 9.2.6 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 9.2.7 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR)............................................................. 9.2.8 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR)................................................................................ 9.2.9 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR)................................................................................ 9.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxii of liv 241 241 242 243 243 244 244 246 246 247 248 248 249 249 249 250 251 9.3.1 Correspondence between PWM Data Register Contents and Output Waveform.......................................................................................... 251 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A ........................................................................................... 10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 10.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 10.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 10.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 10.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 10.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 10.2.1 PWM D/A Counter (DACNT) ............................................................................. 10.2.2 D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB)......................................... 10.2.3 PWM D/A Control Register (DACR) .................................................................. 10.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 10.3 Bus Master Interface ......................................................................................................... 10.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 253 253 253 254 255 255 256 256 257 259 261 262 265 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer......................................................................... 269 11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 11.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 11.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 11.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 11.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) .............................................................................. 11.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) ......................................... 11.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ................................................ 11.2.4 Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) ............................... 11.2.5 Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM) ........................................................... 11.2.6 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) .............................................................. 11.2.7 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................ 11.2.8 Timer Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................. 11.2.9 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) .............................................. 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 11.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 11.3.1 FRC Increment Timing ........................................................................................ 11.3.2 Output Compare Output Timing .......................................................................... 11.3.3 FRC Clear Timing................................................................................................ 11.3.4 Input Capture Input Timing ................................................................................. 11.3.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting ........................................................ 11.3.6 Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA, OCFB)................................ 269 269 270 271 272 273 273 273 274 275 276 276 278 282 284 286 287 287 288 289 289 292 293 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxiii of liv 11.3.7 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) ................................................................. 11.3.8 Automatic Addition of OCRA and OCRAR/OCRAF ......................................... 11.3.9 ICRD and OCRDM Mask Signal Generation ...................................................... 11.4 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 11.5 Sample Application........................................................................................................... 11.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 294 294 295 296 297 298 Section 12 8-Bit Timers ..................................................................................................... 12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 12.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 12.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 12.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 12.2.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA)................................................................... 12.2.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) ................................................................... 12.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) ............................................................................. 12.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................ 12.2.6 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 12.2.7 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 12.2.8 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS)............................................................ 12.2.9 Input Capture Register (TICR) [TMRX Additional Function] ............................ 12.2.10 Time Constant Register C (TCORC) [TMRX Additional Function]................... 12.2.11 Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF) [TMRX Additional Functions]............................................................................. 12.2.12 Timer Input Select Register (TISR) [TMRY Additional Function]..................... 12.2.13 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 12.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 12.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing ............................................................................. 12.3.2 Compare-Match Timing....................................................................................... 12.3.3 TCNT External Reset Timing .............................................................................. 12.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting ............................................................. 12.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection.................................................................. 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation ...................................................................................... 12.4 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 12.5 8-Bit Timer Application Example..................................................................................... 12.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 12.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear........................................................ 12.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment ................................................ 12.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match ...................................... 305 305 305 306 307 308 309 309 310 311 312 315 319 320 320 321 322 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxiv of liv 322 323 324 325 325 326 328 328 329 330 333 334 335 335 336 337 12.6.4 Contention between Compare-Matches A and B................................................. 338 12.6.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation............................................. 338 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group]...................................................... 341 13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 13.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 13.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 13.2.1 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) ............................................................. 13.2.2 Timer Connection Register O (TCONRO) .......................................................... 13.2.3 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS)............................................................ 13.2.4 Edge Sense Register (SEDGR) ............................................................................ 13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 13.3.1 PWM Decoding (PDC Signal Generation) .......................................................... 13.3.2 Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1/CL2/CL3 Signal Generation) ..................... 13.3.3 Measurement of 8-Bit Timer Divided Waveform Period .................................... 13.3.4 IHI Signal and 2fH Modification ......................................................................... 13.3.5 IVI Signal Fall Modification and IHI Synchronization ....................................... 13.3.6 Internal Synchronization Signal Generation (IHG/IVG/CL4 Signal Generation) ..................................................................... 13.3.7 HSYNCO Output ................................................................................................. 13.3.8 VSYNCO Output ................................................................................................. 13.3.9 CBLANK Output ................................................................................................. 341 341 342 343 344 344 344 347 349 351 354 355 355 357 358 360 362 364 367 368 369 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) .............................................................................. 371 14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 14.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 14.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 14.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 14.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 14.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................ 14.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 14.2.4 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 14.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 14.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 371 371 372 374 374 375 375 376 379 380 381 381 382 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxv of liv 14.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) ......................................................... 14.4 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 14.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 14.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment ..................... 14.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0...................................................................... 14.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 14.5.4 Counter Value in Transitions between High-Speed Mode, Subactive Mode, and Watch Mode.................................................................................................. 14.5.5 OVF Flag Clear Condition................................................................................... 383 384 384 384 385 385 385 386 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) ........................................ 15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 15.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 15.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 15.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 15.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) .............................................................................. 15.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) ............................................................................. 15.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)............................................................................. 15.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................ 15.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR).............................................................................. 15.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 15.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 15.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR).............................................................. 15.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 15.2.11 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) .......................................... 15.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 15.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 15.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 15.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function............................................................ 15.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode ......................................................................... 15.3.5 IrDA Operation .................................................................................................... 15.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 15.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 387 387 387 389 390 390 392 392 392 393 393 394 397 401 405 413 414 416 417 417 419 430 438 447 450 451 Section 16 I2C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] ......................................... 455 16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 455 16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 455 16.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 456 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxvi of liv 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins ................................................................................................. 16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 2 16.2.1 I C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 16.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) ............................................................................. 16.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 2 16.2.4 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) ........................................................................... 2 16.2.5 I C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ......................................................................... 2 16.2.6 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 16.2.7 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 16.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ...................................................................... 16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 16.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 2 16.3.1 I C Bus Data Format ............................................................................................ 16.3.2 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 16.3.3 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 16.3.4 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 16.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 16.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 2 16.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Mode to I C Bus Format ........................ 16.3.8 Operation Using the DTC .................................................................................... 16.3.9 Noise Canceler ..................................................................................................... 16.3.10 Sample Flowcharts............................................................................................... 16.3.11 Initialization of Internal State .............................................................................. 16.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 458 459 460 460 463 464 465 468 475 480 481 484 485 485 487 489 492 495 496 498 499 500 500 505 506 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] ............................................................. 523 17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 17.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 17.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 17.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 17.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 17.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 17.2.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) ................................................................. 17.2.3 Host Interface Control Register (HICR) .............................................................. 17.2.4 Input Data Register 1 (IDR1)............................................................................... 17.2.5 Output Data Register 1 (ODR1)........................................................................... 17.2.6 Status Register 1 (STR1) ..................................................................................... 17.2.7 Input Data Register 2 (IDR2)............................................................................... 17.2.8 Output Data Register 2 (ODR2)........................................................................... 523 523 524 525 526 527 527 528 529 530 530 531 532 533 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxvii of liv 17.2.9 Status Register 2 (STR2) ..................................................................................... 17.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 17.3.1 Host Interface Operation...................................................................................... 17.3.2 Control States....................................................................................................... 17.3.3 A20 Gate .............................................................................................................. 17.3.4 Host Interface Pin Shutdown Function ................................................................ 17.4 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 17.4.1 IBF1, IBF2 ........................................................................................................... 17.4.2 HIRQ11, HIRQ1, and HIRQ12............................................................................ 17.5 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 533 535 536 536 536 537 539 541 541 541 542 Section 18 D/A Converter ................................................................................................. 543 18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 18.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 18.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 18.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 18.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 18.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 18.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0, DADR1) ................................................. 18.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR) ............................................................................ 18.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 18.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 543 543 544 545 545 546 546 546 548 549 Section 19 A/D Converter ................................................................................................. 551 19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 19.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 19.1.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 19.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 19.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 19.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 19.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD).............................................. 19.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 19.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 19.2.4 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) .......................................... 19.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 19.3 Interface to Bus Master ..................................................................................................... 19.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 19.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) .................................................................................... 19.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)....................................................................................... 19.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxviii of liv 551 551 552 553 554 555 555 556 558 559 560 561 562 562 564 565 19.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 567 19.5 Interrupts ........................................................................................................................... 567 19.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 568 Section 20 RAM .................................................................................................................. 20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 20.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 20.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 20.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ................................................................................... 20.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 20.3.1 Expanded Mode (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) ............................................... 20.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) ................................................. 573 573 573 574 574 575 575 575 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) ....................................... 577 21.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 21.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 21.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 21.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 21.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 21.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 21.4 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................. 21.4.1 Features................................................................................................................ 21.4.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 21.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes ......................................................................... 21.4.4 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 21.4.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 21.5 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 21.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 21.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 21.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)..................................................... 21.5.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 21.6 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 21.6.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 21.6.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 21.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ............................................................................... 21.7.1 Program Mode ..................................................................................................... 21.7.2 Program-Verify Mode.......................................................................................... 21.7.3 Erase Mode .......................................................................................................... 21.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode .............................................................................................. 21.8 Flash Memory Protection.................................................................................................. 577 577 578 578 578 579 580 580 581 582 586 586 587 587 589 591 592 593 594 599 600 600 601 603 603 605 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxix of liv 21.9 21.10 21.11 21.12 21.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 21.8.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 21.8.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... Flash Memory Programmer Mode .................................................................................... 21.10.1 Programmer Mode Setting ................................................................................... 21.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map ..................................................................... 21.10.3 Programmer Mode Operation .............................................................................. 21.10.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 21.10.5 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................ 21.10.6 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 21.10.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 21.10.8 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 21.10.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time .................................................................... 21.10.10 Notes on Memory Programming...................................................................... Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions..................................................... Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version .................................. 605 605 606 608 609 609 610 610 611 615 617 618 620 620 621 621 622 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) ...................................................... 623 22.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 22.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 22.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 22.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 22.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 22.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 22.4 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................. 22.4.1 Features................................................................................................................ 22.4.2 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 22.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes ......................................................................... 22.4.4 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 22.4.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 22.5 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 22.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 22.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 22.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2)..................................................... 22.5.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 22.6 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 22.6.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 22.6.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 22.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory ............................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxx of liv 623 623 624 624 624 625 626 626 627 628 632 632 633 633 635 637 638 639 640 645 646 22.7.1 Program Mode ..................................................................................................... 22.7.2 Program-Verify Mode.......................................................................................... 22.7.3 Erase Mode .......................................................................................................... 22.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode .............................................................................................. Flash Memory Protection.................................................................................................. 22.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 22.8.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 22.8.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... Flash Memory Programmer Mode .................................................................................... 22.10.1 Programmer Mode Setting ................................................................................... 22.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map ..................................................................... 22.10.3 Programmer Mode Operation .............................................................................. 22.10.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 22.10.5 Auto-Program Mode ............................................................................................ 22.10.6 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 22.10.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 22.10.8 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 22.10.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time .................................................................... 22.10.10 Notes on Memory Programming...................................................................... Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions..................................................... Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version .................................. 646 647 649 649 651 651 651 652 654 655 655 656 656 657 661 663 664 666 666 667 667 668 Section 23 Clock Pulse Generator .................................................................................. 23.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 23.1.1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 23.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 23.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 23.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 23.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 23.3 Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 23.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator........................................................................... 23.3.2 External Clock Input ............................................................................................ 23.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................... 23.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider .......................................................................................... 23.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .................................................................................. 23.7 Subclock Input Circuit ...................................................................................................... 23.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit................................................................................ 23.9 Clock Selection Circuit ..................................................................................................... 669 669 669 670 670 670 671 672 672 674 677 677 677 677 678 679 22.8 22.9 22.10 22.11 22.12 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxi of liv Section 24 Power-Down State ......................................................................................... 681 24.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 24.1.1 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 24.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 24.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 24.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 24.2.3 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) ................................................................ 24.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 24.3 Medium-Speed Mode........................................................................................................ 24.4 Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................... 24.4.1 Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 24.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode............................................................................................ 24.5 Module Stop Mode ........................................................................................................... 24.5.1 Module Stop Mode .............................................................................................. 24.5.2 Usage Note........................................................................................................... 24.6 Software Standby Mode.................................................................................................... 24.6.1 Software Standby Mode....................................................................................... 24.6.2 Clearing Software Standby Mode ........................................................................ 24.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode .......... 24.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example.................................................... 24.6.5 Usage Note........................................................................................................... 24.7 Hardware Standby Mode .................................................................................................. 24.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode ..................................................................................... 24.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing......................................................................... 24.8 Watch Mode...................................................................................................................... 24.8.1 Watch Mode......................................................................................................... 24.8.2 Clearing Watch Mode .......................................................................................... 24.9 Subsleep Mode.................................................................................................................. 24.9.1 Subsleep Mode..................................................................................................... 24.9.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode ...................................................................................... 24.10 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................................ 24.10.1 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................... 24.10.2 Clearing Subactive Mode..................................................................................... 24.11 Direct Transition ............................................................................................................... 24.11.1 Overview of Direct Transition ............................................................................. 24.12 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 681 685 685 685 687 689 690 691 692 692 692 693 693 694 695 695 695 696 696 697 697 697 698 699 699 699 700 700 700 701 701 701 702 702 702 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics.............................................................................. 703 25.1 Voltage of Power Supply and Operating Range ............................................................... 703 25.2 Electrical Characteristics of H8S/2138 F-ZTAT............................................................... 706 25.2.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 706 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxii of liv 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.2.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.2.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.2.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.2.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 25.2.7 Usage Note........................................................................................................... Electrical Characteristics of H8S/2138 F-ZTAT (A-Mask Version), and Mask ROM Versions of H8S/2138 and H8S/2137 .................................................... 25.3.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.3.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.3.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.3.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.3.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.3.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 25.3.7 Usage Note........................................................................................................... Electrical Characteristics of H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, H8S/2132 F-ZTAT, and Mask ROM Versions of H8S/2132 and H8S/2130 .................................................... 25.4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.4.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.4.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.4.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.4.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.4.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 25.4.7 Usage Note........................................................................................................... Electrical Characteristics of H8S/2134 F-ZTAT (A-Mask Version), and Mask ROM Versions of H8S/2134 and H8S/2133 .................................................... 25.5.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................ 25.5.2 DC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.5.3 AC Characteristics ............................................................................................... 25.5.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.5.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics........................................................................... 25.5.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 25.5.7 Usage Note........................................................................................................... Operational Timing ........................................................................................................... 25.6.1 Clock Timing ....................................................................................................... 25.6.2 Control Signal Timing ......................................................................................... 25.6.3 Bus Timing .......................................................................................................... 25.6.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules............................................................. 707 718 727 729 730 731 733 733 734 744 753 755 756 758 759 759 760 768 775 777 778 779 780 780 781 787 794 796 797 799 800 800 802 803 807 Appendix A Instruction Set .............................................................................................. 813 A.1 Instruction ......................................................................................................................... 813 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxiii of liv A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 Instruction Codes .............................................................................................................. Operation Code Map......................................................................................................... Number of States Required for Execution ........................................................................ Bus States during Instruction Execution ........................................................................... 831 845 849 862 Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ................................................................................. 878 B.1 B.2 B.3 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 878 Register Selection Conditions ........................................................................................... 884 Functions........................................................................................................................... 891 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams........................................................................... 965 C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 Port 1 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 2 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 3 Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... Port 4 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 5 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 6 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 7 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 8 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... Port 9 Block Diagrams...................................................................................................... 965 966 969 970 977 980 985 986 992 Appendix D Pin States ....................................................................................................... 997 D.1 Port States in Each Processing State ................................................................................. 997 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................ 999 E.1 E.2 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode ............................................................ 999 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode......................................................... 999 Appendix F Product Code Lineup ................................................................................ 1000 Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................ 1002 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxiv of liv Figures Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2138 Group..................................................... 7 Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2134 Group..................................................... 8 Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2138 Group (FP-80A, TFP-80C: Top View) ............ 9 Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2134 Group (FP-80A, TFP-80C: Top View) ............ 10 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes....................................................................................... Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) ........................................................... Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode ....................................................................... Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) ....................................................... Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode ................................................................... Figure 2.6 Memory Map ..................................................................................................... Figure 2.7 CPU Registers ................................................................................................... Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers ............................................................................... Figure 2.9 Stack .................................................................................................................. Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats.......................................................................... Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats....................................................................................... Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples) ........................................................................ Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ................................. Figure 2.14 Processing States ............................................................................................... Figure 2.15 State Transitions ................................................................................................ Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples) ...................................... Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle........................................................................ Figure 2.18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access ...................................................... Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle....................................................... Figure 2.20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access..................................... 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 39 41 54 57 62 63 65 67 67 68 69 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Figure 3.1 H8S/2138 (Except for F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) and H8S/2134 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.................................................................................... Figure 3.2 H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figure 3.3 H8S/2133 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode............................................ Figure 3.4 H8S/2137 and H8S/2132 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode.................... Figure 3.5 H8S/2130 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode............................................ 80 82 84 86 88 Section 4 Exception Handling Figure 4.1 Exception Sources ............................................................................................. 92 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxv of liv Figure 4.2 Figure 4.3 Figure 4.4 Figure 4.5 (1) Figure 4.5 (2) Figure 4.6 Reset Sequence (Mode 3) .................................................................................. Reset Sequence (Mode 1) .................................................................................. Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts ...................................................... Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode) .................................... Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode) ................................ Operation When SP Value Is Odd ..................................................................... 95 96 97 99 99 100 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller .............................................................. Figure 5.2 Relationship between Interrupts IRQ6, Interrupts KIN7 to KIN0, and Registers KMIMR ...................................................................................... Figure 5.3 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 ...................................................... Figure 5.4 Timing of IRQnF Setting................................................................................... Figure 5.5 Block Diagram of Address Break Function....................................................... Figure 5.6 Examples of Address Break Timing.................................................................. Figure 5.7 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation ................................................. Figure 5.8 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0............................................................................................................... Figure 5.9 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1 ............................... Figure 5.10 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1 ................................................................................................. Figure 5.11 Interrupt Exception Handling ............................................................................ Figure 5.12 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling .................................. Figure 5.13 Interrupt Control for DTC ................................................................................. 128 130 132 134 Section 6 Bus Controller Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller...................................................................... Figure 6.2 IOS Signal Output Timing................................................................................. Figure 6.3 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space)...................... Figure 6.4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space).................... Figure 6.5 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space ...................................................... Figure 6.6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space ...................................................... Figure 6.7 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing ........................................................... Figure 6.8 (a) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 1).............. Figure 6.8 (b) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 0).............. Figure 6.9 Example of Idle Cycle Operation ...................................................................... 138 145 146 147 149 150 152 154 154 156 102 110 114 114 118 120 122 125 126 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DTC ..................................................................................... 160 Figure 7.2 Flowchart of DTC Operation............................................................................. 169 Figure 7.3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control .......................................... 172 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxvi of liv Figure 7.4 Figure 7.5 Figure 7.6 Figure 7.7 Figure 7.8 Figure 7.9 Figure 7.10 Figure 7.11 Figure 7.12 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information ....... Location of DTC Register Information in Address Space................................. Memory Mapping in Normal Mode .................................................................. Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode.................................................................... Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode....................................................... Memory Mapping in Chain Transfer ................................................................. DTC Operation Timing (Normal Mode or Repeat Mode)................................. DTC Operation Timing (Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2)............. DTC Operation Timing (Chain Transfer).......................................................... 173 175 176 177 179 180 181 181 182 Section 8 I/O Ports Figure 8.1 Port 1 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.2 Port 1 Pin Functions (Mode 1) .......................................................................... Figure 8.3 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) ........................................... Figure 8.4 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) ........................................... Figure 8.5 Port 2 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.6 Port 2 Pin Functions (Mode 1) .......................................................................... Figure 8.7 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) ........................................... Figure 8.8 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) ........................................... Figure 8.9 Port 3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.10 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) ...................................... Figure 8.11 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) ........................................... Figure 8.12 Port 4 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.13 Port 5 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.15 Port 7 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.16 Port 8 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... Figure 8.17 Port 9 Pin Functions .......................................................................................... 196 199 199 200 202 205 206 206 208 211 211 213 218 221 228 230 234 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer Module............................................................ 242 Figure 9.2 Example of Additional Pulse Timing (When Upper 4 Bits of PWDR = 1000)............................................................. 252 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Figure 10.1 PWM D/A Block Diagram ................................................................................ Figure 10.2 (a) Access to DACNT (CPU Writes H'AA57 to DACNT) ..................................... Figure 10.2 (b) Access to DACNT (CPU Reads H'AA57 from DACNT) ................................. Figure 10.3 PWM D/A Operation......................................................................................... Figure 10.4 (1) Output Waveform.............................................................................................. Figure 10.4 (2) Output Waveform.............................................................................................. 254 263 264 265 267 267 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxvii of liv Figure 10.4 (3) Output Waveform.............................................................................................. 268 Figure 10.4 (4) Output Waveform.............................................................................................. 268 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer ................................................. Figure 11.2 Input Capture Buffering (Example)................................................................... Figure 11.3 Increment Timing with Internal Clock Source .................................................. Figure 11.4 Increment Timing with External Clock Source ................................................. Figure 11.5 Timing of Output Compare A Output ............................................................... Figure 11.6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A............................................................. Figure 11.7 Input Capture Signal Timing (Usual Case)........................................................ Figure 11.8 Input Capture Signal Timing (Input Capture Input When ICRA/B/C/D Is Read)............................................ Figure 11.9 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Usual Case).................................................... Figure 11.10 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Input Capture Input When ICRA or ICRC Is Read) ........................................ Figure 11.11 Setting of Input Capture Flag (ICFA to ICFD).................................................. Figure 11.12 Setting of Output Compare Flag (OCFA, OCFB) ............................................. Figure 11.13 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)........................................................................ Figure 11.14 OCRA Automatic Addition Timing .................................................................. Figure 11.15 Input Capture Mask Signal Setting Timing ....................................................... Figure 11.16 Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing Timing..................................................... Figure 11.17 Pulse Output (Example) .................................................................................... Figure 11.18 FRC Write-Clear Contention............................................................................. Figure 11.19 FRC Write-Increment Contention ..................................................................... Figure 11.20 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Not Used)........................................... Figure 11.21 Contention between OCRAR/OCRAF Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Used).................................................. Section 12 8-Bit Timers Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module ............................................................. Figure 12.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input.............................................................. Figure 12.3 Count Timing for External Clock Input............................................................. Figure 12.4 Timing of CMF Setting ..................................................................................... Figure 12.5 Timing of Timer Output .................................................................................... Figure 12.6 Timing of Compare-Match Clear ...................................................................... Figure 12.7 Timing of Clearing by External Reset Input...................................................... Figure 12.8 Timing of OVF Setting...................................................................................... Figure 12.9 Timing of Input Capture Operation ................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxviii of liv 270 274 287 288 288 289 289 290 290 291 292 293 294 294 295 295 297 298 299 300 301 306 325 326 326 327 327 328 328 330 Figure 12.10 Figure 12.11 Figure 12.12 Figure 12.13 Figure 12.14 Figure 12.15 Timing of Input Capture Signal (When Input Capture Input Signal Enters while TICRR and TICRF Are Being Read)....................................................... Switching of Input Capture Signal .................................................................... Pulse Output (Example) .................................................................................... Contention between TCNT Write and Clear ..................................................... Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.............................................. Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match.................................... 331 331 334 335 336 337 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer Connection Facility ................................................... Figure 13.2 Timing Chart for PWM Decoding..................................................................... Figure 13.3 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1 and CL2 Signals) ......... Figure 13.4 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL3 Signal).......................... Figure 13.5 Timing Chart for Measurement of IVI Signal and IHI Signal Divided Waveform Periods ............................................................................................. Figure 13.6 2fH Modification Timing Chart ........................................................................ Figure 13.7 Fall Modification/IHI Synchronization Timing Chart....................................... Figure 13.8 IVG Signal/IHG Signal/CL4 Signal Timing Chart............................................ Figure 13.9 CBLANK Output Waveform Generation .......................................................... 360 361 363 366 369 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Figure 14.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0 .................................................................................. Figure 14.1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1 .................................................................................. Figure 14.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0) .................. Figure 14.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode................................................................. Figure 14.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode..................................................................... Figure 14.5 Timing of OVF Setting...................................................................................... Figure 14.6 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment.............................................. 372 373 380 382 383 383 384 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of SCI ....................................................................................... Figure 15.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) ............................................ Figure 15.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) ....................................................................................... Figure 15.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ................................................................. Figure 15.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ............................................................. Figure 15.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) .............................................. Figure 15.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart .......................................................... 342 356 358 358 389 419 421 422 423 425 426 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xxxix of liv Figure 15.8 Figure 15.9 Figure 15.10 Figure 15.11 Figure 15.12 Figure 15.13 Figure 15.14 Figure 15.15 Figure 15.16 Figure 15.17 Figure 15.18 Figure 15.19 Figure 15.20 Figure 15.21 Figure 15.22 Figure 15.23 Figure 15.24 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) .............................................. Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) ...................................... Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart .................................... Example of SCI Operation in Transmission (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) .......................... Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart.......................................... Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) .......................... Data Format in Synchronous Communication................................................... Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart ................................................................. Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart ............................................................. Example of SCI Operation in Transmission ...................................................... Sample Serial Reception Flowchart................................................................... Example of SCI Operation in Reception ........................................................... Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations... Block Diagram of IrDA Function...................................................................... IrDA Transmit/Receive Operations................................................................... Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode .................................. Example of Synchronous Transmission by DTC .............................................. 429 431 432 434 435 437 438 440 441 443 444 445 446 447 448 453 454 Section 16 I2C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Block Diagram of I C Bus Interface .................................................................. 2 I C Bus Interface Connections (Example: H8S/2138 Group Chip as Master)... 2 2 I C Bus Data Formats (I C Bus Formats)........................................................... Formatless.......................................................................................................... 2 I C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) ................................................................ 2 I C Bus Timing .................................................................................................. Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0)..... Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ........................................................................ Figure 16.8 (b) Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) (cont).............................................................. Figure 16.9 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0) .. Figure 16.10 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0) .. Figure 16.11 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0)...................... Figure 16.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control.............................................................. Figure 16.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler ..................................................................... Figure 16.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example).............................................. Figure 16.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example) ............................................... Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3 Figure 16.4 Figure 16.5 Figure 16.6 Figure 16.7 Figure 16.8 (a) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xl of liv 457 458 485 486 486 486 489 491 491 493 494 496 497 500 501 502 Figure 16.16 Figure 16.17 Figure 16.18 Figure 16.19 Figure 16.20 Figure 16.21 Figure 16.22 Figure 16.23 Figure 16.24 Figure 16.25 Figure 16.26 Figure 16.27 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example).................................................. Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example) ................................................ Points for Attention Concerning Reading of Master Receive Data ................... Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for Retransmission............................................................................................. Timing of Stop Condition Issuance ................................................................... IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation ................................................... ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode....................... TRS Bit Setting Timing in Slave Mode............................................................. Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost............................... Note on Interrupt Occurrence in Slave Mode after ACKB = 1 Reception ........ Notes on ICDR Reading with TRS = 1 Setting in Master Mode....................... Notes on ICDR Writing with TRS = 0 Setting in Slave Mode .......................... 503 504 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 519 521 521 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of Host Interface....................................................................... 524 Figure 17.2 GA20 Output ..................................................................................................... 538 Figure 17.3 HIRQ Output Flowchart .................................................................................... 542 Section 18 D/A Converter Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter...................................................................... 544 Figure 18.2 D/A Conversion (Example) ............................................................................... 549 Section 19 A/D Converter Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter...................................................................... Figure 19.2 ADDR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) ................................................... Figure 19.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) ...... Figure 19.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) ............................................................................................................ Figure 19.5 A/D Conversion Timing .................................................................................... Figure 19.6 External Trigger Input Timing .......................................................................... Figure 19.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit ..................................................... Figure 19.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit ................................................................. Figure 19.9 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1)......................................................... Figure 19.10 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2)......................................................... Figure 19.11 Example of Analog Input Circuit ...................................................................... 552 561 563 565 566 567 569 569 571 571 572 Section 20 RAM Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2138, H8S/2134, H8S/2133) ............................ 573 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xli of liv Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Figure 21.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2138, H8S/2134)................................................... Figure 21.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory ...................................................................... Figure 21.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions....................................................................... Figure 21.4 Boot Mode......................................................................................................... Figure 21.5 User Program Mode (Example)......................................................................... Figure 21.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration.................................................................. Figure 21.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode................................................................. Figure 21.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure....................................................................... Figure 21.9 RxD1 Input Signal When Using Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment ............. Figure 21.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode................................................................................. Figure 21.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure ........................................................ Figure 21.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart.................................................................. Figure 21.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase) ......................................... Figure 21.14 Flash Memory State Transitions........................................................................ Figure 21.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode.................................................................. Figure 21.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write...................... Figure 21.17 Timing Waveforms When Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode ........................................................................................................ Figure 21.18 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Enable State Read............................................ Figure 21.19 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Clocked Read .................................................. Figure 21.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms.......................................................... Figure 21.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms .............................................................. Figure 21.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms.............................................................. Figure 21.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Programmer Mode Setup Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence ...................................................................... Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Figure 22.1 ROM Block Diagram......................................................................................... Figure 22.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory ...................................................................... Figure 22.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions....................................................................... Figure 22.4 Boot Mode......................................................................................................... Figure 22.5 User Program Mode (Example)......................................................................... Figure 22.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration.................................................................. Figure 22.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode................................................................. Figure 22.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure....................................................................... Figure 22.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment ................................................................. Figure 22.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode................................................................................. Figure 22.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure ........................................................ Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlii of liv 577 581 582 583 584 585 594 595 596 597 599 602 604 607 610 612 613 614 614 616 617 619 620 623 627 628 629 630 631 640 641 642 643 645 Figure 22.12 Figure 22.13 Figure 22.14 Figure 22.15 Figure 22.16 Figure 22.17 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart.................................................................. Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase) ......................................... Flash Memory State Transitions........................................................................ Memory Map in Programmer Mode.................................................................. Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write...................... Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode ........................................................................................................ Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Enable State Read............................................ Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Clocked Read .................................................. Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms.......................................................... Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms .............................................................. Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms.............................................................. Oscillation Stabilization Time, Programmer Mode Setup Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence ...................................................................... 666 Section 23 Clock Pulse Generator Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ......................................................... Figure 23.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example) ..................................................... Figure 23.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit ................................................................ Figure 23.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design .................................................................. Figure 23.5 External Clock Input (Examples) ...................................................................... Figure 23.6 External Clock Input Timing ............................................................................. Figure 23.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing .................................................. Figure 23.8 Subclock Input Timing ...................................................................................... 669 672 672 673 674 675 676 678 Section 24 Power-Down State Figure 24.1 Mode Transitions............................................................................................... Figure 24.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing................................... Figure 24.3 Software Standby Mode Application Example ................................................. Figure 24.4 Hardware Standby Mode Timing ...................................................................... 683 692 697 698 Figure 22.18 Figure 22.19 Figure 22.20 Figure 22.21 Figure 22.22 Figure 22.23 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics Figure 25.1 Darlington Pair Drive Circuit (Example) .......................................................... Figure 25.2 LED Drive Circuit (Example) ........................................................................... Figure 25.3 Connection of External Capacitor (Mask ROM Type Incorporating Step-Down Circuit and Product Not Incorporating Step-Down Circuit)........... Figure 25.4 Output Load Circuit........................................................................................... Figure 25.5 System Clock Timing ........................................................................................ Figure 25.6 Oscillation Settling Timing ............................................................................... Figure 25.7 Oscillation Setting Timing (Exiting Software Standby Mode).......................... Figure 25.8 Reset Input Timing ............................................................................................ 648 650 653 656 658 659 660 660 662 663 665 717 717 732 800 800 801 801 802 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xliii of liv Figure 25.9 Figure 25.10 Figure 25.11 Figure 25.12 Figure 25.13 Figure 25.14 Figure 25.15 Figure 25.16 Figure 25.17 Figure 25.18 Figure 25.19 Figure 25.20 Figure 25.21 Figure 25.22 Figure 25.23 Figure 25.24 Figure 25.25 Figure 25.26 Interrupt Input Timing ....................................................................................... Basic Bus Timing (Two-State Access).............................................................. Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access)............................................................ Basic Bus Timing (Three-State Access with One Wait State)........................... Burst ROM Access Timing (Two-State Access) ............................................... Burst ROM Access Timing (One-State Access)................................................ I/O Port Input/Output Timing............................................................................ FRT Input/Output Timing ................................................................................. FRT Clock Input Timing ................................................................................... 8-Bit Timer Output Timing ............................................................................... 8-Bit Timer Clock Input Timing ....................................................................... 8-Bit Timer Reset Input Timing ........................................................................ PWM, PWMX Output Timing .......................................................................... SCK Clock Input Timing................................................................................... SCI Input/Output Timing (Synchronous Mode) ................................................ A/D Converter External Trigger Input Timing.................................................. Host Interface Timing........................................................................................ 2 I C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing (Option)............................................... 802 803 804 805 806 807 807 808 808 808 809 809 809 809 810 810 811 812 Appendix A Instruction Set Figure A.1 Address Bus, RD and WR Timing (8-Bit Bus, Three-State Access, No Wait States).................................................................................................. 863 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams Figure C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram ........................................................................................ Figure C.2 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pins P20 to P23) ........................................................... Figure C.3 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pins P24 to P26) ........................................................... Figure C.4 Port 2 Block Diagram (Pin P27)........................................................................ Figure C.5 Port 3 Block Diagram ........................................................................................ Figure C.6 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P40)........................................................................ Figure C.7 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P41)........................................................................ Figure C.8 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P42)........................................................................ Figure C.9 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P43)........................................................................ Figure C.10 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P44)........................................................................ Figure C.11 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pin P45)........................................................................ Figure C.12 Port 4 Block Diagram (Pins P46, P47) .............................................................. Figure C.13 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P50)........................................................................ Figure C.14 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P51)........................................................................ Figure C.15 Port 5 Block Diagram (Pin P52)........................................................................ Figure C.16 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pins P60, P62, P63, P65).............................................. Figure C.17 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P61)........................................................................ Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xliv of liv 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 Figure C.18 Figure C.19 Figure C.20 Figure C.21 Figure C.22 Figure C.23 Figure C.24 Figure C.25 Figure C.26 Figure C.27 Figure C.28 Figure C.29 Figure C.30 Figure C.31 Figure C.32 Figure C.33 Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P64)........................................................................ Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P66)........................................................................ Port 6 Block Diagram (Pin P67)........................................................................ Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P70 to P75) ........................................................... Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P76, P77) .............................................................. Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P80)........................................................................ Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P81)........................................................................ Port 8 Block Diagram (Pins P82, P83) .............................................................. Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P84)........................................................................ Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P85)........................................................................ Port 8 Block Diagram (Pin P86)........................................................................ Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P90)........................................................................ Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P91, P92) .............................................................. Port 9 Block Diagram (Pins P93 to P95) ........................................................... Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P96)........................................................................ Port 9 Block Diagram (Pin P97)........................................................................ 982 983 984 985 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode Figure E.1 Timing of Transition to Hardware Standby Mode............................................. 999 Figure E.2 Timing of Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ......................................... 999 Appendix G Package Dimensions Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (FP-80A) ....................................................................... 1002 Figure G.2 Package Dimensions (TFP-80C) ..................................................................... 1003 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlv of liv Tables Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 2 Table 1.2 H8S/2138 Group Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ..................................... 11 Table 1.3 H8S/2134 Group Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ..................................... 15 Table 1.4 Pin Functions.......................................................................................................... 18 Section 2 CPU Table 2.1 Instruction Classification........................................................................................ Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes............................................ Table 2.3 Instructions Classified by Function ........................................................................ Table 2.4 Addressing Modes.................................................................................................. Table 2.5 Absolute Address Access Ranges .......................................................................... Table 2.6 Effective Address Calculation................................................................................ Table 2.7 Exception Handling Types and Priority ................................................................. 42 43 45 55 56 59 64 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection............................................................................ 71 Table 3.2 MCU Registers....................................................................................................... 72 Table 3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode .................................................................................. 79 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority ................................................................................. 91 Table 4.2 Exception Vector Table.......................................................................................... 93 Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling ..................... 98 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.1 Interrupt Controller Pins......................................................................................... 102 Table 5.2 Interrupt Controller Registers................................................................................. 103 Table 5.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings ............................... 105 Table 5.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities ................................ 116 Table 5.5 Interrupt Control Modes......................................................................................... 121 Table 5.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode .............................................. 123 Table 5.7 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode ........... 123 Table 5.8 Interrupt Response Times....................................................................................... 131 Table 5.9 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution .................................. 131 Table 5.10 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control ................................................... 135 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlvi of liv Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.1 Bus Controller Pins ................................................................................................ 139 Table 6.2 Bus Controller Registers ........................................................................................ 139 Table 6.3 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) ........................................ 144 Table 6.4 IOS Signal Output Range Settings ......................................................................... 145 Table 6.5 Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes ....................................................................... 148 Table 6.6 Pin States in Idle Cycle .......................................................................................... 156 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Table 7.1 DTC Registers ........................................................................................................ 161 Table 7.2 DTC Functions ....................................................................................................... 170 Table 7.3 Activation Sources and DTCER Clearing .............................................................. 171 Table 7.4 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs ................ 174 Table 7.5 Register Information in Normal Mode ................................................................... 176 Table 7.6 Register Information in Repeat Mode .................................................................... 177 Table 7.7 Register Information in Block Transfer Mode ....................................................... 178 Table 7.8 DTC Execution Phases........................................................................................... 182 Table 7.9 Number of States Required for Each Execution Phase .......................................... 183 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.1 H8S/2138 Group Port Functions ............................................................................ Table 8.2 H8S/2134 Group Port Functions ............................................................................ Table 8.3 Port 1 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 1) ........................................................................ Table 8.5 Port 2 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.6 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 2) ........................................................................ Table 8.7 Port 3 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.8 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 3) ........................................................................ Table 8.9 Port 4 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.10 Port 4 Pin Functions ............................................................................................... Table 8.11 Port 5 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.12 Port 5 Pin Functions ............................................................................................... Table 8.13 Port 6 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions ............................................................................................... Table 8.15 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 6) ........................................................................ Table 8.16 Port 7 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.17 Port 8 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.18 Port 8 Pin Functions ............................................................................................... Table 8.19 Port 9 Registers ...................................................................................................... Table 8.20 Port 9 Pin Functions ............................................................................................... 190 193 197 201 203 207 209 212 213 215 218 220 222 225 227 228 230 232 235 237 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlvii of liv Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] Table 9.1 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................... Table 9.2 PWM Timer Module Registers .............................................................................. Table 9.3 Resolution, PWM Conversion Period, and Carrier Frequency when φ = 20 MHz.................................................................................................. Table 9.4 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse...................................................................................... Table 9.5 Position of Pulses Added to Basic Pulses............................................................... 245 251 252 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Table 10.1 Input and Output Pins............................................................................................. Table 10.2 Register Configuration ........................................................................................... Table 10.3 Read and Write Access Methods for 16-Bit Registers ........................................... Table 10.4 Settings and Operation (Examples when φ = 10 MHz) .......................................... 255 255 263 266 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Table 11.1 Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module ......................................... Table 11.2 Register Configuration ........................................................................................... Table 11.3 Buffered Input Capture Edge Selection (Example) ................................................ Table 11.4 Free-Running Timer Interrupts .............................................................................. Table 11.5 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation ................................................... 271 272 275 296 302 243 243 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Table 12.1 8-Bit Timer Input and Output Pins......................................................................... 307 Table 12.2 8-Bit Timer Registers ............................................................................................. 308 Table 12.3 Input Capture Signal Selection............................................................................... 332 Table 12.4 TMR0 and TMR1 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources .................................................. 333 Table 12.5 TMRX 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Source ..................................................................... 333 Table 12.6 TMRY 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources.................................................................... 333 Table 12.7 Timer Output Priorities .......................................................................................... 338 Table 12.8 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation ................................................ 339 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.1 Timer Connection Input and Output Pins............................................................... Table 13.2 Register Configuration ........................................................................................... Table 13.3 Examples of TCR Settings ..................................................................................... Table 13.4 Examples of TCORB (Pulse Width Threshold) Settings ....................................... Table 13.5 Examples of TCR and TCSR Settings.................................................................... Table 13.6 Examples of TCR, TCSR, TCOR, and OCRDM Settings...................................... Table 13.7 Examples of TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings ................................................... Table 13.8 Examples of OCRAR, OCRAF, TOCR, TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings ................................................................................................. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlviii of liv 343 344 356 356 359 361 363 365 Table 13.9 Meaning of HSYNCO Output in Each Mode......................................................... 367 Table 13.10 Meaning of VSYNCO Output in Each Mode......................................................... 368 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Table 14.1 WDT Pin ................................................................................................................ 374 Table 14.2 WDT Registers....................................................................................................... 374 Section 15 Table 15.1 Table 15.2 Table 15.3 Table 15.4 Table 15.5 Table 15.6 Table 15.7 Table 15.8 Table 15.9 Table 15.10 Table 15.11 Table 15.12 Table 15.13 Table 15.14 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) SCI Pins.................................................................................................................. SCI Registers.......................................................................................................... BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) .................................. BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode) .................................... Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)............................ Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode).................. Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) .................... SMR Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection.............................................. SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection ...................................... Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) ..................................................... Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence...................................................... Bit IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Settings .............................................................................. SCI Interrupt Sources ............................................................................................. State of SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data ...................................... 390 391 406 409 411 412 413 418 418 420 429 449 450 451 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Table 16.1 I C Bus Interface Pins............................................................................................. Table 16.2 Register Configuration ........................................................................................... Table 16.3 Flags and Transfer States ....................................................................................... 2 Table 16.4 I C Bus Data Format Symbols................................................................................ Table 16.5 Examples of Operation Using the DTC.................................................................. 2 Table 16.6 I C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output) ................................................................ Table 16.7 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tSr) Values ................................................................. 2 Table 16.8 I C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)............................................... 458 459 474 487 499 507 508 509 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Table 17.1 Host Interface Input/Output Pins........................................................................... 525 Table 17.2 Host Interface Registers ......................................................................................... 526 Table 17.3 Set/Clear Timing for STR1 Flags........................................................................... 532 Table 17.4 Set/Clear Timing for STR2 Flags........................................................................... 535 Table 17.5 Host Interface Channel Selection and Pin Operation ............................................. 536 Table 17.6 Host Interface Operation ........................................................................................ 537 Table 17.7 GA20 (P81) Set/Clear Timing................................................................................ 538 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page xlix of liv Table 17.8 Table 17.9 Table 17.10 Table 17.11 Fast A20 Gate Output Signals ................................................................................ Scope of HIF Pin Shutdown in Slave Mode........................................................... Input Buffer Full Interrupts .................................................................................... HIRQ Setting/Clearing Conditions......................................................................... 539 540 541 541 Section 18 D/A Converter Table 18.1 Input and Output Pins of D/A Converter Module .................................................. 545 Table 18.2 D/A Converter Registers ........................................................................................ 545 Section 19 A/D Converter Table 19.1 A/D Converter Pins ................................................................................................ Table 19.2 A/D Converter Registers ........................................................................................ Table 19.3 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers................................ Table 19.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) .................................................................... Table 19.5 Analog Pin Specifications ...................................................................................... 553 554 555 566 569 Section 20 RAM Table 20.1 Register Configuration ........................................................................................... 574 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.1 ROM Register ........................................................................................................ Table 21.2 Operating Modes and ROM ................................................................................... Table 21.3 Flash Memory Pins................................................................................................. Table 21.4 Flash Memory Registers......................................................................................... Table 21.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks................................................................................... Table 21.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes................................................................. Table 21.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group Bit Rate Is Possible ................................................................ Table 21.8 Hardware Protection............................................................................................... Table 21.9 Software Protection ................................................................................................ Table 21.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings ............................................................................. Table 21.11 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode ...................................... Table 21.12 Programmer Mode Commands .............................................................................. Table 21.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode ........................................................... Table 21.14 AC Characteristics When Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode ..... Table 21.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode ........................................................... Table 21.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode ........................................................... Table 21.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode ................................................................ Table 21.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode ............................................................... Table 21.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands.................................................................... Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page l of liv 578 579 586 586 592 593 596 605 606 609 611 611 612 613 614 615 617 618 619 Table 21.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table.......................................................................... 620 Table 21.21 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications ........................................... 620 Table 21.22 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version ............ 622 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Table 22.1 ROM Register ........................................................................................................ Table 22.2 Operating Modes and ROM ................................................................................... Table 22.3 Flash Memory Pins................................................................................................. Table 22.4 Flash Memory Registers......................................................................................... Table 22.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks................................................................................... Table 22.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes................................................................. Table 22.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of the Chip's Bit Rate Is Possible ...................................................................................................... Table 22.8 Hardware Protection............................................................................................... Table 22.9 Software Protection ................................................................................................ Table 22.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings ............................................................................. Table 22.11 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode ...................................... Table 22.12 Programmer Mode Commands .............................................................................. Table 22.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode ........................................................... Table 22.14 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode ...... Table 22.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode ........................................................... Table 22.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode ........................................................... Table 22.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode ................................................................ Table 22.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode ............................................................... Table 22.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands.................................................................... Table 22.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table.......................................................................... Table 22.21 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications ........................................... Table 22.22 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version ............ 642 651 652 655 657 657 658 659 660 661 663 664 665 666 666 668 Section 23 Clock Pulse Generator Table 23.1 CPG Registers ........................................................................................................ Table 23.2 Damping Resistance Value .................................................................................... Table 23.3 Crystal Resonator Parameters ................................................................................ Table 23.4 External Clock Input Conditions ............................................................................ Table 23.5 External Clock Output Settling Delay Time........................................................... Table 23.6 Subclock Input Conditions ..................................................................................... 670 672 673 675 676 677 624 625 632 632 638 639 Section 24 Power-Down State Table 24.1 H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group Internal States in Each Mode .................. 682 Table 24.2 Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions............................................................. 684 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page li of liv Table 24.3 Table 24.4 Table 24.5 Power-Down State Registers.................................................................................. 685 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules .............................. 694 Oscillation Settling Time Settings.......................................................................... 696 Section 25 Table 25.1 Table 25.1 Table 25.1 Table 25.1 Table 25.2 Table 25.3 Table 25.3 Table 25.3 Table 25.4 Table 25.5 Table 25.6 Table 25.7 Table 25.8 Table 25.9 Table 25.9 Table 25.10 Table 25.11 Electrical Characteristics Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range (1) (F-ZTAT Products) ................... Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range (2) (F-ZTAT A-Mask Products) ..... Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range (3) (Mask-ROM Products).............. Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range (4) (Mask-ROM Products).............. Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... DC Characteristics (1) ............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (2) ............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (3) ............................................................................................ Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Bus Drive Characteristics ....................................................................................... Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Bus Timing............................................................................................................. Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (1).......................................................... Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (2).......................................................... 2 I C Bus Timing....................................................................................................... A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................... A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................. D/A Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. Flash Memory Characteristics (Programming/Erasing Operating Range) ............. Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... DC Characteristics (1) ............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (2) ............................................................................................ DC Characteristics (3) ............................................................................................ Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Bus Drive Characteristics ....................................................................................... Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Bus Timing............................................................................................................. Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (1).......................................................... Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules (2).......................................................... 2 I C Bus Timing....................................................................................................... A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................... Table 25.12 Table 25.13 Table 25.14 Table 25.15 Table 25.16 Table 25.16 Table 25.16 Table 25.17 Table 25.18 Table 25.19 Table 25.20 Table 25.21 Table 25.22 Table 25.22 Table 25.23 Table 25.24 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page lii of liv 703 704 704 705 706 707 710 713 716 718 719 720 721 723 725 726 727 728 729 730 733 734 737 740 743 744 745 746 747 749 751 752 753 Table 25.25 A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................. Table 25.26 D/A Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. Table 25.27 Flash Memory Characteristics (Programming/Erasing Operating Range) ............. Table 25.28 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... Table 25.29 DC Characteristics (1) ............................................................................................ Table 25.29 DC Characteristics (2) ............................................................................................ Table 25.29 DC Characteristics (3) ............................................................................................ Table 25.30 Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Table 25.31 Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Table 25.32 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Table 25.33 Bus Timing............................................................................................................. Table 25.34 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules ............................................................... Table 25.35 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................... Table 25.36 A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................. Table 25.37 D/A Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. Table 25.38 Flash Memory Characteristics................................................................................ Table 25.39 Absolute Maximum Ratings................................................................................... Table 25.40 DC Characteristics (1) ............................................................................................ Table 25.40 DC Characteristics (2) ............................................................................................ Table 25.40 DC Characteristics (3) ............................................................................................ Table 25.41 Permissible Output Currents .................................................................................. Table 25.42 Clock Timing ......................................................................................................... Table 25.43 Control Signal Timing............................................................................................ Table 25.44 Bus Timing............................................................................................................. Table 25.45 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules ............................................................... Table 25.46 A/D Conversion Characteristics (AN7 to AN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................... Table 25.47 A/D Conversion Characteristics (CIN7 to CIN0 Input: 134/266-State Conversion) ................................................. Table 25.48 D/A Conversion Characteristics ............................................................................. Table 25.49 Flash Memory Characteristics (Programming/Erasing Operating Range) ............. Appendix A Instruction Set Table A.1 Instruction Set ........................................................................................................ Table A.2 Instruction Codes.................................................................................................... Table A.3 Operation Code Map (1) ........................................................................................ Table A.3 Operation Code Map (2) ........................................................................................ Table A.3 Operation Code Map (3) ........................................................................................ 754 755 756 759 760 762 765 768 769 770 771 773 775 776 777 778 780 781 783 785 787 788 789 790 792 794 795 796 797 815 831 845 846 847 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page liii of liv Table A.3 Table A.4 Table A.5 Table A.6 Operation Code Map (4) ........................................................................................ Number of States per Cycle.................................................................................... Number of Cycles per Instruction .......................................................................... Instruction Execution Cycle ................................................................................... 848 850 851 864 Appendix D Pin States Table D.1 I/O Port States in Each Processing State ................................................................ 997 Appendix F Product Code Lineup Table F.1 H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group Product Code Lineup............................. 1000 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page liv of liv Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group comprise microcomputers (MCUs) built around the H8S/2000 CPU, employing Renesas Technology proprietary architecture, and equipped with supporting modules on-chip. The H8S/2000 CPU has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300, H8/300L, or H8/300H Series. On-chip supporting modules required for system configuration include a data transfer controller (DTC) bus master, ROM and RAM, a 16-bit free-running timer module (FRT), 8-bit timer module (TMR), watchdog timer module (WDT), two PWM timers (PWM and PWMX), serial communication interface (SCI), host interface (HIF), D/A converter (DAC), A/D converter 2 (ADC), and I/O ports. An I C bus interface (IIC) can also be incorporated as an option. The on-chip ROM is either flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) or mask ROM, with a capacity of 128, 96, 64, or 32 kbytes. ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased. Three operating modes, modes 1 to 3, are provided, and there is a choice of address space and single-chip mode or externally expanded modes. The features of the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group are shown in table 1.1. Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 1 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Overview Item Specifications CPU • General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • High-speed operation suitable for real-time control Maximum operating frequency: 20 MHz/5 V, 10 MHz/3 V High-speed arithmetic operations 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns (20-MHz operation) 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 1000 ns (20-MHz operation) 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 1000 ns (20-MHz operation) • Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit transfer/arithmetic and logic instructions Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode: 64-kbyte address space Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space Operating modes • Three MCU operating modes External Data Bus CPU Operating Mode Mode Description On-Chip Initial ROM Value Maximum Value 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled Disabled 8 bits 8 bits 2 Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Enabled 8 bits 3 Normal Single-chip mode Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 2 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 8 bits None Enabled 8 bits None 8 bits Section 1 Overview Item Specifications Bus controller • 2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for external expansion areas • Number of program wait states can be set for external expansion areas • Can be activated by internal interrupt or software • Multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation source • Transfer possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc. • Request can be sent to CPU for interrupt that activated DTC • One 16-bit free-running counter (also usable for external event counting) • Two output compare outputs • Four input capture inputs (with buffer operation capability) Data transfer controller (DTC) (H8S/2138 Group) 16-bit free-running timer module (FRT: 1 channel) 8-bit timer module (2 channels: TMR0, TMR1) Timer connection and 8-bit timer (TMR) module (2 channels: TMRX, TMRY) (Timer connection and TMRX provided in H8S/2138 Group) Each channel has: • One 8-bit up-counter (also usable for external event counting) • Two time constant registers • The two channels can be connected Input/output and FRT, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY can be interconnected • Measurement of input signal or frequency-divided waveform pulse width and cycle (FRT, TMR1) • Output of waveform obtained by modification of input signal edge (FRT, TMR1) • Determination of input signal duty cycle (TMRX) • Output of waveform synchronized with input signal (FRT, TMRX, TMRY) • Automatic generation of cyclical waveform (FRT, TMRY) Watchdog timer module (WDT: 2 channels) • Watchdog timer or interval timer function selectable • Subclock operation capability (channel 1 only) 8-bit PWM timer (PWM) (H8S/2138 Group) • Up to 16 outputs • Pulse duty cycle settable from 0 to 100% • Resolution: 1/256 • 1.25 MHz maximum carrier frequency (20-MHz operation) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 3 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Item Specifications 14-bit PWM timer (PWMX) • Up to 2 outputs • Resolution: 1/16384 • 312.5 kHz maximum carrier frequency (20-MHz operation) Serial communication • interface • (SCI: 2 channels, SCI0 and SCI1) Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable • Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable • Multiprocessor communication function • Compatible with IrDA specification version 1.0 • TxD and RxD encoding/decoding in IrDA format • 8-bit host interface (ISA) port • Three host interrupt requests (HIRQ11, HIRQ1, HIRQ12) • Normal and fast A20 gate output • Two register sets (each comprising two data registers and two status registers) Keyboard controller • Matrix keyboard control using keyboard scan with wakeup interrupt and sense port configuration A/D converter • Resolution: 10 bits • Input: SCI with IrDA: 1 channel (SCI2) Host interface (HIF) (H8S/2138 Group) Multiprocessor communication function 8 channels (dedicated analog pins) 8 channels (same pins as keyboard sense port) D/A converter I/O ports • High-speed conversion: 6.7 µs minimum conversion time (20-MHz operation) • Single or scan mode selectable • Sample-and-hold function • A/D conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger • Resolution: 8 bits • Output: 2 channels • 58 input/output pins (including 24 with LED drive capability) • 8 input-only pins Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 4 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Item Specifications Memory • Flash memory or mask ROM • High-speed static RAM Interrupt controller Power-down state Product Name ROM RAM H8S/2134, H8S/2138 128 kbytes 4 kbytes H8S/2133 96 kbytes 4 kbytes H8S/2132, H8S/2137 64 kbytes 2 kbytes H8S/2130 32 kbytes 2 kbytes • Nine external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7) • 39 internal interrupt sources • Three priority levels settable • Medium-speed mode • Sleep mode • Module stop mode • Software standby mode • Hardware standby mode • Subclock operation Clock pulse generator • Packages 2 I C bus interface (IIC: 2 channels) (option in H8S/2138 Group) On-chip duty correction circuit • 80-pin plastic QFP (FP-80A) • 80-pin plastic TQFP (TFP-80C) • Conforms to Philips I C bus interface standard • Single master mode/slave mode • Arbitration lost condition can be identified • Supports two slave addresses 2 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 5 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Item Specifications 3 Product Code* Product lineup (preliminary) Group H8S/2138 Mask ROM Versions F-ZTAT™ Versions ROM/RAM (Bytes) HD6432138S 2 HD64F2138* 128 k/4 k HD6432138SW* HD64F2138A HD6432137S — 64 k/2 k HD6432134S HD64F2134 HD64F2134A 128 k/4 k HD6432133S — 96 k/4 k HD6432132 HD64F2132R 64 k/2 k — 32 k/2 k 1 Packages FP-80A, TFP-80C 1 HD6432137SW* H8S/2134 HD6432130 2 Notes: 1. “W” indicates the I C bus option. 2. FP-80A only 3. For the 3-V version, "V" is added to the product code. See appendix F, Product Code Lineup. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 6 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.2 Internal Block Diagram VCC1 VCC2 (VCL) VSS VSS VSS An internal block diagram of the H8S/2138 Group is shown in figure 1.1, and an internal block diagram of the H8S/2134 Group in figure 1.2. P52/SCK0/SCL0 P51/RxD0 P50/TxD0 Port 2 Port 1 P37/D7/HDB7 P36/D6/HDB6 P35/D5/HDB5 P34/D4/HDB4 P33/D3/HDB3 P32/D2/HDB2 P31/D1/HDB1 P30/D0/HDB0 Port 9 P17/A7/PW7 P16/A6/PW6 P15/A5/PW5 P14/A4/PW4 P13/A3/PW3 P12/A2/PW2 P11/A1/PW1 P10/A0/PW0 WDT0, WDT1 Port 6 RAM 8-bit PWM 16-bit FRT 14-bit PWM 8-bit timer × 4ch (TMR0, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY) Timer connection Host interface 10-bit A/D SCI × 3ch (IrDA × 1ch) 8-bit D/A IIC × 2ch (option) Port 7 AVCC AVSS P86/IRQ5/SCK1/SCL1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P83 P82/HIFSD P81/CS2/GA20 P80/HA0 Port 8 P77/AN7/DA1 P76/AN6/DA0 P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 P47/PWX1 P46/PWX0 P45/TMRI1/HIRQ12/CSYNCI P44/TMO1/HIRQ1/HSYNCO P43/TMCI1/HIRQ11/HSYNCI P42/TMRI0/SCK2/SDA1 P41/TMO0/RxD2/IrRxD P40/TMCI0/TxD2/IrTxD DTC P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK P26/A14/PW14 P25/A13/PW13 P24/A12/PW12 P23/A11/PW11 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 ROM Port 4 P67/TMOX/CIN7/KIN7/IRQ7 P66/FTOB/CIN6/KIN6/IRQ6 P65/FTID/CIN5/KIN5 P64/FTIC/CIN4/KIN4/CLAMPO P63/FTIB/CIN3/KIN3/VFBACKI P62/FTIA/CIN2/KIN2/VSYNCI/TMIY P61/FTOA/CIN1/KIN1/VSYNCO P60/FTCI/CIN0/KIN0/HFBACKI/TMIX Interrupt controller Port 5 P97/WAIT/SDA0 P96/φ/EXCL P95/AS/IOS/CS1 P94/WR/IOW P93/RD/IOR P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG/ECS2 H8S/2000 CPU Port 3 MD1 MD0 NMI STBY Bus controller EXTAL Internal data bus Clock pulse generator XTAL Internal address bus RES Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2138 Group Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 7 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 NMI STBY P97/WAIT P96/φ/EXCL Interrupt controller P47/PWX1 P46/PWX0 P45/TMRI1 P44/TMO1 P43/TMCI1 P42/TMRI0/SCK2 P41/TMO0/RxD2/IrRxD P40/TMCI0/TxD2/IrTxD RAM P23/A11 P22/A10 P17/A7 P16/A6 P15/A5 P14/A4 P13/A3 P12/A2 P11/A1 P10/A0 16-bit FRT Port 3 14-bit PWM 8-bit timer × 3ch (TMR0, TMR1, TMRY) 10-bit A/D SCI × 3ch (IrDA × 1ch) 8-bit D/A Port 5 P77/AN7/DA1 P76/AN6/DA0 P75/AN5 Port 7 AVCC AVSS P83 P82 P81 P80 P86/IRQ5/SCK1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 Port 8 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 P52/SCK0 P51/RxD0 P50/TxD0 Port 1 Port 6 WDT0, WDT1 P67/CIN7/KIN7/IRQ7 P66/FTOB/CIN6/KIN6/IRQ6 P65/FTID/CIN5/KIN5 P64/FTIC/CIN4/KIN4 P63/FTIB/CIN3/KIN3 P62/FTIA/CIN2/KIN2/TMIY P61/FTOA/CIN1/KIN1 P60/FTCI/CIN0/KIN0 P25/A13 P24/A12 P21/A9 P20/A8 ROM Port 4 P93/RD P92/IRQ0 P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG P27/A15 P26/A14 Port 9 P95/AS/IOS P94/WR H8S/2000 CPU Port 2 MD1 MD0 Bus controller EXTAL Internal data bus Clock pulse generator RES XTAL Internal address bus VSS VSS VSS VCC1 VCC2 (VCL) Section 1 Overview Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2134 Group Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 8 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 P37/D7 P36/D6 P35/D5 P34/D4 P33/D3 P32/D2 P31/D1 P30/D0 Section 1 Overview 1.3 Pin Arrangement and Functions 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement P42/TMRI0/SCK2/SDA1 P43/TMCI1/HIRQ11/HSYNCI P44/TMO1/HIRQ1/HSYNCO P45/TMRI1/HIRQ12/CSYNCI P46/PWX0 P47/PWX1 VCC1 P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK P26/A14/PW14 P25/A13/PW13 P24/A12/PW12 P23/A11/PW11 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 VSS P17/A7/PW7 P16/A6/PW6 P15/A5/PW5 P14/A4/PW4 The pin arrangement of the H8S/2138 Group is shown in figure 1.3, and the pin arrangement of the H8S/2134 Group in figure 1.4. PW3/A3/P13 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 61 40 P41/TMO0/RxD2/IrRxD PW2/A2/P12 62 39 P40/TMCI0/TxD2/IrTxD PW1/A1/P11 63 38 AVSS PW0/A0/P10 64 37 P77/AN7/DA1 HDB0/D0/P30 65 36 P76/AN6/DA0 HDB1/D1/P31 66 35 P75/AN5 HDB2/D2/P32 67 34 P74/AN4 HDB3/D3/P33 68 33 P73/AN3 HDB4/D4/P34 69 32 P72/AN2 HDB5/D5/P35 70 31 P71/AN1 HDB6/D6/P36 71 30 P70/AN0 HDB7/D7/P37 72 29 AVCC VSS 73 28 P67/TMOX/CIN7/KIN7/IRQ7 HA0/P80 74 27 P66/FTOB/CIN6/KIN6/IRQ6 GA20/CS2/P81 75 26 P65/FTID/CIN5/KIN5 HIFSD/P82 76 25 P64/FTIC/CIN4/KIN4/CLAMPO P83 77 24 P63/FTIB/CIN3/KIN3/VFBACKI TxD1/IRQ3/P84 78 23 P62/FTIA/CIN2/KIN2/VSYNCI/TMIY RxD1/IRQ4/P85 79 22 SCL1/SCK1/IRQ5/P86 80 21 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 NMI STBY VCC2 (VCL) P61/FTOA/CIN1/KIN1/VSYNCO P60/FTCI/CIN0/KIN0/HFBACKI/TMIX ADTRG/ECS2/IRQ2/P90 MD0 IRQ1/P91 MD1 IRQ0/P92 EXTAL IOR/RD/P93 RES IOW/WR/P94 8 CS1/IOS/AS/P95 7 EXCL/φ/P96 6 SDA0/WAIT/P97 5 VSS 4 TxD0/P50 3 RxD0/P51 2 SCL0/SCK0/P52 1 XTAL FP-80A TFP-80C (Top view) Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2138 Group (FP-80A, TFP-80C: Top View) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 9 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 P42/TMRI0/SCK2 P43/TMCI1 P44/TMO1 P45/TMRI1 P46/PWX0 P47/PWX1 VCC1 P27/A15 P26/A14 P25/A13 P24/A12 P23/A11 P22/A10 P21/A9 P20/A8 VSS P17/A7 P16/A6 P15/A5 P14/A4 Section 1 Overview A3/P13 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 61 40 P41/TMO0/RxD2/IrRxD A2/P12 62 39 P40/TMCI0/TxD2/IrTxD A1/P11 63 38 AVSS A0/P10 64 37 P77/AN7/DA1 D0/P30 65 36 P76/AN6/DA0 D1/P31 66 35 P75/AN5 D2/P32 67 34 P74/AN4 D3/P33 68 33 P73/AN3 D4/P34 69 32 P72/AN2 D5/P35 70 31 P71/AN1 D6/P36 71 30 P70/AN0 D7/P37 72 29 AVCC VSS 73 28 P67/CIN7/KIN7/IRQ7 P80 74 27 P66/FTOB/CIN6/KIN6/IRQ6 P81 75 26 P65/FTID/CIN5/KIN5 P82 76 25 P64/FTIC/CIN4/KIN4 P83 77 24 P63/FTIB/CIN3/KIN3 TxD1/IRQ3/P84 78 23 P62/FTIA/CIN2/KIN2/TMIY RxD1/IRQ4/P85 79 22 P61/FTOA/CIN1/KIN1 SCK1/IRQ5/P86 80 MD0 NMI STBY VCC2 (VCL) SCK0/P52 P60/FTCI/CIN0/KIN0 ADTRG/IRQ2/P90 MD1 IRQ1/P91 EXTAL IRQ0/P92 RES RD/P93 8 WR/P94 7 IOS/AS/P95 6 EXCL/φ/P96 5 WAIT/P97 4 VSS 3 TxD0/P50 2 RxD0/P51 1 21 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 XTAL FP-80A TFP-80C (Top view) Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2134 Group (FP-80A, TFP-80C: Top View) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 10 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Tables 1.2 and 1.3 show the pin functions of the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group in each of the operating modes. Table 1.2 H8S/2138 Group Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode FP-80A TFP-80C Mode 1 1 RES RES RES RES 2 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL 3 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL 4 MD1 MD1 MD1 VSS 5 MD0 MD0 MD0 VSS 6 NMI NMI NMI FA9 7 STBY STBY STBY VCC 8 VCC2 (VCL) VCC2 (VCL) VCC2 (VCL) VCC 9 P52/SCK0/SCL0 P52/SCK0/SCL0 P52/SCK0/SCL0 NC 10 P51/RxD0 P51/RxD0 P51/RxD0 FA17 11 P50/TxD0 P50/TxD0 P50/TxD0 NC 12 VSS VSS VSS VSS 13 P97/WAIT/SDA0 P97/WAIT/SDA0 P97/SDA0 VCC 14 φ/P96/EXCL φ/P96/EXCL P96/φ/EXCL NC 15 AS/IOS AS/IOS P95/CS1 FA16 16 WR WR P94/IOW FA15 17 RD RD P93/IOR WE 18 P92/IRQ0 P92/IRQ0 P92/IRQ0 VSS 19 P91/IRQ1 P91/IRQ1 P91/IRQ1 VCC 20 P90/IRQ2/ ADTRG P90/IRQ2/ADTRG P90/IRQ2/ADTRG/ ECS2 VCC 21 P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0/TMIX/ HFBACKI P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0/TMIX/ HFBACKI P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0/TMIX/ HFBACKI NC 22 P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1/VSYNCO P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1/VSYNCO P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1/VSYNCO NC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 11 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin Name Pin No. FP-80A TFP-80C Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) 23 P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY/ VSYNCI P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY/ VSYNCI P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY/ VSYNCI NC 24 P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3/VFBACKI P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3/VFBACKI P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3/VFBACKI NC 25 P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4/CLAMPO P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4/CLAMPO P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4/CLAMPO NC 26 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 NC 27 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 NC 28 P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 P67/TMOX/CIN7/ KIN7/IRQ7 VSS 29 AVCC AVCC AVCC VCC 30 P70/AN0 P70/AN0 P70/AN0 NC 31 P71/AN1 P71/AN1 P71/AN1 NC 32 P72/AN2 P72/AN2 P72/AN2 NC 33 P73/AN3 P73/AN3 P73/AN3 NC 34 P74/AN4 P74/AN4 P74/AN4 NC 35 P75/AN5 P75/AN5 P75/AN5 NC 36 P76/AN6/DA0 P76/AN6/DA0 P76/AN6/DA0 NC 37 P77/AN7/DA1 P77/AN7/DA1 P77/AN7/DA1 NC 38 AVSS AVSS AVSS VSS 39 P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD NC 40 P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD NC 41 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2/SDA1 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2/SDA1 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2/SDA1 NC 42 P43/TMCI1/ HSYNCI P43/TMCI1/ HSYNCI P43/TMCI1/ HIRQ11/HSYNCI NC 43 P44/TMO1/ HSYNCO P44/TMO1/ HSYNCO P44/TMO1/HIRQ1/ HSYNCO NC 44 P45/TMRI1/ CSYNCI P45/TMRI1/ CSYNCI P45/TMRI1/ HIRQ12/CSYNCI NC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 12 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode P46/PWX0 P46/PWX0 P46/PWX0 NC P47/PWX1 P47/PWX1 P47/PWX1 NC 47 VCC1 VCC1 VCC1 VCC 48 A15 A15/P27/PW15/ CBLANK P27/PW15/ CBLANK CE 49 A14 A14/P26/PW14 P26/PW14 FA14 50 A13 A13/P25/PW13 P25/PW13 FA13 51 A12 A12/P24/PW12 P24/PW12 FA12 52 A11 A11/P23/PW11 P23/PW11 FA11 53 A10 A10/P22/PW10 P22/PW10 FA10 54 A9 A9/P21/PW9 P21/PW9 OE FP-80A TFP-80C 45 46 55 A8 A8/P20/PW8 P20/PW8 FA8 56 VSS VSS VSS VSS 57 A7 A7/P17/PW7 P17/PW7 FA7 58 A6 A6/P16/PW6 P16/PW6 FA6 59 A5 A5/P15/PW5 P15/PW5 FA5 60 A4 A4/P14/PW4 P14/PW4 FA4 61 A3 A3/P13/PW3 P13/PW3 FA3 62 A2 A2/P12/PW2 P12/PW2 FA2 63 A1 A1/P11/PW1 P11/PW1 FA1 64 A0 A0/P10/PW0 P10/PW0 FA0 65 D0 D0 P30/HDB0 FO0 66 D1 D1 P31/HDB1 FO1 67 D2 D2 P32/HDB2 FO2 68 D3 D3 P33/HDB3 FO3 69 D4 D4 P34/HDB4 FO4 70 D5 D5 P35/HDB5 FO5 71 D6 D6 P36/HDB6 FO6 72 D7 D7 P37/HDB7 FO7 73 VSS VSS VSS VSS 74 P80 P80 P80/HA0 NC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 13 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode P81 P81 P81/CS2/GA20 NC 76 P82 P82 P82/HIFSD NC 77 P83 P83 P83 NC 78 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 NC 79 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 NC 80 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/ SCL1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/ SCL1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1/ SCL1 NC FP-80A TFP-80C 75 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 14 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Table 1.3 H8S/2134 Group Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Pin Name Pin No. Expanded Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode FP-80A TFP-80C Mode 1 1 RES RES RES RES 2 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL 3 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL 4 MD1 MD1 MD1 VSS 5 MD0 MD0 MD0 VSS 6 NMI NMI NMI FA9 7 STBY STBY STBY VCC 8 VCC2 (VCL) VCC2 (VCL) VCC2 (VCL) VCC 9 P52/SCK0 P52/SCK0 P52/SCK0 NC 10 P51/RxD0 P51/RxD0 P51/RxD0 FA17 11 P50/TxD0 P50/TxD0 P50/TxD0 NC 12 VSS VSS VSS VSS 13 P97/WAIT P97/WAIT P97 VCC 14 φ/P96/EXCL φ/P96/EXCL φ/P96/EXCL NC 15 AS/IOS AS/IOS P95 FA16 16 WR WR P94 FA15 17 RD RD P93 WE 18 P92/IRQ0 P92/IRQ0 P92/IRQ0 VSS 19 P91/IRQ1 P91/IRQ1 P91/IRQ1 VCC 20 P90/IRQ2/ADTRG P90/IRQ2/ADTRG P90/IRQ2/ADTRG VCC 21 P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0 P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0 P60/FTCI/CIN0/ KIN0 NC 22 P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1 P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1 P61/FTOA/CIN1/ KIN1 NC 23 P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY P62/FTIA/CIN2/ KIN2/TMIY NC 24 P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3 P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3 P63/FTIB/CIN3/ KIN3 NC 25 P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4 P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4 P64/FTIC/CIN4/ KIN4 NC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 15 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin Name Pin No. FP-80A TFP-80C Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) 26 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 P65/FTID/CIN5/ KIN5 NC 27 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 P66/FTOB/CIN6/ KIN6/IRQ6 NC 28 P67/CIN7/KIN7/ IRQ7 P67/CIN7/KIN7/ IRQ7 P67/CIN7/KIN7/ IRQ7 VSS 29 AVCC AVCC AVCC VCC 30 P70/AN0 P70/AN0 P70/AN0 NC 31 P71/AN1 P71/AN1 P71/AN1 NC 32 P72/AN2 P72/AN2 P72/AN2 NC 33 P73/AN3 P73/AN3 P73/AN3 NC 34 P74/AN4 P74/AN4 P74/AN4 NC 35 P75/AN5 P75/AN5 P75/AN5 NC 36 P76/AN6/DA0 P76/AN6/DA0 P76/AN6/DA0 NC 37 P77/AN7/DA1 P77/AN7/DA1 P77/AN7/DA1 NC 38 AVSS AVSS AVSS VSS 39 P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD P40/TMCI0/ TxD2/IrTxD NC 40 P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD P41/TMO0/ RxD2/IrRxD NC 41 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2 P42/TMRI0/ SCK2 NC 42 P43/TMCI1 P43/TMCI1 P43/TMCI1 NC 43 P44/TMO1 P44/TMO1 P44/TMO1 NC 44 P45/TMRI1 P45/TMRI1 P45/TMRI1 NC 45 P46/PWX0 P46/PWX0 P46/PWX0 NC 46 P47/PWX1 P47/PWX1 P47/PWX1 NC 47 VCC1 VCC1 VCC1 VCC 48 A15 A15/P27 P27 CE 49 A14 A14/P26 P26 FA14 50 A13 A13/P25 P25 FA13 51 A12 A12/P24 P24 FA12 52 A11 A11/P23 P23 FA11 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 16 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin Name Pin No. FP-80A TFP-80C 53 54 Expanded Modes Single-Chip Modes Mode 1 Mode 2 (EXPE = 1) Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Mode 2 (EXPE = 0) Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Flash Memory Programmer Mode A10 A10/P22 P22 FA10 A9 A9/P21 P21 OE 55 A8 A8/P20 P20 FA8 56 VSS VSS VSS VSS 57 A7 A7/P17 P17 FA7 58 A6 A6/P16 P16 FA6 59 A5 A5/P15 P15 FA5 60 A4 A4/P14 P14 FA4 61 A3 A3/P13 P13 FA3 62 A2 A2/P12 P12 FA2 63 A1 A1/P11 P11 FA1 64 A0 A0/P10 P10 FA0 65 D0 D0 P30 FO0 66 D1 D1 P31 FO1 67 D2 D2 P32 FO2 68 D3 D3 P33 FO3 69 D4 D4 P34 FO4 70 D5 D5 P35 FO5 71 D6 D6 P36 FO6 72 D7 D7 P37 FO7 73 VSS VSS VSS VSS 74 P80 P80 P80 NC 75 P81 P81 P81 NC 76 P82 P82 P82 NC 77 P83 P83 P83 NC 78 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 NC 79 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 NC 80 P86/IRQ5/SCK1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1 P86/IRQ5/SCK1 NC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 17 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview 1.3.3 Pin Functions Table 1.4 summarizes the functions of the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group pins. Table 1.4 Pin Functions Pin No. Type Power supply Clock FP-80A TFP-80C I/O Name and Function VCC1, VCC2 8*, 47 Input Power supply: For connection to the power supply. All VCC1 and VCC2* pins should be connected to the system power supply. VCL 8* Input Internal step-down voltage pin: A power supply pin for the product, applicable to product lines that have an internal step-down voltage. In the 5-V and 4-V versions, connect external capacitors to stabilize the internal step-down voltage between this pin and the VSS pin. Do not connect it to Vcc. In the 3-V version, connect this pin and the VCC1 pin to the power supply for the system. For details, See Section 25, Electrical Characteristics. VSS 12, 56, 73 Input Ground: For connection to the power supply (0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). XTAL 2 Input Connected to a crystal oscillator. See section 23, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. EXTAL 3 Input Connected to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 23, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. φ 14 Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to external devices. EXCL 14 Input Symbol Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 18 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 External subclock input: Input a 32.768 kHz external subclock. Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol FP-80A TFP-80C Operating mode control MD1 MD0 4 5 I/O Name and Function Input Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode. The relation between the settings of pins MD1 and MD0 and the operating mode is shown below. These pins should not be changed while the MCU is operating. MD1 MD0 Operating Mode Description 0 1 Mode 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled 1 0 Mode 2 Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled or single-chip mode 1 1 Mode 3 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled or single-chip mode RES 1 Input Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. STBY 7 Input Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. Address bus A15 to A0 48 to 55, 57 to 64 Output Address bus: These pins output an address. Data bus D7 to D0 72 to 65 Input/ output Data bus (upper): Bidirectional data bus. Used for 8-bit data. Bus control WAIT 13 Input Wait: Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. RD 17 Output Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space is being read. WR 16 Output Write: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space is being written to. AS/IOS 15 Output Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is valid. System control Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 19 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol FP-80A TFP-80C I/O Name and Function Interrupt signals NMI 6 Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. IRQ0 to IRQ7 18 to 20, 78 to 80, 27, 28 Input Interrupt request 0 to 7: These pins request a maskable interrupt. FRT counter clock input: Input pin for an external clock signal for the free-running counter (FRC). 16-bit free- FTCI running timer (FRT) FTOA 21 Input 22 Output FRT output compare A output: The output compare A output pin. FTOB 27 Output FRT output compare B output: The output compare B output pin. FTIA 23 Input FRT input capture A input: The input capture A input pin. FTIB 24 Input FRT input capture B input: The input capture B input pin. FTIC 25 Input FRT input capture C input: The input capture C input pin. FTID 26 Input FRT input capture D input: The input capture D input pin. TMO0 TMO1 TMOX 40 43 28 Output Compare-match output: TMR0, TMR1, and TMRX compare-match output pins. TMCI0 TMCI1 39 42 Input Counter external clock input: Input pins for the external clock input to the TMR0 and TMR1 counters. TMRI0 TMRI1 41 44 Input Counter external reset input: TMR0 and TMR1 counter reset input pins. TMIX TMIY 21 23 Input Counter external clock input and reset input: Dual function as TMRX and TMRY counter clock input pin and reset input pin. PW15 to PW0 48 to 55, 57 to 64 Output PWM timer output: PWM timer pulse output pins. 45 46 Output PWMX timer output: PWM D/A pulse output pins. 8-bit timer (TMR0, TMR1, TMRX, TMRY) PWM timer (PWM) 14-bit PWM PWX0 timer PWX1 (PWMX) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 20 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol FP-80A TFP-80C Serial communication interface (SCI0, SCI1, SCI2) TxD0 TxD1 TxD2 11 78 39 Output Transmit data: Data output pins. RxD0 RxD1 RxD2 10 79 40 Input Receive data: Data input pins. SCK0 SCK1 SCK2 9 80 41 Input/ output Serial clock: Clock input/output pins. SCI with IrTxD IrDA (SCI2) IrRxD 39 40 Output IrDA transmit data/receive data: Input and output Input pins for data encoded for IrDA use. Host interface (HIF) HDB7 to HDB0 72 to 65 Input/ output Host interface data bus: Bidirectional 8-bit bus for accessing the host interface. CS1, CS2, ECS2 15, 75, 20 Input Chip select 1 and 2: Input pins for selecting host interface channel 1 or 2. IOR 17 Input I/O read: Input pin that enables reading from the host interface. IOW 16 Input I/O write: Input pin that enables writing to the host interface. HA0 74 Input Command/data: Input pin that indicates whether an access is a data access or command access. GA20 75 Output GATE A20: A20 gate control signal output pin. HIRQ11 HIRQ1 HIRQ12 42 43 44 Output Host interrupt 11, 1, and 12: Output pins for interrupt requests to the host. HIFSD 76 Input Host interface shutdown: Control input pin used to place host interface input/output pins in the highimpedance/cutoff state. KIN0 to KIN7 21 to 24, 25 to 28 Input Keyboard input: Matrix keyboard input pins. Normally, P10 to P17 and P20 to P27 are used as key-scan outputs. This enables a maximum 16output × 16-input, 256-key matrix to be configured. Keyboard control I/O Name and Function The SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull in the H8S/2138 Group and CMOS output in the H8S/2134 Group. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 21 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Pin No. FP-80A TFP-80C I/O Name and Function AN7 to AN0 37 to 30 Input Analog input: A/D converter analog input pins. CN0 to CN7 21 to 24, 25 to 28 Input Expansion A/D inputs: Expansion A/D input pins can be connected to the A/D converter, but since they are also used as digital input/output pins, precision will fall. ADTRG 20 Input A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. D/A converter (DAC) DA0 DA1 36 37 Output Analog output: D/A converter analog output pins. A/D converter AVCC 29 Input Type Symbol A/D converter (ADC) D/A converter Timer connection 2 I C bus interface (IIC) (option) Analog reference voltage: The analog power supply pin for the A/D converter and D/A converter. When the A/D and D/A converters are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V or +3 V). AVSS 38 Input Analog ground: The ground pin for the A/D converter and D/A converter. This pin should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). VSYNCI, HSYNCI, CSYNCI, VFBACKI, HFBACKI 23 42 44 24 21 Input Timer connection input: Timer connection synchronous signal input pins. VSYNCO, HSYNCO, CLAMPO, CBLANK 22 43 25 48 Output Timer connection output: Timer connection synchronous signal output pins. SCL0 SCL1 9 80 Input/ output I C clock input/output (channels 0 and 1): I C clock I/O pins. These pins have a bus drive function. The SCL0 output form is NMOS open-drain SDA0 SDA1 13 41 Input/ output I C data input/output (channels 0 and 1): I C data I/O pins. These pins have a bus drive function. The SDA0 output form is NMOS open-drain. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 22 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 2 2 2 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Type Symbol I/O ports P17 to P10 Note: * FP-80A TFP-80C I/O Name and Function 57 to 64 Input/ output Port 1: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). These pins have on-chip MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. P27 to P20 48 to 55 Input/ output Port 2: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (P2DDR). These pins have on-chip MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. P37 to P30 72 to 65 Input/ output Port 3: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). These pins have on-chip MOS input pull-ups, and also have LED drive capability. P47 to P40 46 to 39 Input/ output Port 4: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (P4DDR). P52 to P50 9 to 11 Input/ output Port 5: Three input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (P5DDR). P52 is an NMOS pushpull output in the H8S/2138 Group and is a CMOS output in the H8S/2134 Group. P67 to P60 28 to 21 Input/ output Port 6: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (P6DDR). These pins have on-chip MOS input pull-ups. P77 to P70 37 to 30 Input Port 7: Eight input pins. P86 to P80 80 to 74 Input/ output Port 8: Seven input/output pins. The data direction of each pin can be selected in the port 8 data direction register (P8DDR). P97 to P90 13 to 20 Input/ output Port 9: Eight input/output pins. The data direction of each pin (except P96) can be selected in the port 9 data direction register (P9DDR). P97 is an NMOS push-pull output in the H8S/2138 Group and is a CMOS output in the H8S/2134 Group. In F-ZTAT and mask ROM versions of HD64F2138A, HD64F2134A, HD6432138S, HD6432138SW HD6432137S, HD6432137SW, HD6432134S, and HD6432133S, VCC2 pin (8 pin) is the VCL pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 23 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 1 Overview Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 24 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8S/2000 CPU has the following features. • Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs • General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • Sixty-five basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] • 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 25 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU • High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states Maximum clock rate: 20 MHz 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 50 ns 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 600 ns 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 600 ns 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 1000 ns 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 1000 ns • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode Advanced mode • Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction CPU clock speed selection 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below. • Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Number of execution states The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions differ as follows. Number of Execution States Instruction MULXU MULXS Mnemonic H8S/2600 H8S/2000 MULXU.B Rs, Rd 3 12 MULXU.W Rs, ERd 4 20 MULXS.B Rs, Rd 4 13 MULXS.W Rs, ERd 5 21 There are also differences in the address space, EXR register functions, power-down state, etc., depending on the product. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 26 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added. • Expanded address space Normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements. • Additional control register One 8-bit control register has been added. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 27 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address space (architecturally the maximum total address space is 4 Gbytes, with a maximum of 16 Mbytes for the program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for the data area). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller. Normal mode Maximum 64 kbytes for program and data areas combined CPU operating modes Advanced mode Maximum 16 Mbytes for program and data areas combined Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes (1) Normal Mode The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU. Address Space: A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 28 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits. The configuration of the exception vector table in normal mode is shown in figure 2.2. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 29 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Stack Structure: When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP PC (16 bits) SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling Note: * Ignored when returning. Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode (2) Advanced Mode Address Space: Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined). Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 30 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B (Reserved for system use) H'0000000C H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 31 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Stack Structure: In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP Reserved PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch CCR SP PC (24 bits) (b) Exception Handling Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 32 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. H'0000 H'00000000 H'FFFF Program area H'00FFFFFF Data area Cannot be used by the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group H'FFFFFFFF (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.6 Memory Map Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 33 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.4 Register Configuration 2.4.1 Overview The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 07 07 0 ER0 E0 R0H R0L ER1 E1 R1H R1L ER2 E2 R2H R2L ER3 E3 R3H R3L ER4 E4 R4H R4L ER5 E5 R5H R5L ER6 E6 R6H R6L ER7 (SP) E7 R7H R7L Control Registers (CR) 23 0 PC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXR* T — — — — I2 I1 I0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CCR I UI H U N Z V C Legend: SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit H: U: N: Z: V: C: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Note: * Does not affect operation in the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group. Figure 2.7 CPU Registers Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 34 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.4.2 General Registers The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8bit registers. Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. • Address registers • 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) RH registers (R0H to R7H) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the stack. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 35 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.9 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR), and 8-bit condition-code register (CCR). (1) Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) (2) Extended Control Register (EXR) An 8-bit register. In the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, this register does not affect operation. Bit 7—Trace Bit (T): This bit is reserved. In the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, this bit does not affect operation. Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0—Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits are reserved. In the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, these bits do not affect operation. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 36 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU (3) Condition-Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 6—User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: • Add instructions, to indicate a carry • Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow • Shift and rotate instructions, to store the carry The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit-manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to appendix A.1, Instruction. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 37 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values Reset exception handling loads the CPU’s program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 38 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.5 Data Formats The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers. Data Type General Register Data Format 1-bit data RnH 7 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Don’t care Don’t care 7 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 4 3 7 0 Upper digit Lower digit Don’t care Don’t care 4 3 7 0 Upper digit Lower digit 1-bit data 4-bit BCD data 4-bit BCD data Byte data RnL RnH RnL RnH 7 0 Don’t care MSB Byte data LSB RnL 7 0 Don’t care MSB LSB Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 39 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Data Type General Register Word data Rn Word data En Data Format 15 0 MSB 15 0 MSB Longword data LSB ERn 31 MSB LSB 16 15 En 0 Rn Legend: ERn: General register ER En: General register E Rn: General register R RnH: General register RH RnL: General register RL MSB: Most significant bit LSB: Least significant bit Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 40 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 LSB Section 2 CPU 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. Data Type Address Data Format 7 1-bit data Address L Byte data Address L MSB Word data 7 0 6 5 4 2 1 0 LSB Address 2M MSB Address 2M + 1 Longword data 3 LSB Address 2N MSB Address 2N + 1 Address 2N + 2 Address 2N + 3 LSB Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 41 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6 Instruction Set 2.6.1 Overview The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Instruction Classification Function Instructions Size Types Data transfer MOV 1 1 POP* , PUSH* BWL 5 WL 5 5 LDM* , STM* 3 3 MOVFPE* , MOVTPE* L ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG BWL ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS B INC, DEC BWL ADDS, SUBS L MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS BW EXTU, EXTS 4 TAS* B Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT BWL 4 Shift SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BWL 8 Bit manipulation B 14 Branch BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR 2 Bcc* , JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS — 5 System control TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP — 9 Arithmetic operations Block data transfer EEPMOV B 19 WL — 1 Total: 65 types Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. 2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group. 4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 5. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 42 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2000 CPU can use. Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes @aa:16 @aa:24 @aa:32 @(d:8,PC) @(d:16,PC) @@aa:8 — Arithmetic operations Logic operations MOV POP, PUSH 3 3 LDM* , STM* 1 * MOVFPE , 1 MOVTPE* ADD, CMP SUB ADDX, SUBX ADDS, SUBS INC, DEC DAA, DAS MULXU, DIVXU MULXS, DIVXS NEG EXTU, EXTS 2 TAS* AND, OR, XOR NOT @–ERn/@ERn+ @aa:8 Data transfer @(d:32,ERn) BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — BWL — — B — — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — WL L — BWL WL B — — — — — — — — BWL — — — — — — — — — B — B — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BW BWL BWL B L BWL B BW BW BWL WL — BWL BWL BWL B — — — — — — B B — @ERn Rn Instruction #xx Function @(d:16,ERn) Addressing Modes — — — — — — — — — — B — — — B — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — Shift Bit manipulation Branch Bcc, BSR JMP, JSR RTS — System TRAPA — control RTE — SLEEP — LDC — STC — ANDC, ORC, — XORC NOP — — — — — — — — — — Block data transfer — — — — — — — — — — Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Notes: 1. Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group. 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 43 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Table 2.3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in table 2.3 is defined below. Operation Notation Rs General register (destination)* General register (source)* Rn General register* ERn General register (32-bit register) (EAd) Destination operand (EAs) Source operand EXR Extended control register CCR Condition-code register N N (negative) flag in CCR Z Z (zero) flag in CCR V V (overflow) flag in CCR C C (carry) flag in CCR PC Program counter SP Stack pointer Rd #IMM Immediate data disp Displacement + Addition – Subtraction × Multiplication ÷ Division ∧ Logical AND ∨ Logical OR ⊕ Logical exclusive OR → Move ¬ NOT (logical complement) :8/:16/:24/:32 Note: * 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 44 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instructions Classified by Function Type Instruction Size* Function Data transfer MOV B/W/L (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. MOVFPE B Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group. MOVTPE B Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group. POP W/L @SP+ → Rn Pops a general register from the stack. 1 POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. PUSH W/L Rn → @–SP Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP. 3 LDM* L @SP+ → Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. 3 STM* L Rn (register list) → @–SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 45 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Arithmetic operations ADD SUB B/W/L Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) ADDX SUBX B Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. INC DEC B/W/L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) ADDS SUBS L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. DAA DAS B Rd decimal adjust → Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. MULXU B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. MULXS B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 46 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Arithmetic operations DIVXS B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. CMP B/W/L Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. NEG B/W/L 0 – Rd → Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. EXTS W/L TAS B Rd (sign extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. 2 @ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)* Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1. 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 47 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Logic operations AND B/W/L Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. OR B/W/L Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. NOT B/W/L ¬ (Rd) → (Rd) Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. SHAL SHAR B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. SHLL SHLR B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. ROTL ROTR B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. ROTXL ROTXR B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. Shift operations 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 48 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Bitmanipulation instructions BSET B 1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BCLR B 0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BNOT B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BTST B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BAND B C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIAND B C ∧ [¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BOR B C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIOR B C ∨ [¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 49 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Bitmanipulation instructions BXOR B C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIXOR B C ⊕ [¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BLD B (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. BILD B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BST B C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. BIST B ¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 50 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Branch instructions Bcc — Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. 1 Mnemonic Description Condition BRA(BT) Always (true) Always BRN(BF) Never (false) Never BHI High C∨Z=0 BLS Low or same C∨Z=1 BCC(BHS) Carry clear (high or same) C=0 BCS(BLO) Carry set (low) C=1 BNE Not equal Z=0 BEQ Equal Z=1 BVC Overflow clear V=0 BVS Overflow set V=1 BPL Plus N=0 BMI Minus N=1 BGE Greater or equal N⊕V=0 BLT Less than N⊕V=1 BGT Greater than Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0 BLE Less or equal Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1 JMP — Branches unconditionally to a specified address. BSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. JSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. RTS — Returns from a subroutine Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 51 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function System control instructions TRAPA — Starts trap-instruction exception handling. RTE — Returns from an exception-handling routine. 1 SLEEP — Causes a transition to a power-down state. LDC B/W (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR Moves contents of a general register or memory or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. STC B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. ANDC B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. ORC B CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. XORC B CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. NOP — PC + 2 → PC Only increments the program counter. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 52 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size* Function Block data transfer instructions EEPMOV.B — if R4L ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4L–1 → R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; EEPMOV.W — if R4 ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4–1 → R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; 1 Block transfer instruction. Transfers the number of data bytes specified by R4L or R4 from locations starting at the address indicated by ER5 to locations starting at the address indicated by ER6. After the transfer, the next instruction is executed. Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. 3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 53 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats. (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rm rn ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc. EA (disp) (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples) 2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, carry out bit manipulation, then write back the byte of data. Caution is therefore required when using these instructions on a register containing write-only bits, or a port. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear internal I/O register flags to 0. In this case, the relevant flag need not be read beforehand if it is clear that it has been set to 1 in an interrupt handling routine, etc. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 54 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation 2.7.1 Addressing Mode The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.4. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.4 Addressing Modes No. Addressing Mode Symbol 1 Register direct Rn 2 Register indirect @ERn 3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) 4 Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement @ERn+ @-ERn 5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. Register Indirect—@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand in memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn): A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 55 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn: • Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. • Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even. Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32: The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Table 2.5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. Table 2.5 Absolute Address Access Ranges Absolute Address Data address Normal Mode Advanced Mode 8 bits (@aa:8) H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF 16 bits (@aa:16) H'0000 to H'FFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 56 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 H'000000 to H'FFFFFF Section 2 CPU Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00). Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode (b) Advanced Mode Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 57 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or an instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 58 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Table 2.6 Effective Address Calculation No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format 1 Register direct (Rn) op 2 Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Operand is general register contents. rm rn Register indirect (@ERn) 31 0 3 24 23 0 Don’t care General register contents op 31 r Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) 31 0 General register contents 31 op r disp 31 0 0 Sign extension 4 24 23 Don’t care disp Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement • Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ 31 0 24 23 0 Don’t care General register contents op 31 r 1, 2, or 4 • Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn 31 0 General register contents 31 op 24 23 0 Don’t care r Operand Size Byte Word Longword Value Added 1 2 4 1, 2, or 4 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 59 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format 5 Absolute address Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) @aa:8 31 op abs @aa:16 31 op 0 H'FFFF 24 23 16 15 Sign extension 0 24 23 0 Don’t care abs @aa:24 31 op 87 24 23 Don’t care Don’t care abs @aa:32 op 31 abs 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 op 7 24 23 0 Don’t care Operand is immediate data. IMM Program-counter relative @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) 0 23 PC contents op disp Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 60 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 23 Sign extension 0 disp 31 24 23 Don’t care 0 Section 2 CPU No. Addressing Mode and Instruction Format 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 • Effective Address Calculation Effective Address (EA) Normal mode op abs 31 87 0 abs H'000000 31 24 23 Don’t care 16 15 0 H'00 0 15 Memory contents • Advanced mode op abs 31 87 H'000000 31 0 abs 0 Memory contents 31 24 23 0 Don’t care Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 61 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.8 Processing States 2.8.1 Overview The CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception-handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states. Figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions. Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped. Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Bus-released state The external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the CPU. Sleep mode Power-down state CPU operation is stopped to conserve power.* Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode, sub-active mode, sub-sleep mode, and watch mode. Figure 2.14 Processing States Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 62 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU End of bus request Bus request Program execution state End of bus request SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, PSS = 0, SSBY = 1 Bus request Bus-released state End of exception handling SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, SSBY = 0 Request for exception handling Sleep mode Interrupt request Exception-handling state External interrupt Software standby mode RES = high Reset state*1 STBY = high, RES = low Hardware standby mode*2 Power-down state*3 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. 3. The power-down state also includes a watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down State. Figure 2.15 State Transitions 2.8.2 Reset State When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All interrupts are disabled in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, refer to section 14, Watchdog Timer. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 63 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority: Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.7 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR. Table 2.7 Exception Handling Types and Priority Priority Type of Exception Detection Timing Start of Exception Handling High Reset Synchronized with clock Exception handling starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. Interrupt End of instruction execution or end of exception-handling 1 sequence* When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence. Trap instruction When TRAPA instruction is executed Exception handling starts when a trap (TRAPA) instruction is 2 executed.* Low Notes: 1. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. 2. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state. Reset Exception Handling: After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES goes high again, reset exception handling starts. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends. Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling: When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 64 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends. Normal mode SP Advanced mode CCR CCR* SP CCR PC (24 bits) PC (16 bits) Note: * Ignored when returning. Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples) 2.8.4 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. 2.8.5 Bus-Released State This is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts except for internal operations. There is one other bus master in addition to the CPU: the data transfer controller (DTC). For further details, refer to section 6, Bus Controller. 2.8.6 Power-Down State The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode, software standby mode, hardware standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In medium-speed mode, the CPU and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock. Module Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 65 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are power-down modes that use subclock input. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down State. Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) and the LSON bit in the low-power control register (LPWRCR) are both cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are retained. Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the PSS bit in the WDT1 timer control/status register (TCSR) are both cleared to 0. In software standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states. Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY pin goes low. In hardware standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are retained. 2.9 Basic Timing 2.9.1 Overview The CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a “state.” The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one, two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2.18 shows the pin states. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 66 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Bus cycle T1 φ Internal address bus Address Internal read signal Read access Internal data bus Read data Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Bus cycle T1 φ Address bus Unchanged AS High RD High WR High Data bus High impedance Figure 2.18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 67 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 2.20 shows the pin states. Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Internal address bus Address Internal read signal Read access Internal data bus Read data Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 68 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Address bus Unchanged AS High RD High WR High Data bus High impedance Figure 2.20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit data bus width in a two-state or three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to section 6, Bus Controller. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 69 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 2 CPU 2.10 Usage Note 2.10.1 TAS Instruction Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS instruction is not generated by the Renesas H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used. 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Two, three, or four registers can be saved/restored by one STM/LDM instruction. The following ranges can be specified in the register list. Two registers: ER0–ER1, ER2–ER3, or ER4–ER5 Three registers: ER0–ER2, or ER4–ER6 Four registers: ER0–ER3 The STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not generated by the Renesas H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 70 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have three operating modes (modes 1 to 3). These modes enable selection of the CPU operating mode and enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, by setting the mode pins (MD1 and MD0). Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection MCU Operating Mode MD0 CPU Operating Mode MD1 Description On-Chip ROM 0 0 0 — — — 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled Disabled 1 0 Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Enabled 1 2 Single-chip mode 3 1 Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Single-chip mode The CPU’s architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group actually access a maximum of 16 Mbytes. However, as there are 16 external address output pins, advanced mode is enabled only in single-chip mode or in expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled when a specific area in the external address space is accessed using IOS. The external data bus width is 8 bits. Mode 1 is an externally expanded mode that allows access to external memory and peripheral devices. With modes 2 and 3, operation begins in single-chip mode after reset release, but a transition can be made to external expansion mode by setting the EXPE bit in MDCR. The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group can only be used in modes 1 to 3. These means that the mode pins must select one of these modes. Do not changes the inputs at the mode pins during operation. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 71 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1.2 Register Configuration The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD1 and MD0), a system control register (SYSCR) and bus control register (BCR) that control the operation of the MCU, and a serial timer control register (STCR) that controls the operation of the supporting modules. Table 3.2 summarizes these registers. Table 3.2 MCU Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Mode control register MDCR R/W Undetermined H'FFC5 System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFC4 Bus control register BCR R/W H'D7 H'FFC6 Serial timer control register STCR R/W H'00 H'FFC3 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 3.2 Register Descriptions 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXPE — — — — — MDS1 MDS0 Initial value —* 0 0 0 0 0 —* —* Read/Write R/W* — — — — — R R Note: * Determined by pins MD1 and MD0. MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the operating mode setting and the current operating mode of the MCU. The EXPE bit is initialized in coordination with the mode pin states by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 72 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 7—Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, this bit is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, this bit has an initial value of 0, and can be read and written. Bit 7 EXPE Description 0 Single chip mode is selected 1 Expanded mode is selected Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 1 and 0—Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to MD1 and MD0. MDS1 and MDS0 are read-only bits—they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD1 and MD0) input levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W Bit SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of system pin functions, reset source monitoring, interrupt control mode selection, NMI detected edge selection, supporting module pin location selection, supporting module register access control, and RAM address space control. Only bits 7, 6, 3, 1, and 0 are described here. For a detailed description of these bits, refer also to the description of the relevant modules (host interface, bus controller, watchdog timer, RAM, etc.). For information on bits 5, 4, and 2, see section 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7—Chip Select 2 Enable (CS2E): Specifies the location of the host interface control pin (CS2). For details, see section 17, Host Interface. The H8S/2134 Group does not incorporate a host interface, so do not set this bit to 1 in the H8S/2134 Group. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 73 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 6—IOS Enable (IOSE): Controls the function of the AS/IOS pin in expanded mode. Bit 6 IOSE Description 0 The AS/IOS pin functions as the address strobe pin (AS) (Low output when accessing an external area) The AS/IOS pin functions as the I/O strobe pin (IOS) (Low output when accessing a specified address from H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F)* 1 Note: (Initial value) * In the H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-mask version, the address range is from H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F7FF. Bit 3—External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST Description 0 A reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow 1 A reset is generated by an external reset (Initial value) Bit 1—Host Interface Enable (HIE): This bit controls CPU access to the host interface data registers and control registers (HICR, IDR1, ODR1, STR1, IDR2, ODR2, and STR2), the keyboard controller and MOS input pull-up control registers (KMIMR and KMPCR), the 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers (TCRX/TCRY, TCSRX/TCSRY, TICRR/TCORAY, TICRF/TCORBY, TCNTX/TCNTY, TCORC/TISR, TCORAX, and TCORBX), and the timer connection control registers (TCONRI, TCONRO, TCONRS, and SEDGR). Bit 1 HIE Description 0 In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to 8bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is permitted (Initial value) 1 In areas H'(FF)FFF0 to H'(FF)FFF7 and H'(FF)FFFC to H'(FF)FFFF, CPU access to host interface data registers and control registers, and keyboard controller and MOS input pull-up control registers, is permitted Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 74 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset state is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME Description 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled 3.2.3 (Initial value) Bus Control Register (BCR) 7 Bit ICIS1 6 5 4 3 ICIS0 BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 2 1 0 — IOS1 IOS0 Initial value 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W BCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the external memory space access mode, and the I/O area range when the AS pin is designated for use as the I/O strobe. For details on bits 7 to 2, see section 6.2.1, Bus Control Register (BCR). BCR is initialized to H'D7 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 1 and 0—IOS Select 1 and 0 (IOS1, IOS0): These bits specify the addresses for which the AS/IOS pin output goes low when IOSE = 1. BCR Bit 1 Bit 0 IOS1 IOS0 Description 0 0 The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F03F 1 The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F0FF 0 The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F3FF 1 The AS/IOS pin output goes low in accesses to addresses H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F* (Initial value) 1 Note: * In the H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-mask version, the address range is from H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F7FF. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 75 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.2.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), an on-chip flash memory control (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details of functions other than register access control, see the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. 2 2 Bits 6 and 5—I C Transfer Select (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I C bus interface when the on-chip IIC option is included. For details, see section 16.2.7, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR). 2 2 Bit 4—I C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I C bus interface data registers and control registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, and ICMR/SAR), the PWMX data registers and control registers (DADRAH/DACR, DADRAL, DADRBH/DACNTH, and DADRBL/DACNTL), and the SCI control registers (SMR, BRR, and SCMR). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 76 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 4 IICE Description 0 Addresses H'(FF)FF88 and H'(FF)FF89, and H'(FF)FF8E and H'(FF)FF8F, are used for SCI1 control register access (Initial value) Addresses H'(FF)FFA0 and H'(FF)FFA1, and H'(FF)FFA6 and H'(FF)FFA7, are used for SCI2 control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFD8 and H'(FF)FFD9, and H'(FF)FFDE and H'(FF)FFDF, are used for SCI0 control register access 1 Addresses H'(FF)FF88 and H'(FF)FF89, and H'(FF)FF8E and H'(FF)FF8F, are used for IIC1 data register and control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFA0 and H'(FF)FFA1, and H'(FF)FFA6 and H'(FF)FFA7, are used for PWMX data register and control register access Addresses H'(FF)FFD8 and H'(FF)FFD9, and H'(FF)FFDE and H'(FF)FFDF, are used for IIC0 data register and control register access Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers (FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2), the power-down mode control registers (SBYCR, LPWRCR, MSTPCRH, and MSTPCRL), and the supporting module control registers (PCSR and SYSCR2). Bit 3 FLSHE Description 0 Addresses H'(FF)FF80 to H'(FF)FF87 are used for power-down mode control register and supporting module control register access (Initial value) 1 Addresses H'(FF)FF80 to H'(FF)FF87 are used for flash memory control register access (F-ZTAT version only) Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock to be input to TCNT. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 77 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3 Operating Mode Descriptions 3.3.1 Mode 1 The CPU can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports 1 and 2 function as an address bus, port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 9 carries bus control signals. 3.3.2 Mode 2 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. After a reset, single-chip mode is set, and the EXPE bit in MDCR must be set to 1 in order to use external addresses. However, as these groups have a maximum of 16 address outputs, an external address can be specified correctly only when the I/O strobe function of the AS/IOS pin is used. When the EXPE bit in MDCR is set to 1, ports 1 and 2 function as input ports after a reset. They can be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (DDR) to 1. Port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 9 carries bus control signals. 3.3.3 Mode 3 The CPU can access a 64-kbyte address space in normal mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. After a reset, single-chip mode is set, and the EXPE bit in MDCR must be set to 1 in order to use external addresses. When the EXPE bit in MDCR is set to 1, ports 1 and 2 function as input ports after a reset. They can be set to output addresses by setting the corresponding bits in the data direction register (DDR) to 1. Port 3 function as a data bus, and part of port 9 carries bus control signals. In products with an on-chip ROM capacity of 64 kbytes or more, the amount of on-chip ROM that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 78 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode The pin functions of ports 1 to 3, and 9 vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.3 shows their functions in each operating mode. Table 3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Port Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Port 1 A Port 2 A P*/A P*/A P*/A P*/A Port 3 P97 D P*/C P*/D P*/C P*/D P*/C P96 C*/P P95 to P93 C P*/C P*/C P*/C P*/C P92 to P90 P P P Port 9 Legend: P: I/O port A: Address bus output D: Data bus I/O C: Control signals, clock I/O *: After reset 3.5 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Figures 3.1 to 3.4 show memory maps for each of the operating modes. The address space is 64 kbytes in modes 1 and 3 (normal modes), and 16 Mbytes in mode 2 (advanced mode). The on-chip ROM capacity is 32 kbytes (H8S/2130), 64 kbytes (H8S/2132 and H8S/2137), 96 kbytes (H8S/2133), or 128 kbytes (H8S/2134 and H8S/2138), but for products with an on-chip ROM capacity of 64 kbytes or more, the amount of on-chip ROM that can be used is limited to 56 kbytes in mode 3 (normal mode). Do not access the reserved area and addresses of modules not supported by the product. Note that normal operation is not guaranteed when these regions are accessed. For details, see section 6, Bus Controller. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 79 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'0000 External address space Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 On-chip ROM H'DFFF On-chip ROM H'DFFF External address space H'E080 H'E080 On-chip RAM* On-chip RAM* H'EFFF H'E080 H'EFFF H'EFFF External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF On-chip RAM External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.1 H8S/2138 (Except for F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) and H8S/2134 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 80 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM H'01FFFF H'020000 On-chip ROM H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 H'FFE080 On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM H'FFEFFF H'FFEFFF External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.1 H8S/2138 (Except for F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) and H8S/2134 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 81 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'0000 External address space Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 On-chip ROM H'DFFF On-chip ROM H'DFFF External address space H'E080 H'E080 H'E080 On-chip RAM* On-chip RAM* H'EFFF H'EFFF H'EFFF External address space H'F800 Reserved area H'FE4F H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF On-chip RAM External address space H'F800 Reserved area H'FE4F H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.2 H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 82 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM H'01FFFF H'020000 On-chip ROM H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 H'FFE080 On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM H'FFEFFF H'FFEFFF External address space*2 H'FFF800 Reserved area H'FFFE4F H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.2 H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 83 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'0000 External address space Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 On-chip ROM H'DFFF On-chip ROM H'DFFF External address space H'E080 H'E080 H'E080 On-chip RAM* On-chip RAM* H'EFFF H'EFFF H'EFFF External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF On-chip RAM External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.3 H8S/2133 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 84 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'017FFF H'017FFF Reserved area H'01FFFF H'020000 Reserved area H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 H'FFE080 On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM H'FFEFFF H'FFEFFF External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.3 H8S/2133 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 85 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM External address space H'DFFF H'DFFF External address space H'E080 H'E880 H'EFFF H'E080 H'E080 Reserved area* Reserved area* On-chip RAM* H'E880 H'EFFF External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF On-chip RAM* Reserved area H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.4 H8S/2137 and H8S/2132 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 86 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'00FFFF H'00FFFF Reserved area H'01FFFF H'020000 Reserved area H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 H'FFE080 Reserved area*1 H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM*1 Reserved area H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.4 H8S/2137 and H8S/2132 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 87 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 1 (normal expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'0000 Mode 3/EXPE = 0 (normal single-chip mode) H'0000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM External address space H'7FFF H'7FFF Reserved area H'DFFF Reserved area H'DFFF External address space H'E080 H'E880 H'EFFF H'E080 H'E080 Reserved area* Reserved area* On-chip RAM* H'E880 H'EFFF External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF On-chip RAM* Reserved area H'E880 H'EFFF On-chip RAM External address space H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes)* H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF H'FE50 H'FEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FF00 (128 bytes) H'FF7F H'FF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFF Note: * External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Figure 3.5 H8S/2130 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 88 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Mode 2/EXPE = 1 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 2/EXPE = 0 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'007FFF H'007FFF Reserved area H'01FFFF H'020000 Reserved area H'01FFFF External address space*2 H'FFE080 H'FFE080 Reserved area*1 H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM*1 Reserved area H'FFE880 H'FFEFFF On-chip RAM External address space*2 H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM H'FFFF00 (128 bytes)*1 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 Internal I/O registers 1 H'FFFFFF H'FFFE50 H'FFFEFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF7F H'FFFF80 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers 2 On-chip RAM (128 bytes) Internal I/O registers 1 Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. For these models, the maximum number of external address pins is 16. An external address can only be specified correctly for an area that uses the I/O strobe function. Figure 3.5 H8S/2130 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 89 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 90 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, direct transition, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits in SYSCR. Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority Priority Exception Type Start of Exception Handling High Reset Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. Trace Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1. (Cannot be used with this LSI.) Interrupt Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception 1 handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.* Direct transition Started by a direct transition resulting from execution of a SLEEP instruction. Low 2 Trap instruction (TRAPA)* Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA). Notes: 1. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 2. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in the program execution state. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 91 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows: 1. The program counter (PC) and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 4.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Reset Trace Exception sources (Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group) External interrupts: NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts Internal interrupts: interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules Direct transition Trap instruction Figure 4.1 Exception Sources Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 92 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.2 Exception Vector Table Vector Address* 1 Exception Source Vector Number Normal Mode Advanced Mode Reset 0 H'0000 to H'0001 H'0000 to H'0003 Reserved for system use 1 H'0002 to H'0003 H'0004 to H'0007 2 H'0004 to H'0005 H'0008 to H'000B 3 H'0006 to H'0007 H'000C to H'000F 4 H'0008 to H'0009 H'0010 to H'0013 5 H'000A to H'000B H'0014 to H'0017 6 H'000C to H'000D H'0018 to H'001B 7 H'000E to H'000F H'001C to H'001F 8 H'0010 to H'0011 H'0020 to H'0023 9 H'0012 to H'0013 H'0024 to H'0027 10 H'0014 to H'0015 H'0028 to H'002B 11 H'0016 to H'0017 H'002C to H'002F 12 H'0018 to H'0019 H'0030 to H'0033 13 H'001A to H'001B H'0034 to H'0037 14 H'001C to H'001D H'0038 to H'003B 15 H'001E to H'001F H'003C to H'003F IRQ0 16 H'0020 to H'0021 H'0040 to H'0043 IRQ1 17 H'0022 to H'0023 H'0044 to H'0047 IRQ2 18 H'0024 to H'0025 H'0048 to H'004B IRQ3 19 H'0026 to H'0027 H'004C to H'004F IRQ4 20 H'0028 to H'0029 H'0050 to H'0053 IRQ5 21 H'002A to H'002B H'0054 to H'0057 IRQ6 22 H'002C to H'002D H'0058 to H'005B IRQ7 23 H'002E to H'002F H'005C to H'005F 24 103 H'0030 to H'0031 H'00CE to H'00CF H'0060 to H'0063 H'019C to H'019F Direct transition External interrupt NMI Trap instruction (4 sources) Reserved for system use External interrupt 2 Internal interrupt* Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details on internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Exception Vector Table. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 93 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.2 Reset 4.2.1 Overview A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the MCU enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. Reset exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high. H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group MCUs can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 14, Watchdog Timer (WDT). 4.2.2 Reset Sequence The MCU enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 ms when powering on. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. For pin states in a reset, see appendix D.1, Port States in Each Processing State. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows: [1] The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. [2] The reset exception vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figures 4.2 and 4.3 show examples of the reset sequence. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 94 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Fetch of Vector Internal first program fetch processing instruction φ RES Internal address bus (1) (3) Internal read signal Internal write signal Internal data bus (1) (2) (3) (4) High (2) (4) Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000) Start address (contents of reset exception vector address) Start address ((3) = (2)) First program instruction Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 3) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 95 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling Vector fetch φ Internal processing Fetch of first program instruction * * * (1) (3) (5) RES Address bus RD High WR (2) D7 to D0 (1) (3) (2) (4) (5) (6) (4) (6) Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000, (3) = H'0001) Start address (contents of reset exception vector address) Start address ((5) = (2) (4)) First program instruction Note: * 3 program wait states are inserted. Figure 4.3 Reset Sequence (Mode 1) 4.2.3 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 96 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.3 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by nine external sources (NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0) from 17 input pins (NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0, and KIN7 to KIN0), and internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4.4 shows the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT), 16-bit free-running timer (FRT), 8-bit timer (TMR), serial communication interface (SCI), data transfer controller (DTC) (only in the H8S/2138 Group), A/D converter (ADC), host interface 2 (HIF) (only in the H8S/2138 Group), and I C bus interface (option). Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI and address break to either three priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. For details on interrupts, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. External interrupts Interrupts Internal interrupts NMI (1) IRQ7 to IRQ0 (8) WDT* (2) FRT (7) TMR (10) SCI (12) DTC (1) ADC (1) HIF (2) IIC (3) (option) Other (1) Note: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources. * When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at each counter overflow. Figure 4.4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 97 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.4 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.3 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR EXR Interrupt Control Mode I UI I2 to I0 T 0 1 — — — 1 1 1 — — Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 —: Retains value prior to execution. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 98 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode) SP CCR PC (24 bits) Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 99 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.6 Notes on Use of the Stack When accessing word data or longword data, the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W Rn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) POP.L ERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.6 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. CCR SP R1L SP PC PC SP H'FFEFFA H'FFEFFB H'FFEFFC H'FFEFFD H'FFEFFF TRAP instruction executed MOV.B R1L, @–ER7 SP set to H'FFFEFF Data saved above SP Contents of CCR lost Legend: CCR: Condition-code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode. Figure 4.6 Operation When SP Value Is Odd Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 100 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 Overview 5.1.1 Features H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group MCUs control interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the following features: • Two interrupt control modes Either of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR). • Priorities settable with ICR An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI and address break. • Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine. • Fifteen external interrupt pins (nine external sources) NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. A rising or falling edge at the NMI pin can be selected for the NMI interrupt. Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected for interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0. The IRQ6 interrupt is shared by the interrupt from the IRQ6 pin and eight external interrupt inputs (KIN7 to KIN0). • DTC control DTC activation is controlled by means of interrupts. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 101 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 5.1. CPU INTM1 INTM0 SYSCR NMIEG NMI input NMI input unit IRQ input IRQ input unit ISR ISCR Interrupt request Vector number Priority determination IER I, UI Internal interrupt requests SWDTEND to IICI1 CCR ICR Interrupt controller Legend: ISCR: IER: ISR: ICR: SYSCR: IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt control register System control register Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller 5.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1 Interrupt Controller Pins Name Symbol I/O Function Nonmaskable interrupt NMI Input Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or falling edge can be selected External interrupt requests 7 to 0 IRQ7 to IRQ0 Input Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be selected. Key input interrupt requests 7 to 0 KIN7 to KIN0 Maskable external interrupts: falling edge or level sensing can be selected. Input Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 102 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.4 Register Configuration Table 5.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 5.2 Interrupt Controller Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFC4 IRQ sense control register H ISCRH R/W H'00 H'FEEC IRQ sense control register L ISCRL R/W H'00 H'FEED IRQ enable register IER R/W H'00 H'FFC2 IRQ status register ISR 2 R/(W)* H'00 Keyboard matrix interrupt mask KMIMR register R/W H'BF H'FEEB 3 H'FFF1* Interrupt control register A ICRA R/W H'00 H'FEE8 Interrupt control register B ICRB R/W H'00 H'FEE9 Interrupt control register C ICRC R/W H'00 H'FEEA Address break control register ABRKCR R/W H'00 H'FEF4 Break address register A BARA R/W H'00 H'FEF5 Break address register B BARB R/W H'00 H'FEF6 Break address register C BARC R/W H'00 H'FEF7 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 3. When setting KMIMR, the HIE bit in SYSCR must be set to 1, and also MSTP2 bit in MSTPCRL must be set to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 103 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2 Register Descriptions 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register of which bits 5, 4, and 2 select the interrupt control mode and the detected edge for NMI. Only bits 5, 4, and 2 are described here; for details on the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of four interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. The INTM1 bit must not be set to 1. Bit 5 Bit 4 INTM1 INTM0 Interrupt Control Mode Description 0 0 0 Interrupts are controlled by I bit 1 1 Interrupts are controlled by I and UI bits and ICR 0 2 Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group 1 3 Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group 1 (Initial value) Bit 2—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the input edge for the NMI pin. Bit 2 NMIEG Description 0 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input 1 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 104 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to C (ICRA to ICRC) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICR7 ICR6 ICR5 ICR4 ICR3 ICR2 ICR1 ICR0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The ICR registers are three 8-bit readable/writable registers that set the interrupt control level for interrupts other than NMI and address break. The correspondence between ICR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5.3. The ICR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit n—Interrupt Control Level (ICRn): Sets the control level for the corresponding interrupt source. Bit n ICRn Description 0 Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) 1 Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority) (Initial value) (n = 7 to 0) Table 5.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings Bits Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ICRA IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ4 IRQ6 DTC IRQ3 IRQ5 IRQ7 Watchdog Watchdog timer 0 timer 1 — — 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit HIF timer timer timer channel 0 channel 1 channels X, Y IRQ0 ICRB A/D Freeconverter running timer ICRC SCI SCI SCI IIC IIC — channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 channel 0 channel 1 (option) (option) — 0 — Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 105 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ7E IRQ6E IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0. IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ7E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ7 to IRQ0 are enabled or disabled. Bit n IRQnE Description 0 IRQn interrupt disabled 1 IRQn interrupt enabled (Initial value) (n = 7 to 0) 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL) • ISCRH Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 • ISCRL Bit IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 106 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller ISCRH and ISCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Each of the ISCR registers is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. ISCRH Bits 7 to 0, ISCRL Bits 7 to 0: IRQ7 Sense Control A and B (IRQ7SCA, IRQ7SCB) to IRQ0 Sense Control A and B (IRQ0SCA, IRQ0SCB) ISCRH Bits 7 to 0 ISCRL Bits 7 to 0 IRQ7SCB to IRQ0SCB IRQ7SCA to IRQ0SCA 0 0 Interrupt request generated at IRQ7 to IRQ0 input low level (Initial value) 1 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input 1 5.2.5 Description 0 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input 1 Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input IRQ Status Register (ISR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ7F IRQ6F IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Bit Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 Flags (IRQ7F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 107 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Bit n IRQnF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 Note: (Initial value) • • Cleared by reading IRQnF when set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF • When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or bothedge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1)* When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high* [Setting conditions] • When IRQn input goes low when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) • When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input when falling edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1) • When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input when rising edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0) • When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input when both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1) * (1) (2) (3) (4) (n = 7 to 0) When a product, in which a DTC is incorporated, is used in the following settings, the corresponding flag bit is not automatically cleared even when exception handling, which is a clear condition, is executed and the bit is held at 1. When DTCEA3 is set to 1 (ADI is set to an interrupt source), IRQ4F flag is not automatically cleared. When DTCEA2 is set to 1 (ICIA is set to an interrupt source), IRQ5F flag is not automatically cleared. When DTCEA1 is set to 1 (ICIB is set to an interrupt source), IRQ6F flag is not automatically cleared. When DTCEA0 is set to 1 (OCIA is set to an interrupt source), IRQ7F flag is not automatically cleared. When activation interrupt sources of DTC and IRQ interrupts are used with the above combinations, clear the interrupt flag by software in the interrupt handling routine of the corresponding IRQ. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 108 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.6 Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask Register (KMIMR) 7 Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KMIMR7 KMIMR6 KMIMR5 KMIMR4 KMIMR3 KMIMR2 KMIMR1 KMIMR0 Initial value 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W KMIMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs mask control for the keyboard matrix interrupt inputs (pins KIN7 to KIN0) and IRQ6 pin. To enable key-sense input interrupts from multiple pin inputs in keyboard matrix scanning/sensing, clear the corresponding mask bits to 0. KMIMR is initialized to H'BF by a reset and in hardware standby mode, and only IRQ6 (KIN6) input is enabled. Bits 7 to 0—Keyboard Matrix Interrupt Mask (KMIMR7 to KMIMR0): These bits control key-sense input interrupt requests (KIN7 to KIN0). Bits 7 to 0 KMIMR7 to KMIMR0 Description 0 Key-sense input interrupt requests enabled 1 Key-sense input interrupt requests disabled Note: * (Initial value)* However, the initial value of KMIMR6 is 0 because the KMIMR6 bit controls both IRQ6 interrupt request masking and key-sense input enabling. Figure 5.2 shows the relationship between interrupts IRQ6, interrupts KIN7 to KIN0, and registers KMIMR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 109 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller KMIMR0 (initial value 1) P60/KIN0 KMIMR5 (initial value 1) P65/KIN5 IRQ6 internal signal KMIMR6 (initial value 0) P66/KIN6/IRQ6 KMIMR7 (initial value 1) P67/KIN7/IRQ7 IRQ6E IRQ6SC Edge/level selection enable/disable circuit IRQ6 interrupt Figure 5.2 Relationship between Interrupts IRQ6, Interrupts KIN7 to KIN0, and Registers KMIMR When pins KIN7 to KIN0 are used as key-sense interrupt input pins, either low-level sensing or falling-edge sensing must be designated as the interrupt sense condition for the corresponding interrupt source (IRQ6). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 110 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.7 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMF — — — — — — BIE Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R — — — — — — R/W Bit ABRKCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address break control. ABRKCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7—Condition Match Flag (CMF): This is the address break source flag, used to indicate that the address set by BAR has been prefetched. When the CMF flag and BIE flag are both set to 1, an address break is requested. Bit 7 CMF Description 0 [Clearing condition] When address break interrupt exception handling is executed 1 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When address set by BARA to BARC is prefetched while BIE = 1 Bits 6 to 1—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bit 0—Break Interrupt Enable (BIE): Selects address break enabling or disabling. Bit 0 BIE Description 0 Address break disabled 1 Address break enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 111 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.8 Break Address Registers A, B, C (BARA, BARB, BARC) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 — BARA Bit BARB Bit BARC Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — BAR consists of three 8-bit readable/writable registers (BARA, BARB, and BARC), and is used to specify the address at which an address break is to be executed. Each of the BAR registers is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. BARA Bits 7 to 0—Address 23 to 16 (A23 to A16) BARB Bits 7 to 0—Address 15 to 8 (A15 to A8) BARC Bits 7 to 1—Address 7 to 1 (A7 to A1) These bits specify the address at which an address break is to be executed. BAR bits A15 to A1 are compared with internal address bus lines A15 to A1, respectively. The address at which the first instruction byte is located should be specified as the break address. Occurrence of the address break condition may not be recognized for other addresses. In normal mode, no comparison is made with address lines A23 to A16. BARC Bit 0—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 112 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3 Interrupt Sources Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts. 5.3.1 External Interrupts There are nine external interrupt sources from 17 input pins (15 actual pins): NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0, and KIN7 to KIN0. KIN7 to KIN0 share the IRQ6 interrupt source. Of these, NMI, IRQ7, IRQ6, and IRQ2 to IRQ0 can be used to restore the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group chip from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode and the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 have the following features: • Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. • Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER. • The interrupt control level can be set with ICR. • The status of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.3. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 113 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller IRQnE IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB IRQnF Edge/level detection circuit S Q IRQn interrupt request R IRQn input Clear signal Note: n: 7 to 0 Figure 5.3 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 Figure 5.4 shows the timing of IRQnF setting. φ IRQn input pin IRQnF Figure 5.4 Timing of IRQnF Setting The vector numbers for IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 23 to 16. Detection of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. Therefore, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR bit to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. When the IRQ6 pin is assigned as the IRQ6 interrupt input pin, then set the KMIMR6 bit to 0. As interrupt request flags IRQ7F to IRQ0F are set when the setting condition is met, regardless of the IER setting, only the necessary flags should be referenced. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 114 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupts KIN7 to KIN0: Interrupts KIN7 to KIN0 are requested by input signals at pins KIN7 to KIN0. When any of pins KIN7 to KIN0 are used as key-sense inputs, the corresponding KMIMR bits should be cleared to 0 to enable those key-sense input interrupts. The remaining unused key-sense input KMIMR bits should be set to 1 to disable those interrupts. Interrupts KIN7 to KIN0 correspond to the IRQ6 interrupt. Interrupt request generation pin conditions, interrupt request enabling, interrupt control level setting, and interrupt request status indications, are all in accordance with the IRQ6 interrupt settings. When pins KIN7 to KIN0 are used as key-sense interrupt input pins, either low-level sensing or falling-edge sensing must be designated as the interrupt sense condition for the corresponding interrupt source (IRQ6). 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts There are 38 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules, plus one software interrupt source (address break). • For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If any one of these is set to 1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. • The interrupt control level can be set by means of ICR. • The DTC can be activated by an FRT, TMR, SCI, or other interrupt request. When the DTC is activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits have no effect. 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table Table 5.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among modules can be set by means of ICR. The situation when two or more modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 5.4. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 115 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 Origin of Interrupt Source External pin Vector Address Vector Normal Number Mode Advanced Mode ICR Priority 7 H'000E H'00001C High 16 H'0020 H'000040 ICRA7 IRQ1 17 H'0022 H'000044 ICRA6 IRQ2 IRQ3 18 19 H'0024 H'0026 H'000048 H'00004C ICRA5 IRQ4 IRQ5 20 21 H'0028 H'002A H'000050 H'000054 ICRA4 IRQ6, KIN7 to KIN0 IRQ7 22 23 H'002C H'002E H'000058 H'00005C ICRA3 SWDTEND (software activation interrupt end) DTC 24 H'0030 H'000060 ICRA2 WOVI0 (interval timer) Watchdog timer 0 25 H'0032 H'000064 ICRA1 WOVI1 (interval timer) Watchdog timer 1 26 H'0034 H'000068 ICRA0 Address break (PC break) — 27 H'0036 H'00006C ADI (A/D conversion end) A/D 28 H'0038 H'000070 Reserved — 29 to 47 H'003A to H'005E H'000074 to H'0000BC ICIA (input capture A) ICIB (input capture B) ICIC (input capture C) ICID (input capture D) OCIA (output compare A) OCIB (output compare B) FOVI (overflow) Reserved Freerunning timer 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 H'0060 H'0062 H'0064 H'0066 H'0068 H'006A H'006C H'006E H'0000C0 H'0000C4 H'0000C8 H'0000CC H'0000D0 H'0000D4 H'0000D8 H'0000DC Reserved — 56 to 63 H'0070 to H'007E H'0000E0 to H'0000FC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 116 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 ICRB7 ICRB6 Low Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source Vector Address Vector Normal Number Mode Advanced Mode ICR CMIA0 (compare-match A) CMIB0 (compare-match B) OVI0 (overflow) Reserved 8-bit timer channel 0 64 65 66 67 H'0080 H'0082 H'0084 H'0086 H'000100 H'000104 H'000108 H'00010C ICRB3 CMIA1 (compare-match A) CMIB1 (compare-match B) OVI1 (overflow) Reserved 8-bit timer channel 1 68 69 70 71 H'0088 H'008A H'008C H'008E H'000110 H'000114 H'000118 H'00011C ICRB2 CMIAY (compare-match A) CMIBY (compare-match B) OVIY (overflow) ICIX (input capture X) 8-bit timer channels Y, X 72 73 74 75 H'0090 H'0092 H'0094 H'0096 H'000120 H'000124 H'000128 H'00012C ICRB1 IBF1 (IDR1 reception completed) Host IBF2 (IDR2 reception completed) interface Reserved Reserved 76 77 78 79 H'0098 H'009A H'009C H'009E H'000130 H'000134 H'000138 H'00013C ICRB0 ERI0 (receive error 0) RXI0 (reception completed 0) TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) TEI0 (transmission end 0) SCI channel 0 80 81 82 83 H'00A0 H'00A2 H'00A4 H'00A6 H'000140 H'000144 H'000148 H'00014C ICRC7 ERI1 (receive error 1) RXI1 (reception completed 1) TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) TEI1 (transmission end 1) SCI channel 1 84 85 86 87 H'00A8 H'00AA H'00AC H'00AE H'000150 H'000154 H'000158 H'00015C ICRC6 ERI2 (receive error 2) RXI2 (reception completed 2) TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) TEI2 (transmission end 2) SCI channel 2 88 89 90 91 H'00B0 H'00B2 H'00B4 H'00B6 H'000160 H'000164 H'000168 H'00016C ICRC5 IICI0 (1-byte transmission/ reception completed) DDCSWI (format switch) IIC channel 0 (option) 92 H'00B8 H'000170 ICRC4 93 H'00BA H'000174 IICI1 (1-byte transmission/ reception completed) Reserved IIC channel 1 (option) 94 H'00BC H'000178 95 H'00BE H'00017C Reserved — 96 to 103 H'00C0 to H'00CE H'000180 to H'00019C Priority High ICRC3 Low Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 117 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4 Address Breaks 5.4.1 Features With the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, it is possible to identify the prefetch of a specific address by the CPU and generate an address break interrupt, using the ABRKCR and BAR registers. When an address break interrupt is generated, address break interrupt exception handling is executed. This function can be used to detect the beginning of execution of a bug location in the program, and branch to a correction routine. 5.4.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the address break function is shown in figure 5.5. BAR Comparator ABRKCR Match signal Control logic Address break interrupt request Internal address Prefetch signal (internal signal) Figure 5.5 Block Diagram of Address Break Function Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 118 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4.3 Operation ABRKCR and BAR settings can be made so that an address break interrupt is generated when the CPU prefetches the address set in BAR. This address break function issues an interrupt request to the interrupt controller when the address is prefetched, and the interrupt controller determines the interrupt priority. When the interrupt is accepted, interrupt exception handling is started on completion of the currently executing instruction. With an address break interrupt, interrupt mask control by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR is ineffective. The register settings when the address break function is used are as follows. 1. Set the break address in bits A23 to A1 in BAR. 2. Set the BIE bit in ABRKCR to 1 to enable address breaks. An address break will not be requested if the BIE bit is cleared to 0. When the setting condition occurs, the CMF flag in ABRKCR is set to 1 and an interrupt is requested. If necessary, the source should be identified in the interrupt handling routine. 5.4.4 Usage Notes 1. With the address break function, the address at which the first instruction byte is located should be specified as the break address. Occurrence of the address break condition may not be recognized for other addresses. 2. In normal mode, no comparison is made with address lines A23 to A16. 3. If a branch instruction (Bcc, BSR), jump instruction (JMP, JSR), RTS instruction, or RTE instruction is located immediately before the address set in BAR, execution of this instruction will output a prefetch signal for that address, and an address break may be requested. This can be prevented by not making a break address setting for an address immediately following one of these instructions, or by determining within the interrupt handling routine whether interrupt handling was initiated by a genuine condition occurrence. 4. As an address break interrupt is generated by a combination of the internal prefetch signal and address, the timing of the start of interrupt exception handling depends on the content and execution cycle of the instruction at the set address and the preceding instruction. Figure 5.6 shows some address timing examples. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 119 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller • Program area in on-chip memory, 1-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation Vector fetch Stack save Internal Instruction operation fetch φ Address bus H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 SP-2 NOP NOP NOP execution execution execution SP-4 H'0036 Interrupt exception handling Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 NOP NOP NOP NOP Breakpoint NOP instruction is executed at breakpoint address H'0312 and next address, H'0314; fetch from address H'0316 starts after end of exception handling. • Program area in on-chip memory, 2-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Instruction Internal fetch fetch fetch fetch fetch operation Vector fetch Stack save Internal Instruction operation fetch φ Address bus H'0310 H'0312 NOP execution H'0314 H'0316 H'0318 MOV.W execution SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 Interrupt exception handling Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0316 H'0318 NOP MOV.W NOP NOP #xx:16,Rd Breakpoint MOV instruction is executed at breakpoint address H'0312, NOP instruction at next address, H'0316, is not executed; fetch from address H'0316 starts after end of exception handling. • Program area in external memory (2-state access, 16-bit-bus access), 1-state execution instruction at specified break address Instruction fetch Instruction fetch Instruction fetch Internal operation Stack save Vector fetch Internal operation φ Address bus H'0310 H'0312 NOP execution H'0314 SP-2 SP-4 H'0036 Interrupt exception handling Break request signal H'0310 H'0312 H'0314 H'0316 NOP NOP NOP NOP Breakpoint NOP instruction at breakpoint address H'0312 is not executed; fetch from address H'0312 starts after end of exception handling. Figure 5.6 Examples of Address Break Timing Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 120 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5 Interrupt Operation 5.5.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation Interrupt operations in the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group differ depending on the interrupt control mode. NMI and address break interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. In the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller. Table 5.5 shows the interrupt control modes. The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in ICR, and the masking state indicated by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR. Table 5.5 Interrupt Control Modes SYSCR Interrupt Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 Priority Setting Register Interrupt Mask Bits 0 ICR I 0 0 Description Interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit Priority can be set with ICR 1 1 ICR I, UI 3-level interrupt mask control is performed by the I and UI bits Priority can be set with ICR Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 121 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.7 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit. I UI ICR Interrupt source Interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control Default priority determination Vector number Interrupt control modes 0 and 1 Figure 5.7 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation Interrupt Acceptance Control and 3-Level Control: In interrupt control modes 0 and 1, interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control is performed by means of the I and UI bits in CCR, and ICR (control level). Table 5.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 122 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Mask Bits Interrupt Control Mode I UI Selected Interrupts 0 0 * All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) 1 * NMI and address break interrupts 0 * All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) 1 0 NMI, address break and control level 1 interrupts 1 NMI and address break interrupts 1 Legend: *: Don’t care Default Priority Determination: The priority is determined for the selected interrupt, and a vector number is generated. If the same value is set for ICR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated. Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending. Table 5.7 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode. Table 5.7 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode 0 1 Interrupt Acceptance Control 3-Level Control Setting Interrupt Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 0 0 1 Default Priority Determination T (Trace) I UI ICR O IM — PR O — O IM IM PR O — Legend: O: Interrupt operation control performed IM: Used as interrupt mask bit PR: Sets priority —: Not used Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 123 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by means of the I bit in the CPU’s CCR, and ICR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. Control level 1 interrupt sources have higher priority. Figure 5.8 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. 3. The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI and address break interrupts. 7. A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 124 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI? No No Control level 1 interrupt? Hold pending Yes No No IRQ0? Yes IRQ0? No Yes IRQ1? Yes No IRQ1? Yes IICI1? IICI1? Yes Yes No I = 0? Yes Save PC and CCR I←1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.8 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 125 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1 Three-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts by means of the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR, and ICR. • Control level 0 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. • Control level 1 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit or UI bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1. For example, if the interrupt enable bit for an interrupt request is set to 1, and H'20, H'00, and H'00 are set in ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC, respectively, (i.e. IRQ2 and IRQ3 interrupts are set to control level 1 and other interrupts to control level 0), the situation is as follows: • When I = 0, all interrupts are enabled (Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IRQ3 > address break > IRQ0 > IRQ1 ...) • When I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, IRQ2, IRQ3, and address break interrupts are enabled • When I = 1 and UI = 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are enabled Figure 5.9 shows the state transitions in these cases. I←0 All interrupts enabled Only NMI, IRQ2, IRQ3, and address break interrupts enabled I←1, UI←0 I←0 UI←0 Exception handling execution or UI←1 Exception handling execution or I←1, UI←1 Only NMI and address break interrupts enabled Figure 5.9 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 126 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.10 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. 1. If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. 2. When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt, according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. 3. The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit has no effect. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0. If the I bit is set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 1 has priority over an interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0, and is accepted if the I bit is cleared to 0, or if the I bit is set to 1 and the UI bit is cleared to 0. When both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1, only NMI and address break interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. 4. When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. 5. The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. 6. Next, the I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI and address break. 7. A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 127 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution state No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI? No No Control level 1 interrupt? Hold pending Yes IRQ0? Yes No No IRQ0? No Yes IRQ1? No IRQ1? Yes Yes IICI1? IICI1? Yes Yes No I = 0? Yes UI = 0? I = 0? No No Yes Yes Save PC and CCR I ← 1, UI ← 1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.10 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 128 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Figure 5.11 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 129 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 130 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Figure 5.11 Interrupt Exception Handling (1) (2) (4) (3) Instruction prefetch Internal operation Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address.) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed.) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.) (5) SP-2 (7) SP-4 (1) Internal data bus Internal write signal Internal read signal Internal address bus Interrupt request signal φ Interrupt level determination Wait for end of instruction Interrupt acceptance (5) (7) (8) (9) (10) Vector fetch (12) (11) Internal operation (14) (13) Interrupt handling routine instruction prefetch (6) (8) Saved PC and saved CCR (9) (11) Vector address (10) (12) Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents) (13) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12)) (14) First instruction of interrupt handling routine (6) Stack Section 5 Interrupt Controller Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.5 Interrupt Response Times The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group are capable of fast word access to on-chip memory, and high-speed processing can be achieved by providing the program area in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM. Table 5.8 shows interrupt response times—the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols used in table 5.8 are explained in table 5.9. Table 5.8 Interrupt Response Times Number of States No. Item Normal Mode Advanced Mode 1 1 Interrupt priority determination* 3 3 2 Number of wait states until executing 2 instruction ends* 1 to (19+2·SI) 1 to 19+(2·SI) 3 PC, CCR stack save 2·SK 2·SK 4 Vector fetch SI 2·SI 5 3 Instruction fetch* 2·SI 2·SI 6 4 Internal processing* 2 2 11 to 31 12 to 32 Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Table 5.9 Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Object of Access External Device 8-Bit Bus Symbol Internal Memory 2-State Access 3-State Access Instruction fetch SI 1 4 6+2m Branch address read SJ Stack manipulation SK Legend: m: Number of wait states in an external device access Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 131 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6 Usage Notes 5.6.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.12 shows an example in which the CMIEA bit in 8-bit timer register TCR is cleared to 0. TCR write cycle by CPU CMIA exception handling φ Internal address bus TCR address Internal write signal CMIEA CMFA CMIA interrupt signal Figure 5.12 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 132 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. 5.6.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts, including NMI, are disabled, and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.6.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: EEPMOV.W MOV.W R4,R4 BNE L1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 133 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.7 DTC Activation by Interrupt 5.7.1 Overview The DTC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available: • Interrupt request to CPU • Activation request to DTC • Both of the above For details of interrupt requests that can be used to activate the DTC, see section 7, Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group]. 5.7.2 Block Diagram Figure 5.13 shows a block diagram of the DTC and interrupt controller. Interrupt request IRQ interrupt On-chip supporting module Interrupt source clear signal DTC activation request vector number Selection circuit Select signal Clear signal DTCER Control logic DTC Clear signal DTVECR SWDTE clear signal Interrupt controller Determination of priority Figure 5.13 Interrupt Control for DTC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 134 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 CPU interrupt request vector number CPU I, UI Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.7.3 Operation The interrupt controller has three main functions in DTC control. Selection of Interrupt Source: It is possible to select DTC activation request or CPU interrupt request with the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERE in the DTC. After a DTC data transfer, the DTCE bit can be cleared to 0 and an interrupt request sent to the CPU in accordance with the specification of the DISEL bit of MRB in the DTC. When the DTC performs the specified number of data transfers and the transfer counter reaches 0, following the DTC data transfer the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Determination of Priority: The DTC activation source is selected in accordance with the default priority order, and is not affected by mask or priority levels. See section 7.3.3, DTC Vector Table, for the respective priorities. Operation Order: If the same interrupt is selected as a DTC activation source and a CPU interrupt source, the DTC data transfer is performed first, followed by CPU interrupt exception handling. Table 5.10 summarizes interrupt source selection and interrupt source clearance control according to the settings of the DTCE bit of DTCERA to DTCERE in the DTC and the DISEL bit of MRB in the DTC. Table 5.10 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control Settings DTC Interrupt Source Selection/Clearing Control DTCE DISEL DTC CPU 0 * × ∆ 1 0 ∆ × 1 O ∆ Legend: ∆: The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed. (The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.) O: The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared. ×: The relevant bit cannot be used. *: Don’t care Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 135 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Usage Note: SCI, IIC, and A/D converter interrupt sources are cleared when the DTC reads or writes to the prescribed register, and are not dependent upon the DISEL bit. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 136 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have an on-chip bus controller (BSC) that allows external address space bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, to be set. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the CPU and data transfer controller (DTC). 6.1.1 Features The features of the bus controller are listed below. • Basic bus interface 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected Program wait states can be inserted • Burst ROM interface External space can be designated as ROM interface space 1-state or 2-state burst access can be selected • Idle cycle insertion An idle cycle can be inserted when an external write cycle immediately follows an external read cycle • Bus arbitration function Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership between the CPU and DTC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 137 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. External bus control signals Internal control signals Bus controller Bus mode signal WSCR BCR WAIT Internal data bus Wait controller CPU bus request signal DTC bus request signal Bus arbiter CPU bus acknowledge signal DTC bus acknowledge signal Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 138 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller. Table 6.1 Bus Controller Pins Name Symbol I/O Function Address strobe AS Output Strobe signal indicating that address output on address bus is enabled (when IOSE bit is 0) I/O select IOS Output I/O select signal (when IOSE bit is 1) Read RD Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is being read Write WR Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is being written to, and that data bus is enabled Wait WAIT Input Wait request signal when external 3-state access space is accessed 6.1.4 Register Configuration Table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller. Table 6.2 Bus Controller Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Bus control register BCR R/W H'D7 H'FFC6 Wait state control register WSCR R/W H'33 H'FFC7 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 139 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.2 Register Descriptions 6.2.1 Bus Control Register (BCR) 7 6 ICIS1 ICIS0 Initial value 1 1 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IOS1 IOS0 0 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 BCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the external memory space access mode, and the extent of the I/O area when the I/O strobe function has been selected for the AS pin. BCR is initialized to H'D7 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7—Idle Cycle Insert 1 (ICIS1): Reserved. Do not write 0 to this bit. Bit 6—Idle Cycle Insert 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether or not a one-state idle cycle is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed. Bit 6 ICIS0 Description 0 Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles 1 Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles (Initial value) Bit 5—Burst ROM Enable (BRSTRM): Selects whether external space is designated as a burst ROM interface space. The selection applies to the entire external space . Bit 5 BRSTRM Description 0 Basic bus interface 1 Burst ROM interface Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 140 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 4—Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM interface. Bit 4 BRSTS1 Description 0 Burst cycle comprises 1 state 1 Burst cycle comprises 2 states (Initial value) Bit 3—Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst ROM interface burst access. Bit 3 BRSTS0 Description 0 Max. 4 words in burst access 1 Max. 8 words in burst access (Initial value) Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 0 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—IOS Select 1 and 0 (IOS1, IOS0): See table 6.4. 6.2.2 Wait State Control Register (WSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RAMS RAM0 ABW AST WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0 Initial value 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W WSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the data bus width, number of access states, wait mode, and number of wait states for external memory space. The on-chip memory and internal I/O register bus width and number of access states are fixed, irrespective of the WSCR settings. WSCR is initialized to H'33 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 141 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bit 7—RAM Select (RAMS)/Bit 6—RAM Area Setting (RAM0): These are reserved bits. Always write 0 when writing to these bits in the A-mask version. Bit 5—Bus Width Control (ABW): Specifies whether the external memory space is 8-bit access space or 16-bit access space. However, a 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these group, and therefore 0 should not be written to this bit. Bit 5 ABW Description 0 External memory space is designated as 16-bit access space (A 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these group) 1 External memory space is designated as 8-bit access space (Initial value) Bit 4—Access State Control (AST): Specifies whether the external memory space is 2-state access space or 3-state access space, and simultaneously enables or disables wait state insertion. Bit 4 AST Description 0 External memory space is designated as 2-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space accesses is disabled 1 External memory space is designated as 3-state access space Wait state insertion in external memory space accesses is enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 and 2—Wait Mode Select 1 and 0 (WMS1, WMS0): These bits select the wait mode when external memory space is accessed while the AST bit is set to 1. Bit 3 Bit 2 WMS1 WMS0 Description 0 0 Program wait mode 1 Wait-disabled mode 1 0 Pin wait mode 1 Pin auto-wait mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 142 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 6 Bus Controller Bits 1 and 0—Wait Count 1 and 0 (WC1, WC0): These bits select the number of program wait states when external memory space is accessed while the AST bit is set to 1. Bit 1 Bit 0 WC1 WC0 Description 0 0 No program wait states are inserted 1 1 program wait state is inserted in external memory space accesses 0 2 program wait states are inserted in external memory space accesses 1 3 program wait states are inserted in external memory space accesses (Initial value) 1 6.3 Overview of Bus Control 6.3.1 Bus Specifications The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access states, and wait mode and number of program wait states. The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with the ABW bit. A 16-bit access space cannot be specified for these group. Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with the AST bit. When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. The number of access states on the burst ROM interface is determined without regard to the AST bit setting. Wait Mode and Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by the AST bit, the wait mode and the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WMS1, WMS0, WC1, and WC0. From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. Table 6.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 143 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.3 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface) Access States Program Wait States ABW AST WMS1 WMS0 WC1 WC0 Bus Width 0 0 — — — — Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group. 1 0 — — — — 8 2 0 1 0 1 — — 8 3 0 —* —* 0 0 3 0 1 Note: 6.3.2 * 1 1 0 2 1 3 Except when WMS1 = 0 and WMS0 = 1 Advanced Mode The H8S/2138 and H8S/2134 have 16 address output pins, so there are no pins for output of the upper address bits (A16 to A23) in advanced mode. H'FFF000 to H'FFFE4F (H'FFF000 to H'FFF7FF in the H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A mask version) can be accessed by designating the AS pin as an I/O strobe pin. The accessible external space is therefore H'FFF000 to H'FFFE4F (H'FFF000 to H'FFF7FF in the H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A mask version) even when expanded mode with ROM enabled is selected in advanced mode. The initial state of the external space is basic bus interface, three-state access space. In ROMenabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. 6.3.3 Normal Mode The initial state of the external memory space is basic bus interface, three-state access space. In ROM-disabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. In ROM-enabled expanded mode, the space excluding the on-chip ROM, on-chip RAM, and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the onchip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 144 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.3.4 I/O Select Signal In the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, an I/O select signal (IOS) can be output, with the signal output going low when the designated external space is accessed. Figure 6.2 shows an example of IOS signal output timing. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus External address in IOS set range IOS Figure 6.2 IOS Signal Output Timing Enabling or disabling of IOS signal output is controlled by the setting of the IOSE bit in SYSCR. In expanded mode, this pin operates as the AS output pin after a reset, and therefore the IOSE bit in SYSCR must be set to 1 in order to use this pin as the IOS signal output. See section 8, I/O Ports, for details. The range of addresses for which the IOS signal is output can be set with bits IOS1 and IOS0 in BCR. The IOS signal address ranges are shown in table 6.4. Table 6.4 IOS Signal Output Range Settings IOS1 IOS0 IOS Signal Output Range 0 0 H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F03F 1 H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F0FF 0 H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F3FF 1 H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)FE4F* 1 Note: * (Initial value) In the H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-mask version, the address range is from H'(FF)F000 to H'(FF)F7FF. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 145 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.4 Basic Bus Interface 6.4.1 Overview The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on. The bus specifications can be selected with the AST bit, and the WMS1, WMS0, WC1, and WC0 bits (see table 6.3). 6.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data size. These group only have an upper data bus, and only 8-bit access space alignment is used. In these group, the upper data bus pins are designated D7 to D0. 8-Bit Access Space: Figure 6.3 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses. Upper data bus Lower data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size Word size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle Longword size 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle Figure 6.3 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 146 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 16-Bit Access Space (Cannot Be Used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group): Figure 6.4 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword access is executed as two word accesses. In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. Lower data bus Upper data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size • Even address Byte size • Odd address Word size Longword size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle Figure 6.4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space) 6.4.3 Valid Strobes Table 6.5 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces. In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the data bus. In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the lower half. These group only have an upper data bus, and only the RD and HWR signals are valid. In these group, the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 147 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Table 6.5 Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes Area 8-bit access space Access Size Read/ Write Address Valid Strobe Upper Data Bus 1 (D15 to D8)* Lower Data Bus 3 (D7 to D0)* Byte Read — RD Valid Port, etc. — 2 HWR* Even RD 16-bit access Byte space (Cannot be used in the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group) Word Write Read Odd Port, etc. Valid Invalid Invalid Valid Even HWR Valid Undefined Odd LWR Undefined Valid Read — RD Valid Valid Write — HWR, LWR Valid Valid Write Notes: Undefined: Undefined data is output. Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored. Port, etc.: Pins are used as port or on-chip supporting module input/output pins, and not as data bus pins. 1. The pin names in these group are D7 to D0. 2. The pin name in these group is WR. 3. There are no lower data bus pins in these group. 6.4.4 Basic Timing 8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 6.5 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. Wait states cannot be inserted. These group have no lower data bus (D7 to D0) pins or LWR pin. In these group, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) pins are designated D7 to D0, and the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 148 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 1) AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR Write D15 to D8 Valid Figure 6.5 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 149 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 8-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figure 6.6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. Wait states can be inserted. These group have no lower data bus (D7 to D0) pins or LWR pin. In these group, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) pins are designated D7 to D0, and the HWR signal pin is designated WR. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 1) AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR Write D15 to D8 Valid Figure 6.6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 150 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.4.5 Wait Control When accessing external space, the MCU can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (TW). There are three ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion, pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin, and a combination of the two. Program Wait Mode In program wait mode, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are always inserted between the T2 and T3 states when external space is accessed. Pin Wait Mode In pin wait mode, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are always inserted between the T2 and T3 states when external space is accessed. If the WAIT pin is low at the fall of φ in the last T2 or TW state, another TW state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, TW states are inserted until it goes high. Pin wait mode is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for changing the number of TW states for different external devices. Pin Auto-Wait Mode In pin auto-wait mode, if the WAIT pin is low at the fall of the system clock in the T2 state, the number of TW states specified by bits WC1 and WC0 are inserted between the T2 and T3 states when external space is accessed. No additional TW states are inserted even if the WAIT pin remains low. Pin auto-wait mode can be used for an easy interface to low-speed memory, simply by routing the chip select signal to the WAIT pin. Figure 6.7 shows an example of wait state insertion timing. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 151 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller By program wait T1 T2 Tw By WAIT pin Tw Tw T3 φ WAIT Address bus AS (IOSE = 0) RD Read Data bus Read data WR Write Data bus Note: Write data indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling using the φ clock. Figure 6.7 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing The settings after a reset are: 3-state access, insertion of 3 program wait states, and WAIT input disabled. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 152 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5 Burst ROM Interface 6.5.1 Overview With the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group, external space area 0 can be designated as burst ROM space, and burst ROM interfacing can be performed. External space can be designated as burst ROM space by means of the BRSTRM bit in BCR. Consecutive burst accesses of a maximum of 4 words or 8 words can be performed for CPU instruction fetches only. One or two states can be selected for burst access. 6.5.2 Basic Timing The number of states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface is in accordance with the setting of the AST bit. Also, when the AST bit is set to 1, wait state insertion is possible. One or two states can be selected for the burst cycle, according to the setting of the BRSTS1 bit in BCR. Wait states cannot be inserted. When the BRSTS0 bit in BCR is cleared to 0, burst access of up to 4 words is performed; when the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, burst access of up to 8 words is performed. The basic access timing for burst ROM space is shown in figures 6.8 (a) and (b). The timing shown in figure 6.8 (a) is for the case where the AST and BRSTS1 bits are both set to 1, and that in figure 6.8 (b) is for the case where both these bits are cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 153 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Full access T1 T2 Burst access T3 T1 T2 T1 T2 φ Only lower address changed Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 6.8 (a) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 1) Full access T1 T2 Burst access T1 T1 φ Only lower address changed Address bus AS/IOS (IOSE = 0) RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 6.8 (b) Example of Burst ROM Access Timing (When AST = BRSTS1 = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 154 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.5.3 Wait Control As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. See section 6.4.5, Wait Control. Wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. 6.6 Idle Cycle 6.6.1 Operation When the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group chip accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (TI) between bus cycles when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on. If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCR is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. This is enabled in advanced mode and normal mode. Figure 6.9 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 155 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller Bus cycle A T1 T2 Bus cycle A Bus cycle B T3 T1 T2 T1 φ φ Address bus Address bus RD RD WR WR Data bus Data bus Long output floating time T2 Pin States in Idle Cycle Table 6.6 shows pin states in an idle cycle. Pin States in Idle Cycle Pins Pin State A15 to A0, IOS Contents of next bus cycle D7 to D0 High impedance AS High RD High WR High Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 156 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 T1 (b) Idle cycle inserted Figure 6.9 Example of Idle Cycle Operation Table 6.6 TI Data collision (a) Idle cycle not inserted 6.6.2 T3 Bus cycle B T2 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.7 Bus Arbitration 6.7.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations. There are two bus masters, the CPU and the DTC, which perform read/write operations when they have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and begins its operation. 6.7.2 Operation The bus arbiter detects the bus masters’ bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from both bus masters, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the higher priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (High) DTC > CPU (Low) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 157 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 6 Bus Controller 6.7.3 Bus Transfer Timing Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus. CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the DTC. The timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: • The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between the operations. See appendix A.5, Bus States during Instruction Execution, for timings at which the bus is not transferred. • If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately. DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. The DTC does not release the bus until it has completed a group of processing operations. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 158 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Provided in the H8S/2138 Group; not provided in the H8S/2134 Group. 7.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. 7.1.1 Features • Transfer possible over any number of channels Transfer information is stored in memory One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) • Wide range of transfer modes Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available Incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of transfer source and destination addresses can be selected • Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified • Transfer can be set in byte or word units • A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after one data transfer ends An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after all specified data transfers have ended • Activation by software is possible • Module stop mode can be set The initial setting enables DTC registers to be accessed. DTC operation is halted by setting module stop mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 159 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM*. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information. Note: * When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. Internal address bus On-chip RAM CPU interrupt request Register information MRA MRB CRA CRB DAR SAR DTC Control logic DTC activation request DTVECR Interrupt request DTCERA to DTCERE Interrupt controller Internal data bus Legend: MRA, MRB: DTC mode registers A and B CRA, CRB: DTC transfer count registers A and B SAR: DTC source address register DAR: DTC destination address register DTCERA to DTCERE: DTC enable registers A to E DTVECR: DTC vector register Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of DTC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 160 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.1.3 Register Configuration Table 7.1 summarizes the DTC registers. Table 7.1 DTC Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* DTC mode register A MRA Undefined DTC mode register B MRB —* 2 —* 3 —* 3 —* DTC source address register SAR 2 —* Undefined DTC destination address register DAR Undefined DTC transfer count register A CRA 2 —* 2 —* DTC transfer count register B CRB —* Undefined 3 —* 3 —* DTC enable registers DTCER* R/W H'00 H'FEEE to H'FEF2 DTC vector register 4 DTVECR* R/W H'00 H'FEF3 Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 2 4 2 Undefined Undefined 3 —* 3 —* Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Registers within the DTC cannot be read or written to directly. 3. Addresses H'EC00 to H'EFFF contain register information. They cannot be located in external memory space. When the DTC is used, do not clear the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 4. The H8S/2134 Group does not include an on-chip DTC, and therefore the DTCER and DTVECR register addresses should not be accessed by the CPU. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 161 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.2 Register Descriptions 7.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SM1 SM0 DM1 DM0 MD1 MD0 DTS Sz Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — MRA is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Bits 7 and 6—Source Address Mode 1 and 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits specify whether SAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 7 Bit 6 SM1 SM0 Description 0 — SAR is fixed 1 0 SAR is incremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) 1 SAR is decremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) Bits 5 and 4—Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits specify whether DAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 5 Bit 4 DM1 DM0 Description 0 — DAR is fixed 1 0 DAR is incremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) 1 DAR is decremented after a transfer (by 1 when Sz = 0; by 2 when Sz = 1) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 162 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 3 and 2—DTC Mode (MD1, MD0): These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. Bit 3 Bit 2 MD1 MD0 Description 0 0 Normal mode 1 Repeat mode 0 Block transfer mode 1 — 1 Bit 1—DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): Specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. Bit 1 DTS Description 0 Destination side is repeat area or block area 1 Source side is repeat area or block area Bit 0—DTC Data Transfer Size (Sz): Specifies the size of data to be transferred. Bit 0 Sz Description 0 Byte-size transfer 1 Word-size transfer Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 163 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHNE DISEL — — — — — — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — MRB is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Bit 7—DTC Chain Transfer Enable (CHNE): Specifies chain transfer. In chain transfer, multiple data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. With data transfer for which CHNE is set to 1, there is no determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the interrupt source flag, or clearing of DTCER. Bit 7 CHNE Description 0 End of DTC data transfer (activation waiting state is entered) 1 DTC chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred) Bit 6—DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): Specifies whether interrupt requests to the CPU are disabled or enabled after a data transfer. Bit 6 DISEL Description 0 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 (the DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) 1 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled (the DTC does not clear the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: In the H8S/2138 Group these bits have no effect on DTC operation, and should always be written with 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 164 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR) 23 Bit Initial value Read/write 22 21 20 19 4 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even source address. 7.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR) 23 Bit Initial value Read/write 22 21 20 19 4 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. 7.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) Bit Initial value Read/Write 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — CRAH CRAL CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the entire CRA register functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. In repeat mode or block transfer mode, CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits (CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are transferred when the count reaches H'00. This operation is repeated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 165 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB) 15 Bit 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initial value Read/Write CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. 7.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTCE7 DTCE6 DTCE5 DTCE4 DTCE3 DTCE2 DTCE1 DTCE0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The DTC enable registers comprise five 8-bit readable/writable registers, DTCERA to DTCERE, with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can activate the DTC. These bits enable or disable DTC service for the corresponding interrupt sources. The DTC enable registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit n—DTC Activation Enable (DTCEn) Bit n DTCEn Description 0 DTC activation by interrupt is disabled (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1 • When data transfer ends with the DISEL bit set to 1 • When the specified number of transfers end DTC activation by interrupt is enabled [Holding condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 166 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] A DTCE bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the DTC. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 7.4, together with the vector number generated by the interrupt controller in each case. For DTCE bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bit-manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. For the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. 7.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR) 7 Bit 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * A value of 1 can always be written to the SWDTE bit, but 0 can only be written after 1 is read. DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt. DTVECR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—DTC Software Activation Enable (SWDTE): Specifies enabling or disabling of DTC software activation. To clear the SWDTE bit by software, read SWDTE when set to 1, then write 0 in the bit. Bit 7 SWDTE Description 0 DTC software activation is disabled (Initial value) [Clearing condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended 1 DTC software activation is enabled [Holding conditions] • When data transfer ends with the DISEL bit set to 1 • When the specified number of transfers end • During software-activated data transfer Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 167 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 6 to 0—DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 (DTVEC6 to DTVEC0): These bits specify a vector number for DTC software activation. The vector address is H'0400 + (vector number) << 1 (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. 7.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 15 14 13 12 11 MSTPCRL 10 9 8 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP14 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DTC operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Note that 1 cannot be written to the MSTP14 bit when the DTC is being activated. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTP14): Specifies the DTC module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 6 MSTP14 Description 0 DTC module stop mode is cleared 1 DTC module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 168 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3 Operation 7.3.1 Overview When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to memory. Pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation. Figure 7.2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation. Start Read DTC vector Next transfer Read register information Data transfer Write register information CHNE = 1? Yes No Transfer counter = 0 or DISEL = 1? Yes No Clear activation flag Clear DTCER End Interrupt exception handling Figure 7.2 Flowchart of DTC Operation Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 169 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] The DTC transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode. The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed. Table 7.2 outlines the functions of the DTC. Table 7.2 DTC Functions Address Registers Transfer Mode Activation Source Transfer Source • Normal mode • IRQ 24 bits One transfer request transfers one byte or one word • FRT ICI or OCI • 8-bit timer CMI Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 • Host interface IBF Up to 65,536 transfers possible • SCI TXI or RXI • A/D converter ADI • IIC IICI • Software • Repeat mode One transfer request transfers one byte or one word Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 After the specified number of transfers (1 to 256), the initial state resumes and operation continues • Block transfer mode One transfer request transfers a block of the specified size Block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or words Up to 65,536 transfers possible A block area can be designated at either the source or destination Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 170 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Transfer Destination 24 bits Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.2 Activation Sources The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software (software activation). An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER bit. The interrupt request is directed to the DTC when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and to the CPU when the bit is cleared to 0. At the end of one data transfer (or the last of the consecutive transfers in the case of chain transfer) the interrupt source or the corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. Table 7.3 shows activation sources and DTCER clearing. The interrupt source flag for RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag in SCI0. Table 7.3 Activation Sources and DTCER Clearing When DISEL Bit Is 0 and Specified Number of Transfers Have Not Ended When DISEL Bit Is 1 or Specified Number of Transfers Have Ended Software activation SWDTE bit cleared to 0 • SWDTE bit held at 1 • Interrupt request sent to CPU Interrupt activation • Corresponding DTCER bit held at 1 • Corresponding DTCER bit cleared to 0 • Activation source flag held at 1 • Activation source flag cleared to 0 • Activation source interrupt request sent to CPU Activation Source Figure 7.3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 171 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Source flag cleared Clear control Clear DTCER Clear request On-chip supporting module IRQ interrupt Interrupt request Selection circuit Select DTVECR DTC Interrupt controller CPU Interrupt mask Figure 7.3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC is activated in accordance with the default priorities. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 172 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.3 DTC Vector Table Figure 7.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information. Table 7.4 shows the correspondence between activation sources, vector addresses, and DTCER bits. When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + DTVECR[6:0] << 1 (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. The register information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip RAM. The start address of the register information should be an integral multiple of four. The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip RAM. DTC vector address Register information start address Register information Chain transfer Figure 7.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 173 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Table 7.4 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source Write to DTVECR IRQ0 IRQ1 Vector Number Vector Address Software DTVECR (Decimal indication) External pin DTCE* Priority H'0400 + DTVECR [6:0] << 1 — High 16 H'0420 DTCEA7 17 H'0422 DTCEA6 IRQ2 18 H'0424 DTCEA5 IRQ3 19 H'0426 DTCEA4 ADI (A/D conversion end) A/D 28 H'0438 DTCEA3 ICIA (FRT input capture A) FRT 48 H'0460 DTCEA2 ICIB (FRT input capture B) 49 H'0462 DTCEA1 OCIA (FRT output compare A) 52 H'0468 DTCEA0 OCIB (FRT output compare B) CMIA0 (TMR0 compare-match A) TMR0 CMIB0 (TMR0 compare-match B) CMIA1 (TMR1 compare-match A) TMR1 CMIB1 (TMR1 compare-match B) CMIAY (TMRY compare-match A) 54 H'046A DTCEB7 64 H'0480 DTCEB2 65 H'0482 DTCEB1 68 H'0488 DTCEB0 69 H'048A DTCEC7 72 H'0490 DTCEC6 73 H'0492 DTCEC5 76 H'0498 DTCEC4 77 H'049A DTCEC3 SCI channel 0 81 H'04A2 DTCEC2 82 H'04A4 DTCEC1 SCI channel 1 85 H'04AA DTCEC0 86 H'04AC DTCED7 89 H'04B2 DTCED6 TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) SCI channel 2 90 H'04B4 DTCED5 IICI0 (IIC0 1-byte transmission/ reception completed) IIC0 (option) 92 H'04B8 DTCED4 IICI1 (IIC1 1-byte transmission/ reception completed) IIC1 (option) 94 H'04BC DTCED3 TMRY CMIBY (TMRY compare-match B) IBF1 (IDR1 reception completed) HIF IBF2 (IDR2 reception completed) RXI0 (reception completed 0) TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) RXI1 (reception completed 1) TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) RXI2 (reception completed 2) Note: * Low DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 174 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space Figure 7.5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space. Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information (vector address contents). In chain transfer, locate the register information in consecutive areas. Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEC00 to H'FFEFFF). Lower address 0 Register information start address Chain transfer 1 2 3 MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA Register information CRB MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA CRB Register information for 2nd transfer in chain transfer 4 bytes Figure 7.5 Location of DTC Register Information in Address Space Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 175 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.5 Normal Mode In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 7.5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 7.6 shows memory mapping in normal mode. Table 7.5 Register Information in Normal Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Transfer source address DTC destination address register DAR Transfer destination address DTC transfer count register A CRA Transfer count DTC transfer count register B CRB Not used SAR DAR Transfer Figure 7.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 176 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.6 Repeat Mode In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial address register state specified by the transfer counter and repeat area resumes and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Table 7.6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 7.7 shows memory mapping in repeat mode. Table 7.6 Register Information in Repeat Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Transfer source address DTC destination address register DAR Transfer destination address DTC transfer count register AH CRAH Holds number of transfers DTC transfer count register AL CRAL Transfer count DTC transfer count register B CRB Not used SAR or DAR DAR or SAR Repeat area Transfer Figure 7.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 177 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.7 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is specified as a block area. The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified in the block area is restored. The other address register is successively incremented or decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 7.7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 7.8 shows memory mapping in block transfer mode. Table 7.7 Register Information in Block Transfer Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Transfer source address DTC destination address register DAR Transfer destination address DTC transfer count register AH CRAH Holds block size DTC transfer count register AL CRAL Block size count DTC transfer count register B CRB Transfer counter Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 178 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] First block SAR or DAR · · · Block area DAR or SAR Transfer Nth block Figure 7.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 179 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.8 Chain Transfer Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 7.9 shows memory mapping for chain transfer. Source Destination Register information CHNE = 1 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information CHNE = 0 Source Destination Figure 7.9 Memory Mapping in Chain Transfer In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 180 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.9 Operation Timing Figures 7.10 to 7.12 show examples of DTC operation timing. φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Read Write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 7.10 DTC Operation Timing (Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Read Write Read Write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 7.11 DTC Operation Timing (Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 181 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Data transfer Read Write Read Write Vector read Address Transfer information read Transfer Transfer information information write read Transfer information write Figure 7.12 DTC Operation Timing (Chain Transfer) 7.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States Table 7.8 lists execution phases for a single DTC data transfer, and table 7.9 shows the number of states required for each execution phase. Table 7.8 DTC Execution Phases Mode Vector Read I Register Information Read/Write J Data Read K Data Write L Internal Operation M Normal 1 6 1 1 3 Repeat 1 6 1 1 3 Block transfer 1 6 N N 3 N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 182 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Table 7.9 Number of States Required for Each Execution Phase Object of Access On-Chip RAM On-Chip ROM Internal I/O Registers External Devices Bus width 32 16 8 16 8 8 Access states 1 1 2 2 2 3 Execution phase Vector read SI — 1 — — 4 6+2m Register information read/write SJ 1 — — — — — Byte data read SK 1 1 2 2 2 3+m Word data read SK 1 1 4 2 4 6+2m Byte data write SL 1 1 2 2 2 3+m Word data write SL 1 1 4 2 4 6+2m Internal operation SM 1 1 1 1 1 1 The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that Σ means the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number for which the CHNE bit is set to one, plus 1). Number of execution states = I · SI + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 183 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.11 Procedures for Using the DTC Activation by Interrupt: The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: 1. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. 2. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. 5. After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1. Activation by Software: The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: 1. Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. 2. Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. 3. Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. 4. Write 1 in the SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR. 5. Check the vector number written to DTVECR. 6. After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 184 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC Normal Mode: An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI. 1. Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address. 3. Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. 4. Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. 5. Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. 6. When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine should perform wrap-up processing. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 185 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Software Activation: An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0. 1. Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR, and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB. 2. Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0). 3. Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. 4. Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0. 5. Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3. 6. If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. 7. After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 186 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] 7.4 Interrupts An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of activation by software, a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. 7.5 Usage Notes Module Stop: When the MSTP14 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DTC clock stops, and the DTC enters the module stop state. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTP14 bit while the DTC is operating. When the DTC is placed in the module stop state, the DTCER registers must all be in the cleared state when the MSTP14 bit is set to 1. On-Chip RAM: The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. DTCE Bit Setting: For DTCE bit setting, read/write operations must be performed using bitmanipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. For the initial setting only, however, when multiple activation sources are set at one time, it is possible to disable interrupts and write after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 187 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 7 Data Transfer Controller [H8S/2138 Group] Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 188 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Section 8 I/O Ports 8.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have eight I/O ports (ports 1 to 6, 8, and 9), and one input-only port (port 7). Tables 8.1 and 8.2 summarize the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions. Each port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output (not provided for the input-only port) and data registers (DR, ODR) that store output data. Ports 1 to 3, and 6 have an on-chip MOS input pull-up function. Ports 1 to 3 and 6 have a MOS input pull-up control register (PCR), in addition to DDR and DR, to control the on/off status of the MOS input pull-ups. Ports 1 to 6, 8, and 9 can drive a single TTL load and 30 pF capacitive load. All the I/O ports can drive a Darlington transistor when in output mode. Ports 1, 2, and 3 can drive an LED (10 mA sink current). In the H8S/2138 Group, P52 in port 5 and P97 in port 9 are NMOS push-pull outputs. Note that the H8S/2134 Group has subset specifications that do not include some supporting modules. For differences in pin functions, see table 8.1, H8S/2138 Group Port Functions, and table 8.2, H8S/2134 Group Port Functions. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 189 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.1 H8S/2138 Group Port Functions Expanded Modes Port Description Pins Port 1 • 8-bit I/O port P17 to P10/ A7 to A0/ • On-chip PW7 to PW0 MOS input Mode 1 Lower address When DDR = 0 output (after reset): input (A7 to A0) port • LED drive capability Port 2 • 8-bit I/O port P27/A15/PW15/ CBLANK • On-chip • LED drive capability Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port also functioning as PWM timer output (PW7 to PW0) When DDR = 1: lower address output (A7 to A0) or PWM timer output (PW7 to PW0) pull-ups MOS input pull-ups Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode P26/A14/PW14 P25/A13/PW13 Upper address When DDR = 0 output (after reset): input (A15 to A8) port or timer connection output (CBLANK) P24/A12/PW12 When DDR = 1: upper address output (A15 to A8), PWM timer output (PW15 to PW12), timer connection output (CBLANK), or output ports (P27 to P24) P23/A11/PW11 P22/A10/PW10 P21/A9/PW9 P20/A8/PW8 Port 3 • 8-bit I/O port P37 to P30/ HDB7 to HDB0/ • On-chip D7 to D0 MOS input I/O port also functioning as PWM timer output (PW15 to PW8) and timer connection output (CBLANK) Data bus input/output (D7 to D0) pull-ups • LED drive capability Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 190 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 I/O port also functioning as host interface data bus input/output (HDB7 to HDB0) Section 8 I/O Ports Expanded Modes Port Description Pins Port 4 • 8-bit I/O port P47/PWX1 P46/PWX0 P45/TMRI1/ HIRQ12/CSYNCI P44/TMO1/ HIRQ1/HSYNCO P43/TMCI1/ HIRQ11/HSYNCI P42/TMRI0/SCK2/ SDA1 P41/TMO0/RxD2/ IrRxD P40/TMCI0/TxD2/ IrTxD Port 5 • 3-bit I/O port P52/SCK0/SCL0 P51/RxD0 Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) I/O port also functioning as 14-bit PWM timer output (PWX1, PWX0), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 input/output (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer connection input/output (HSYNCO, CSYNCI, HSYNCI), SCI2 input/output (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2), IrDA interface input/output (IrTxD, IrRxD), and I2C bus interface 1 (option) input/output (SDA1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port also functioning as 14-bit PWM timer output (PWX1, PWX0), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 input/ output (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer connection input/output (HSYNCO, CSYNCI, HSYNCI), host interface host CPU interrupt request output (HIRQ12, HIRQ1, HIRQ11), SCI2 input/ output (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2), IrDA interface input/output (IrTxD, IrRxD), and I2C bus interface 1 (option) input/output (SDA1) I/O port also functioning as SCI0 input/output (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) and I2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SCL0) P50/TxD0 Port 6 • 8-bit I/O port P67/IRQ7/TMOX/ KIN7/CIN7 P66/IRQ6/FTOB/ KIN6/CIN6 P65/FTID/KIN5/ CIN5 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ7, IRQ6), FRT input/output (FTCI, FTOA, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOB), 8-bit timer X and Y input/output (TMOX, TMIX, TMIY), timer connection input/output (CLAMPO, VFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, HFBACKI), key-sense interrupt input (KIN7 to KIN0), and expansion A/D converter input (CIN7 to CIN0) P64/FTIC/KIN4/ CIN4/CLAMPO P63/FTIB/KIN3/ CIN3/VFBACKI P62/FTIA/TMIY/ KIN2/CIN2/VSYNCI P61/FTOA/KIN1/ CIN1/VSYNCO P60/FTCI/TMIX/ KIN0/CIN0/ HFBACKI Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 191 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Expanded Modes Port Description Port 7 • 8-bit input port Pins P77/AN7/DA1 P76/AN6/DA0 Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) Input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input (AN7 to AN0) and D/A converter analog output (DA1, DA0) P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 Port 8 • 7-bit I/O port P86/IRQ5/SCK1/ SCL1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 P84/IRQ3/TxD1 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3), SCI1 input/output (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), and I2C bus interface 1 (option) input/output (SCL1) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3), SCI1 input/output (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), host interface control input/output (CS2, GA20, HA0, HIFSD), and I2C bus interface 1 (option) input/output (SCL1) I/O port also functioning as expanded data bus control input (WAIT) and I2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SDA0) I/O port also functioning as I2C bus interface 0 (option) input/output (SDA0) P83 P82/HIFSD P81/CS2/GA20 P80/HA0 Port 9 • 8-bit I/O port P97/WAIT/SDA0 P96/φ/EXCL When DDR = When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port or EXCL 0: input port or input EXCL input When DDR = 1: φ output When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output P95/AS/IOS/CS1 Expanded data bus control output (AS/IOS, WR, RD) P94/WR/IOW I/O port also functioning as host interface control input (CS1, IOW, IOR) P93/RD/IOR P92/IRQ0 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ0, IRQ1) P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ ADTRG/ECS2 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2), and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 192 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2), A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG), and host interface control input (ECS2) Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.2 H8S/2134 Group Port Functions Expanded Modes Port Description Pins Port 1 • 8-bit I/O port P17 to P10/ A7 to A0 • On-chip MOS input pull-ups Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Lower address When DDR = 0 output (A7 to (after reset): input A0) port Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port When DDR = 1: lower address output (A7 to A0) • LED drive capability Port 2 • 8-bit I/O port P27 to P20/ A15 to A8 • On-chip MOS input pull-ups Upper address When DDR = 0 output (A15 to (after reset): input A8) port I/O port When DDR = 1: upper address output (A15 to A8) or output port (P27 to P24) • LED drive capability Port 3 • 8-bit I/O port P37 to P30/ D7 to D0 • On-chip Data bus input/output (D7 to D0) I/O port MOS input pull-ups • LED drive capability Port 4 • 8-bit I/O port P47/PWX1 P46/PWX0 P45/TMRI1 I/O port also functioning as 14-bit PWM timer output (PWX1, PWX0), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 input/output (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), SCI2 input/output (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2), and IrDA interface input/output (IrTxD, IrRxD) P44/TMO1 P43/TMCI1 P42/TMRI0/SCK2 P41/TMO0/RxD2/ IrRxD P40/TMCI0/TxD2/ IrTxD Port 5 • 3-bit I/O port P52/SCK0 P51/RxD0 I/O port also functioning as SCI0 input/output (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) P50/TxD0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 193 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Expanded Modes Port Description Pins Port 6 • 8-bit I/O port P67/IRQ7/KIN7/ CIN7 P66/IRQ6/FTOB/ KIN6/CIN6 Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ7, IRQ6), FRT input/output (FTCI, FTOA, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOB), 8-bit timer Y input (TMIY), key-sense interrupt input (KIN7 to KIN0), and expansion A/D converter input (CIN7 to CIN0) P65/FTID/KIN5/ CIN5 P64/FTIC/KIN4/ CIN4 P63/FTIB/KIN3/ CIN3 P62/FTIA/TMIY/ KIN2/CIN2 P61/FTOA/KIN1/ CIN1 P60/FTCI/KIN0/ CIN0 Port 7 • 8-bit input port P77/AN7/DA1 P76/AN6/DA0 Input port also functioning as A/D converter analog input (AN7 to AN0) and D/A converter analog output (DA1, DA0) P75/AN5 P74/AN4 P73/AN3 P72/AN2 P71/AN1 P70/AN0 Port 8 • 7-bit I/O port P86/IRQ5/SCK1 P85/IRQ4/RxD1 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ5, IRQ4, IRQ3) and SCI1 input/output (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1) P84/IRQ3/TxD1 P83 P82 P81 P80 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 194 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Expanded Modes Port Description Pins Port 9 • 8-bit I/O port P97/WAIT Mode 1 Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 1) I/O port also functioning as expanded data bus control input (WAIT) Single-Chip Mode Mode 2, Mode 3 (EXPE = 0) I/O port P96/φ/EXCL When DDR = When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port or EXCL 0: input port or input EXCL input When DDR = 1: φ output When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output P95/AS/IOS Expanded data bus control output(AS/IOS, WR, RD) P94/WR I/O port P93/RD P92/IRQ0 I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ0, IRQ1) P91/IRQ1 P90/IRQ2/ ADTRG 8.2 Port 1 8.2.1 Overview I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2), and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) I/O port also functioning as external interrupt input (IRQ2) and A/D converter external trigger input (ADTRG) Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as address bus output pins (A7 to A0), and as 8-bit PWM output pins (PW7 to PW0) (H8S/2138 Group only). Port 1 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 1 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 195 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 1 Port 1 pins Pin functions in mode 1 P17/A7/PW7 A7 (Output) P16/A6/PW6 A6 (Output) P15/A5/PW5 A5 (Output) P14/A4/PW4 A4 (Output) P13/A3/PW3 A3 (Output) P12/A2/PW2 A2 (Output) P11/A1/PW1 A1 (Output) P10/A0/PW0 A0 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) A7 (Output)/P17 (Input)/PW7 (Output) A6 (Output)/P16 (Input)/PW6 (Output) A5 (Output)/P15 (Input)/PW5 (Output) A4 (Output)/P14 (Input)/PW4 (Output) A3 (Output)/P13 (Input)/PW3 (Output) A2 (Output)/P12 (Input)/PW2 (Output) A1 (Output)/P11 (Input)/PW1 (Output) A0 (Output)/P10 (Input)/PW0 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P17 (I/O)/PW7 (Output) P16 (I/O)/PW6 (Output) P15 (I/O)/PW5 (Output) P14 (I/O)/PW4 (Output) P13 (I/O)/PW3 (Output) P12 (I/O)/PW2 (Output) P11 (I/O)/PW1 (Output) P10 (I/O)/PW0 (Output) Figure 8.1 Port 1 Pin Functions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 196 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.2.2 Register Configuration Table 8.3 shows the port 1 register configuration. Table 8.3 Port 1 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'00 H'FFB0 Port 1 data register P1DR R/W H'00 H'FFB2 Port 1 MOS pull-up control register P1PCR R/W H'00 H'FFAC Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The address output pins maintain their output state in a transition to software standby mode. • Mode 1 The corresponding port 1 pins are address outputs, regardless of the P1DDR setting. In hardware standby mode, the address outputs go to the high-impedance state. • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) The corresponding port 1 pins are address outputs or PWM outputs when P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 1 pins are output ports or PWM outputs when P1DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 197 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10). If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 1 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P1PCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17PCR P16PCR P15PCR P14PCR P13PCR P12PCR P11PCR P10PCR Initial value R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 1 on-chip MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3, the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P1PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P1PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 198 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.2.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1: In mode 1, port 1 pins automatically function as address outputs. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.2. A7 (Output) A6 (Output) A5 (Output) Port 1 A4 (Output) A3 (Output) A2 (Output) A1 (Output) A0 (Output) Figure 8.2 Port 1 Pin Functions (Mode 1) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 1 pins function as address outputs, PWM outputs, or input ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P1DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output or PWM output, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.3. Port 1 When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 0 When P1DDR = 0 When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 1 A7 (Output) P17 (Input) PW7 (Output) A6 (Output) P16 (Input) PW6 (Output) A5 (Output) P15 (Input) PW5 (Output) A4 (Output) P14 (Input) PW4 (Output) A3 (Output) P13 (Input) PW3 (Output) A2 (Output) P12 (Input) PW2 (Output) A1 (Output) P11 (Input) PW1 (Output) A0 (Output) P10 (Input) PW0 (Output) Figure 8.3 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 199 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 1 pins function as PWM outputs or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P1DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as a PWM output or output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. The port 1 pin functions are shown in figure 8.4. Port 1 P1n: Input pin when P1DDR = 0, output pin when P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 0 When P1DDR = 1 and PWOERA = 1 P17 (I/O) PW7 (Output) P16 (I/O) PW6 (Output) P15 (I/O) PW5 (Output) P14 (I/O) PW4 (Output) P13 (I/O) PW3 (Output) P12 (I/O) PW2 (Output) P11 (I/O) PW1 (Output) P10 (I/O) PW0 (Output) Figure 8.4 Port 1 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 200 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.2.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 1 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3, and can be specified as on or off on a bit-bybit basis. When a P1DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3, setting the corresponding P1PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.4 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 1) Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 1 Off Off Off Off 2, 3 Off Off On/Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P1DDR = 0 and P1PCR = 1; otherwise off. 8.3 Port 2 8.3.1 Overview Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 2 pins also function as address bus output pins (A15 to A8), 8-bit PWM output pins (PW15 to PW8) (H8S/2138 Group only), and the timer connection output pin (CBLANK) (H8S/2138 Group only). Port 2 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 2 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.5 shows the port 2 pin configuration. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 201 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 2 Port 2 pins Pin functions in mode 1 P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK A15 (Output) P26/A14/PW14 A14 (Output) P25/A13/PW13 A13 (Output) P24/A12/PW12 A12 (Output) P23/A11/PW11 A11 (Output) P22/A10/PW10 A10 (Output) P21/A9/PW9 A9 (Output) P20/A8/PW8 A8 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) A15 (Output)/P27 (I/O)/PW15 (Output)/CBLANK (Output) A14 (Output)/P26 (I/O)/PW14 (Output) A13 (Output)/P25 (I/O)/PW13 (Output) A12 (Output)/P24 (I/O)/PW12 (Output) A11 (Output)/P23 (Input)/PW11 (Output) A10 (Output)/P22 (Input)/PW10 (Output) A9 (Output)/P21 (Input)/PW9 (Output) A8 (Output)/P20 (Input)/PW8 (Output) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P27 (I/O)/PW15 (Output)/CBLANK (Output) P26 (I/O)/PW14 (Output) P25 (I/O)/PW13 (Output) P24 (I/O)/PW12 (Output) P23 (I/O)/PW11 (Output) P22 (I/O)/PW10 (Output) P21 (I/O)/PW9 (Output) P20 (I/O)/PW8 (Output) Figure 8.5 Port 2 Pin Functions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 202 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.3.2 Register Configuration Table 8.5 shows the port 2 register configuration. Table 8.5 Port 2 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 2 data direction register P2DDR W H'00 H'FFB1 Port 2 data register P2DR R/W H'00 H'FFB3 Port 2 MOS pull-up control register P2PCR R/W H'00 H'FFAD Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 2. P2DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P2DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The address output pins maintain their output state in a transition to software standby mode. • Mode 1 The corresponding port 2 pins are address outputs, regardless of the P2DDR setting. In hardware standby mode, the address outputs go to the high-impedance state. • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) The corresponding port 2 pins are address outputs or PWM outputs when P2DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. P27 to P24 are switched from address outputs to output ports by setting the IOSE bit to 1. P27 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P27DDR setting, but to ensure normal access to external space, P27 should not be set as an on-chip supporting module output pin when port 2 pins are used as address output pins. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 203 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 2 pins are output ports or PWM outputs when P2DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. P27 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P27DDR setting. Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) Bit Initial value R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27DR P26DR P25DR P24DR P23DR P22DR P21DR P20DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 2 pins (P27 to P20). If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are set to 1, the P2DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 2 read is performed while P2DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P2DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 2 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P2PCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27PCR P26PCR P25PCR P24PCR P23PCR P22PCR P21PCR P20PCR Initial value R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P2PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 2 on-chip MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3, the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P2PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P2PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 204 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Mode 1: In mode 1, port 2 pins automatically function as address outputs. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.6. A15 (Output) A14 (Output) A13 (Output) Port 2 A12 (Output) A11 (Output) A10 (Output) A9 (Output) A8 (Output) Figure 8.6 Port 2 Pin Functions (Mode 1) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 2 pins function as address outputs, PWM outputs, or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output or PWM output, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P27 to P24 are switched from address outputs to output ports by setting the IOSE bit to 1. P27 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P27DDR setting, but to ensure normal access to external space, P27 should not be set as an on-chip supporting module output pin when port 2 pins are used as address output pins. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.7. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 205 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 0 When P2DDR = 0 When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 1 A15 (Output)/P27 (Output) P27 (Input)/CBLANK (Output) PW15 (Output)/CBLANK (Output) Port 2 A14 (Output)/P26 (Output) P26 (Input) PW14 (Output) A13 (Output)/P25 (Output) P25 (Input) PW13 (Output) A12 (Output)/P24 (Output) P24 (Input) PW12 (Output) A11 (Output) P23 (Input) PW11 (Output) A10 (Output) P22 (Input) PW10 (Output) A9 (Output) P21 (Input) PW9 (Output) A8 (Output) P20 (Input) PW8 (Output) Figure 8.7 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1)) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 2 pins function as PWM outputs (P27 can also function as the timer connection output (CBLANK)) or I/O ports, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P2DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as a PWM output or output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P27 can be used as an on-chip supporting module output pin regardless of the P27DDR setting. The port 2 pin functions are shown in figure 8.8. Port 2 P2n: Input pin when P2DDR = 0, output pin when P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 0 When P2DDR = 1 and PWOERB = 1 P27 (I/O)/CBLANK (Output) PW15 (Output)/CBLANK (Output) P26 (I/O) PW14 (Output) P25 (I/O) PW13 (Output) P24 (I/O) PW12 (Output) P23 (I/O) PW11 (Output) P22 (I/O) PW10 (Output) P21 (I/O) PW9 (Output) P20 (I/O) PW8 (Output) Figure 8.8 Port 2 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 206 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.3.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 2 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3, and can be specified as on or off on a bit-bybit basis. When a P2DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3, setting the corresponding P2PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.6 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 8.6 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 2) Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 1 Off Off Off Off 2, 3 Off Off On/Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P2DDR = 0 and P2PCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 207 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.4 Port 3 8.4.1 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 3 pins also function as host data bus I/O pins (HDB7 to HDB0) (H8S/2138 Group only), and as data bus I/O pins. Port 3 functions change according to the operating mode. Port 3 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 8.9 shows the port 3 pin configuration. Port 3 Port 3 pins Pin functions in modes 1, 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) P37/D7/HDB7 D7 (I/O) P36/D6/HDB6 D6 (I/O) P35/D5/HDB5 D5 (I/O) P34/D4/HDB4 D4 (I/O) P33/D3/HDB3 D3 (I/O) P32/D2/HDB2 D2 (I/O) P31/D1/HDB1 D1 (I/O) P30/D0/HDB0 D0 (I/O) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P37 (I/O)/HDB7 (I/O) P36 (I/O)/HDB6 (I/O) P35 (I/O)/HDB5 (I/O) P34 (I/O)/HDB4 (I/O) P33 (I/O)/HDB3 (I/O) P32 (I/O)/HDB2 (I/O) P31 (I/O)/HDB1 (I/O) P30 (I/O)/HDB0 (I/O) Figure 8.9 Port 3 Pin Functions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 208 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.4.2 Register Configuration Table 8.7 shows the port 3 register configuration. Table 8.7 Port 3 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 3 data direction register P3DDR W H'00 H'FFB4 Port 3 data register P3DR R/W H'00 H'FFB6 Port 3 MOS pull-up control register P3PCR R/W H'00 H'FFAE Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P3DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 3. P3DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. • Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) The input/output direction specified by P3DDR is ignored, and pins automatically function as data I/O pins. After a reset, and in hardware standby mode or software standby mode, the data I/O pins go to the high-impedance state. • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) The corresponding port 3 pins are output ports when P3DDR bits are set to 1, and input ports when cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 209 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DR P36DR P35DR P34DR P33DR P32DR P31DR P30DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 3 pins (P37 to P30). If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are set to 1, the P3DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 3 read is performed while P3DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 3 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (P3PCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 1 P37PCR P36PCR P35PCR P34PCR P33PCR P32PCR P31PCR P30PCR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 3 on-chip MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), the MOS input pull-up is turned on when a P3PCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P3DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). P3PCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. The MOS input pull-up function cannot be used in slave mode (when the host interface is enabled). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 210 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.4.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1): In modes 1, 2, and 3 (when EXPE = 1), port 3 pins automatically function as data I/O pins. The port 3 pin functions are shown in figure 8.10. D7 (I/O) D6 (I/O) D5 (I/O) D4 (I/O) Port 3 D3 (I/O) D2 (I/O) D1 (I/O) D0 (I/O) Figure 8.10 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0): In modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), port 3 functions as host interface data bus I/O pins (HDB7 to HDB0) or as I/O ports. When the HI12E bit is set to 1 in SYSCR2 and a transition is made to slave mode, port 3 functions as the host interface data bus. In slave mode, P3DR and P3DDR should be cleared to H'00. When the HI12E bit is cleared to 0, port 3 functions as an I/O port, and input or output can be specified on a bit-by-bit basis. When a bit in P3DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. The port 3 pin functions are shown in figure 8.11. P37 (I/O)/HDB7 (I/O) P36 (I/O)/HDB6 (I/O) P35 (I/O)/HDB5 (I/O) Port 3 P34 (I/O)/HDB4 (I/O) P33 (I/O)/HDB3 (I/O) P32 (I/O)/HDB2 (I/O) P31 (I/O)/HDB1 (I/O) P30 (I/O)/HDB0 (I/O) Figure 8.11 Port 3 Pin Functions (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 211 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.4.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 3 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 2 and 3 (when EXPE = 0), and can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. When a P3DDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 2 or 3 (when EXPE = 0), setting the corresponding P3PCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.8 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 8.8 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 3) Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) Off Off Off Off 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) Off Off On/Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P3DDR = 0 and P3PCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 212 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.5 Port 4 8.5.1 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 4 pins also function as 14-bit PWM output pins (PWX1, PWX0), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 (TMR0, TMR1) I/O pins (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer connection I/O pins (CSYNCI, HSYNCI, HSYNCO) (H8S/2138 Group only), SCI2 I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2), IrDA interface I/O pins (IrTxD, IrRxD), host interface output pins (HIRQ12, HIRQ1, HIRQ11) (H8S/2138 Group only), and the IIC1 I/O pin (SDA1) (option in H8S/2138 Group only). Port 4 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.12 shows the port 4 pin configuration. Port 4 pins P47 (I/O)/PWX1 (Output) P46 (I/O)/PWX0 (Output) P45 (I/O)/TMRI1 (Input)/HIRQ12 (Output)/CSYNCI (Input) Port 4 P44 (I/O)/TMO1 (Output)/HIRQ1 (Output)/HSYNCO (Output) P43 (I/O)/TMCI1 (Input)/HIRQ11 (Output)/HCYNCI (Input) P42 (I/O)/TMRI0 (Input)/SCK2 (I/O)/SDA1 (I/O) P41 (I/O)/TMO0 (Output)/RxD2 (Input)/IrRxD (Input) P40 (I/O)/TMCI0 (Input)/TxD2 (Output)/IrTxD (Output) Figure 8.12 Port 4 Pin Functions 8.5.2 Register Configuration Table 8.9 shows the port 4 register configuration. Table 8.9 Port 4 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 4 data direction register P4DDR W H'00 H'FFB5 Port 4 data register P4DR R/W H'00 H'FFB7 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 213 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 4 Data Direction Register (P4DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47DDR P46DDR P45DDR P44DDR P43DDR P42DDR P41DDR P40DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P4DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 4. P4DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. When a bit in P4DDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port, and when cleared to 0, as an input port. P4DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. As 14-bit PWM and SCI2 are initialized in software standby mode, the pin states are determined by the TMR0, TMR1, HIF, IIC1, P4DDR, and P4DR specifications. Port 4 Data Register (P4DR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47DR P46DR P45DR P44DR P43DR P42DR P41DR P40DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P4DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 4 pins (P47 to P40). If a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are set to 1, the P4DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 4 read is performed while P4DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P4DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 8.5.3 Pin Functions Port 4 pins also function as 14-bit PWM output pins (PWX1, PWX0), 8-bit timer 0 and 1 (TMR0, TMR1) I/O pins (TMCI0, TMRI0, TMO0, TMCI1, TMRI1, TMO1), timer connection I/O pins (CSYNCI, HSYNCI, HSYNCO), SCI2 I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2), IrDA interface I/O pins (IrTxD, IrRxD), host interface output pins (HIRQ12, HIRQ1, HIRQ11), and the IIC1 I/O pin (SDA1). The port 4 pin functions are shown in table 8.10. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 214 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.10 Port 4 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P47/PWX1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit OEB in DACR of 14-bit PWM, and bit P47DDR. OEB 0 P47DDR Pin function P46/PWX0 0 1 — P47 input pin P47 output pin PWX1 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit OEA in DACR of 14-bit PWM, and bit P46DDR. OEA 0 P46DDR Pin function P45/TMRI1/ HIRQ12/CSYNCI 1 1 0 1 — P46 input pin P46 output pin PWX0 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bit P45DDR. P45DDR 0 Operating mode — Not slave mode Slave mode P45 input pin P45 output pin HIRQ12 output pin Pin function 1 TMRI1 input pin, CSYNCI input pin When bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1 of TMR1 are set to 1, this pin is used as the TMRI1 input pin. It can also be used as the CSYNCI input pin. P44/TMO1/ HIRQ1/HSYNCO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of TMR1, bit HOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function, and bit P44DDR. HOE 0 OS3 to OS0 1 All 0 — — — P44DDR 0 Operating mode — Not slave mode Slave mode — — P44 input pin P44 output pin HIRQ1 output pin TMO1 output pin HSYNCO output pin Pin function 1 Not all 0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 215 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P43/TMCI1/ HIRQ11/HSYNCI The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bit P43DDR. P43DDR 0 Operating mode — Not slave mode Slave mode P43 input pin P43 output pin HIRQ11 output pin Pin function 1 TMCI1 input pin, HSYNCI input pin When an external clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 of TMR1, this pin is used as the TMCI1 input pin. It can also be used as the HSYNCI input pin. P42/TMRI0/ SCK2/SDA1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit ICE in ICCR of IIC1, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI2, bit C/A in SMR of SCI2, and bit P42DDR. ICE 0 CKE1 0 C/A Pin function 1 0 1 — 0 1 — — 0 — — — 0 CKE0 P42DDR 1 0 0 1 P42 P42 SCK2 SCK2 SCK2 input pin output pin output pin output pin input pin — SDA1 I/O pin TMRI0 input pin When this pin is used as the SDA1 I/O pin, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI2 and bit C/A in SMR of SCI2 must all be cleared to 0. SDA1 is an NMOSonly output, and has direct bus drive capability. When bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR0 of TMR0 are set to 1, this pin is used as the TMRI0 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 216 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P41/TMO0/RxD2/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of IrRxD bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of TMR0, bit RE in SCR of SCI2 and bit P41DDR. OS3 to OS0 All 0 RE P41DDR Pin function Not all 0 0 1 0 0 1 — — P41 input pin P41 output pin RxD2/IrRxD input pin TMO0 output pin When this pin is used as the TMO0 output pin, bit RE in SCR of SCI2 must be cleared to 0. P40/TMCI0/TxD2/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of IrTxD bit TE in SCR of SCI2 and bit P40DDR. TE P40DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P40 input pin P40 output pin TxD2/IrTxD output pin TMCI0 input pin When an external clock is selected with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 of TMR0, this pin is used as the TMCI0 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 217 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.6 Port 5 8.6.1 Overview Port 5 is a 3-bit I/O port. Port 5 pins also function as SCI0 I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0), and the IIC0 I/O pin (SCL0) (option in H8S/2138 Group only). In the H8S/2138 Group, P52 and SCK0 are NMOS push-pull outputs, and SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output. Port 5 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.13 shows the port 5 pin configuration. Port 5 pins P52 (I/O)/SCK0 (I/O)/SCL0 (I/O) Port 5 P51 (I/O)/RxD0 (Input) P50 (I/O)/TxD0 (Output) Figure 8.13 Port 5 Pin Functions 8.6.2 Register Configuration Table 8.11 shows the port 5 register configuration. Table 8.11 Port 5 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 5 data direction register P5DDR W H'F8 H'FFB8 Port 5 data register P5DR R/W H'F8 H'FFBA Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 218 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 5 Data Direction Register (P5DDR) 7 6 5 4 3 — — — — — Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Read/Write — — — — — W W W Bit 2 1 0 P52DDR P51DDR P50DDR P5DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 5. P5DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. Bits 7 to 3 are reserved. Setting a P5DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 5 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P5DDR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. As SCI0 is initialized, the pin states are determined by the IIC0 ICCR, P5DDR, and P5DR specifications. Port 5 Data Register (P5DR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — P52DR P51DR P50DR Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Read/Write — — — — — R/W R/W R/W Bit P5DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 5 pins (P52 to P50). If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are set to 1, the P5DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 5 read is performed while P5DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. Bits 7 to 3 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. P5DR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 219 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.6.3 Pin Functions Port 5 pins also function as SCI0 I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0) and the IIC0 I/O pin (SCL0). The port 5 pin functions are shown in table 8.12. Table 8.12 Port 5 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P52/SCK0/SCL0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI0, bit C/A in SMR of SCI0, bit ICE in ICCR of IIC0, and bit P52DDR. ICE 0 CKE1 0 C/A Pin function 1 0 1 — 0 1 — — 0 — — — — 0 CKE0 P52DDR 1 0 0 1 P52 P52 SCK0 SCK0 SCK0 input pin output pin output pin output pin input pin SCL0 I/O pin When this pin is used as the SCL0 I/O pin, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI0 and bit C/A in SMR of SCI0 must all be cleared to 0. SCL0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. In the H8S/2138 Group, when set as the P52 output pin or SCK0 output pin, this pin is an NMOS push-pull output. P51/RxD0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit RE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P51DDR. RE 0 P51DDR Pin function P50/TxD0 1 0 1 — P51 input pin P51 output pin RxD0 input pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI0 and bit P50DDR. TE 0 P50DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P50 input pin P50 output pin TxD0 output pin Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 220 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.7 Port 6 8.7.1 Overview Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 6 pins also function as the 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) I/O pins (FTOA, FTOB, FTIA to FTID, FTCI), timer X (TMRX) I/O pins (TMOX, TMIX) (H8S/2138 Group only), the timer Y (TMRY) input pin (TMIY), timer connection I/O pins (HFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, VFBACKI, CLAMPO) (H8S/2138 Group only), key-sense interrupt input pins (KIN7 to KIN0), expansion A/D converter input pins (CIN7 to CIN0), and external interrupt input pins (IRQ7, IRQ6). In the H8S/2138 Group, the port 6 input level can be switched in four stages. Port 6 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.14 shows the port 6 pin configuration. Port 6 pins P67 (I/O)/TMOX (Output)/KIN7 (Input)/CIN7 (Input)/IRQ7 (Input) P66 (I/O)/FTOB (Output)/KIN6 (Input)/CIN6 (Input)/IRQ6 (Input) P65 (I/O)/FTID (Input)/KIN5 (Input)/CIN5 (Input) Port 6 P64 (I/O)/FTIC (Input)/KIN4 (Input)/CIN4 (Input)/CLAMPO (Output) P63 (I/O)/FTIB (Input)/KIN3 (Input)/CIN3 (Input)/VFBACKI (Input) P62 (I/O)/FTIA (Input)/KIN2 (Input)/CIN2 (Input)/VSYNCI (Input)/TMIY (Input) P61 (I/O)/FTOA (Output)/KIN1 (Input)/CIN1 (Input)/VSYNCO (Output) P60 (I/O)/FTCI (Input)/KIN0 (Input)/CIN0 (Input)/HFBACKI (Input)/TMIX (Input) Figure 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 221 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.7.2 Register Configuration Table 8.13 shows the port 6 register configuration. Table 8.13 Port 6 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* Port 6 data direction register P6DDR W H'00 H'FFB9 Port 6 data register P6DR R/W H'00 Port 6 MOS pull-up control register KMPCR R/W H'00 H'FFBB 2 H'FFF2* System control register 2 SYSCR2 R/W H'00 H'FF83 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. KMPCR has the same address as TICRR/TCORAY of TMRX/TMRY. To select KMPCR, set the HIF bit to 1 in SYSCR and clear the MSTP2 bit to 0 in MSTPCRL. Port 6 Data Direction Register (P6DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P67DDR P66DDR P65DDR P64DDR P63DDR P62DDR P61DDR P60DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P6DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 6. P6DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. Setting a P6DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 6 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P6DDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 222 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 6 Data Register (P6DR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P67DR P66DR P65DR P64DR P63DR P62DR P61DR P60DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit P6DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 6 pins (P67 to P60). If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are set to 1, the P6DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 6 read is performed while P6DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P6DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 6 MOS Pull-Up Control Register (KMPCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KM7PCR KM6PCR KM5PCR KM4PCR KM3PCR KM2PCR KM1PCR KM0PCR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W KMPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the port 6 on-chip MOS input pull-ups on a bit-by-bit basis. The MOS input pull-up is turned on when a KMPCR bit is set to 1 while the corresponding P6DDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting). KMPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 223 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) [H8S/2138 Group Only] Bit 7 6 KWUL1 KWUL0 5 4 3 2 1 0 P6PUE — SDE CS4E CS3E HI12E Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W SYSCR2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls port 6 input level selection and the operation of host interface functions. Only bits 7, 6, and 5 are described here. See section 17.2.2, System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2), for information on bits 4 to 0. SYSCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6—Key Wakeup Level 1 and 0 (KWUL1, KWUL0): The port 6 input level setting can be changed by software, using these bits. The setting of these bits also changes the input level of the pin functions multiplexed with port 6. Bit 7 Bit 6 KWUL1 KWUL0 0 1 Description 0 Standard input level is selected as port 6 input level 1 Input level 1 is selected as port 6 input level 0 Input level 2 is selected as port 6 input level 1 Input level 3 is selected as port 6 input level (Initial value) Bit 5—Port 6 Input Pull-Up Extra (P6PUE): Controls and selects the current specification for the port 6 MOS input pull-up function connected by means of KMPCR settings. Bit 5 P6PUE Description 0 Standard current specification is selected for port 6 MOS input pull-up function (Initial value) 1 Current-limit specification is selected for port 6 MOS input pull-up function Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 224 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.7.3 Pin Functions Port 6 pins also function as the 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) I/O pins (FTOA, FTOB, FTIA to FTID, FTCI), timer X (TMRX) I/O pins (TMOX, TMIX), the timer Y (TMRY) input pin (TMIY), timer connection I/O pins (HFBACKI, VSYNCI, VSYNCO, VFBACKI, CLAMPO), key-sense interrupt input pins (KIN7 to KIN0), expansion A/D converter input pins (CIN7 to CIN0), and external interrupt input pins (IRQ7, IRQ6). In the H8S/2138 Group, the port 6 input level can be switched in four stages. The port 6 pin functions are shown in table 8.14. Table 8.14 Port 6 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P67/TMOX/IRQ7/ KIN7/CIN7 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR of TMRX and bit P67DDR. OS3 to OS0 P67DDR Pin function All 0 Not all 0 0 1 — P67 input pin P67 output pin TMOX output pin IRQ7 input pin, KIN7 input pin, CIN7 input pin This pin is used as the IRQ7 input pin when bit IRQ7E is set to 1 in IER. It can always be used as the KIN7 or CIN7 input pin. P66/FTOB/IRQ6/ KIN6/CIN6 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit OEB in TOCR of the FRT and bit P66DDR. OEB P66DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P66 input pin P66 output pin FTOB output pin IRQ6 input pin, KIN6 input pin, CIN6 input pin This pin is used as the IRQ6 input pin when bit IRQ6E is set to 1 in IER. It can always be used as the KIN6 or CIN6 input pin. P65/FTID/KIN5/ CIN5 P65DDR Pin function 0 1 P65 input pin P65 output pin FTID input pin, KIN5 input pin, CIN5 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTID, KIN5, or CIN5 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 225 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P64/FTIC/KIN4/ CIN4/CLAMPO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit CLOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function and bit P64DDR. CLOE 0 P64DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P64 input pin P64 output pin CLAMPO output pin FTIC input pin, KIN4 input pin, CIN4 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTIC, KIN4, or CIN4 input pin. P63/FTIB/KIN3/ CIN3/VFBACKI P63DDR Pin function 0 1 P63 input pin P63 output pin FTIB input pin, VFBACKI input pin, KIN3 input pin, CIN3 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTIB, KIN3, CIN3, or VFBACKI input pin. P62/FTIA/TMIY/ KIN2/CIN2/ VSYNCI P62DDR Pin function 0 1 P62 input pin P62 output pin FTIA input pin, VSYNCI input pin, TMIY input pin, KIN2 input pin, CIN2 input pin This pin can always be used as the FTIA, TMIY, KIN2, CIN2, or VSYNCI input pin. P61/FTOA/KIN1/ CIN1/VSYNCO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit OEA in TOCR of the FRT, bit VOE in TCONRO of the timer connection function, and bit P61DDR. VOE 0 OEA P61DDR Pin function 0 1 1 0 0 1 — — P61 input pin P61 output pin FTOA output pin VSYNCO output pin KIN1 input pin, CIN1 input pin When this pin is used as the VSYNCO pin, bit OEA in TOCR of the FRT must be cleared to 0. This pin can always be used as the KIN1 or CIN1 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 226 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P60/FTCI/TMIX/ KIN0/CIN0/ HFBACKI P60DDR Pin function 0 1 P60 input pin P60 output pin FTCI input pin, HFBACKI input pin, TMIX input pin, KIN0 input pin, CIN0 input pin This pin is used as the FTCI input pin when an external clock is selected with bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR of the FRT. It can always be used as the TMIX, KIN0, CIN0, or HFBACKI input pin. 8.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port 6 has an on-chip MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in any operating mode, and can be specified as on or off on a bit-by-bit basis. When a P6DDR bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding KMPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up current specification can be changed by means of the P6PUE bit. When a pin is designated as an on-chip supporting module output pin, the MOS input pull-up is always off. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a reset and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained in software standby mode. Table 8.15 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 8.15 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port 6) Mode Reset Hardware Standby Mode Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 1, 2, 3 Off Off On/Off On/Off Legend: Off: MOS input pull-up is always off. On/Off: On when P6DDR = 0 and KMPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 227 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.8 Port 7 8.8.1 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit input port. Port 7 pins also function as the A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA0, DA1). Port 7 functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.15 shows the port 7 pin configuration. Port 7 pins P77 (Input)/AN7 (Input)/DA1 (Output) P76 (Input)/AN6 (Input)/DA0 (Output) P75 (Input)/AN5 (Input) P74 (Input)/AN4 (Input) Port 7 P73 (Input)/AN3 (Input) P72 (Input)/AN2 (Input) P71 (Input)/AN1 (Input) P70 (Input)/AN0 (Input) Figure 8.15 Port 7 Pin Functions 8.8.2 Register Configuration Table 8.16 shows the port 7 register configuration. Port 7 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 8.16 Port 7 Registers Name Port 7 input data register Note: * Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* P7PIN R Undefined H'FFBE Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 228 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 7 Input Data Register (P7PIN) 7 Bit P77PIN 6 5 P76PIN P75PIN 4 3 2 P74PIN P73PIN P72PIN 1 0 P71PIN P70PIN Initial value —* —* —* —* —* —* —* —* Read/Write R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by the state of pins P77 to P70. When a P7PIN read is performed, the pin states are always read. 8.8.3 Pin Functions Port 7 pins also function as the A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA0, DA1). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 229 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.9 Port 8 8.9.1 Overview Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 8 pins also function as SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), the IIC1 I/O pin (SCL1) (option in H8S/2138 Group only), HIF I/O pins (CS2, GA20, HA0, HIFSD) (H8S/2138 Group only), and external interrupt input pins (IRQ5 to IRQ3). Port 8 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 8.16 shows the port 8 pin configuration. Port 8 pins P86 (I/O)/IRQ5 (Input)/SCK1 (I/O)/SCL1 (I/O) P85 (I/O)/IRQ4 (Input)/RxD1 (Input) P84 (I/O)/IRQ3 (Input)/TxD1 (Output) Port 8 P83 (I/O) P82 (I/O)/HIFSD (Input) P81 (I/O)/CS2 (Input)/GA20 (Output) P80 (I/O)/HA0 (Input) Figure 8.16 Port 8 Pin Functions 8.9.2 Register Configuration Table 8.17 summarizes the port 8 registers. Table 8.17 Port 8 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 8 data direction register P8DDR W H'80 H'FFBD Port 8 data register P8DR R/W H'80 H'FFBF Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 230 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Port 8 Data Direction Register (P8DDR) Bit 7 — 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P86DDR P85DDR P84DDR P83DDR P82DDR P81DDR P80DDR Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write — W W W W W W W P8DDR is a 7-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 8. Setting a P8DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 8 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P8DDR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port 8 Data Register (P8DR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — P86DR P85DR P84DR P83DR P82DR P81DR P80DR Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P8DR is a 7-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 8 pins (P86 to P80). If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are set to 1, the P8DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 8 read is performed while P8DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P8DR is initialized to H'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 8.9.3 Pin Functions Port 8 pins also function as SCI1 I/O pins (TxD1, RxD1, SCK1), the IIC1 I/O pin (SCL1), HIF I/O pins (CS2, GA20, HA0, HIFSD), and external interrupt input pins (IRQ5 to IRQ3). The port 8 pin functions are shown in table 8.18. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 231 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.18 Port 8 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P86/IRQ5/SCK1/ SCL1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI1, bit C/A in SMR of SCI1, bit ICE in ICCR of IIC1, and bit P86DDR. ICE 0 CKE1 C/A Pin function 1 0 1 — 0 1 — — 0 — — — — 0 CKE0 P86DDR 1 0 0 0 1 P86 P86 SCK1 SCK1 SCK1 input pin output pin output pin output pin input pin SCL1 I/O pin IRQ5 input pin When the IRQ5E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ5 input pin. When this pin is used as the SCL1 I/O pin, bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR of SCI1 and bit C/A in SMR of SCI1 must all be cleared to 0. SCL1 is an NMOSonly output, and has direct bus drive capability. P85/IRQ4/RxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit RE in SCR of SCI1 and bit P85DDR. RE 0 P85DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P85 input pin P85 output pin RxD1 input pin IRQ4 input pin When the IRQ4E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ4 input pin. P84/IRQ3/TxD1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit TE in SCR of SCI1 and bit P84DDR. TE 0 P84DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P84 input pin P84 output pin TxD1 output pin IRQ3 input pin When the IRQ3E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ3 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 232 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P83 The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit P83DDR. P83DDR Pin function P82/HIFSD 0 1 P83 input pin P83 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit SDE in SYSCR2 of the HIF, and bit P82DDR. Operating mode Not slave mode SDE — P82DDR Pin function P81/GA20/CS2 Slave mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 — P82 input pin P82 output pin P82 input pin P82 output pin HIFSD input pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit CS2E, bit FGA20E in HICR of the HIF, and bit P81DDR. Operating mode Not slave mode FGA20E — CS2E — P81DDR Pin function Slave mode 0 1 0 1 — 0 1 0 1 — 0 1 P81 input pin P81 output pin P81 input pin P81 output pin CS2 input pin P81 input pin GA20 output pin This pin should be used as the GA20 or CS2 output pin only in mode 2 or 3 (EXPE = 0). P80/HA0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode and bit P80DDR. Operating mode P80DDR Pin function Not slave mode Slave mode 0 1 — P80 input pin P80 output pin HA0 input pin Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 233 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.10 Port 9 8.10.1 Overview Port 9 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 9 pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 to IRQ2), the A/D converter external trigger input pin (ADTRG), host interface input pins (ECS2, CS1, IOW, IOR) (H8S/2138 Group only), the IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0) (option in H8S/2138 Group only), the subclock input pin (EXCL), bus control signal I/O pins (AS/IOS, RD, WR, WAIT), and the system clock (φ) output pin. In the H8S/2138 Group, P97 is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. Figure 8.17 shows the port 9 pin configuration. Port 9 Port 9 pins Pin functions in modes 1, 2 and 3 (EXPE = 1) P97/WAIT/SDA0 WAIT (Input)/P97 (I/O)/SDA0 (I/O) P96/φ/EXCL φ (Output)/P96 (Input)/EXCL (Input) P95/AS/IOS/CS1 AS (Output)/IOS (Output) P94/WR/IOW WR (Output) P93/RD/IOR RD (Output) P92/IRQ0 P92 (I/O)/IRQ0 (Input) P91/IRQ1 P91 (I/O)/IRQ1 (Input) P90/IRQ2/ADTRG/ECS2 P90 (I/O)/IRQ2 (Input)/ADTRG (Input) Pin functions in modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) P97 (I/O)/SDA0 (I/O) P96 (Input)/φ (Output)/EXCL (Input) P95 (I/O)/CS1 (Input) P94 (I/O)/IOW (Input) P93 (I/O)/IOR (Input) P92 (I/O)/IRQ0 (Input) P91 (I/O)/IRQ1 (Input) P90 (I/O)/IRQ2 (Input)/ADTRG (Input)/ECS2 (Input) Figure 8.17 Port 9 Pin Functions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 234 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports 8.10.2 Register Configuration Table 8.19 summarizes the port 9 registers. Table 8.19 Port 9 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* Port 9 data direction register P9DDR W H'40/H'00* H'FFC0 Port 9 data register P9DR R/W H'00 2 H'FFC1 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Initial value depends on the mode. Port 9 Data Direction Register (P9DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P97DDR P96DDR P95DDR P94DDR P93DDR P92DDR P91DDR P90DDR Mode 1 Initial value 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W Modes 2 and 3 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P9DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 9. P9DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be returned. P9DDR is initialized to H'40 (mode 1) or H'00 (modes 2 and 3) by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. • Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) Pin P97 functions as a bus control input (WAIT), the IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0), or an I/O port, according to the wait mode setting. When P97 functions as an I/O port, it becomes an output port when P97DDR is set to 1, and an input port when P97DDR is cleared to 0. Pin P96 functions as the φ output pin when P96DDR is set to 1, and as the subclock input (EXCL) or an input port when P96DDR is cleared to 0. Pins P95 to P93 automatically become bus control outputs (AS/IOS, WR, RD), regardless of the input/output direction indicated by P95DDR to P93DDR. Pins P92 and P90 become output ports when P92DDR and P90DDR are set to 1, and input ports when P92DDR and P91DDR are cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 235 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports • Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) When the corresponding P9DDR bits are set to 1, pin P96 functions as the φ output pin and pins P97 and P95 to P90 become output ports. When P9DDR bits are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. Port 9 Data Register (P9DR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P97DR P94DR P93DR P92DR P91DR P90DR 0 P96DR —* P95DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * Determined by the state of pin P96. P9DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 9 pins (P97 to P90). With the exception of P96, if a port 9 read is performed while P9DDR bits are set to 1, the P9DR values are read directly, regardless of the actual pin states. If a port 9 read is performed while P9DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. P9DR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. 8.10.3 Pin Functions Port 9 pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 to IRQ2), the A/D converter trigger input pin (ADTRG), HIF input pins (ECS2, CS1, IOW, IOR), the IIC0 I/O pin (SDA0), the subclock input pin (EXCL), bus control signal I/O pins (AS/IOS, RD, WR, WAIT), and the system clock (φ) output pin. The pin functions differ between the mode 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1) expanded modes and the mode 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0) single-chip modes. The port 9 pin functions are shown in table 8.20. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 236 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Table 8.20 Port 9 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P97/WAIT/SDA0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit WMS1 in WSCR, bit ICE in ICCR of IIC0, and bit P97DDR. Operating mode Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) WMS1 0 ICE P97DDR Pin function Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) 1 0 1 — — 0 1 0 1 — — 0 1 — P97 input pin P97 output pin SDA0 I/O pin WAIT input pin P97 input pin P97 output pin SDA0 I/O pin In the H8S/2138 Group, when this pin is set as the P97 output pin, it is an NMOS push-pull output. SDA0 is an NMOS open-drain output, and has direct bus drive capability. P96/φ/EXCL The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of bit EXCLE in LPWRCR and bit P96DDR. P96DDR 0 EXCLE Pin function 1 0 1 0 P96 input pin EXCL input pin φ output pin When this pin is used as the EXCL input pin, P96DDR should be cleared to 0. P95/AS/IOS/CS1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit IOSE in SYSCR, bit HI12E in SYSCR2, and bit P95DDR. Operating mode Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) HI12E — P95DDR IOSE Pin function Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) 0 — 1 0 1 — 0 1 — — — AS output pin IOS output pin P95 input pin P95 output pin CS1 input pin Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 237 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P94/WR/IOW The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit HI12E in SYSCR2, and bit P94DDR. Operating mode — P94DDR — 0 1 — WR output pin P94 input pin P94 output pin IOW input pin 0 1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bit HI12E in SYSCR2, and bit P93DDR. Operating mode HI12E P93DDR Pin function P92/IRQ0 Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) HI12E Pin function P93/RD/IOR Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) — 0 1 — 0 1 — RD output pin P93 input pin P93 output pin IOR input pin P92DDR Pin function 0 1 P92 input pin P92 output pin IRQ0 input pin When bit IRQ0E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ0 input pin. P91/IRQ1 P91DDR Pin function 0 1 P91 input pin P91 output pin IRQ1 input pin When bit IRQ1E in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ1 input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 238 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P90/IRQ2/ ADTRG/ECS2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of operating mode, bits HI12E and CS2E in SYSCR2, bit FGA20E in HICR, and bit P90DDR. Operating mode Modes 1, 2, 3 (EXPE = 1) Modes 2, 3 (EXPE = 0) HI12E — FGA20E — 1 CS2E — 1 P90DDR Pin function Any one 0 1 0 1 0 1 — P90 input pin P90 output pin P90 input pin P90 output pin ECS2 input pin IRQ2 input pin, ADTRG input pin When the IRQ2E bit in IER is set to 1, this pin is used as the IRQ2 input pin. When TRGS1 and TRGS0 in ADCR of the A/D converter are both set to 1, this pin is used as the ADTRG input pin. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 239 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 8 I/O Ports Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 240 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.1 Overview The H8/2138 Group has an on-chip pulse width modulation (PWM) timer module with sixteen outputs. Sixteen output waveforms are generated from a common time base, enabling PWM output with a high carrier frequency to be produced using pulse division. The PWM timer module has sixteen 8-bit PWM data registers (PWDRs), and an output pulse with a duty cycle of 0 to 100% can be obtained as specified by PWDR and the port data register (P1DR or P2DR). 9.1.1 Features The PWM timer module has the following features. • Operable at a maximum carrier frequency of 1.25 MHz using pulse division (at 20-MHz operation) • Duty cycles from 0 to 100% with 1/256 resolution (100% duty realized by port output) • Direct or inverted PWM output, and PWM output enable/disable control Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 241 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM timer module. PWDR0 Comparator 1 PWDR1 P12/PW2 Comparator 2 PWDR2 P13/PW3 Comparator 3 PWDR3 P14/PW4 Comparator 4 PWDR4 Comparator 5 PWDR5 Comparator 6 PWDR6 Comparator 7 PWDR7 Comparator 8 PWDR8 P15/PW5 P16/PW6 P17/PW7 P20/PW8 P21/PW9 P22/PW10 Comparator 9 PWDR9 Comparator 10 PWDR10 Comparator 11 PWDR11 P24/PW12 Comparator 12 PWDR12 P25/PW13 Comparator 13 PWDR13 P26/PW14 Comparator 14 PWDR14 P27/PW15 Comparator 15 PWDR15 TCNT Clock selection P23/PW11 PWDPRB PWDPRA PWOERB PWOERA P2DDR P1DDR P2DR P1DR Legend: PWSL: PWDR: PWDPRA: PWDPRB: PWOERA: PWOERB: PCSR: P1DDR: P2DDR: P1DR: P2DR: PWM register select PWM data register PWM data polarity register A PWM data polarity register B PWM output enable register A PWM output enable register B Peripheral clock select register Port 1 data direction register Port 2 data direction register Port 1 data register Port 2 data register Module data bus φ/16 φ/8 φ/4 φ/2 φ Internal clock Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of PWM Timer Module Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 242 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Bus interface Comparator 0 P11/PW1 Port/PWM output control P10/PW0 PWSL PCSR Internal data bus Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 9.1 shows the PWM output pin. Table 9.1 Pin Configuration Name Abbreviation I/O Function PWM output pin 0 to 15 PW0 to PW15 Output PWM timer pulse output 0 to 15 9.1.4 Register Configuration Table 9.2 lists the registers of the PWM timer module. Table 9.2 PWM Timer Module Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* PWM register select PWSL R/W H'20 H'FFD6 PWM data registers 0 to 15 PWDR0 to PWDR15 R/W H'00 H'FFD7 PWM data polarity register A PWDPRA R/W H'00 H'FFD5 PWM data polarity register B PWDPRB R/W H'00 H'FFD4 PWM output enable register A PWOERA R/W H'00 H'FFD3 PWM output enable register B PWOERB R/W H'00 H'FFD2 Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'00 H'FFB0 Port 2 data direction register P2DDR W H'00 H'FFB1 Port 1 data register P1DR R/W H'00 H'FFB2 Port 2 data register P2DR R/W H'00 H'FFB3 Peripheral clock select register PCSR R/W H'00 H'FF82* Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Some registers in the 8-bit timer are assigned in the same addresses as other registers. In this case, register selection is performed by the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 243 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.2 Register Descriptions 9.2.1 PWM Register Select (PWSL) Bit 7 6 PWCKE PWCKS 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 Initial value 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W PWSL is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select the PWM timer input clock and the PWM data register. PWSL is initialized to H'20 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 and 6—PWM Clock Enable, PWM Clock Select (PWCKE, PWCKS): These bits, together with bits PWCKA and PWCKB in PCSR, select the internal clock input to TCNT in the PWM timer. PWSL PCSR Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 1 PWCKE PWCKS PWCKB PWCKA Description 0 — — — Clock input is disabled 1 0 — — φ (system clock) is selected 1 0 0 φ/2 is selected 1 φ/4 is selected 0 φ/8 is selected 1 φ/16 is selected 1 (Initial value) The PWM resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency depend on the selected internal clock, and can be found from the following equations. Resolution (minimum pulse width) = 1/internal clock frequency PWM conversion period = resolution × 256 Carrier frequency = 16/PWM conversion period Thus, with a 20-MHz system clock (φ), the resolution, PWM conversion period, and carrier frequency are as shown below. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 244 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] Resolution, PWM Conversion Period, and Carrier Frequency when φ = 20 MHz Table 9.3 Internal Clock Frequency Resolution PWM Conversion Period Carrier Frequency φ 50 ns 12.8 µs 1250 kHz φ/2 100 ns 25.6 µs 625 kHz φ/4 200 ns 51.2 µs 312.5 kHz φ/8 400 ns 102.4 µs 156.3 kHz φ/16 800 ns 204.8 µs 78.1 kHz Bit 5—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 4—Reserved: This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bits 3 to 0—Register Select (RS3 to RS0): These bits select the PWM data register. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RS3 RS2 RS1 RS0 Register Selection 0 0 0 0 PWDR0 selected 1 PWDR1 selected 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 PWDR2 selected 1 PWDR3 selected 0 PWDR4 selected 1 PWDR5 selected 0 PWDR6 selected 1 PWDR7 selected 0 PWDR8 selected 1 PWDR9 selected 0 PWDR10 selected 1 PWDR11 selected 0 PWDR12 selected 1 PWDR13 selected 0 PWDR14 selected 1 PWDR15 selected Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 245 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.2.2 PWM Data Registers (PWDR0 to PWDR15) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each PWDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the duty cycle of the basic pulse to be output, and the number of additional pulses. The value set in PWDR corresponds to a 0 or 1 ratio in the conversion period. The upper 4 bits specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16. The lower 4 bits specify how many extra pulses are to be added within the conversion period comprising 16 basic pulses. Thus, a specification of 0/256 to 255/256 is possible for 0/1 ratios within the conversion period. For 256/256 (100%) output, port output should be used. PWDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. 9.2.3 PWM Data Polarity Registers A and B (PWDPRA and PWDPRB) PWDPRA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OS7 OS6 OS5 OS4 OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OS15 OS14 OS13 OS12 OS11 OS10 OS9 OS8 PWDPRB Bit Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each PWDPR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the polarity of the PWM output. Bits OS0 to OS15 correspond to outputs PW0 to PW15. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 246 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] PWDPR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. OS Description 0 PWM direct output (PWDR value corresponds to high width of output) 1 PWM inverted output (PWDR value corresponds to low width of output) 9.2.4 PWM Output Enable Registers A and B (PWOERA and PWOERB) (Initial value) PWOERA Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OE7 OE6 OE5 OE4 OE3 OE2 OE1 OE0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PWOERB Bit OE15 OE14 OE13 OE12 OE11 OE10 OE9 OE8 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each PWOER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that switches between PWM output and port output. Bits OE15 to OE0 correspond to outputs PW15 to PW0. To set a pin in the output state, a setting in the port direction register is also necessary. Bits P17DDR to P10DDR correspond to outputs PW7 to PW0, and bits P27DDR to P20DDR correspond to outputs PW15 to PW8. PWOER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. DDR OE Description 0 0 Port input 1 Port input 0 Port output or PWM 256/256 output 1 PWM output (0 to 255/256 output) 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 247 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.2.5 Peripheral Clock Select Register (PCSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 — — — — — 2 1 PWCKB PWCKA 0 — Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write — — — — — R/W R/W — PCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the PWM timer input clock. PCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 2 and 1—PWM Clock Select (PWCKB, PWCKA): Together with bits PWCKE and PWCKS in PWSL, these bits select the internal clock input to TCNT in the PWM timer. For details, see section 9.2.1, PWM Register Select (PWSL). Bit 0—Reserved: Do not set this bit to 1. 9.2.6 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that specifies the input/output direction and PWM output for each pin of port 1 on a bit-by-bit basis. Port 1 pins are multiplexed with pins PW0 to PW7. The bit corresponding to a pin to be used for PWM output should be set to 1. For details on P1DDR, see section 8.2, Port 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 248 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.2.7 Port 2 Data Direction Register (P2DDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27DDR P26DDR P25DDR P24DDR P23DDR P22DDR P21DDR P20DDR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write W W W W W W W W P2DDR is an 8-bit write-only register that specifies the input/output direction and PWM output for each pin of port J on a bit-by-bit basis. Port 2 pins are multiplexed with pins PW8 to PW15. The bit corresponding to a pin to be used for PWM output should be set to 1. For details on P2DDR, see section 8.3, Port 2. 9.2.8 Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to fix PWM output at 1 (when OS = 0) or 0 (when OS = 1). For details on P1DR, see section 8.2, Port 1. 9.2.9 Port 2 Data Register (P2DR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P27DR P26DR P25DR P24DR P23DR P22DR P21DR P20DR Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P2DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to fix PWM output at 1 (when OS = 0) or 0 (when OS = 1). For details on P2DR, see section 8.3, Port 2. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 249 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, 8-bit PWM timer operation is halted and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTP11): Specifies PWM module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3 MSTP11 Description 0 PWM module stop mode is cleared 1 PWM module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 250 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] 9.3 Operation 9.3.1 Correspondence between PWM Data Register Contents and Output Waveform The upper 4 bits of PWDR specify the duty cycle of the basic pulse as 0/16 to 15/16 with a resolution of 1/16, as shown in table 9.4. Table 9.4 Upper 4 Bits 0000 Duty Cycle of Basic Pulse Basic Pulse Waveform (Internal) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 .. . 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 251 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 9 8-Bit PWM Timers [H8S/2138 Group] The lower 4 bits of PWDR specify the position of pulses added to the 16 basic pulses, as shown in table 9.5. An additional pulse consists of a high period (when OS = 0) with a width equal to the resolution, added before the rising edge of a basic pulse. When the upper 4 bits of PWDR are 0000, there is no rising edge of the basic pulse, but the timing for adding pulses is the same. Table 9.5 Position of Pulses Added to Basic Pulses Lower 4 Bits Basic Pulse No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0000 0001 Yes 0010 Yes 0011 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0100 Yes Yes 0101 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0110 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0111 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1001 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1010 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1011 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1100 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1101 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1110 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1111 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No additional pulse Resolution width Additional pulse provided Additional pulse Figure 9.2 Example of Additional Pulse Timing (When Upper 4 Bits of PWDR = 1000) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 252 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have an on-chip 14-bit pulse-width modulator (PWM) with two output channels. Each channel can be connected to an external low-pass filter to operate as a 14-bit D/A converter. Both channels share the same counter (DACNT) and control register (DACR). 10.1.1 Features The features of the 14-bit PWM D/A are listed below. • The pulse is subdivided into multiple base cycles to reduce ripple. • Two resolution settings and two base cycle settings are available The resolution can be set equal to one or two system clock cycles. The base cycle can be set equal to T × 64 or T × 256, where T is the resolution. • Four operating rates The two resolution settings and two base cycle settings combine to give a selection of four operating rates. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 253 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM D/A module. Internal clock φ Internal data bus φ/2 Clock Clock selection Bus interface Basic cycle compare-match A PWX0 Fine-adjustment pulse addition A PWX1 Basic cycle compare-match B Fine-adjustment pulse addition B Comparator A DADRA Comparator B DADRB Control logic Basic cycle overflow DACNT DACR Module data bus Legend: DACR: DADRA: DADRB: DACNT: PWM D/A control register ( 6 bits) PWM D/A data register A (15 bits) PWM D/A data register B (15 bits) PWM D/A counter (14 bits) Figure 10.1 PWM D/A Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 254 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 10.1 lists the pins used by the PWM D/A module. Table 10.1 Input and Output Pins Name Abbr. I/O Function PWM output pin 0 PWX0 Output PWM output, channel A PWM output pin 1 PWX1 Output PWM output, channel B 10.1.4 Register Configuration Table 10.2 lists the registers of the PWM D/A module. Table 10.2 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial value 1 Address* PWM D/A control register DACR R/W H'30 PWM D/A data register A high DADRAH R/W H'FF H'FFA0* 2 H'FFA0* PWM D/A data register A low DADRAL R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register B high DADRBH R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register B low DADRBL R/W H'FF PWM D/A counter high DACNTH R/W H'00 H'FFA7* 2 H'FFA6* PWM D/A counter low DACNTL R/W H'03 H'FFA7* Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 2 H'FFA1* 2 H'FFA6* 2 2 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Registers in the 14-bit PWM timer are assigned to the same addresses as the other registers. In this case, register selection is performed by the IICE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR), and also the same addresses are shared by DADRAH and DACR, and by DADRB and DACNT. Switching is performed by the REGS bit in DACNT or DADRB. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 255 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.2 Register Descriptions 10.2.1 PWM D/A Counter (DACNT) DACNTH DACNTL Bit (CPU) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BIT (Counter) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 — — — REGS Initial value Read/Write 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 — R/W DACNT is a 14-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an input clock pulse. The input clock is selected by the clock select bit (CKS) in DACR. The CPU can read and write the DACNT value, but since DACNT is a 16-bit register, data transfers between it and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 10.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. DACNT functions as the time base for both PWM D/A channels. When a channel operates with 14-bit precision, it uses all DACNT bits. When a channel operates with 12-bit precision, it uses the lower 12 (counter) bits and ignores the upper two (counter) bits. DACNT is initialized to H'0003 by a reset, in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode, and by the PWME bit. Bit 1 of DACNTL (CPU) is not used, and is always read as 1. DACNTL Bit 0—Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS Description 0 DADRA and DADRB can be accessed 1 DACR and DACNT can be accessed Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 256 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.2.2 D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB) DADRH Bit (CPU) Bit (Data) DADRA Initial value DADRL 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 — 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DADRB DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS REGS Initial value Read/Write 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 — 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W There are two 16-bit readable/writable D/A data registers: DADRA and DADRB. DADRA corresponds to PWM D/A channel A, and DADRB to PWM D/A channel B. The CPU can read and write the PWM D/A data register values, but since DADRA and DADRB are 16-bit registers, data transfers between them and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 10.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. The least significant (CPU) bit of DADRA is not used and is always read as 1. DADR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 257 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Bits 15 to 3—PWM D/A Data 13 to 0 (DA13 to DA0): The digital value to be converted to an analog value is set in the upper 14 bits of the PWM D/A data register. In each base cycle, the DACNT value is continually compared with these upper 14 bits to determine the duty cycle of the output waveform, and to decide whether to output a fineadjustment pulse equal in width to the resolution. To enable this operation, the data register must be set within a range that depends on the carrier frequency select bit (CFS). If the DADR value is outside this range, the PWM output is held constant. A channel can be operated with 12-bit precision by keeping the two lowest data bits (DA0 and DA1) cleared to 0 and writing the data to be converted in the upper 12 bits. The two lowest data bits correspond to the two highest counter (DACNT) bits. Bit 1—Carrier Frequency Select (CFS) Bit 1 CFS Description 0 Base cycle = resolution (T) × 64 DADR range = H'0401 to H'FFFD 1 Base cycle = resolution (T) × 256 DADR range = H'0103 to H'FFFF (Initial value) DADRA Bit 0—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. DADRB Bit 0—Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS Description 0 DADRA and DADRB can be accessed 1 DACR and DACNT can be accessed Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 258 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.2.3 PWM D/A Control Register (DACR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TEST PWME — — OEB OEA OS CKS Initial value 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects test mode, enables the PWM outputs, and selects the output phase and operating speed. DACR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7—Test Mode (TEST): Selects test mode, which is used in testing the chip. Normally this bit should be cleared to 0. Bit 7 TEST Description 0 PWM (D/A) in user state: normal operation 1 PWM (D/A) in test state: correct conversion results unobtainable (Initial value) Bit 6—PWM Enable (PWME): Starts or stops the PWM D/A counter (DACNT). Bit 6 PWME Description 0 DACNT operates as a 14-bit up-counter 1 DACNT halts at H'0003 (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3—Output Enable B (OEB): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel B. Bit 3 OEB Description 0 PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWX1 pin) is disabled 1 PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWX1 pin) is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 259 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Bit 2—Output Enable A (OEA): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel A. Bit 2 OEA Description 0 PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWX0 pin) is disabled 1 PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWX0 pin) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—Output Select (OS): Selects the phase of the PWM D/A output. Bit 1 OS Description 0 Direct PWM output 1 Inverted PWM output (Initial value) Bit 0—Clock Select (CKS): Selects the PWM D/A resolution. If the system clock (φ) frequency is 10 MHz, resolutions of 100 ns and 200 ns can be selected. Bit 0 CKS Description 0 Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc) 1 Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc) × 2 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 260 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, 14-bit PWM timer operation is halted and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTP11): Specifies PWMX module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 3 MSTP11 Description 0 PWMX module stop mode is cleared 1 PWMX module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 261 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.3 Bus Master Interface DACNT, DADRA, and DADRB are 16-bit registers. The data bus linking the bus master and the on-chip supporting modules, however, is only 8 bits wide. When the bus master accesses these registers, it therefore uses an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). These registers are written and read as follows (taking the example of the CPU interface). • Write When the upper byte is written, the upper-byte write data is stored in TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is written, the lower-byte write data and TEMP value are combined, and the combined 16-bit value is written in the register. • Read When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the lower-byte value in TEMP is transferred to the CPU. These registers should always be accessed 16 bits at a time using an MOV instruction (by word access or two consecutive byte accesses), and the upper byte should always be accessed before the lower byte. Correct data will not be transferred if only the upper byte or only the lower byte is accessed. Also note that a bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to access these registers. Figure 10.2 shows the data flow for access to DACNT. The other registers are accessed similarly. Example 1: Write to DACNT MOV.W R0, @DACNT ; Write R0 contents to DACNT Example 2: Read DADRA MOV.W @DADRA, R0 ; Copy contents of DADRA to R0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 262 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Table 10.3 Read and Write Access Methods for 16-Bit Registers Read Write Register Name Word Byte Word DADRA and DADRB Yes Yes Yes DACNT Yes × Yes Byte × × Notes: Yes: Permitted type of access. Word access includes successive byte accesses to the upper byte (first) and lower byte (second). ×: This type of access may give incorrect results. Upper-Byte Write CPU (H'AA) Upper byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Lower-Byte Write CPU (H'57) Lower byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Figure 10.2 (a) Access to DACNT (CPU Writes H'AA57 to DACNT) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 263 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Upper-Byte Read CPU (H'AA) Upper byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'57) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Lower-Byte Read CPU (H'57) Lower byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'57) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Figure 10.2 (b) Access to DACNT (CPU Reads H'AA57 from DACNT) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 264 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 10.4 Operation A PWM waveform like the one shown in figure 10.3 is output from the PWMX pin. When OS = 0, the value in DADR corresponds to the total width (TL) of the low (0) pulses output in one conversion cycle (256 pulses when CFS = 0, 64 pulses when CFS = 1). When OS = 1, the output waveform is inverted and the DADR value corresponds to the total width (TH) of the high (1) output pulses. Figure 10.4 shows the types of waveform output available. 1 conversion cycle (T × 214 (= 16384)) tf Basic cycle (T × 64 or T × 256) tL T: Resolution m TL = ∑ tLn (when OS = 0) n=1 (When CFS = 0, m = 256; when CFS = 1, m = 64) Figure 10.3 PWM D/A Operation Table 10.4 summarizes the relationships of the CKS, CFS, and OS bit settings to the resolution, base cycle, and conversion cycle. The PWM output remains flat unless DADR contains at least a certain minimum value. Table 10.4 indicates the range of DADR settings that give an output waveform like the one in figure 10.3, and lists the conversion cycle length when low-order DADR bits are kept cleared to 0, reducing the conversion precision to 12 bits or 10 bits. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 265 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A Table 10.4 Settings and Operation (Examples when φ = 10 MHz) Base Conversion Resolution CKS CFS Cycle Cycle T (µs) (µs) (µs) 0 0.1 0 6.4 1638.4 Fixed DADR Bits TL (if OS = 0) TH (if OS = 1) 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 1 25.6 1638.4 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) 1 0.2 0 12.8 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 1 51.2 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) Note: * Precision Bit Data (Bits) 3 2 1 0 Conversion Cycle* (µs) 14 1638.4 12 0 0 409.6 10 0 0 0 0 102.4 14 1638.4 12 0 0 409.6 10 0 0 0 0 102.4 14 3276.8 12 0 0 819.2 10 0 0 0 0 204.8 14 3276.8 12 0 0 819.2 10 0 0 0 0 204.8 This column indicates the conversion cycle when specific DADR bits are fixed. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 266 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 1. OS = 0 (DADR corresponds to TL) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tL1 tf2 tf255 tL2 tL3 tL255 tf256 tL256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf255 = tf256 = T × 64 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + · · · + tL255 + tL256 = TL Figure 10.4 (1) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tL1 tf2 tL2 tf63 tL3 tL63 tf64 tL64 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf63 = tf64 = T × 256 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + · · · + tL63 + tL64 = TL Figure 10.4 (2) Output Waveform Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 267 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 10 14-Bit PWM D/A 2. OS = 1 (DADR corresponds to TH) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tH1 tf2 tf255 tH2 tH3 tH255 tf256 tH256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf255 = tf256 = T × 64 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + · · · + tH255 + tH256 = TH Figure 10.4 (3) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tH1 tf2 tH2 tf63 tH3 tH63 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf63 = tf64 = T × 256 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + · · · + tH63 + tH64 = TH Figure 10.4 (4) Output Waveform Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 268 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 tf64 tH64 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have a single-channel on-chip 16-bit free-running timer (FRT) module that uses a 16-bit free-running counter as a time base. Applications of the FRT module include rectangular-wave output (up to two independent waveforms), input pulse width measurement, and measurement of external clock periods. 11.1.1 Features The features of the free-running timer module are listed below. • Selection of four clock sources The free-running counter can be driven by an internal clock source (φ/2, φ/8, or φ/32), or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). • Two independent comparators Each comparator can generate an independent waveform. • Four input capture channels The current count can be captured on the rising or falling edge (selectable) of an input signal. The four input capture registers can be used separately, or in a buffer mode. • Counter can be cleared under program control The free-running counters can be cleared on compare-match A. • Seven independent interrupts Two compare-match interrupts, four input capture interrupts, and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently. • Special functions provided by automatic addition function The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF can be added to the contents of OCRA automatically, enabling a periodic waveform to be generated without software intervention. The contents of ICRD can be added automatically to the contents of OCRDM × 2, enabling input capture operations in this interval to be restricted. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 269 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the free-running timer. External clock source Internal clock sources φ/2 φ/8 φ/32 FTCI Clock select OCRA R/F (H/L) + Clock OCRA (H/L) Comparematch A Comparator A FTOA Overflow FTOB Clear Bus interface FRC (H/L) Comparematch B OCRB (H/L) Control logic Input capture FTIA ICRA (H/L) ICRB (H/L) FTIB Internal data bus Module data bus Comparator B ICRC (H/L) FTIC ICRD (H/L) FTID + Comparator M Compare-match M ×1 ×2 OCRDM L TCSR TIER TCR TOCR ICIA ICIB ICIC ICID OCIA OCIB FOVI Legend: OCRA, B: FRC: ICRA, B, C, D: TCSR: Interrupt signals Output compare register A, B (16 bits) Free-running counter (16 bits) Input capture register A, B, C, D (16 bits) Timer control/status register (8 bits) TIER: Timer interrupt enable register (8 bits) TCR: Timer control register (8 bits) TOCR: Timer output compare control register (8 bits) Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 270 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 11.1 lists the input and output pins of the free-running timer module. Table 11.1 Input and Output Pins of Free-Running Timer Module Name Abbreviation I/O Function Counter clock input FTCI Input FRC counter clock input Output compare A FTOA Output Output compare A output Output compare B FTOB Output Output compare B output Input capture A FTIA Input Input capture A input Input capture B FTIB Input Input capture B input Input capture C FTIC Input Input capture C input Input capture D FTID Input Input capture D input Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 271 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.1.4 Register Configuration Table 11.2 lists the registers of the free-running timer module. Table 11.2 Register Configuration Initial Value 1 Address* H'01 H'FF90 H'00 H'FF91 R/W H'0000 H'FF92 OCRA R/W H'FFFF Output compare register B OCRB R/W H'FFFF H'FF94* 3 H'FF94* Timer control register TCR R/W H'00 H'FF96 Timer output compare control register TOCR R/W H'00 H'FF97 Input capture register A ICRA R H'0000 Input capture register B ICRB R H'0000 H'FF98* 4 H'FF9A* Input capture register C ICRC R H'0000 4 H'FF9C* Input capture register D ICRD R H'0000 Output compare register AR OCRAR R/W H'FFFF H'FF9E 4 H'FF98* Output compare register AF OCRAF R/W H'FFFF Output compare register DM OCRDM R/W H'0000 H'FF9A* 4 H'FF9C* Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 Name Abbreviation R/W Timer interrupt enable register TIER R/W Timer control/status register TCSR R/(W)* Free-running counter FRC Output compare register A 2 3 4 4 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Bits 7 to 1 are read-only; only 0 can be written to clear the flags. Bit 0 is readable/writable. 3. OCRA and OCRB share the same address. Access is controlled by the OCRS bit in TOCR. 4. ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC share the same addresses with OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM. Access is controlled by the ICRS bit in TOCR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 272 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.2 Register Descriptions 11.2.1 Free-Running Counter (FRC) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W FRC is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an internal pulse generated from a clock source. The clock source is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR. FRC can also be cleared by compare-match A. When FRC overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. FRC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.2 Output Compare Registers A and B (OCRA, OCRB) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/ Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRA and OCRB are 16-bit readable/writable registers, the contents of which are continually compared with the value in the FRC. When a match is detected, the corresponding output compare flags (OCFA or OCFB) is set in TCSR. In addition, if the output enable bit (OEA or OEB) in TOCR is set to 1, when OCR and FRC values match, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Following a reset, the FTOA and FTOB output levels are 0 until the first compare-match. OCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 273 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.2.3 Input Capture Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R There are four input capture registers, A to D, each of which is a 16-bit read-only register. When the rising or falling edge of the signal at an input capture input pin (FTIA to FTID) is detected, the current FRC value is copied to the corresponding input capture register (ICRA to ICRD). At the same time, the corresponding input capture flag (ICFA to ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. The input capture edge is selected by the input edge select bits (IEDGA to IEDGD) in TCR. ICRC and ICRD can be used as ICRA and ICRB buffer registers, respectively, and made to perform buffer operations, by means of buffer enable bits A and B (BUFEA, BUFEB) in TCR. Figure 11.2 shows the connections when ICRC is specified as the ICRA buffer register (BUFEA = 1). When ICRC is used as the ICRA buffer, both rising and falling edges can be specified as transitions of the external input signal by setting IEDGA ≠ IEDGC. When IEDGA = IEDGC, either the rising or falling edge is designated. See table 11.3. Note: The FRC contents are transferred to the input capture register regardless of the value of the input capture flag (ICF). IEDGA BUFEA IEDGC FTIA Edge detect and capture signal generating circuit ICRC ICRA Figure 11.2 Input Capture Buffering (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 274 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 FRC Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Table 11.3 Buffered Input Capture Edge Selection (Example) IEDGA IEDGC Description 0 0 Captured on falling edge of input capture A (FTIA) 1 Captured on both rising and falling edges of input capture A (FTIA) 1 (Initial value) 0 1 Captured on rising edge of input capture A (FTIA) To ensure input capture, the width of the input capture pulse should be at least 1.5 system clock periods (1.5φ). When triggering is enabled on both edges, the input capture pulse width should be at least 2.5 system clock periods (2.5φ). ICR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.4 Output Compare Registers AR and AF (OCRAR, OCRAF) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRAR and OCRAF are 16-bit readable/writable registers. When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the operation of OCRA is changed to include the use of OCRAR and OCRAF. The contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added alternately to OCRA, and the result is written to OCRA. The write operation is performed on the occurrence of compare-match A. In the first compare-match A after the OCRAMS bit is set to 1, OCRAF is added. The operation due to compare-match A varies according to whether the compare-match follows addition of OCRAR or OCRAF. The value of the OLVLA bit in TOCR is ignored, and 1 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAF, while 0 is output on a compare-match A following addition of OCRAR. When the OCRA automatically addition function is used, do not set internal clock φ/2 as the FRC counter input clock together with an OCRAR (or OCRAF) value of H'0001 or less. OCRAR and OCRAF are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 275 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.2.5 Output Compare Register DM (OCRDM) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W OCRDM is a 16-bit readable/writable register in which the upper 8 bits are fixed at H'00. When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, the operation of ICRD is changed to include the use of OCRDM. The point at which input capture D occurs is taken as the start of a mask interval. Next, twice the contents of OCRDM is added to the contents of ICRD, and the result is compared with the FRC value. The point at which the values match is taken as the end of the mask interval. New input capture D events are disabled during the mask interval. A mask interval is not generated when the ICRDMS bit is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are H'0000. OCRDM is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 11.2.6 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICIAE ICIBE ICICE ICIDE OCIAE OCIBE OVIE — Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — TIER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables interrupts. TIER is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 276 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 7—Input Capture Interrupt A Enable (ICIAE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt A (ICIA) when input capture flag A (ICFA) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 7 ICIAE Description 0 Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is disabled 1 Input capture interrupt request A (ICIA) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6—Input Capture Interrupt B Enable (ICIBE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt B (ICIB) when input capture flag B (ICFB) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 6 ICIBE Description 0 Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is disabled 1 Input capture interrupt request B (ICIB) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—Input Capture Interrupt C Enable (ICICE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt C (ICIC) when input capture flag C (ICFC) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 5 ICICE Description 0 Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is disabled 1 Input capture interrupt request C (ICIC) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 4—Input Capture Interrupt D Enable (ICIDE): Selects whether to request input capture interrupt D (ICID) when input capture flag D (ICFD) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 4 ICIDE Description 0 Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is disabled 1 Input capture interrupt request D (ICID) is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 277 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 3—Output Compare Interrupt A Enable (OCIAE): Selects whether to request output compare interrupt A (OCIA) when output compare flag A (OCFA) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 3 OCIAE Description 0 Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is disabled 1 Output compare interrupt request A (OCIA) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2—Output Compare Interrupt B Enable (OCIBE): Selects whether to request output compare interrupt B (OCIB) when output compare flag B (OCFB) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 2 OCIBE Description 0 Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is disabled 1 Output compare interrupt request B (OCIB) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Selects whether to request a free-running timer overflow interrupt (FOVI) when the timer overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. Bit 1 OVIE Description 0 Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is disabled 1 Timer overflow interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 0—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. 11.2.7 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICFA ICFB ICFC ICFD OCFA OCFB OVF CCLRA Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 1 to clear these flags. TCSR is an 8-bit register used for counter clear selection and control of interrupt request signals. TCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 278 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Timing is described in section 11.3, Operation. Bit 7—Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRA by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, ICFA indicates that the old ICRA value has been moved into ICRC and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRA. ICFA must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 7 ICFA Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read ICFA when ICFA = 1, then write 0 in ICFA 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRA Bit 6—Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRB by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, ICFB indicates that the old ICRB value has been moved into ICRD and the new FRC value has been transferred to ICRB. ICFB must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 6 ICFB Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read ICFB when ICFB = 1, then write 0 in ICFB 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal causes the FRC value to be transferred to ICRB Bit 5—Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRC by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEA = 1, on occurrence of the signal transition in FTIC (input capture signal) specified by the IEDGC bit, ICFC is set but data is not transferred to ICRC. Therefore, in buffer operation, ICFC can be used as an external interrupt signal (by setting the ICICE bit to 1). ICFC must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 279 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 5 ICFC Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read ICFC when ICFC = 1, then write 0 in ICFC 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received Bit 4—Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status flag indicates that the FRC value has been transferred to ICRD by means of an input capture signal. When BUFEB = 1, on occurrence of the signal transition in FTID (input capture signal) specified by the IEDGD bit, ICFD is set but data is not transferred to ICRD. Therefore, in buffer operation, ICFD can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICIDE bit to 1. ICFD must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 4 ICFD Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read ICFD when ICFD = 1, then write 0 in ICFD 1 [Setting condition] When an input capture signal is received Bit 3—Output Compare Flag A (OCFA): This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRA value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 3 OCFA Description 0 [Clearing condition] Read OCFA when OCFA = 1, then write 0 in OCFA 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRA Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 280 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 2—Output Compare Flag B (OCFB): This status flag indicates that the FRC value matches the OCRB value. This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 2 OCFB Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read OCFB when OCFB = 1, then write 0 in OCFB 1 [Setting condition] When FRC = OCRB Bit 1—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): This status flag indicates that the FRC has overflowed (changed from H'FFFF to H'0000). This flag must be cleared by software. It is set by hardware, however, and cannot be set by software. Bit 1 OVF Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] When FRC changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 Bit 0—Counter Clear A (CCLRA): This bit selects whether the FRC is to be cleared at comparematch A (when the FRC and OCRA values match). Bit 0 CCLRA Description 0 FRC clearing is disabled 1 FRC is cleared at compare-match A (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 281 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.2.8 Timer Control Register (TCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IEDGA IEDGB IEDGC IEDGD BUFEA BUFEB CKS1 CKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture signals, enables the input capture buffer mode, and selects the FRC clock source. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Input Edge Select A (IEDGA): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture A signal (FTIA). Bit 7 IEDGA Description 0 Capture on the falling edge of FTIA 1 Capture on the rising edge of FTIA (Initial value) Bit 6—Input Edge Select B (IEDGB): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture B signal (FTIB). Bit 6 IEDGB Description 0 Capture on the falling edge of FTIB 1 Capture on the rising edge of FTIB (Initial value) Bit 5—Input Edge Select C (IEDGC): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture C signal (FTIC). Bit 5 IEDGC Description 0 Capture on the falling edge of FTIC 1 Capture on the rising edge of FTIC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 282 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 4—Input Edge Select D (IEDGD): Selects the rising or falling edge of the input capture D signal (FTID). Bit 4 IEDGD Description 0 Capture on the falling edge of FTID 1 Capture on the rising edge of FTID (Initial value) Bit 3—Buffer Enable A (BUFEA): Selects whether ICRC is to be used as a buffer register for ICRA. Bit 3 BUFEA Description 0 ICRC is not used as a buffer register for input capture A 1 ICRC is used as a buffer register for input capture A (Initial value) Bit 2—Buffer Enable B (BUFEB): Selects whether ICRD is to be used as a buffer register for ICRB. Bit 2 BUFEB Description 0 ICRD is not used as a buffer register for input capture B 1 ICRD is used as a buffer register for input capture B (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select (CKS1, CKS0): Select external clock input or one of three internal clock sources for the FRC. External clock pulses are counted on the rising edge of signals input to the external clock input pin (FTCI). Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS1 CKS0 Description 0 0 φ/2 internal clock source 1 φ/8 internal clock source 0 φ/32 internal clock source 1 External clock source (rising edge) 1 (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 283 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.2.9 Timer Output Compare Control Register (TOCR) Bit 7 6 ICRDMS OCRAMS 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICRS OCRS OEA OEB OLVLA OLVLB 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W TOCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables output from the output compare pins, selects the output levels, switches access between output compare registers A and B, controls the ICRD and OCRA operating mode, and switches access to input capture registers A, B, and C. TOCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Input Capture D Mode Select (ICRDMS): Specifies whether ICRD is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRDM. Bit 7 ICRDMS Description 0 The normal operating mode is specified for ICRD 1 The operating mode using OCRDM is specified for ICRD (Initial value) Bit 6—Output Compare A Mode Select (OCRAMS): Specifies whether OCRA is used in the normal operating mode or in the operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF. Bit 6 OCRAMS Description 0 The normal operating mode is specified for OCRA 1 The operating mode using OCRAR and OCRAF is specified for OCRA (Initial value) Bit 5—Input Capture Register Select (ICRS): The same addresses are shared by ICRA and OCRAR, by ICRB and OCRAF, and by ICRC and OCRDM. The ICRS bit determines which registers are selected when the shared addresses are read or written to. The operation of ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC is not affected. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 284 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 5 ICRS Description 0 The ICRA, ICRB, and ICRC registers are selected 1 The OCRAR, OCRAF, and OCRDM registers are selected (Initial value) Bit 4—Output Compare Register Select (OCRS): OCRA and OCRB share the same address. When this address is accessed, the OCRS bit selects which register is accessed. This bit does not affect the operation of OCRA or OCRB. Bit 4 OCRS Description 0 The OCRA register is selected 1 The OCRB register is selected (Initial value) Bit 3—Output Enable A (OEA): Enables or disables output of the output compare A signal (FTOA). Bit 3 OEA Description 0 Output compare A output is disabled 1 Output compare A output is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2—Output Enable B (OEB): Enables or disables output of the output compare B signal (FTOB). Bit 2 OEB Description 0 Output compare B output is disabled 1 Output compare B output is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—Output Level A (OLVLA): Selects the logic level to be output at the FTOA pin in response to compare-match A (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRA values). When the OCRAMS bit is 1, this bit is ignored. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 285 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Bit 1 OLVLA Description 0 0 output at compare-match A 1 1 output at compare-match A (Initial value) Bit 0—Output Level B (OLVLB): Selects the logic level to be output at the FTOB pin in response to compare-match B (signal indicating a match between the FRC and OCRB values). Bit 0 OLVLB Description 0 0 output at compare-match B 1 1 output at compare-match B (Initial value) 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP13 bit is set to 1, FRT operation is stopped at the end of the bus cycle, and module stop mode is entered. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTP13): Specifies the FRT module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 5 MSTP13 Description 0 FRT module stop mode is cleared 1 FRT module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 286 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3 Operation 11.3.1 FRC Increment Timing FRC increments on a pulse generated once for each period of the selected (internal or external) clock source. Internal Clock: Any of three internal clocks (φ/2, φ/8, or φ/32) created by division of the system clock (φ) can be selected by making the appropriate setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR. Figure 11.3 shows the increment timing. φ Internal clock FRC input clock FRC N–1 N N+1 Figure 11.3 Increment Timing with Internal Clock Source External Clock: If external clock input is selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TCR, FRC increments on the rising edge of the external clock signal. The pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clock (φ) periods. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is shorter than 1.5 system clock periods. Figure 11.4 shows the increment timing. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 287 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer φ External clock input pin FRC input clock FRC N N+1 Figure 11.4 Increment Timing with External Clock Source 11.3.2 Output Compare Output Timing When a compare-match occurs, the logic level selected by the output level bit (OLVLA or OLVLB) in TOCR is output at the output compare pin (FTOA or FTOB). Figure 11.5 shows the timing of this operation for compare-match A. φ FRC N OCRA N+1 N N N Compare-match A signal Clear* OLVLA Output compare A output pin FTOA Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. Figure 11.5 Timing of Output Compare A Output Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 288 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 N+1 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3.3 FRC Clear Timing FRC can be cleared when compare-match A occurs. Figure 11.6 shows the timing of this operation. φ Compare-match A signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 11.6 Clearing of FRC by Compare-Match A 11.3.4 Input Capture Input Timing Input Capture Input Timing: An internal input capture signal is generated from the rising or falling edge of the signal at the input capture pin, as selected by the corresponding IEDGx (x = A to D) bit in TCR. Figure 11.7 shows the usual input capture timing when the rising edge is selected (IEDGx = 1). φ Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 11.7 Input Capture Signal Timing (Usual Case) If the upper byte of ICRA to ICRD is being read when the corresponding input capture signal arrives, the internal input capture signal is delayed by one system clock (φ) period. Figure 11.8 shows the timing for this case. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 289 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer ICRA/B/C/D read cycle T1 T2 φ Input capture input pin Input capture signal Figure 11.8 Input Capture Signal Timing (Input Capture Input When ICRA/B/C/D Is Read) Buffered Input Capture Input Timing: ICRC and ICRD can operate as buffers for ICRA and ICRB. Figure 11.9 shows how input capture operates when ICRA and ICRC are used in buffer mode and IEDGA and IEDGC are set to different values (IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1, or IEDG A = 1 and IEDGC = 0), so that input capture is performed on both the rising and falling edges of FTIA. φ FTIA Input capture signal FRC n ICRA M ICRC m n+1 N N+1 n n N M M n Figure 11.9 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Usual Case) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 290 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer When ICRC or ICRD is used as a buffer register, its input capture flag is set by the selected transition of its input capture signal. For example, if ICRC is used to buffer ICRA, when the edge transition selected by the IEDGC bit occurs on the FTIC input capture line, ICFC will be set, and if the ICIEC bit is set, an interrupt will be requested. The FRC value will not be transferred to ICRC, however. In buffered input capture, if the upper byte of either of the two registers to which data will be transferred (ICRA and ICRC, or ICRB and ICRD) is being read when the input signal arrives, input capture is delayed by one system clock (φ) period. Figure 11.10 shows the timing when BUFEA = 1. Read cycle: CPU reads ICRA or ICRC T1 T2 φ FTIA Input capture signal Figure 11.10 Buffered Input Capture Timing (Input Capture Input When ICRA or ICRC Is Read) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 291 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3.5 Timing of Input Capture Flag (ICF) Setting The input capture flag ICFx (x = A, B, C, D) is set to 1 by the internal input capture signal. The FRC value is simultaneously transferred to the corresponding input capture register (ICRx). Figure 11.11 shows the timing of this operation. φ Input capture signal ICFA to ICFD N FRC ICRA to ICRD N Figure 11.11 Setting of Input Capture Flag (ICFA to ICFD) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 292 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3.6 Setting of Output Compare Flags A and B (OCFA, OCFB) The output compare flags are set to 1 by an internal compare-match signal generated when the FRC value matches the OCRA or OCRB value. This compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the two values match, just before FRC increments to a new value. Accordingly, when the FRC and OCR values match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next period of the clock source. Figure 11.12 shows the timing of the setting of OCFA and OCFB. φ FRC N OCRA or OCRB N+1 N Compare-match signal OCFA or OCFB Figure 11.12 Setting of Output Compare Flag (OCFA, OCFB) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 293 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3.7 Setting of FRC Overflow Flag (OVF) The FRC overflow flag (OVF) is set to 1 when FRC overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000). Figure 11.13 shows the timing of this operation. φ FRC H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal OVF Figure 11.13 Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) 11.3.8 Automatic Addition of OCRA and OCRAR/OCRAF When the OCRAMS bit in TOCR is set to 1, the contents of OCRAR and OCRAF are automatically added to OCRA alternately, and when an OCRA compare-match occurs a write to OCRA is performed. The OCRA write timing is shown in figure 11.14. φ FRC N N+1 OCRA N N+A OCRAR, F A Compare-match signal Figure 11.14 OCRA Automatic Addition Timing Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 294 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.3.9 ICRD and OCRDM Mask Signal Generation When the ICRDMS bit in TOCR is set to 1 and the contents of OCRDM are other than H'0000, a signal that masks the ICRD input capture function is generated. The mask signal is set by the input capture signal. The mask signal setting timing is shown in figure 11.15. The mask signal is cleared by the sum of the ICRD contents and twice the OCRDM contents, and an FRC compare-match. The mask signal clearing timing is shown in figure 11.16. φ Input capture signal Input capture mask signal Figure 11.15 Input Capture Mask Signal Setting Timing φ FRC N ICRD + OCRDM × 2 N+1 N Compare-match signal Input capture mask signal Figure 11.16 Input Capture Mask Signal Clearing Timing Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 295 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.4 Interrupts The free-running timer can request seven interrupts (three types): input capture A to D (ICIA, ICIB, ICIC, ICID), output compare A and B (OCIA and OCIB), and overflow (FOVI). Each interrupt can be enabled or disabled by an enable bit in TIER. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. Table 11.4 lists information about these interrupts. Table 11.4 Free-Running Timer Interrupts Interrupt Description DTC Activation Priority ICIA Requested by ICFA Possible High ICIB Requested by ICFB Possible ICIC Requested by ICFC Not possible ICID Requested by ICFD Not possible OCIA Requested by OCFA Possible OCIB Requested by OCFB Possible FOVI Requested by OVF Not possible Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 296 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Low Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.5 Sample Application In the example below, the free-running timer is used to generate pulse outputs with a 50% duty cycle and arbitrary phase relationship. The programming is as follows: • The CCLRA bit in TCSR is set to 1. • Each time a compare-match interrupt occurs, software inverts the corresponding output level bit in TOCR (OLVLA or OLVLB). FRC H'FFFF Counter clear OCRA OCRB H'0000 FTOA FTOB Figure 11.17 Pulse Output (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 297 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer 11.6 Usage Notes Application programmers should note that the following types of contention can occur in the freerunning timer. Contention between FRC Write and Clear: If an internal counter clear signal is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the clear signal takes priority and the write is not performed. Figure 11.18 shows this type of contention. FRC write cycle T1 T2 φ Address FRC address Internal write signal Counter clear signal FRC N H'0000 Figure 11.18 FRC Write-Clear Contention Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 298 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Contention between FRC Write and Increment: If an FRC increment pulse is generated during the state after an FRC write cycle, the write takes priority and FRC is not incremented. Figure 11.19 shows this type of contention. FRC write cycle T1 T2 φ Address FRC address Internal write signal FRC input clock FRC N M Write data Figure 11.19 FRC Write-Increment Contention Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 299 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match: If a compare-match occurs during the state after an OCRA or OCRB write cycle, the write takes priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. Figure 11.20 shows this type of contention. If automatic addition of OCRAR/OCRAF to OCRA is selected, and a compare-match occurs in the cycle following the OCRA, OCRAR and OCRAF write cycle, the OCRA, OCRAR and OCRAF write takes priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. Consequently, the result of the automatic addition is not written to OCRA. Figure 11.21 shows this type of contention. OCRA or OCRB write cycle T1 T2 φ Address OCR address Internal write signal FRC N OCR N N+1 M Write data Compare-match signal Inhibited Figure 11.20 Contention between OCR Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Not Used) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 300 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer φ Address OCRAR (OCRAF) address Internal write signal OCRAR (OCRAF) Compare-match signal Old Data New Data Inhibited FRC N OCRA N N+1 The compare-match signal is inhibited and automatic addition does not occur. Figure 11.21 Contention between OCRAR/OCRAF Write and Compare-Match (When Automatic Addition Function Is Used) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 301 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation: When the internal clock is changed, the changeover may cause FRC to increment. This depends on the time at which the clock select bits (CKS1 and CKS0) are rewritten, as shown in table 11.5. When an internal clock is used, the FRC clock is generated on detection of the falling edge of the internal clock scaled from the system clock (φ). If the clock is changed when the old source is high and the new source is low, as in case no. 3 in table 11.5, the changeover is regarded as a falling edge that triggers the FRC increment clock pulse. Switching between an internal and external clock can also cause FRC to increment. Table 11.5 Switching of Internal Clock and FRC Operation No. 1 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from low to low FRC Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N+1 N CKS bit rewrite 2 Switching from low to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 302 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer No. 3 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits Switching from high to low FRC Operation Clock before switchover Clock after switchover * FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite 4 Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover FRC clock FRC N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Note: * Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; FRC is incremented. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 303 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 11 16-Bit Free-Running Timer Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 304 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group include an 8-bit timer module with two channels (TMR0 and TMR1). Each channel has an 8-bit counter (TCNT) and two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect comparematches. The 8-bit timer module can be used as a multifunction timer in a variety of applications, such as generation of a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty cycle. The H8S/2138 Group also has two similar 8-bit timer channels (TMRX and TMRY). These channels can be used in a connected configuration using the timer connection function. TMRX and TMRY have greater input/output and interrupt function related restrictions than TMR0 and TMR1. TMRX has a built-in H8S/2138, but does not have a built-in H8S/2134. 12.1.1 Features • Selection of clock sources TMR0, TMR1: The counter input clock can be selected from six internal clocks and an external clock (enabling use as an external event counter). TMRX, TMRY: The counter input clock can be selected from three internal clocks and an external clock (enabling use as an external event counter). • Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare-match A or B, or by an external reset signal. • Timer output controlled by two compare-match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare-match signals, enabling the timer to be used for various applications, such as the generation of pulse output or PWM output with an arbitrary duty cycle. (Note: TMRY does not have a timer output pin.) • Cascading of the two channels (TMR0, TMR1) Operation as a 16-bit timer can be performed using channel 0 as the upper half and channel 1 as the lower half (16-bit count mode). Channel 1 can be used to count channel 0 compare-match occurrences (compare-match count mode). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 305 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers • Multiple interrupt sources for each channel TMR0, TMR1, TMRY: Two compare-match interrupts and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently. TMRX: One input capture source is available. 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module (TMR0 and TMR1). TMRX and TMRY have a similar configuration, but cannot be cascaded. TMRX also has an input capture function. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group]. External clock sources Internal clock sources TMCI0 TMCI1 TMR0 φ/8, φ/2 φ/64, φ/32 φ/1024, φ/256 TMR1 φ/8, φ/2 φ/64, φ/128 φ/1024, φ/2048 TMRX φ φ/2 φ/4 TMRY φ/4 φ/256 φ/2048 Clock 1 Clock 0 Clock select TCORA0 Compare-match A1 Compare-match A0 Comparator A0 TCNT0 Comparator A1 TCNT1 Clear 0 Clear 1 Compare-match B1 Compare-match B0 Comparator B0 TMO1 TMRI1 Comparator B1 Control logic TCORB0 TCORB1 TCSR0 TCSR1 TCR0 TCR1 CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 Interrupt signals Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Module Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 306 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Internal bus Overflow 1 Overflow 0 TMO0 TMRI0 TCORA1 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 12.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer module. Table 12.1 8-Bit Timer Input and Output Pins Channel Name Symbol* I/O Function 0 Timer output TMO0 Output Output controlled by compare-match Timer clock input TMCI0 Input External clock input for the counter Timer reset input TMRI0 Input External reset input for the counter 1 X Y Note: * Timer output TMO1 Output Output controlled by compare-match Timer clock input TMCI1 Input External clock input for the counter Timer reset input TMRI1 Input External reset input for the counter Timer output TMOX Output Output controlled by compare-match Timer clock/ reset input HFBACKI/TMIX Input (TMCIX/TMRIX) External clock/reset input for the counter Timer clock/reset input VSYNCI/TMIY Input (TMCIY/TMRIY) External clock/reset input for the counter The abbreviations TMO, TMCI, and TMRI are used in the text, omitting the channel number. Channel X and Y I/O pins have the same internal configuration as channels 0 and 1, and therefore the same abbreviations are used. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 307 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.1.4 Register Configuration Table 12.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Table 12.2 8-Bit Timer Registers Channel Name Abbreviation* 0 Timer control register 0 Timer control/status register 0 Time constant register A0 Time constant register B0 Time counter 0 Timer control register 1 Timer control/status register 1 Time constant register A1 Time constant register B1 Timer counter 1 Serial timer control register Module stop control register TCR0 TCSR0 TCORA0 TCORB0 TCNT0 TCR1 TCSR1 TCORA1 TCORB1 TCNT1 STCR MSTPCRH MSTPCRL TCONRS TCRX TCSRX TCORAX TCORBX TCNTX TCORC TICRR TICRF TCRY TCSRY TCORAY TCORBY TCNTY TISR 1 Common X Y Timer connection register S Timer control register X Timer control/status register X Time constant register AX Time constant register BX Timer counter X Time constant register C Input capture register R Input capture register F Timer control register Y Timer control/status register Y Time constant register AY Time constant register BY Timer counter Y Timer input select register 3 R/W Initial value Address* R/W 2 R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 R/(W)* H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'10 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'00 H'3F H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'FF H'00 H'00 H'00 H'00 H'FF H'FF H'00 H'FE R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R/W 2 R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 H'FFC8 H'FFCA H'FFCC H'FFCE H'FFD0 H'FFC9 H'FFCB H'FFCD H'FFCF H'FFD1 H'FFC3 H'FF86 H'FF87 H'FFFE H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF6 H'FFF7 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. 3. The abbreviations TCR, TCSR, TCORA, TCORB, and TCNT are used in the text, omitting the channel designation (0, 1, X, or Y). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 308 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Each pair of registers for channel 0 and channel 1 comprises a 16-bit register with the upper 8 bits for channel 0 and the lower 8 bits for channel 1, so they can be accessed together by word access. (Access is not divided into two 8-bit accesses.) In the H8S/2138 Group, certain of the channel X and channel Y registers are assigned to the same address. The TMRX/Y bit in TCONRS determines which register is accessed. 12.2 Register Descriptions 12.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) TCNT0 TCNT1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNTX, TCNTY Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Each TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. TCNT0 and TCNT1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCNT increments on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. This clock source is selected by clock select bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. TCNT can be cleared by an external reset input signal or compare-match signal. Counter clear bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR select the method of clearing. When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00, the overflow flag (OVF) in TCSR is set to 1. The timer counters are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 309 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.2 Time Constant Register A (TCORA) TCORA0 TCORA1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORAX, TCORAY Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORA is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORA0 and TCORA1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag A (CMFA) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORA write cycle. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare-match signals and the settings of output select bits OS1 and OS0 in TCSR. TCORA is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 310 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.3 Time Constant Register B (TCORB) TCORB0 TCORB1 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORBX, TCORBY Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB is an 8-bit readable/writable register. TCORB0 and TCORB1 comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word access. TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding compare-match flag B (CMFB) in TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORB write cycle. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare-match signals and the settings of output select bits OS3 and OS2 in TCSR. TCORB is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 311 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.4 Timer Control Register (TCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMIEB CMIEA OVIE CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and enables interrupts. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. For details of the timing, see section 12.3, Operation. Bit 7—Compare-Match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): Selects whether the CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that a CMIB interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the CMIEB value. Bit 7 CMIEB Description 0 CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is disabled 1 CMFB interrupt request (CMIB) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 6—Compare-Match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): Selects whether the CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that a CMIA interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the CMIEA value. Bit 6 CMIEA Description 0 CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is disabled 1 CMFA interrupt request (CMIA) is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 312 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 12 8-Bit Timers Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Selects whether the OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled or disabled when the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1. Note that an OVI interrupt is not requested by TMRX, regardless of the OVIE value. Bit 5 OVIE Description 0 OVF interrupt request (OVI) is disabled 1 OVF interrupt request (OVI) is enabled (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3—Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select the method by which the timer counter is cleared: by compare-match A or B, or by an external reset input. Bit 4 Bit 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description 0 0 Clearing is disabled 1 Cleared on compare-match A 0 Cleared on compare-match B 1 Cleared on rising edge of external reset input 1 (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select whether the clock input to TCNT is an internal or external clock. The input clock can be selected from either six or three clocks, all divided from the system clock (φ). The falling edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. When use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Some functions differ between channel 0 and channel 1, because of the cascading function. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 313 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers TCR Bit 2 Bit 1 STCR Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 ICKS1 ICKS0 Description 0 0 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 0 0 1 — 0 φ/8 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 0 1 — 1 φ/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 0 — 0 φ/64 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 0 — 1 φ/32 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 — 0 φ/1024 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 — 1 φ/256 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 1 0 0 — — Counted on TCNT1 overflow signal* 0 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 0 0 1 0 — φ/8 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 0 1 1 — φ/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 0 0 — φ/64 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 0 1 — φ/128 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 0 — φ/1024 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 1 — φ/2048 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 1 0 0 — — Counted on TCNT0 compare-match A* 0 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 0 0 1 — — Counted on φ internal clock source 0 1 0 — — φ/2 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 — — φ/4 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 1 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 0 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 0 0 1 — — φ/4 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 0 — — φ/256 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 0 1 1 — — φ/2048 internal clock source, counted on the falling edge 1 0 0 — — Clock input disabled 1 X Y (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) (Initial value) Common 1 0 1 — — External clock source, counted at rising edge 1 1 0 — — External clock source, counted at falling edge 1 1 1 — — External clock source, counted at both rising and falling edges Note: * If the count input of channel 0 is the TCNT1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the TCNT0 compare-match signal, no incrementing clock will be generated. Do not use this setting. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 314 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF ADTE OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF — OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* — R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF ICF OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF ICIE OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCSR1 Bit TCSRX Bit TCSRY Bit Note: * Only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 5, and in bit 4 in TCSRX, to clear these flags. TCSR is an 8-bit register that indicates compare-match and overflow statuses (and input capture status in TMRX only), and controls compare-match output. TCSR0, TCSRX, and TCSRY are initialized to H'00, and TCSR1 is initialized to H'10, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 315 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Bit 7—Compare-Match Flag B (CMFB): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORB match. Bit 7 CMFB Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • Read CMFB when CMFB = 1, then write 0 in CMFB • When the DTC is activated by a CMIB interrupt (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORB Bit 6—Compare-match Flag A (CMFA): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORA match. Bit 6 CMFA Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • Read CMFA when CMFA = 1, then write 0 in CMFA • When the DTC is activated by a CMIA interrupt (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT = TCORA Bit 5—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): Status flag indicating that TCNT has overflowed (changed from H'FF to H'00). Bit 5 OVF Description 0 [Clearing condition] Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF 1 [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 316 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 12 8-Bit Timers TCSR0 Bit 4—A/D Trigger Enable (ADTE): Enables or disables A/D converter start requests by compare-match A. Bit 4 ADTE Description 0 A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are disabled 1 A/D converter start requests by compare-match A are enabled (Initial value) TCSR1 Bit 4—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. TCSRX Bit 4—Input Capture Flag (ICF): Status flag that indicates detection of a rising edge followed by a falling edge in the external reset signal after the ICST bit in TCONRI has been set to 1. Bit 4 ICF Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Read ICF when ICF = 1, then write 0 in ICF 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected in the external reset signal after the ICST bit in TCONRI has been set to 1 TCSRY Bit 4—Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): Selects enabling or disabling of the interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) when the ICF bit in TCSRX is set to 1. Bit 4 ICIE Description 0 Interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) is disabled 1 Interrupt request by ICF (ICIX) is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 317 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Bits 3 to 0—Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify how the timer output level is to be changed by a compare-match of TCOR and TCNT. OS3 and OS2 select the effect of compare-match B on the output level, OS1 and OS0 select the effect of compare-match A on the output level, and both of them can be controlled independently. Note, however, that priorities are set such that: trigger output > 1 output > 0 output. If comparematches occur simultaneously, the output changes according to the compare-match with the higher priority. Timer output is disabled when bits OS3 to OS0 are all 0. After a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare-match occurs. Bit 3 Bit 2 OS3 OS2 Description 0 1 0 No change when compare-match B occurs 1 0 is output when compare-match B occurs 0 1 is output when compare-match B occurs 1 Output is inverted when compare-match B occurs (toggle output) Bit 1 Bit 0 OS1 OS0 Description 0 1 (Initial value) 0 No change when compare-match A occurs 1 0 is output when compare-match A occurs 0 1 is output when compare-match A occurs 1 Output is inverted when compare-match A occurs (toggle output) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 318 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.6 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details on functions not related to the 8-bit timers, see section 3.2.4, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. 2 2 Bits 6 to 4—I C Control (IICX1, IICX0, IICE): These bits control the operation of the I C bus interface when the IIC option is included on-chip. See section 16.2.7, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), for details. Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls CPU access to the flash memory control registers, the power-down mode control registers, and the supporting module control registers. See section 3.2.4, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), for details. Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock to be input to TCNT. For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 319 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.7 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W Only bit 1 is described here. For details on functions not related to the 8-bit timers, see sections 3.2.2 and 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. Bit 1—Host Interface Enable (HIE): Controls CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers. Bit 1 HIE Description 0 CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is enabled (Initial value) 1 CPU access to 8-bit timer (channel X and Y) data registers and control registers, and timer connection control registers, is disabled 12.2.8 Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMRX/Y ISGENE HOMOD1HOMOD0 VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCONRS is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls access to the TMRX and TMRY registers and timer connection operation. TCONRS is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 320 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Bit 7—TMRX/TMRY Access Select (TMRX/Y): The TMRX and TMRY registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0. In the H8S/2138 Group, some of the TMRX registers and the TMRY registers are assigned to the same memory space addresses (H'FFF0 to H'FFF5), and the TMRX/Y bit determines which registers are accessed. In the H8S/2134 Group, there is no control of TMRY register access by this bit. Accessible Registers Bit 7 TMRX/Y H'FFF0 H'FFF1 H'FFF2 H'FFF3 H'FFF4 H'FFF5 H'FFF6 0 TCRX (Initial value) (TMRX) TCSRX TICRR TICRF TCNTX TCORC TCORAX TCORBX (TMRX) (TMRX) (TMRX) (TMRX) (TMRX) (TMRX) 1 TCRY TCSRY TCORAY TCORBY TCNTY TISR (TMRY) (TMRY) (TMRY) (TMRY) 12.2.9 (TMRY) (TMRY) H'FFF7 (TMRX) Input Capture Register (TICR) [TMRX Additional Function] Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write — — — — — — — — TICR is an 8-bit internal register to which the contents of TCNT are transferred on the falling edge of external reset input. The CPU cannot read or write to TICR directly. The TICR function is used in timer connection. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group]. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 321 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.10 Time Constant Register C (TCORC) [TMRX Additional Function] Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORC is an 8-bit readable/writable register. The sum of the contents of TCORC and TICR is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, a compare-match C signal is generated. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCORC write cycle and a TICR input capture cycle. TCORC is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The TCORC function is used in timer connection. For details, see section 13, Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group]. 12.2.11 Input Capture Registers R and F (TICRR, TICRF) [TMRX Additional Functions] Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R TICRR and TICRF are 8-bit read-only registers. When the ICST bit in TCONRI is set to 1, TICRR and TICRF capture the contents of TCNT successively on the rise and fall of the external reset input. When one capture operation ends, the ICST bit is cleared to 0. TICRR and TICRF are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The TICRR and TICRF functions are used in timer connection. For details, see section 12.3.6, Input Capture Operation, and section 13, Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group]. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 322 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.12 Timer Input Select Register (TISR) [TMRY Additional Function] Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — — — IS Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Read/Write — — — — — — — R/W TISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the external clock/reset signal source for the counter. TISR is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1—Reserved: Do not write 0 to these bits. Bit 0—Input Select (IS): Selects the internal synchronization signal (IVG signal) or the timer clock/reset input pin (VSYNCI/TMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY)) as the external clock/reset signal source for the counter. Bit 0 IS Description 0 IVG signal is selected (H8S/2138 Group) External clock/reset input is disabled (H8S/2134 Group) 1 VSYNCI/TMIY (TMCIY/TMRIY) is selected (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 323 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.2.13 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP12 bit or MSTP8 bit is set to 1, 8-bit timer operation is halted on channels 0 and 1 or channels X and Y, respectively, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTP12): Specifies 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4 MSTP12 Description 0 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode is cleared 1 8-bit timer (channel 0/1) module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRH Bit 0—Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 0 MSTP8 Description 0 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode is cleared 1 8-bit timer (channel X/Y) and timer connection module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 324 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.3 Operation 12.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing TCNT is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). Internal Clock: An internal clock created by dividing the system clock (φ) can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. Figure 12.2 shows the count timing. φ Internal clock TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 12.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input External Clock: Three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states for incrementation at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for incrementation at both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. Figure 12.3 shows the timing of incrementation at both edges of an external clock signal. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 325 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers φ External clock input pin TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 12.3 Count Timing for External Clock Input 12.3.2 Compare-Match Timing Setting of Compare-Match Flags A and B (CMFA, CMFB): The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare-match signal generated when the TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare-match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCOR and TCNT match, the compare-match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. Figure 12.4 shows this timing. φ TCNT N TCOR N Compare-match signal CMF Figure 12.4 Timing of CMF Setting Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 326 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 N+1 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Timer Output Timing: When compare-match A or B occurs, the timer output changes as specified by the output select bits (OS3 to OS0) in TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output can remain the same, be set to 0, be set to 1, or toggle. Figure 12.5 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at compare-match A. φ Compare-match A signal Timer output pin Figure 12.5 Timing of Timer Output Timing of Compare-Match Clear: TCNT is cleared when compare-match A or B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 12.6 shows the timing of this operation. φ Compare-match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.6 Timing of Compare-Match Clear Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 327 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.3.3 TCNT External Reset Timing TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The width of the clearing pulse must be at least 1.5 states. Figure 12.7 shows the timing of this operation. φ External reset input pin Clear signal TCNT N–1 N H'00 Figure 12.7 Timing of Clearing by External Reset Input 12.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting OVF in TCSR is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 12.8 shows the timing of this operation. φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 12.8 Timing of OVF Setting Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 328 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR0 or TCR1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer can be used (16-bit timer mode) or compare-matches of 8-bit channel 0 can be counted by the timer of channel 1 (comparematch count mode). In this case, the timer operates as described below. 16-Bit Count Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. • Setting of compare-match flags The CMF flag in TCSR0 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare-match occurs. The CMF flag in TCSR1 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare-match occurs. • Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR0 have been set for counter clear at compare-match, the 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) is cleared when a 16-bit compare-match occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 together) is cleared even if counter clear by the TMRI0 pin has also been set. The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR1 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. • Pin output Control of output from the TMO0 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare-match conditions. Control of output from the TMO1 pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare-match conditions. Compare-Match Count Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 are B'100, TCNT1 counts compare-match A’s for channel 0. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clearing are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Usage Note: If the 16-bit count mode and compare-match count mode are set simultaneously, the input clock pulses for TCNT0 and TCNT1 are not generated and thus the counters will stop operating. Simultaneous setting of these two modes should therefore be avoided. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 329 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.3.6 Input Capture Operation TMRX has input capture registers of TICR,TICRR, and TICRF. Narrow pulse width can be measured with TICRR and TICRF, using one capture operation controlled by the ICST bit in the TCONRI register of the timer connection. When TMRIX detects a rising and falling edge successively after the ICST bit has been set to 1, the values of TCNT at that time are transferred to TICRR and TICRF and ICST bit is cleared to 0. The TMRIX input signal can be selected by setting other bits in the TCONRI register. (1) Input capture input timing Figure 12.9 shows the timing of the input capture operation. φ TMRIX Input capture signal TCNTX n TICRR M TICRF m n+1 n N N+1 n m N Figure 12.9 Timing of Input Capture Operation If the input capture signal enters while TICRR and TICRF are being read, it is internally delayed one system clock (φ) period. Figure 12.10 shows the timing of this operation. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 330 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers T1 TICRR, TICRF read cycle T2 φ TMRIX Input capture signal Figure 12.10 Timing of Input Capture Signal (When Input Capture Input Signal Enters while TICRR and TICRF Are Being Read) (2) Input capture signal input selection Input capture input signal (TMRIX) in TMRX is switched by setting bits in the TCONRI register. Figure 12.11 and table 12.3 show the input capture signal selections. See section 13.2.1, Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI), for details. TMRX TMIX pin Polarity inversion TMRI1 pin Polarity inversion TMCI1 pin Polarity inversion HFINV, HIINV Signal selector SIMOD1, SIMOD0 TMRIX ICST Figure 12.11 Switching of Input Capture Signal Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 331 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Table 12.3 Input Capture Signal Selection TCONRI Bit 4 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 3 Bit 1 ICST SIMOD1 SIMOD0 HFINV HIINV Description 0 — — — — Input capture function not used 1 0 0 0 — TMIX pin input signal 1 — Inverted signal of TMIX pin input — 0 TMRI1 pin input signal — 1 Inverted signal of TMRI1 pin input — 0 TMCI1 pin input signal — 1 Inverted signal of TMCI1 pin input 1 1 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 332 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.4 Interrupt Sources The TMR0, TMR1, and TMRY 8-bit timers can generate three types of interrupt: compare-match A and B (CMIA and CMIB), and overflow (OVI). TMRX can generate only an ICIX interrupt. An interrupt is requested when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set in TCR or TCSR. Independent signals are sent to the interrupt controller for each interrupt. It is also possible to activate the DTC by means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts from TMR0, TMR1, and TMRY. An overview of 8-bit timer interrupt sources is given in tables 12.4 to 12.6. Table 12.4 TMR0 and TMR1 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Interrupt source Description DTC Activation Interrupt Priority CMIA Requested by CMFA Possible High CMIB Requested by CMFB Possible OVI Requested by OVF Not possible Low Table 12.5 TMRX 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Source Interrupt source Description DTC Activation ICIX Requested by ICF Not possible Table 12.6 TMRY 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Interrupt source Description DTC Activation Interrupt Priority CMIA Requested by CMFA Possible High CMIB Requested by CMFB Possible OVI Requested by OVF Not possible Low Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 333 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.5 8-Bit Timer Application Example In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle, as shown in figure 12.12. The control bits are set as follows: • In TCR, CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and CCLR0 is set to 1 so that the timer counter is cleared by a TCORA compare-match. • In TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to B'0110, causing 1 output at a TCORA compare-match and 0 output at a TCORB compare-match. With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. TCNT H'FF Counter clear TCORA TCORB H'00 TMO Figure 12.12 Pulse Output (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 334 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.6 Usage Notes Application programmers should note that the following kinds of contention can occur in the 8-bit timer module. 12.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. Figure 12.13 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ Address TCNT address Internal write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 12.13 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 335 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. Figure 12.14 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 12.14 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 336 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match During the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write has priority even if a compare-match occurs and the compare-match signal is disabled. Figure 12.15 shows this operation. With TMRX, an ICR input capture contends with a compare-match in the same way as with a write to TCORC. In this case, the input capture has priority and the compare-match signal is inhibited. TCOR write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ Address TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCOR N M TCOR write data Compare-match signal Inhibited Figure 12.15 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare-Match Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 337 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers 12.6.4 Contention between Compare-Matches A and B If compare-matches A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with the priorities for the output states set for compare-match A and compare-match B, as shown in table 12.7. Table 12.7 Timer Output Priorities Output Setting Priority Toggle output High 1 output 0 output No change 12.6.5 Low Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 12.8 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1 and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in no. 3 in table 12.8, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge. This increments TCNT. Erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 338 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers Table 12.8 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation No. 1 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from low 1 to low* Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 CKS bit rewrite 2 Switching from low 2 to high* Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 339 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 12 8-Bit Timers No. 3 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from high 3 to low* Clock before switchover Clock after switchover *4 TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite 4 Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit rewrite Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. Includes switching from stop to high. Includes switching from high to stop. Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is incremented. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 340 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Sectio 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Provided in the H8S/2138 Group; not provided in the H8S/2134 Group. 13.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group allows interconnection between a combination of input signals, the input/output of the single free-running timer (FRT) channel and the three 8-bit timer channels (TMR1, TMRX, and TMRY). This capability can be used to implement complex functions such as PWM decoding and clamp waveform output. All the timers are initially set for independent operation. 13.1.1 Features The features of the timer connection facility are as follows. • Five input pins and four output pins, all of which can be designated for phase inversion. Positive logic is assumed for all signals used within the timer connection facility. • An edge-detection circuit is connected to the input pins, simplifying signal input detection. • TMRX can be used for PWM input signal decoding and clamp waveform generation. • An external clock signal divided by TMR1 can be used as the FRT capture input signal. • An internal synchronization signal can be generated using the FRT and TMRY. • A signal generated/modified using an input signal and timer connection can be selected and output. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 341 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 342 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer Connection Facility HFBACKI/ FTCI/TMIX CSYNCI/ TMRI1 HSYNCI/ TMCI1 FTID FTIC Phase inversion Phase inversion Phase inversion Phase inversion Phase inversion Edge detection Edge detection Edge detection Edge detection Edge detection IHI signal selection IVI signal selection FRT input selection IVI signal READ flag IHI signal READ flag 16-bit FRT VSYNC modify FTOA ICR +1C compare match ICR 8-bit TMRX PWM decoding PDC signal TMRI CMA TMO CMB CMB TMCI 8-bit TMR1 TMO CLAMP waveform generation CM1C TMRI TMCI TMR1 input selection CBLANK waveform generation SET RES 2f H mask generation 2f H mask/flag FTIB OCRA +VR, +VF CMA(R) FTIC ICRD +1M, +2M CMA(F) compare match FTOB FTID CM1M CM2M FTIA SET sync RES CL1 signal CL2 signal CL3 signal RES VSYNC generation SET CL signal selection CL4 signal FRT output selection phase inversion phase inversion Phase inversion TMO1 output selection TMRI/TMCI 8-bit TMRY TMO IVO signal Phase inversion CL4 generation IHO signal selection TMIY signal selection IVG signal IVO signal selection CLAMPO/ FTIC TMOX HSYNCO/ TMO1 CBLANK IHG signal VSYNCO/ FTOA 13.1.2 VFBACKI/ FTIB VSYNCI/ FTIA/TMIY Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Block Diagram Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the timer connection facility. Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 13.1 lists the timer connection input and output pins. Table 13.1 Timer Connection Input and Output Pins Name Abbreviation Input/ Output Vertical synchronization signal input pin VSYNCI Input Vertical synchronization signal input pin or FTIA input pin/TMIY input pin Horizontal synchronization signal input pin HSYNCI Input Horizontal synchronization signal input pin or TMCI1 input pin Composite synchronization signal input pin CSYNCI Input Composite synchronization signal input pin or TMRI1 input pin Spare vertical synchronization signal input pin VFBACKI Input Spare vertical synchronization signal input pin or FTIB input pin Spare horizontal synchronization signal input pin HFBACKI Input Spare horizontal synchronization signal input pin or FTCI input pin/TMIX input pin Vertical synchronization signal output pin VSYNCO Output Vertical synchronization signal output pin or FTOA output pin Horizontal synchronization signal output pin HSYNCO Output Horizontal synchronization signal output pin or TMO1 output pin Clamp waveform output pin CLAMPO Output Clamp waveform output pin or FTIC input pin Blanking waveform output pin CBLANK Output Blanking waveform output pin Function Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 343 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.1.4 Register Configuration Table 13.2 lists the timer connection registers. Timer connection registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is 0. Table 13.2 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* Timer connection register I TCONRI R/W H'00 H'FFFC Timer connection register O TCONRO R/W H'00 H'FFFD Timer connection register S TCONRS R/W H'00 H'FFFE Edge sense register SEDGR 2 R/(W)* 3 H'00* H'FFFF Module stop control register MSTPRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Bits 7 to 2: Only 0 can be written to clear the flags. 3. Bits 1 and 0: Undefined (reflect the pin states). 13.2 Register Descriptions 13.2.1 Timer Connection Register I (TCONRI) Bit 7 6 5 SIMOD1 SIMOD0 SCONE 4 3 2 1 0 ICST HFINV VFINV HIINV VIINV Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCONRI is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls connection between timers, the signal source for synchronization signal input, phase inversion, etc. TCONR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 344 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 7 and 6—Input Synchronization Mode Select 1 and 0 (SIMOD1, SIMOD0): These bits select the signal source of the IHI and IVI signals. Bit 7 Bit 6 SIMOD1 SIMOD0 Mode 0 0 No signal 1 S-on-G mode 1 Description (Initial value) IHI Signal IVI Signal HFBACKI input VFBACKI input CSYNCI input PDC input 0 Composite mode HSYNCI input PDC input 1 Separate mode HSYNCI input VSYNCI input Bit 5—Synchronization Signal Connection Enable (SCONE): Selects the signal source of the FRT FTI input and the TMR1 TMCI1/TMRI1 input. Bit 5 Description SCONE Mode FTIA FTIB FTIC FTID TMCI1 TMRI1 0 Normal connection (Initial value) FTIA input FTIB input FTIC input FTID input TMCI1 input TMRI1 input 1 Synchronization signal connection mode IVI signal TMO1 signal VFBACKI IHI input signal IHI signal IVI inverse signal Bit 4—Input Capture Start Bit (ICST): The TMRX external reset input (TMRIX) is connected to the IHI signal. TMRX has input capture registers (TICR, TICRR, and TICRF). TICRR and TICRF can measure the width of a short pulse by means of a single capture operation under the control of the ICST bit. When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX after the ICST bit is set to 1, the contents of TCNT at those points are captured into TICRR and TICRF, respectively, and the ICST bit is cleared to 0. Bit 4 ICST Description 0 The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are stopped (Initial value) [Clearing condition] When a rising edge followed by a falling edge is detected on TMRIX 1 The TICRR and TICRF input capture functions are operating (Waiting for detection of a rising edge followed by a falling edge on TMRIX) [Setting condition] When 1 is written in ICST after reading ICST = 0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 345 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 3 to 0—Input Synchronization Signal Inversion (HFINV, VFINV, HIINV, VIINV): These bits select inversion of the input phase of the spare horizontal synchronization signal (HFBACKI), the spare vertical synchronization signal (VFBACKI), the horizontal synchronization signal and composite synchronization signal (HSYNCI, CSYNCI), and the vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCI). Bit 3 HFINV Description 0 The HFBACKI pin state is used directly as the HFBACKI input 1 The HFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the HFBACKI input (Initial value) Bit 2 VFINV Description 0 The VFBACKI pin state is used directly as the VFBACKI input 1 The VFBACKI pin state is inverted before use as the VFBACKI input (Initial value) Bit 1 HIINV Description 0 The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are used directly as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs (Initial value) 1 The HSYNCI and CSYNCI pin states are inverted before use as the HSYNCI and CSYNCI inputs Bit 0 VIINV Description 0 The VSYNCI pin state is used directly as the VSYNCI input 1 The VSYNCI pin state is inverted before use as the VSYNCI input Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 346 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.2.2 Timer Connection Register O (TCONRO) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 HOE VOE CLOE CBOE HOINV VOINV 1 0 CLOINV CBOINV Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCONRO is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output signal output, phase inversion, etc. TCONRO is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 4—Output Enable (HOE, VOE, CLOE, CBOE): These bits control enabling/disabling of horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNCO), vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCO), clamp waveform (CLAMPO), and blanking waveform (CBLANK) output. When output is disabled, the state of the relevant pin is determined by the port DR and DDR, FRT, TMR, and PWM settings. Output enabling/disabling control does not affect the port, FRT, or TMR input functions, but some FRT and TMR input signal sources are determined by the SCONE bit in TCONRI. Bit 7 HOE Description 0 The P44/TMO1/HIRQ1/HSYNCO pin functions as the P44/TMO1/HIRQ1 pin (Initial value) 1 The P44/TMO1/HIRQ1/HSYNCO pin functions as the HSYNCO pin Bit 6 VOE Description 0 The P61/FTOA/KIN1/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the P61/FTOA/ KIN1/CIN1 pin (Initial value) 1 The P61/FTOA/KIN1/CIN1/VSYNCO pin functions as the VSYNCO pin Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 347 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 5 CLOE Description 0 The P64/FTIC/KIN4/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the P64/FTIC/KIN4/CIN4 pin (Initial value) 1 The P64/FTIC/KIN4/CIN4/CLAMPO pin functions as the CLAMPO pin Bit 4 CBOE Description 0 The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the P27/A15/PW15 pin 1 In mode 1 (expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled): The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the A15 pin (Initial value) In modes 2 and 3 (modes with on-chip ROM enabled): The P27/A15/PW15/CBLANK pin functions as the CBLANK pin Bits 3 to 0—Output Synchronization Signal Inversion (HOINV, VOINV, CLOINV, CBOINV): These bits select inversion of the output phase of the horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNCO), the vertical synchronization signal (VSYNCO), the clamp waveform (CLAMPO), and the blank waveform (CBLANK). Bit 3 HOINV Description 0 The IHO signal is used directly as the HSYNCO output 1 The IHO signal is inverted before use as the HSYNCO output (Initial value) Bit 2 VOINV Description 0 The IVO signal is used directly as the VSYNCO output 1 The IVO signal is inverted before use as the VSYNCO output (Initial value) Bit 1 CLOINV Description 0 The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is used directly as the CLAMPO output (Initial value) 1 The CLO signal (CL1, CL2, CL3, or CL4 signal) is inverted before use as the CLAMPO output Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 348 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 0 CBOINV Description 0 The CBLANK signal is used directly as the CBLANK output 1 The CBLANK signal is inverted before use as the CBLANK output 13.2.3 (Initial value) Timer Connection Register S (TCONRS) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMRX/Y ISGENE HOMOD1 HOMOD0VOMOD1 VOMOD0 CLMOD1 CLMOD0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCONRS is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit timer TMRX/TMRY access and the synchronization signal output signal source and generation method. TCONRS is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—TMRX/TMRY Access Select (TMRX/Y): The TMRX and TMRY registers can only be accessed when the HIE bit in SYSCR is cleared to 0. In the H8S/2138 Group, some of the TMRX registers and the TMRY registers are assigned to the same memory space addresses (H'FFF0 to H'FFF5), and the TMRX/Y bit determines which registers are accessed. In the H8S/2134 Group, there is no control of TMRY register access by this bit. Bit 7 TMRX/Y Description 0 The TMRX registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 1 The TMRY registers are accessed at addresses H'FFF0 to H'FFF5 (Initial value) Bit 6—Internal Synchronization Signal Select (ISGENE): Selects internal synchronization signals (IHG, IVG, and CL4 signals) as the signal sources for the IHO, IVO, and CLO signals. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 349 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 5 and 4—Horizontal Synchronization Output Mode Select 1 and 0 (HOMOD1, HOMOD0): These bits select the signal source and generation method for the IHO signal. Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ISGENE VOMOD1 VOMOD0 Description 0 0 0 The IHI signal (without 2fH modification) is selected 1 The IHI signal (with 2fH modification) is selected 0 The CL1 signal is selected 1 (Initial value) 1 1 0 0 The IHG signal is selected 1 1 0 1 Bits 3 and 2—Vertical Synchronization Output Mode Select 1 and 0 (VOMOD1, VOMOD0): These bits select the signal source and generation method for the IVO signal. Bit 6 Bit 3 Bit 2 ISGENE VOMOD1 VOMOD0 Description 0 0 0 The IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) is selected (Initial value) 1 The IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) is selected 0 The IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) is selected 1 The IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) is selected 0 The IVG signal is selected 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 350 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bits 1 and 0—Clamp Waveform Mode Select 1 and 0 (CLMOD1, CLMOD0): These bits select the signal source for the CLO signal (clamp waveform). Bit 6 Bit 1 Bit 0 ISGENE CLMOD1 CLMOD2 Description 0 0 0 The CL1 signal is selected 1 The CL2 signal is selected 0 The CL3 signal is selected 1 (Initial value) 1 1 0 0 The CL4 signal is selected 1 1 0 1 13.2.4 Edge Sense Register (SEDGR) Bit 7 6 5 VEDG HEDG CEDG Initial value 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)*1 4 3 2 HFEDG VFEDG PREQF 0 0 0 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 R/(W)*1 1 0 IHI IVI —*2 —*2 R R Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flags. 2. The initial value is undefined since it depends on the pin states. SEDGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to detect a rising edge on the timer connection input pins and the occurrence of 2fH modification, and to determine the phase of the IVI and IHI signals. The upper 6 bits of SEDGR are initialized to 0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. The initial value of the lower 2 bits is undefined, since it depends on the pin states. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 351 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 7—VSYNCI Edge (VEDG): Detects a rising edge on the VSYNCI pin. Bit 7 VEDG Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written in VEDG after reading VEDG = 1 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VSYNCI pin Bit 6—HSYNCI Edge (HEDG): Detects a rising edge on the HSYNCI pin. Bit 6 HEDG Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written in HEDG after reading HEDG = 1 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HSYNCI pin Bit 5—CSYNCI Edge (CEDG): Detects a rising edge on the CSYNCI pin. Bit 5 CEDG Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written in CEDG after reading CEDG = 1 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the CSYNCI pin Bit 4—HFBACKI Edge (HFEDG): Detects a rising edge on the HFBACKI pin. Bit 4 HFEDG Description 0 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in HFEDG after reading HFEDG = 1 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the HFBACKI pin Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 352 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 3—VFBACKI Edge (VFEDG): Detects a rising edge on the VFBACKI pin. Bit 3 VFEDG Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written in VFEDG after reading VFEDG = 1 1 [Setting condition] When a rising edge is detected on the VFBACKI pin Bit 2—Pre-Equalization Flag (PREQF): Detects the occurrence of an IHI signal 2fH modification condition. The generation of a falling/rising edge in the IHI signal during a mask interval is expressed as the occurrence of a 2fH modification condition. For details, see section 13.3.4, IHI Signal and 2fH Modification. Bit 2 PREQF Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written in PREQF after reading PREQF = 1 1 [Setting condition] When an IHI signal 2fH modification condition is detected Bit 1—IHI Signal Level (IHI): Indicates the current level of the IHI signal. Signal source and phase inversion selection for the IHI signal depends on the contents of TCONRI. Read this bit to determine whether the input signal is positive or negative, then maintain the IHI signal at positive phase by modifying TCONRI. Bit 1 IHI Description 0 The IHI signal is low 1 The IHI signal is high Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 353 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 0—IVI Signal Level (IVI): Indicates the current level of the IVI signal. Signal source and phase inversion selection for the IVI signal depends on the contents of TCONRI. Read this bit to determine whether the input signal is positive or negative, then maintain the IVI signal at positive phase by modifying TCONRI. Bit 0 IVI Description 0 The IVI signal is low 1 The IVI signal is high 13.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP13, MSTP12, and MSTP8 bits are set to 1, the 16-bit free-running timer, 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1, and 8-bit timer channels X and Y and timer connection, respectively, halt and enter module stop mode. See section 24.5, Module Stop Mode, for details. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTP13): Specifies FRT module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 5 MSTP13 Description 0 FRT module stop mode is cleared 1 FRT module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 354 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] MSTPCRH Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTP12): Specifies 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 4 MSTP12 Description 0 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode is cleared 1 8-bit timer channel 0 and 1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRH Bit 0—Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 0 MSTP8 Description 0 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode is cleared 1 8-bit timer channel X and Y and timer connection module stop mode is set (Initial value) 13.3 Operation 13.3.1 PWM Decoding (PDC Signal Generation) The timer connection facility and TMRX can be used to decode a PWM signal in which 0 and 1 are represented by the pulse width. To do this, a signal in which a rising edge is generated at regular intervals must be selected as the IHI signal. The timer counter (TCNT) in TMRX is set to count the internal clock pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal). The value to be used as the threshold for deciding the pulse width is written in TCORB. The PWM decoder contains a delay latch which uses the IHI signal as data and compare-match signal B (CMB) as a clock, and the state of the IHI signal (the result of the pulse width decision) at the compare-match signal B timing after TCNT is reset by the rise of the IHI signal is output as the PDC signal. The pulse width setting using TICRR and TICRF of TMRX can be used to determine the pulse width decision threshold. Examples of TCR and TCORB settings are shown in tables 13.3 and 13.4, and the timing chart is shown in figure 13.2. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 355 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.3 Examples of TCR Settings Bit(s) Abbreviation Contents Description 7 CMIEB 0 6 CMIEA 0 Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled 5 OVIE 0 4 and 3 CCLR1, CCLR0 11 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal) 2 to 0 CKS2 to CKS0 001 Incremented on internal clock: φ Table 13.4 Examples of TCORB (Pulse Width Threshold) Settings φ:10 MHz φ: 12 MHz φ: 16 MHz φ: 20 MHz H'07 0.8 µs 0.67 µs 0.5 µs 0.4 µs H'0F 1.6 µs 1.33 µs 1 µs 0.8 µs H'1F 3.2 µs 2.67 µs 2 µs 1.6 µs H'3F 6.4 µs 5.33 µs 4 µs 3.2 µs H'7F 12.8 µs 10.67 µs 8 µs 6.4 µs IHI signal is tested at compare-match IHI signal PDC signal TCNT TCORB (threshold) Counter reset caused by IHI signal Counter clear caused by TCNT overflow At the 2nd compare-match, IHI signal is not tested Figure 13.2 Timing Chart for PWM Decoding Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 356 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.3.2 Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1/CL2/CL3 Signal Generation) The timer connection facility and TMRX can be used to generate signals with different duty cycles and rising/falling edges (clamp waveforms) in synchronization with the input signal (IHI signal). Three clamp waveforms can be generated: the CL1, CL2, and CL3 signals. In addition, the CL4 signal can be generated using TMRY. The CL1 signal rises simultaneously with the rise of the IHI signal, and when the CL1 signal is high, the CL2 signal rises simultaneously with the fall of the IHI signal. The fall of both the CL1 and the CL2 signal can be specified by TCORA. The rise of the CL3 signal can be specified as simultaneous with the sampling of the fall of the IHI signal using the system clock, and the fall of the CL3 signal can be specified by TCORC. The CL3 signal can also fall when the IHI signal rises. TCNT in TMRX is set to count internal clock pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (IHI signal). The value to be used as the CL1 signal pulse width is written in TCORA. Write a value of H'02 or more in TCORA when internal clock φ is selected as the TMRX counter clock, and a value or H'01 or more when φ/2 is selected. When internal clock φ is selected, the CL1 signal pulse width is (TCORA set value + 3 ± 0.5). When the CL2 signal is used, the setting must be made so that this pulse width is greater than the IHI signal pulse width. The value to be used as the CL3 signal pulse width is written in TCORC. The TICR register in TMRX captures the value of TCNT at the inverse of the external reset signal edge (in this case, the falling edge of the IHI signal). The timing of the fall of the CL3 signal is determined by the sum of the contents of TICR and TCORC. Caution is required if the rising edge of the IHI signal precedes the fall timing set by the contents of TCORC, since the IHI signal will cause the CL3 signal to fall. Examples of TMRX TCR settings are the same as those in table 13.3. The clamp waveform timing charts are shown in figures 13.3 and 13.4. Since the rise of the CL1 and CL2 signals is synchronized with the edge of the IHI signal, and their fall is synchronized with the system clock, the pulse width variation is equivalent to the resolution of the system clock. Both the rise and the fall of the CL3 signal are synchronized with the system clock and the pulse width is fixed, but there is a variation in the phase relationship with the IHI signal equivalent to the resolution of the system clock. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 357 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] IHI signal CL1 signal CL2 signal TCNT TCORA Figure 13.3 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL1 and CL2 Signals) IHI signal CL3 signal TCNT TICR+TCORC TICR Figure 13.4 Timing Chart for Clamp Waveform Generation (CL3 Signal) 13.3.3 Measurement of 8-Bit Timer Divided Waveform Period The timer connection facility, TMR1, and the free-running timer (FRT) can be used to measure the period of an IHI signal divided waveform. Since TMR1 can be cleared by a rising edge of inverted IVI signal, the rise and fall of the IHI signal divided waveform can be virtually synchronized with the IVI signal. This enables period measurement to be carried out efficiently. To measure the period of an IHI signal divided waveform, TCNT in TMR1 is set to count the external clock (IHI signal) pulses and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverted IVI signal). The value to be used as the division factor is written in TCORA, and the TMO output method is specified by the OS bits in TCSR. Examples of TCR and TCSR settings are shown in table 13.5, and the timing chart for measurement of the IVI signal and IHI signal divided waveform periods is shown in figure 13.5. The period of the IHI signal divided waveform is given by (ICRD(3) – ICRD(2)) × the resolution. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 358 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.5 Examples of TCR and TCSR Settings Register Bit(s) Abbreviation Contents Description TCR in TMR1 7 CMIEB 0 6 CMIEA 0 5 OVIE 0 4 and 3 CCLR1, CCLR0 11 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverted IVI signal) 2 to 0 CKS2 to CKS0 101 TCNT is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock (IHI signal) 3 to 0 OS3 to OS0 0011 Not changed by compare-match B; output inverted by compare-match A (toggle output): division by 512 TCSR in TMR1 1001 TCR in FRT 6 IEDGB 0/1 Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled or when TCORB < TCORA, 1 output on compare-match B, and 0 output on compare-match A: division by 256 0: FRC value is transferred to ICRB on falling edge of input capture input B (IHI divided signal waveform) 1: FRC value is transferred to ICRB on rising edge of input capture input B (IHI divided signal waveform) TCSR in FRT 1 and 0 CKS1, CKS0 01 FRC is incremented on internal clock: φ/8 0 0 FRC clearing is disabled CCLRA Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 359 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] IVI signal IHI signal divided waveform ICRB(4) ICRB(3) ICRB(2) ICRB(1) FRC ICRB Figure 13.5 Timing Chart for Measurement of IVI Signal and IHI Signal Divided Waveform Periods 13.3.4 IHI Signal and 2fH Modification By using the timer connection FRT, even if there is a part of the IHI signal with twice the frequency, this can be eliminated. In order for this function to operate properly, the duty cycle of the IHI signal must be approximately 30% or less, or approximately 70% or above. The 8-bit OCRDM contents or twice the OCRDM contents can be added automatically to the data captured in ICRD in the FRT, and compare-matches generated at these points. The interval between the two compare-matches is called a mask interval. A value equivalent to approximately 1/3 the IHI signal period is written in OCRDM. ICRD is set so that capture is performed on the rise of the IHI signal. Since the IHI signal supplied to the IHO signal selection circuit is normally set on the rise of the IHI signal and reset on the fall, its waveform is the same as that of the original IHI signal. When 2fH modification is selected, IHI signal edge detection is disabled during mask intervals. Capture is also disabled during these intervals. Examples of FRT TCR settings are shown in table 13.6, and the 2fH modification timing chart is shown in figure 13.6. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 360 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.6 Examples of TCR, TCSR, TCOR, and OCRDM Settings Register Bit(s) Abbreviation Contents Description TCR in FRT 4 IEDGD 1 FRC value is transferred to ICRD on the rising edge of input capture input D (IHI signal) 1 and 0 CKS1, CKS0 01 FRC is incremented on internal clock: φ/8 TCSR in FRT 0 CCLRA 0 FRC clearing is disabled TCOR in FRT 7 ICRDMS 1 ICRD is set to the operating mode in which OCRDM is used OCRDM7 to OCRDM0 H'01 to H'FF Specifies the period during which ICRD operation is masked OCRDM in FRT 7 to 0 IHI signal (without 2fH modification) IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Mask interval ICRD + OCRDM × 2 ICRD + OCRDM FRC ICRD Figure 13.6 2fH Modification Timing Chart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 361 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.3.5 IVI Signal Fall Modification and IHI Synchronization By using the timer connection TMR1, the fall of the IVI signal can be shifted backward by the specified number of IHI signal waveforms. Also, the fall of the IVI signal can be synchronized with the rise of the IHI signal. To perform 8-bit timer divided waveform period measurement, TCNT in TMR1 is set to count external clock (IHI signal) pulses, and to be cleared on the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverse of the IVI signal). The number of IHI signal pulses until the fall of the IVI signal is written in TCORB. Since the IVI signal supplied to the IVO signal selection circuit is normally set on the rise of the IVI signal and reset on the fall, its waveform is the same as that of the original IVI signal. When fall modification is selected, a reset is performed on a TMR1 TCORB compare-match. The fall of the waveform generated in this way can be synchronized with the rise of the IHI signal, regardless of whether or not fall modification is selected. Examples of TMR1 TCORB, TCR, and TCSR settings are shown in table 13.7, and the fall modification/IHI synchronization timing chart is shown in figure 13.7. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 362 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.7 Examples of TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings Register TCR in TMR1 TCSR in TMR1 Bit(s) Abbreviation Contents Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled 7 CMIEB 0 6 CMIEA 0 5 OVIE 0 4 and 3 CCLR1, CCLR0 11 TCNT is cleared by the rising edge of the external reset signal (inverse of the IVI signal) 2 to 0 CKS2 to CKS0 101 TCNT is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock (IHI signal) 3 to 0 OS3 to OS0 0011 Not changed by compare-match B; output inverted by compare-match A (toggle output) 1001 TOCRB in TMR1 H'03 (example) or when TCORB ≤ TCORA, 1 output on compare-match B, 0 output on comparematch A Compare-match on the 4th (example) rise of the IHI signal after the rise of the inverse of the IVI signal IHI signal IVI signal (PDC signal) IVO signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) IVO signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) IVO signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) TCNT 0 1 2 3 4 5 TCNT = TCORB (3) Figure 13.7 Fall Modification/IHI Synchronization Timing Chart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 363 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.3.6 Internal Synchronization Signal Generation (IHG/IVG/CL4 Signal Generation) By using the timer connection FRT and TMRY, it is possible to automatically generate internal signals (IHG and IVG signals) corresponding to the IHI and IVI signals. As the IHG signal is synchronized with the rise of the IVG signal, the IHG signal period must be made a divisor of the IVG signal period in order to keep it constant. In addition, the CL4 signal can be generated in synchronization with the IHG signal. The contents of OCRA in the FRT are updated by the automatic addition of the contents of OCRAR or OCRAF, alternately, each time a compare-match occurs. A value corresponding to the 0 interval of the IVG signal is written in OCRAR, and a value corresponding to the 1 interval of the IVG signal is written in OCRAF. The IVG signal is set by a compare-match after an OCRAR addition, and reset by a compare-match after an OCRAF addition. The IHG signal is the TMRY 8-bit timer output. TMRY is set to count internal clock pulses, and to be cleared on TCORA compare-match, to fix the period and set the timer output. TCORB is set so as to reset the timer output. The IVG signal is connected as the TMRY reset input (TMRI), and the rise of the IVG signal can be treated in the same way as a TCORA compare-match. The CL4 signal is a waveform that rises within one system clock period after the fall of the IHG signal, and has a 1 interval of 6 system clock periods. Examples of settings of TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR in TMRY, and OCRAR, OCRAF, and TCR in the FRT, are shown in table 13.8, and the IHG signal/IVG signal timing chart is shown in figure 13.8. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 364 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Table 13.8 Examples of OCRAR, OCRAF, TOCR, TCORA, TCORB, TCR, and TCSR Settings Register TCR in TMRY Bit(s) Abbreviation Contents Description Interrupts due to compare-match and overflow are disabled 7 CMIEB 0 6 CMIEA 0 5 OVIE 0 4 and 3 CCLR1, CCLR0 01 2 to 0 CKS2 to CKS0 001 TCNT is incremented on internal clock: φ/4 3 to 0 OS3 to OS0 0110 0 output on compare-match B 1 output on compare-match A TOCRA in TMRY H'3F (example) IHG signal period = φ × 256 TOCRB in TMRY H'03 (example) IHG signal 1 interval = φ × 16 01 FRC is incremented on internal clock: φ/8 OCRAR in FRT H'7FEF (example) IVG signal 0 interval = φ × 262016 OCRAF in FRT H'000F (example) IVG signal 1 interval = φ × 128 1 OCRA is set to the operating mode in which OCRAR and OCRAF are used TCSR in TMRY TCR in FRT TOCR in FRT 1 and 0 6 CKS1, CKS0 OCRAMS TCNT is cleared by compare-match A IVG signal period = φ × 262144 (1024 times IHG signal) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 365 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] IVG signal OCRA (1) = OCRA (0) + OCRAF OCRA (2) = OCRA (1) + OCRAR OCRA (3) = OCRA (2) + OCRAF OCRA (4) = OCRA (3) + OCRAR OCRA FRC 6 system clocks 6 system clocks 6 system clocks CL4 signal IHG signal TCORA TCORB TCNT Figure 13.8 IVG Signal/IHG Signal/CL4 Signal Timing Chart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 366 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.3.7 HSYNCO Output With the HSYNCO output, the meaning of the signal source to be selected and use or non-use of modification varies according to the IHI signal source and the waveform required by external circuitry. The meaning of the HSYNCO output in each mode is shown in table 13.9. Table 13.9 Meaning of HSYNCO Output in Each Mode Mode IHI Signal IHO Signal Meaning of IHO Signal No signal HFBACKI input IHI signal (without 2fH modification) HFBACKI input is output directly IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Meaningless unless there is a double-frequency part in the HFBACKI input CL1 signal HFBACKI input 1 interval is changed before output IHG signal Internal synchronization signal is output IHI signal (without 2fH modification) CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is output directly IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Double-frequency part of CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is eliminated before output CL1 signal CSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) horizontal synchronization signal part is separated before output IHG signal Internal synchronization signal is output IHI signal (without 2fH modification) HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is output directly IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Double-frequency part of HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) is eliminated before output CL1 signal HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) horizontal synchronization signal part is separated before output IHG signal Internal synchronization signal is output IHI signal (without 2fH modification) HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) is output directly IHI signal (with 2fH modification) Meaningless unless there is a double-frequency part in the HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) CL1 signal HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) 1 interval is changed before output IHG signal Internal synchronization signal is output S-on-G mode CSYNCI input Composite HSYNCI mode input Separate mode HSYNCI input Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 367 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] 13.3.8 VSYNCO Output With the VSYNCO output, the meaning of the signal source to be selected and use or non-use of modification varies according to the IVI signal source and the waveform required by external circuitry. The meaning of the VSYNCO output in each mode is shown in table 13.10. Table 13.10 Meaning of VSYNCO Output in Each Mode Mode IVI Signal IVO Signal Meaning of IVO Signal No signal VFBACKI input IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) VFBACKI input is output directly IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) Meaningless unless VFBACKI input is synchronized with HFBACKI input IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) VFBACKI input fall is modified before output IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) VFBACKI input fall is modified and signal is synchronized with HFBACKI input before output IVG signal Internal synchronization signal is output IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated before output IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, and signal is synchronized with CSYNCI/HSYNCI input before output IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, and fall is modified before output IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) CSYNCI/HSYNCI input (composite synchronization signal) vertical synchronization signal part is separated, fall is modified, and signal is synchronized with CSYNCI/HSYNCI input before output IVG signal Internal synchronization signal is output S-on-G PDC signal mode or composite mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 368 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Mode IVI Signal IVO Signal Meaning of IVO Signal Separate mode VSYNCI input IVI signal (without fall modification or IHI synchronization) VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) is output directly IVI signal (without fall modification, with IHI synchronization) Meaningless unless VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) is synchronized with HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) IVI signal (with fall modification, without IHI synchronization) VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) fall is modified before output IVI signal (with fall modification and IHI synchronization) VSYNCI input (vertical synchronization signal) fall is modified and signal is synchronized with HSYNCI input (horizontal synchronization signal) before output IVG signal Internal synchronization signal is output 13.3.9 CBLANK Output Using the signals generated/selected with timer connection, it is possible to generate a waveform based on the composite synchronization signal (blanking waveform). One kind of blanking waveform is generated by combining HFBACKI and VFBACKI inputs, with the phase polarity made positive by means of bits HFINV and VFINV in TCONRI, with the IVO signal. The composition logic is shown in figure 13.9. HFBACKI input (positive) VFBACKI input (positive) Falling edge sensing Reset Rising edge sensing Set Q CBLANK signal (positive) IVO signal (positive) Figure 13.9 CBLANK Output Waveform Generation Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 369 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 13 Timer Connection [H8S/2138 Group] Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 370 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have an on-chip watchdog timer with two channels (WDT0, WDT1) for monitoring system operation. The WDT outputs an overflow signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal or internal NMI interrupt signal. When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. 14.1.1 Features WDT features are listed below. • Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode WOVI interrupt generation in interval timer mode • Internal reset or internal interrupt generated when the timer counter overflows Choice of internal reset or NMI interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode • Choice of 8 (WDT0) or 16 (WDT1) counter input clocks Maximum WDT interval: system clock period × 131072 × 256 Subclock can be selected for the WDT1 input counter Maximum interval when the subclock is selected: subclock period × 256 × 256 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 371 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.1.2 Block Diagram Figures 14.1 (a) and (b) show block diagrams of WDT0 and WDT1. Internal NMI interrupt request signal*2 Interrupt control Overflow Clock Clock select Reset control Internal reset signal*1 φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Internal clock source TCNT TCSR Module bus Bus interface WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter Notes: 1. For the internal reset signal, the reset of the WDT that overflowed first has priority. 2. The internal NMI interrupt request signal can be output independently by either WDT0 or WDT1. The interrupt controller does not distinguish between NMI interrupt requests from WDT0 and WDT1. Figure 14.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 372 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Internal bus WOVI (interrupt request signal) Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Internal NMI (interrupt request signal)*2 Interrupt control Overflow Clock φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Clock select Reset control Internal reset signal*1 Internal clock source TCNT φSUB/2 φSUB/4 φSUB/8 φSUB/16 φSUB/32 φSUB/64 φSUB/128 φSUB/256 TCSR Bus interface Module bus Internal bus WOVI (interrupt request signal) WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter Notes: 1. For the internal reset signal, the reset of the WDT that overflowed first has priority. 2. The internal NMI interrupt request signal can be output independently by either WDT0 or WDT1. The interrupt controller does not distinguish between NMI interrupt requests from WDT0 and WDT1. Figure 14.1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 373 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 14.1 describes the WDT input pin. Table 14.1 WDT Pin Name Symbol I/O Function External subclock input pin EXCL Input WDT1 prescaler counter input clock 14.1.4 Register Configuration The WDT has four registers, as summarized in table 14.2. These registers control clock selection, WDT mode switching, the reset signal, etc. Table 14.2 WDT Registers Address* 1 Channel 0 1 Common Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Write* H'00 H'FFA8 H'FFA8 H'00 H'FFA8 H'FFA9 H'00 H'FFEA H'FFEA 2 Read Timer control/status register 0 TCSR0 3 R/(W)* Timer counter 0 TCNT0 R/W Timer control/status register 1 TCSR1 R/(W)* Timer counter 1 TCNT1 R/W H'00 H'FFEA H'FFEB System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFC4 H'FFC4 3 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details of write operations, see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. 3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 374 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.2 Register Descriptions 14.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF flag in TCSR is set to 1, and an internal reset, NMI interrupt, interval timer interrupt (WOVI), etc., can be generated, according to the mode selected by the WT/IT bit and RST/NMI bit. TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 375 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) • TCSR0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVF WT/IT TME RSTS RST/NMI CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. • TCSR1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVF WT/IT TME PSS RST/NMI CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. TCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: * TCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 14.2.4, Notes on Register Access. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 376 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): A status flag that indicates that TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • Write 0 in the TME bit • Read TCSR when OVF = 1*, then write 0 in OVFA [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) (When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset.) Note: * When OVF flag is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled, OVF=1 must be read at least twice. Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT IT): IT Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when TCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset or NMI interrupt when TCNT overflows. Bit 6 WT/IT IT Description 0 Interval timer: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when TCNT overflows (Initial value) 1 Watchdog timer: Generates a reset or NMI interrupt when TCNT overflows Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted. Bit 5 TME Description 0 TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted 1 TCNT counts (Initial value) TCSR0 Bit 4—Reset Select (RSTS): Reserved. This bit should not be set to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 377 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) TCSR1 Bit 4—Prescaler Select (PSS): Selects the input clock source for TCNT in WDT1. For details, see the description of the CKS2 to CKS0 bits below. TCSR1 Bit 4 PSS Description 0 TCNT counts φ-based prescaler (PSM) divided clock pulses 1 TCNT counts φSUB-based prescaler (PSS) divided clock pulses (Initial value) Bit 3—Reset or NMI (RST/NMI NMI): NMI Specifies whether an internal reset or NMI interrupt is requested on TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode. Bit 3 RST/NMI NMI Description 0 An NMI interrupt is requested 1 An internal reset is requested (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select an internal clock source, obtained by dividing the system clock (φ), or subclock (φSUB) for input to TCNT. • WDT0 input clock selection Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Overflow Period* (when φ = 20 MHz) 0 0 0 φ/2 (Initial value) 25.6 µs 1 φ/64 819.2 µs 1 0 φ/128 1.6 ms 1 φ/512 6.6 ms 0 0 φ/2048 26.2 ms 1 φ/8192 104.9 ms 0 φ/32768 419.4 ms 1 φ/131072 1.68 s 1 1 Note: * Description The overflow period is the time from when TCNT starts counting up from H'00 until overflow occurs. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 378 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) • WDT1 input clock selection Bit 4 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PSS CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Overflow Period* (when φ = 20 MHz and φSUB = 32.768 kHz) 0 0 0 0 φ/2 (Initial value) 25.6 µs 1 φ/64 819.2 µs 0 φ/128 1.6 ms 1 φ/512 6.6 ms 0 φ/2048 26.2 ms 1 φ/8192 104.9 ms 0 φ/32768 419.4 ms 1 φ/131072 1.68 s 0 φSUB/2 15.6 ms 1 φSUB/4 31.3 ms 0 φSUB/8 62.5 ms 1 φSUB/16 125 ms 0 φSUB/32 250 ms 1 φSUB/64 500 ms 0 φSUB/128 1s 1 φSUB/256 2s 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: 14.2.3 * Description The overflow period is the time from when TCNT starts counting up from H'00 until overflow occurs. System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W Only bit 3 is described here. For details on functions not related to the watchdog timer, see sections 3.2.2 and 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 379 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) Bit 3—External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow in addition to external reset input. XRST is a read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset, and when the RST/NMI bit is 1, is cleared to 0 by an internal reset due to watchdog timer overflow. Bit 3 XRST Description 0 Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow 1 Reset is generated by external reset input 14.2.4 (Initial value) Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer’s TCNT and TCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0): These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to with byte transfer instructions. Figure 14.2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. For a write to TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. TCNT write 15 8 7 H'5A Address: H'FFA8 0 Write data TCSR write 15 Address: H'FFA8 8 7 H'A5 0 Write data Figure 14.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0) Reading TCNT and TCSR (Example of WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFA8 for TCSR, and H'FFA9 for TCNT. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 380 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.3 Operation 14.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits in TCSR to 1. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally by writing H'00) before overflow occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, an internal reset or NMI interrupt request is generated. When the RST/NMI bit is set to 1, the chip is reset for 518 system clock periods (518 φ) by a counter overflow. This is illustrated in figure 14.3. When the RST/NMI bit cleared to 0, an NMI interrupt request is generated by a counter overflow. An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and reset input from the RES pin are handled via the same vector. The reset source can be identified from the value of the XRST bit in SYSCR. If a reset caused by an input signal from the RES pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur simultaneously, the RES pin reset has priority, and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1. An NMI interrupt request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are handled via the same vector. Simultaneous handling of a watchdog timer NMI interrupt request and an NMI pin interrupt request must therefore be avoided. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 381 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) TCNT value Overflow H'FF Time H'00 WT/IT = 1 TME = 1 H'00 written to TCNT OVF = 1* WT/IT = 1 H'00 written TME = 1 to TCNT Internal reset signal 518 system clock periods Legend: WT/IT: Timer mode select bit TME: Timer enable bit OVF: Overflow flag Note: * Cleared to 0 by an internal reset when OVF is set to 1. XRST is cleared to 0. Figure 14.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode 14.3.2 Interval Timer Operation To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in TCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time TCNT overflows, provided that the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 14.4. This function can be used to generate interrupt requests at regular intervals. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 382 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) TCNT count Overflow H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Time H'00 WT/IT = 0 TME = 1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Legend: WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 14.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode 14.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF) The OVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 14.5. If NMI request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, when TCNT overflows the OVF bit in TCSR is set to 1 and at the same time an NMI interrupt is requested. φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF Figure 14.5 Timing of OVF Setting Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 383 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.4 Interrupts During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When NMI interrupt request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, an overflow generates an NMI interrupt request. 14.5 Usage Notes 14.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 14.6 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ Address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 14.6 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 384 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0 If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0. 14.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. 14.5.4 Counter Value in Transitions between High-Speed Mode, Subactive Mode, and Watch Mode If the mode is switched between high-speed mode and subactive mode or between high-speed mode and watch mode when WDT1 is used as a realtime clock counter, an error will occur in the counter value when the internal clock is switched. When the mode is switched from high-speed mode to subactive mode or watch mode, the increment timing is delayed by approximately 2 or 3 clock cycles when the WDT1 control clock is switched from the main clock to the subclock. Also, since the main clock oscillator is halted during subclock operation, when the mode is switched from watch mode or subactive mode to high-speed mode, the clock is not supplied until internal oscillation stabilizes. As a result, after oscillation is started, counter incrementing is halted during the oscillation stabilization time set by bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, and there is a corresponding discrepancy in the counter value. Caution is therefore required when using WDT1 as the realtime clock counter. No error occurs in the counter value while WDT1 is operating in the same mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 385 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 14 Watchdog Timer (WDT) 14.5.5 OVF Flag Clear Condition To clear OVF flag in WOVI handling routine, read TCSR when OVF=1, then write with 0 to OVF, as stated above. When WOVI is masked and OVF flag is poling, if contention between OVF flag set and TCSR read is occurred, OVF=1 is read but OVF can not be cleared by writing with 0 to OVF. In this case, reading TCSR when OVF=1 two times meet the requirements of OVF clear condition. Please read TCSR when OVF=1 two times before writing with 0 to OVF. LOOP BTST.B BEQ MOV.B MOV.W MOV.W #7,@TCSR LOOP @TCSR,R0L #H’A521,R0 R0,@TCSR Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 386 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 ; ; ; ; ; OVF flag read if OVF=1, exit from loop OVF=1 read again OVF flag clear : Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group are equipped with a 3-channel serial communication interface (SCI). The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). One of the three SCI channels can transmit and receive IrDA communication waveforms based on IrDA specification version 1.0. 15.1.1 Features SCI features are listed below. • Choice of asynchronous or synchronous serial communication mode Asynchronous mode Serial data communication is executed using an asynchronous system in which synchronization is achieved character by character Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA) A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data communication with a number of processors Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Synchronous mode Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous communication function Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 387 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) One serial data transfer format Data length: 8 bits Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected • Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data • LSB-first or MSB-first transfer can be selected This selection can be made regardless of the communication mode (with the exception of 7-bit data transfer in asynchronous mode)* Note: * LSB-first transfer is used in the examples in this section. • On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected • Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from SCK pin • Capability of transmit and receive clock output The P86/SCK1 and P42/SCK2 pins are CMOS type outputs The P52/SCK0 pin is an NMOS push-pull type output in the H8S/2138 Group and a CMOS output in the H8S/2134 Group (When the P52/SCK0 pin is used as an output in the H8S/2138 Group, external pull-up resistor must be connected in order to output high level) • Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources (transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive error) that can issue requests independently The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive-data-full interrupt can activate the data transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 388 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.1.2 Block Diagram Bus interface Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Module data bus RDR RxD TxD RSR TDR SCMR SSR SCR SMR TSR BRR φ Baud rate generator Transmission/ reception control Parity generation Parity check SCK Internal data bus φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 Clock External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Legend: RSR: Receive shift register RDR: Receive data register TSR: Transmit shift register TDR: Transmit data register SMR: Serial mode register SCR: Serial control register SSR: Serial status register SCMR: Serial interface mode register BRR: Bit rate register Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of SCI Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 389 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 15.1 shows the serial pins used by the SCI. Table 15.1 SCI Pins Channel Pin Name Symbol* I/O Function 0 Serial clock pin 0 SCK0 I/O SCI0 clock input/output Receive data pin 0 RxD0 Input SCI0 receive data input Transmit data pin 0 TxD0 Output SCI0 transmit data output 1 2 Note: 15.1.4 * Serial clock pin 1 SCK1 I/O SCI1 clock input/output Receive data pin 1 RxD1 Input SCI1 receive data input Transmit data pin 1 TxD1 Output SCI1 transmit data output Serial clock pin 2 SCK2 I/O SCI2 clock input/output Receive data pin 2 RxD2/IrRxD Input SCI2 receive data input (normal/IrDA) Transmit data pin 2 TxD2/IrTxD Output SCI2 transmit data output (normal/IrDA) The abbreviations SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text, omitting the channel number. Register Configuration The SCI has the internal registers shown in table 15.2. These registers are used to specify asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control the transmitter/receiver. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 390 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.2 SCI Registers Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* 0 Serial mode register 0 SMR0 R/W H'00 Bit rate register 0 BRR0 R/W H'FF H'FFD8* 3 H'FFD9* Serial control register 0 SCR0 R/W H'00 H'FFDA H'FF H'FFDB H'84 H'FFDC H'FFDD 3 H'FFDE* 1 2 Transmit data register 0 TDR0 R/W Serial status register 0 SSR0 R/(W)* Receive data register 0 RDR0 R H'00 Serial interface mode register 0 SCMR0 R/W H'F2 Serial mode register 1 SMR1 R/W H'00 Bit rate register 1 BRR1 R/W H'FF 2 3 H'FF88* 3 H'FF89* 3 Serial control register 1 SCR1 R/W H'00 H'FF8A Transmit data register 1 TDR1 R/W H'FF H'FF8B Serial status register 1 SSR1 R/(W)* H'84 H'FF8C Receive data register 1 RDR1 R H'00 Serial interface mode register 1 SCMR1 R/W H'F2 H'FF8D 3 H'FF8E* Serial mode register 2 SMR2 R/W H'00 Bit rate register 2 BRR2 R/W H'FF H'FFA0* 3 H'FFA1* Serial control register 2 SCR2 R/W H'00 H'FFA2 Transmit data register 2 TDR2 R/W H'FF H'FFA3 SSR2 2 R/(W)* H'84 H'FFA4 Serial status register 2 Common 1 2 3 Receive data register 2 RDR2 R H'00 H'FFA5 Serial interface mode register 2 SCMR2 R/W H'F2 H'FFA6* Keyboard comparator control register KBCOMP R/W H'00 H'FEE4 Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 3 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 3. Some serial communication interface registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. In this case, register selection is performed by the IICE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 391 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.2 Register Descriptions 15.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write — — — — — — — — RSR is a register used to receive serial data. The SCI sets serial data input from the RxD pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 15.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R RDR is a register that stores received serial data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can be performed. RDR is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 392 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Read/Write — — — — — — — — TSR is a register used to transmit serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then sends the data to the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0). When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR to TSR is not performed if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 15.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. When the SCI detects that TSR is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next transmit data to TDR during serial transmission of the data in TSR. TDR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 393 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 C/A CHR PE O/E STOP MP CKS1 CKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W SMR is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI’s serial transfer format and select the baud rate generator clock source. SMR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7—Communication Mode (C/A A): Selects asynchronous mode or synchronous mode as the SCI operating mode. Bit 7 C/A A Description 0 Asynchronous mode 1 Synchronous mode (Initial value) Bit 6—Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting. Bit 6 CHR Description 0 8-bit data 7-bit data* 1 Note: * (Initial value) When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted, and LSBfirst/MSB-first selection is not available. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 394 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 5—Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In synchronous mode, or when a multiprocessor format is used, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the PE bit setting. Bit 5 PE Description 0 Parity bit addition and checking disabled Parity bit addition and checking enabled* 1 Note: * (Initial value) When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit. Bit 4—Parity Mode (O/E E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and checking. The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, when parity bit addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is used. Bit 4 O/E E Description 0 Even parity* 2 Odd parity* 1 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even. 2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 395 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 3—Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode. The STOP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If synchronous mode is set the STOP bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added. Bit 3 STOP Description 0 1 stop bit* 2 2 stop bits* 1 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. 2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit character before it is sent. In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit character. Bit 2—Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode; it is invalid in synchronous mode. For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 15.3.3, Multiprocessor Communication Function. Bit 2 MP Description 0 Multiprocessor function disabled 1 Multiprocessor format selected Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 396 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bits 1 and 0—Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from φ, φ/4, φ/16, and φ/64, according to the setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0. For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see section 15.2.8, Bit Rate Register. Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS1 CKS0 Description 0 0 φ clock 1 φ/4 clock 0 φ/16 clock 1 φ/64 clock 1 15.2.6 (Initial value) Serial Control Register (SCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W SCR is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source. SCR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 397 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 7—Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR to TSR and the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1. Bit 7 TIE Description 0 Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled* 1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled Note: * (Initial value) TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0. Bit 6—Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR and the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1. Bit 6 RIE Description 0 Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request disabled* (Initial value) 1 Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request enabled Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0. Bit 5—Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI. Bit 5 TE Description 0 Transmission disabled* 2 Transmission enabled* 1 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1. 2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and the TDRE flag in SSR is cleared to 0. SMR setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the TE bit to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 398 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 4—Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI. Bit 4 RE Description 0 1 Reception disabled* 2 Reception enabled* 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states. 2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. SMR setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE bit to 1. Bit 3—Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when receiving with the MP bit in SMR set to 1. The MPIE bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0. Bit 3 MPIE Description 0 Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] • When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 • When data with MPB = 1 is received Multiprocessor interrupts enabled* 1 Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. Note: * When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR , is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled. Bit 2—Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request generation if there is no valid transmit data in TDR when the MSB is transmitted. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 399 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2 TEIE Description 0 Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request disabled* Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request enabled* 1 Note: (Initial value) TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0. * Bits 1 and 0—Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or the serial clock input pin. The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, and in the case of external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). The setting of bits CKE1 and CKE0 must be carried out before the SCI’s operating mode is determined using SMR. For details of clock source selection, see table 15.9 in section 15.3, Operation. Bit 1 Bit 0 CKE1 CKE0 Description 0 0 Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port* Synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock 1 output* Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output* Synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock output Asynchronous mode External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input* Synchronous mode External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input 3 External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input* 1 1 0 1 Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode External clock/SCK pin functions as serial clock input Notes: 1. Initial value 2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate. 3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 400 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 1 2 3 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R R R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. SSR is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and multiprocessor bits. SSR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified. SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7—Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from TDR to TSR and the next serial data can be written to TDR. Bit 7 TDRE Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 • When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR [Setting conditions] (Initial value) • When the TE bit in SCR is 0 • When data is transferred from TDR to TSR and data can be written to TDR Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 401 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 6—Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR. Bit 6 RDRF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value) • When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1 • When the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and reads data from RDR 1 [Setting condition] When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Note: RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. Bit 5—Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception, causing abnormal termination. Bit 5 ORER Description 0 [Clearing condition] 1 (Initial value)* When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1* 2 Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR, and the data received subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 402 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 4—Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 4 FER Description 0 [Clearing condition] 1 (Initial value)* When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the SCI checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception ends, 2 and the stop bit is 0 * Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 0; the second stop bit is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Bit 3—Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination. Bit 3 PER Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)* 1 When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1 1 [Setting condition] When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does not 2 match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR* Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0. 2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR but the RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 403 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2—Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended. The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified. Bit 2 TEND Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1 • When the DTC is activated by a TXI interrupt and writes data to TDR [Setting conditions] (Initial value) • When the TE bit in SCR is 0 • When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character Bit 1—Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data. MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified. Bit 1 MPB Description 0 [Clearing condition] 1 [Setting condition] (Initial value)* When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received Note: * Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor format. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 404 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 0—Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using a multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the transmit data. The MPBT bit setting is invalid when a multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting, and in synchronous mode. Bit 0 MPBT Description 0 Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted 1 Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted 15.2.8 (Initial value) Bit Rate Register (BRR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W BRR is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR. BRR can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. BRR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. As baud rate generator control is performed independently for each channel, different values can be set for each channel. Table 15.3 shows sample BRR settings in asynchronous mode, and table 15.4 shows sample BRR settings in synchronous mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 405 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.3 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 2 MHz φ = 2.097152 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) 110 1 141 0.03 1 148 150 1 103 0.16 1 300 0 207 0.16 600 0 103 1200 0 2400 4800 φ = 2.4576 MHz N Error (%) –0.04 1 174 108 0.21 1 0 217 0.21 0.16 0 108 0.21 51 0.16 0 54 0 25 0.16 0 0 12 0.16 0 9600 — — — 19200 — — 31250 0 38400 — φ = 3 MHz N Error (%) –0.26 1 212 0.03 127 0.00 1 155 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 77 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 155 0.16 –0.70 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16 26 1.14 0 31 0.00 0 38 0.16 13 –2.48 0 15 0.00 0 19 –2.34 0 6 –2.48 0 7 0.00 0 9 –2.34 — — — — 0 3 0.00 0 4 –2.34 1 0.00 — — — — — — 0 2 0.00 — — — — — 0 1 0.00 — — — n n Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 3.6864 MHz φ = 4 MHz φ = 4.9152 MHz φ = 5 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) 110 2 64 0.70 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 –0.25 150 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 300 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 600 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1200 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 2400 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36 9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 19200 0 5 0.00 — — — 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 31250 — — — 0 3 0.00 0 4 –1.70 0 4 0.00 38400 0 2 0.00 — — — 0 3 0.00 3 1.73 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 406 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 0 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 6 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) 110 2 106 150 2 300 φ = 6.144 MHz φ = 7.3728 MHz φ = 8 MHz N Error (%) n N Error (%) –0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 2 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1 600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 9600 0 19 –2.34 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 19200 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.40 — — — 0 7 0.00 38400 0 4 –2.34 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 — — — n N Error (%) –0.07 2 141 0.03 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 n Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 9.8304 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) 110 2 174 150 2 300 φ = 10 MHz N Error (%) –0.26 2 177 127 0.00 2 1 255 0.00 600 1 127 1200 0 255 2400 0 4800 φ = 12 MHz φ = 12.288 MHz N Error (%) n N Error (%) –0.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0.00 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 0.00 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 0.00 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 19 –2.34 0 19 0.00 31250 0 9 –1.70 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 11 2.40 38400 0 7 0.00 7 1.73 0 9 –2.34 0 9 0.00 n 0 n 0 0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 407 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 14 MHz φ = 14.7456 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) 110 2 248 150 2 300 φ = 16 MHz φ = 17.2032 MHz N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) –0.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03 3 75 0.48 181 0.16 2 191 0.00 2 207 0.16 2 223 0.00 2 90 0.16 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 2 111 0.00 600 1 181 0.16 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 223 0.00 1200 1 90 0.16 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 111 0.00 2400 0 181 0.16 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 223 0.00 4800 0 90 0.16 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 111 0.00 9600 0 45 –0.93 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 55 0.00 19200 0 22 –0.93 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 27 0.00 31250 0 13 0.00 0 14 –1.70 0 15 0.00 0 16 1.20 38400 — — — 0 11 0.00 12 0.16 0 13 0.00 n 0 Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 18 MHz Bit Rate (bits/s) n N Error (%) 110 3 79 150 2 300 φ = 19.6608 MHz φ = 20 MHz N Error (%) n N Error (%) –0.12 3 86 0.31 3 88 –0.25 233 0.16 2 255 0.00 3 64 0.16 2 116 0.16 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 600 1 233 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 1200 1 116 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 2400 0 233 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 4800 0 116 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 9600 0 58 –0.69 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 19200 0 28 1.02 0 31 0.00 0 32 –1.36 31250 0 17 0.00 0 19 –1.70 0 19 0.00 38400 0 14 –2.34 0 15 0.00 15 1.73 n Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 408 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 0 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.4 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) φ = 2 MHz Bit Rate φ = 4 MHz (bits/s) n N n N 110 3 70 — — 250 2 124 2 500 1 249 2 1k 1 124 2.5 k 0 5k φ = 8 MHz φ = 10 MHz φ = 16 MHz n N n N n N 249 3 124 — — 3 249 124 2 249 — — 3 1 249 2 124 — — 199 1 99 1 199 1 0 99 0 199 1 99 10 k 0 49 0 99 0 25 k 0 19 0 39 0 50 k 0 9 0 19 100 k 0 4 0 250 k 0 1 0 0* 500 k 1M φ = 20 MHz n N 124 — — 2 249 — — 249 2 99 2 124 1 124 1 199 1 249 199 0 249 1 99 1 124 79 0 99 0 159 0 199 0 39 0 49 0 79 0 99 9 0 19 0 24 0 39 0 49 0 3 0 7 0 9 0 15 0 19 0 1 0 3 0 4 0 7 0 9 0 0* 0 1 0 3 0 4 0 1 0 0* 2.5 M 5M 0 0* Legend: Blank: Cannot be set. —: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error. *: Continuous transfer is not possible. Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 409 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) The BRR setting is found from the following equations. Asynchronous mode: N= φ 64 × 22n–1 ×B × 106 – 1 Synchronous mode: N= Where B: N: φ: n: φ × 106 – 1 8 × 22n–1 × B Bit rate (bits/s) BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255) Operating frequency (MHz) Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3) (See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.) SMR Setting n Clock CKS1 CKS0 0 φ 0 0 1 φ/4 0 1 2 φ/16 1 0 3 φ/64 1 1 The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following equation: φ × 106 Error (%) = – 1 × 100 2n–1 (N + 1) × B × 64 × 2 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 410 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 15.6 and 15.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input. Table 15.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) φ (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) n N 2 62500 0 0 2.097152 65536 0 0 2.4576 76800 0 0 3 93750 0 0 3.6864 115200 0 0 4 125000 0 0 4.9152 153600 0 0 5 156250 0 0 6 187500 0 0 6.144 192000 0 0 7.3728 230400 0 0 8 250000 0 0 9.8304 307200 0 0 10 312500 0 0 12 375000 0 0 12.288 384000 0 0 14 437500 0 0 14.7456 460800 0 0 16 500000 0 0 17.2032 537600 0 0 18 562500 0 0 19.6608 614400 0 0 20 625000 0 0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 411 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode) φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 2 0.5000 31250 2.097152 0.5243 32768 2.4576 0.6144 38400 3 0.7500 46875 3.6864 0.9216 57600 4 1.0000 62500 4.9152 1.2288 76800 5 1.2500 78125 6 1.5000 93750 6.144 1.5360 96000 7.3728 1.8432 115200 8 2.0000 125000 9.8304 2.4576 153600 10 2.5000 156250 12 3.0000 187500 12.288 3.0720 192000 14 3.5000 218750 14.7456 3.6864 230400 16 4.0000 250000 17.2032 4.3008 268800 18 4.5000 281250 19.6608 4.9152 307200 20 5.0000 312500 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 412 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode) φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) 2 0.3333 333333.3 4 0.6667 666666.7 6 1.0000 1000000.0 8 1.3333 1333333.3 10 1.6667 1666666.7 12 2.0000 2000000.0 14 2.3333 2333333.3 16 2.6667 2666666.7 18 3.0000 3000000.0 20 3.3333 3333333.3 15.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register (SCMR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — SDIR SINV — SMIF Initial value 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 Read/Write — — — — R/W R/W — R/W SCMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select SCI functions. SCMR is initialized to H'F2 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3—Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion format. Bit 3 SDIR Description 0 TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first (Initial value) Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first 1 TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 413 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Bit 2—Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the O/E bit in SMR. Bit 2 SINV Description 0 TDR contents are transmitted without modification (Initial value) Receive data is stored in RDR without modification 1 TDR contents are inverted before being transmitted Receive data is stored in RDR in inverted form Bit 1—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 0—Serial Communication Interface Mode Select (SMIF): Reserved bit. 1 should not be written in this bit. Bit 0 SMIF Description 0 Normal SCI mode 1 Reserved mode (Initial value) 15.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When bit MSTP7, MSTP6, or MSTP5 is set to 1, SCI0, SCI1, or SCI2 operation, respectively, stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 414 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) MSTPCRL Bit 7—Module Stop (MSTP7): Specifies the SCI0 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 7 MSTP7 Description 0 SCI0 module stop mode is cleared 1 SCI0 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRL Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTP6): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 6 MSTP6 Description 0 SCI1 module stop mode is cleared 1 SCI1 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRL Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTP5): Specifies the SCI2 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 5 MSTP5 Description 0 SCI2 module stop mode is cleared 1 SCI2 module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 415 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.2.11 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IrE IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 KBADE KBCH2 KBCH1 KBCH0 Bit Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W KBCOMP is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the functions of SCI2 and the A/D converter. KBCOMP is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—IrDA Enable (IrE): Specifies normal SCI operation or IrDA operation for SCI2 input/output. Bit 7 IrE Description 0 The TxD2/IrTxD and RxD2/IrRxD pins function as TxD2 and RxD2 1 The TxD2/IrTxD and RxD2/IrRxD pins function as IrTxD and IrRxD (Initial value) Bits 6 to 4—IrDA Clock Select 2 to 0 (IrCKS2 to IrCKS0): These bits specify the high pulse width in IrTxD output pulse encoding when the IrDA function is enabled. Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 Description 0 0 0 B × 3/16 (3/16 of the bit rate) 1 φ/2 1 1 0 1 0 φ/4 1 φ/8 0 φ/16 1 φ/32 0 φ/64 1 φ/128 (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0—Keyboard Comparator Control: See the description in section 19, A/D converter. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 416 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.3 Operation 15.3.1 Overview The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using SMR as shown in table 15.8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR, as shown in table 15.9. Asynchronous Mode • Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits • Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length) • Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception • Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency as the bit rate can be output When external clock is selected: A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the on-chip baud rate generator is not used) Synchronous Mode • Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data • Detection of overrun errors during reception • Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source When internal clock is selected: The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip When external clock is selected: The on-chip baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial clock Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 417 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.8 SMR Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection SMR Settings SCI Transfer Format Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3 C/A A CHR MP PE STOP Mode 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Asynchronous mode Data Length Multiprocessor Bit Parity Bit 8-bit data No No 0 0 0 1 0 Yes 7-bit data No 1 bit Yes 1 bit 2 bits 2 bits 1 1 1 1 — — — 0 — 1 — 0 — 1 — — 1 bit 2 bits 1 0 1 bit 2 bits 1 1 Stop Bit Length Asynchronous mode (multiprocessor format) 8-bit data Yes No 1 bit 2 bits 7-bit data 1 bit 2 bits Synchronous mode 8-bit data No None Table 15.9 SMR and SCR Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection SMR SCR Setting SCI Transfer Clock Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0 C/A A CKE1 CKE0 Mode 0 0 0 Asynchronous mode 1 1 0 Clock Source SCK Pin Function Internal SCI does not use SCK pin Outputs clock with same frequency as bit rate External Inputs clock with frequency of 16 times the bit rate Internal Outputs serial clock External Inputs serial clock 1 1 0 0 1 1 Synchronous mode 0 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 418 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the start of communication and followed by one or two stop bits indicating the end of communication. Serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-bycharacter basis. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 15.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level), recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication. One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSBfirst order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level). In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit. Idle state (mark state) LSB 1 Serial data 0 D0 MSB D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 Start bit Transmit/receive data 1 bit 7 or 8 bits D6 D7 1 0/1 1 1 Parity Stop bit(s) bit 1 bit, or none 1 or 2 bits One unit of transfer data (character or frame) Figure 15.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 419 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Data Transfer Format Table 15.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12 transfer formats can be selected by settings in SMR. Table 15.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) SMR Settings Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length CHR PE MP STOP 1 2 0 0 0 0 S 8-bit data STOP 0 0 0 1 S 8-bit data STOP STOP 0 1 0 0 S 8-bit data P STOP 0 1 0 1 S 8-bit data P STOP STOP 1 0 0 0 S 7-bit data STOP 1 0 0 1 S 7-bit data STOP STOP 1 1 0 0 S 7-bit data P STOP 1 1 0 1 S 7-bit data P STOP STOP 0 — 1 0 S 8-bit data MPB STOP 0 — 1 1 S 8-bit data MPB STOP STOP 1 — 1 0 S 7-bit data MPB STOP 1 — 1 1 S 7-bit data MPB STOP STOP Legend: S: Start bit STOP: Stop bit P: Parity bit MPB: Multiprocessor bit Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 420 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI’s serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details of SCI clock source selection, see table 15.9. When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the rising edge of the clock is at the center of each transmit data bit, as shown in figure 15.3. 0 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1 1 frame Figure 15.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase (Asynchronous Mode) Data Transfer Operations SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including initialization, since operation is uncertain. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 421 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 15.4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0. Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR [2] Set value in BRR [3] Wait No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits When the clock is selected in asynchronous mode, it is output immediately after SCR settings are made. [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. [4] <Initialization completed> Figure 15.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 422 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 15.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. [1] Initialization Start transmission Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes [3] Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? Yes [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, one frame of 1s is output and transmission is enabled. [4] [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set DDR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin to 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 <End> Figure 15.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 423 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit: One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output. A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 424 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 15.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. 1 Start bit 0 Data D0 D1 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit D7 0/1 1 0 Data D0 D1 Parity Stop bit bit D7 0/1 1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt Data written to TDR and TXI interrupt request generated TDRE flag cleared to 0 in request generated TXI interrupt handling routine TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 15.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 425 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode): Figure 15.7 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. Initialization [1] Start reception [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error handling and break detection: Read ORER, PER, and If a receive error occurs, read the [2] FER flags in SSR ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error Yes handling, ensure that the ORER, PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1? PER, and FER flags are all [3] cleared to 0. Reception cannot No Error handling be resumed if any of these flags (Continued on next page) are set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the value of [4] Read RDRF flag in SSR the input port corresponding to the RxD pin. No RDRF = 1? [4] SCI status check and receive data read : Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 <End> [5] [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the stop bit for the current frame is received, read the RDRF flag, read RDR, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by an RXI interrupt and the RDR value is read. Figure 15.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 426 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [3] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes No Break? Yes Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 No PER = 1? Yes Parity error handling Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 <End> Figure 15.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 427 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal synchronization and starts reception. 2. The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order. 3. The parity bit and stop bit are received. After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks. a. Parity check: The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity (even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR. b. Stop bit check: The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1. If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. c. Status check: The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 15.11. Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred. Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be cleared to 0. 4. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 428 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence Receive Error Abbreviation Occurrence Condition Data Transfer Overrun error ORER When the next data reception is Receive data is not completed while the RDRF flag transferred from RSR to in SSR is set to 1 RDR Framing error FER When the stop bit is 0 Parity error PER When the received data differs Receive data is transferred from the parity (even or odd) set from RSR to RDR in SMR Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR Figure 15.8 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode. 1 Start bit 0 Data D0 D1 Parity Stop Start bit bit bit D7 0/1 1 0 Data D0 D1 Parity Stop bit bit D7 0/1 0 1 Idle state (mark state) RDRF FER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine ERI interrupt request generated by framing error 1 frame Figure 15.8 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 429 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using a multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors sharing transmission lines. When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added. The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent. When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors. Figure 15.9 shows an example of inter-processor communication using a multiprocessor format. Data Transfer Format There are four data transfer formats. When a multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid. For details, see table 15.10. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 430 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Clock See the section on asynchronous mode. Transmitting station Serial communication line Receiving station A Receiving station B Receiving station C Receiving station D (ID = 01) (ID = 02) (ID = 03) (ID = 04) Serial data H'01 H'AA (MPB = 1) ID transmission cycle: receiving station specification (MPB = 0) Data transmission cycle: data transmission to receiving station specified by ID Legend: MPB: Multiprocessor bit Figure 15.9 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) Data Transfer Operations Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission: Figure 15.10 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 431 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [1] [1] SCI initialization: Initialization Start transmission Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and set MPBT bit in SSR Clear TDRE flag to 0 No All data transmitted? Yes Read TEND flag in SSR No TEND = 1? Yes No Break output? The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. After the TE bit is set to 1, one frame of 1s is output and transmission is enabled. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR. Set the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 or 1. Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is [3] possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmitdata-empty interrupt (TXI) request, and data is written to TDR. [4] Break output at the end of serial transmission: To output a break in serial transmission, set the port DDR to [4] 1, clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR to 0. Yes Clear DR to 0 and set DDR to 1 Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 <End> Figure 15.10 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 432 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin in the following order. a. Start bit: One 0-bit is output. b. Transmit data: 8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order. c. Multiprocessor bit One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output. d. Stop bit(s): One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output. e. Mark state: 1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent. 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 433 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 15.11 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using a multiprocessor format. 1 Start bit 0 Multiprocessor Stop bit bit Data D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 Start bit 0 Multiproces- Stop 1 sor bit bit Data D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 Idle state (mark state) TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR and TDRE flag cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine TXI interrupt request generated TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 15.11 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception: Figure 15.12 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial reception. The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 434 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization [1] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [2] ID reception cycle: Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1. Start reception Read MPIE bit in SCR Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FER ∨ ORER = 1? [3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and compare it with this station’s ID. If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF flag to 0. If the data is this station’s ID, clear the RDRF flag to 0. Yes No Read RDRF flag in SSR [3] No RDRF = 1? Yes [4] SCI status check and data reception: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the data in RDR. Read receive data in RDR No This station's ID? Yes [5] Receive error handling and break detection: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER and FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After performing the appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER and FER flags are both cleared to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if either of these flags is set to 1. In the case of a framing error, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value. Read ORER and FER flags in SSR FER ∨ ORER = 1? Yes No Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR No All data received? [5] Error handling Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 (Continued on next page) <End> Figure 15.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 435 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [5] Error handling No ORER = 1? Yes Overrun error handling No FER = 1? Yes Yes Break? No Framing error handling Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 Clear ORER, PER, and FER flags in SSR to 0 <End> Figure 15.12 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 436 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Figure 15.13 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception. 1 Start bit 0 Data (ID1) MPB D0 D1 D7 1 Stop bit Start bit 1 0 Data (Data1) MPB D0 D1 D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID1 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated MPIE = 0 RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine If not this station’s ID, RXI interrupt request is MPIE bit is set to 1 not generated, and RDR again retains its state (a) Data does not match station’s ID 1 Start bit 0 Data (ID2) MPB D0 D1 D7 1 Stop bit Start bit 1 0 Data (Data2) MPB D0 D1 D7 0 Stop bit 1 1 Idle state (mark state) MPIE RDRF RDR value ID2 ID1 MPIE = 0 RXI interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine Matches this station’s ID, so reception continues, and data is received in RXI interrupt handling routine Data2 MPIE bit set to 1 again (b) Data matches station’s ID Figure 15.13 Example of SCI Operation in Reception (Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 437 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode In synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses, making it suitable for high-speed serial communication. Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer. Figure 15.14 shows the general format for synchronous serial communication. One unit of transfer data (character or frame) * * Serial clock LSB Serial data Bit 0 MSB Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Don’t care Don’t care Note: * High except in continuous transfer Figure 15.14 Data Format in Synchronous Communication In synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rising edge of the serial clock. In synchronous serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB and ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state. In synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial clock. Data Transfer Format A fixed 8-bit data format is used. No parity or multiprocessor bits are added. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 438 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Clock Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external serial clock input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR. For details on SCI clock source selection, see table 15.9. When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. To perform receive operations in units of one character, select an external clock as the clock source. Data Transfer Operations SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode): Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR to 0, then initialize the SCI as described below. When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not change the settings of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents of RDR. Figure 15.15 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 439 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [1] Set the clock selection in SCR. Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE and RE, to 0. Start initialization Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 [2] Set the data transfer format in SMR and SCMR. Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR (TE, RE bits 0) [1] [3] Write a value corresponding to the bit rate to BRR. This is not necessary if an external clock is used. Set data transfer format in SMR and SCMR [2] Set value in BRR [3] [4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits. Setting the TE and RE bits enables the TxD and RxD pins to be used. Wait No 1-bit interval elapsed? Yes Set TE and RE bits in SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits [4] <Transfer start> Note: In simultaneous transmit and receive operations, the TE bit and RE bit should both be cleared to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously. Figure 15.15 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 440 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Serial Data Transmission (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.16 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission. The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission. [1] Initialization Start transmission Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 No All data transmitted? [3] Yes Read TEND flag in SSR [1] SCI initialization: The TxD pin is automatically designated as the transmit data output pin. [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. [3] Serial transmission continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission, be sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR, and then clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. No TEND = 1? Yes Clear TE bit in SCR to 0 <End> Figure 15.16 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 441 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR. 2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated. When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock. The serial transmit data is sent from the TxD pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with the MSB (bit 7). 3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7). If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission of the next frame is started. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the TxD pin maintains its state. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated. 4. After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state. Figure 15.17 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 442 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Transfer direction Serial clock Serial data Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 TDRE TEND TXI interrupt request generated Data written to TDR TXI interrupt and TDRE flag request generated cleared to 0 in TXI interrupt handling routine TEI interrupt request generated 1 frame Figure 15.17 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission Serial Data Reception (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception. The following procedure should be used for serial data reception. When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to synchronous, be sure to check that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0. The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor receive operations will be possible. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 443 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) [1] Initialization Start reception [2] Read ORER flag in SSR Yes [3] ORER = 1? No Error handling (Continued below) Read RDRF flag in SSR [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? Yes Clear RE bit in SCR to 0 [5] [1] SCI initialization: The RxD pin is automatically designated as the receive data input pin. [2] [3] Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR , and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [5] Serial reception continuation procedure: To continue serial reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. <End> [3] Error handling Overrun error handling Clear ORER flag in SSR to 0 <End> Figure 15.18 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 444 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below. 1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output. 2. The received data is stored in RSR in LSB-to-MSB order. After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be transferred from RSR to RDR. If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR. If a receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 15.11. Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error has been found in the error check. 3. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request is generated. Also, if the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated. Figure 15.19 shows an example of SCI operation in reception. Serial clock Serial data Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7 RDRF ORER RXI interrupt request generated RDR data read and RDRF flag cleared to 0 in RXI interrupt handling routine RXI interrupt request generated ERI interrupt request generated by overrun error 1 frame Figure 15.19 Example of SCI Operation in Reception Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Synchronous Mode): Figure 15.20 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations. The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive operations. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 445 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Initialization [1] SCI initialization: [1] The TxD pin is designated as the transmit data output pin, and the RxD pin is designated as the receive data input pin, enabling simultaneous transmit and receive operations. Start transmission/reception Read TDRE flag in SSR [2] [2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by a TXI interrupt. No TDRE = 1? Yes Write transmit data to TDR and clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0 [3] Receive error handling: If a receive error occurs, read the ORER flag in SSR , and after performing the appropriate error handling, clear the ORER flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1. Read ORER flag in SSR ORER = 1? No Read RDRF flag in SSR Yes [3] Error handling [4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR and clear the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an RXI interrupt. [4] No RDRF = 1? Yes [5] Serial transmission/reception Read receive data in RDR, and clear RDRF flag in SSR to 0 No All data received? [5] Yes Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0 <End> Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these bits to 1 simultaneously. continuation procedure: To continue serial transmission/ reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received, finish reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0. Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted, read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is possible, then write data to TDR and clear the TDRE flag to 0. Checking and clearing of the TDRE flag is automatic when the DTC is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request and data is written to TDR. Also, the RDRF flag is cleared automatically when the DTC is activated by a receive-datafull interrupt (RXI) request and the RDR value is read. Figure 15.20 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 446 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.3.5 IrDA Operation Figure 15.21 shows a block diagram of the IrDA function. When the IrDA function is enabled with bit IrE in KBCOMP, the SCI channel 2 TxD2 and RxD2 signals are subjected to waveform encoding/decoding conforming to IrDA specification version 1.0 (IrTxD and IrRxD pins). By connecting these pins to an infrared transceiver/receiver, it is possible to implement infrared transmission/reception conforming to the IrDA specification version 1.0 system. In the IrDA specification version 1.0 system, communication is started at a transfer rate of 9600 bps, and subsequently the transfer rate can be varied as necessary. As the IrDA interface in the H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group does not include a function for varying the transfer rate automatically, the transfer rate setting must be changed by software. IrDA TxD2/IrTxD Pulse encoder RxD2/IrRxD Pulse decoder SCI2 TxD RxD KBCOMP Figure 15.21 Block Diagram of IrDA Function Transmission: In transmission, the output signal (UART frame) from the SCI is converted to an IR frame by the IrDA interface (see figure 15.22). When the serial data is 0, a high-level pulses of 3/16 the bit rate (interval equivalent to the width of one bit) is output (initial value). The high-level pulse can be varied according to the setting of bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 in KBCOMP. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 447 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) The high-level pulse width is fixed at a minimum of 1.41 µs, and a maximum of (3/16 + 2.5%) × bit rate or (3/16 × bit rate) + 1.08 µs. When system clock φ is 20 MHz, 1.6 µs can be set as the minimum high-level pulse width at 1.41 µs or above. When the serial data is 1, no pulse is output. UART frame Data Start bit 1 0 1 0 0 Stop bit 1 0 Transmission 1 1 0 Reception IR frame Data Start bit 0 1 0 1 Bit interval 0 0 Stop bit 1 1 0 1 Pulse width is 1.6 µs to 3/16 bit interval Figure 15.22 IrDA Transmit/Receive Operations Reception: In reception, IR frame data is converted to a UART frame by the IrDA interface, and input to the SCI. When a high-level pulse is detected, 0 data is output, and if there is no pulse during a one-bit interval, 1 data is output. Note that a pulse shorter than the minimum pulse width of 1.41 µs will be identified as a 0 signal. High-Level Pulse Width Selection: Table 15.12 shows possible settings for bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 (minimum pulse width), and H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group operating frequencies and bit rates, for making the pulse width shorter than 3/16 times the bit rate in transmission. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 448 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Table 15.12 Bit IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Settings Bit Rate (bps) (Upper Row) / Bit Interval × 3/16 (µs) (Lower Row) Operating Frequency φ (MHz) 2400 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 78.13 19.53 9.77 4.88 3.26 1.63 2 010 010 010 010 010 — 2.097152 010 010 010 010 010 — 2.4576 010 010 010 010 010 — 3 011 011 011 011 011 — 3.6864 011 011 011 011 011 011 4.9152 011 011 011 011 011 011 5 011 011 011 011 011 011 6 100 100 100 100 100 100 6.144 100 100 100 100 100 100 7.3728 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 100 100 100 100 100 100 9.8304 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 12 101 101 101 101 101 101 12.288 101 101 101 101 101 101 14 101 101 101 101 101 101 14.7456 101 101 101 101 101 101 16 101 101 101 101 101 101 16.9344 101 101 101 101 101 101 17.2032 101 101 101 101 101 101 18 101 101 101 101 101 101 19.6608 101 101 101 101 101 101 20 101 101 101 101 101 101 Legend: —: An SCI bit rate setting cannot be mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 449 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 15.4 SCI Interrupts The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt (ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request. Table 15.13 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in SCR. Each kind of interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently. When the TDRE flag in SSR is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated. A TXI interrupt can activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by a TEI interrupt request. When the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER, PER, or FER flag in SSR is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated. An RXI interrupt can activate the DTC to perform data transfer. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0 automatically when data transfer is performed by the DTC. The DTC cannot be activated by an ERI interrupt request. Table 15.13 SCI Interrupt Sources Channel Interrupt Source Description DTC Activation Priority* 0 ERI Receive error (ORER, FER, or PER) Not possible High RXI Receive data register full (RDRF) Possible TXI Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Possible TEI Transmit end (TEND) Not possible ERI Receive error (ORER, PER, or PER) Not possible RXI Receive data register full (RDRF) Possible TXI Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Possible TEI Transmit end (TEND) Not possible ERI Receive error (ORER, PER, or PER) Not possible RXI Receive data register full (RDRF) Possible TXI Transmit data register empty (TDRE) Possible TEI Transmit end (TEND) Not possible 1 2 Note: * Low The table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 450 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt will have priority for acceptance, and the TDRE flag and TEND flag may be cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be accepted in this case. 15.5 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the SCI. Relation between Writes to TDR and the TDRE Flag The TDRE flag in SSR is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred from TDR to TSR. When the SCI transfers data from TDR to TSR, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Data can be written to TDR regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is written to TDR when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR will be lost since it has not yet been transferred to TSR. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR. Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR is as shown in table 15.14. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR to RDR, and the receive data is lost. Table 15.14 State of SSR Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data SSR Status Flags RDRF ORER FER PER Receive Data Transfer RSR to RDR Receive Errors 1 1 0 0 X Overrun error 0 0 1 0 O Framing error 0 0 0 1 O Parity error 1 1 1 0 X Overrun error + framing error 1 1 0 1 X Overrun error + parity error 0 0 1 1 O Framing error + parity error 1 1 1 1 X Overrun error + framing error + parity error Notes: O: Receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR. X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR to RDR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 451 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Break Detection and Processing: When a framing error (FER) is detected, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is set, and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set. Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again. Sending a Break: The TxD pin has a dual function as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) is determined by DR and DDR. This feature can be used to send a break. Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is replaced by the value of DR (the pin does not function as the TxD pin until the TE bit is set to 1). Consequently, DDR and DR for the port corresponding to the TxD pin should first be set to 1. To send a break during serial transmission, first clear DR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0. When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the TxD pin. Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Synchronous Mode Only): Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0. Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode: In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a base clock with a frequency of 16 times the transfer rate. In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the base clock, and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the base clock. This is illustrated in figure 15.23. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 452 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) 16 clocks 8 clocks 0 7 15 0 7 15 0 Internal base clock Receive data (RxD) Start bit D0 D1 Synchronization sampling timing Data sampling timing Figure 15.23 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode Thus the receive margin in asynchronous mode is given by equation (1) below. M = 0.5 – Where M: N: D: L: F: 1 D – 0.5 (1 + F) × 100% – (L – 0.5)F – 2N N .......... (1) Receive margin (%) Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16) Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0) Frame length (L = 9 to 12) Absolute value of clock rate deviation Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in equation (1), a receive margin of 46.875% is given by equation (2) below. When D = 0.5 and F = 0, M = 0.5 – 1 × 100% 2 × 16 = 46.875% .......... (2) However, this is only a theoretical value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in system design. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 453 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 15 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Restrictions on Use of DTC • When an external clock source is used as the serial clock, the transmit clock should not be input until at least 5 φ clock cycles after TDR is updated by the DTC. Misoperation may occur if the transmit clock is input within 4 clock cycles after TDR is updated. (Figure 15.24) • When RDR is read by the DTC, be sure to set the activation source to the relevant SCI receivedata-full interrupt (RXI). SCK t TDRE LSB Serial data D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Note: When operating on an external clock, set t > 4 states. Figure 15.24 Example of Synchronous Transmission by DTC Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 454 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 D7 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 2 A two-channel I C bus interface is available as an option in the H8S/2138 Group. The I C bus interface is not available for the H8S/2134 Group. Observe the following notes when using this option. 1. For mask-ROM versions, a W is added to the part number in products in which this optional function is used. Examples: HD6432137SW 2. The product number is identical for F-ZTAT versions. However, be sure to inform your Renesas sales representative if you will be using this option. 16.1 Overview 2 2 A two-channel I C bus interface is available for the H8S/2138 Group as an option. The I C bus 2 interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I C bus (inter-IC bus) interface 2 functions. The register configuration that controls the I C bus differs partly from the Philips configuration, however. 2 Each I C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer data, saving board and connector space. 16.1.1 Features • Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation 2 Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only • Conforms to Philips I C bus interface (I C bus format) 2 2 • Two ways of setting slave address (I C bus format) 2 • Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I C bus format) 2 • Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I C bus format) 2 • Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I C bus format) 2 • Wait function in master mode (I C bus format) 2 A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 455 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Wait function in slave mode (I C bus format) 2 A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible. • Three interrupt sources Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I C bus format and address reception after loss of master arbitration) 2 Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in 2 slave receive mode (I C bus format) Stop condition detection • Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode) • Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins) Two pins—P52/SCL0 and P97/SDA0—(normally NMOS push-pull outputs) function as NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive function is selected. Two pins—P86/SCL1 and P42/SDA1—(normally CMOS pins) function as NMOS-only outputs when the bus drive function is selected. • Automatic switching from formatless mode to I C bus format (channel 0 only) 2 Formatless operation (no start/stop conditions, non-addressing mode) in slave mode Operation using a common data pin (SDA) and independent clock pins (VSYNCI, SCL) Automatic switching from formatless mode to I C bus format on the fall of the SCL pin 2 16.1.2 Block Diagram 2 Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the I C bus interface. Figure 16.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. Channel 0 I/O pins and channel 1 I/O pins differ in structure, and have different specifications for permissible applied voltages. For details, see section 25, Electrical Characteristics. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 456 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Formatless dedicated clock (channel 0 only) φ PS ICCR SCL Clock control Noise canceler Bus state decision circuit SDA ICSR Arbitration decision circuit ICDRT Output data control circuit ICDRS Internal data bus ICMR ICDRR Noise canceler Address comparator SAR, SARX Interrupt generator Legend: ICCR: I2C bus control register ICMR: I2C bus mode register ICSR: I2C bus status register ICDR: I2C bus data register SAR: Slave address register SARX: Slave address register X PS: Prescaler Interrupt request 2 Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of I C Bus Interface Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 457 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Vcc VCC SCL SCL SDA SDA SCL in SDA out (Master) SCL in H8S/2138 Group chip SCL out SCL out SDA in SDA in SDA out SDA out SCL SDA SDA in SCL SDA SCL out SCL in (Slave 1) (Slave 2) 2 Figure 16.2 I C Bus Interface Connections (Example: H8S/2138 Group Chip as Master) 16.1.3 Input/Output Pins 2 Table 16.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I C bus interface. 2 Table 16.1 I C Bus Interface Pins Channel Name Abbreviation* I/O Function 0 Serial clock SCL0 I/O IIC0 serial clock input/output Serial data SDA0 I/O IIC0 serial data input/output Formatless serial clock VSYNCI Input IIC0 formatless serial clock input Serial clock SCL1 I/O IIC1 serial clock input/output Serial data SDA1 I/O IIC1 serial data input/output 1 Note: * In the text, the channel subscript is omitted, and only SCL and SDA are used. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 458 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.1.4 Register Configuration 2 Table 16.2 summarizes the registers of the I C bus interface. Table 16.2 Register Configuration Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* 2 ICCR0 R/W H'01 H'FFD8 2 ICSR0 R/W H'00 H'FFD9 2 ICDR0 R/W — I C bus mode register ICMR0 R/W H'00 2 H'FFDE* 2 H'FFDF* Slave address register SAR0 R/W H'00 Second slave address register SARX0 R/W H'01 H'FFDF* 2 H'FFDE* 2 ICCR1 R/W H'01 H'FF88 2 ICSR1 R/W H'00 H'FF89 2 ICDR1 R/W — I C bus mode register 2 ICMR1 R/W H'00 2 H'FF8E* 2 H'FF8F* Slave address register SAR1 R/W H'00 Second slave address register SARX1 R/W H'01 H'FF8F* 2 H'FF8E* Serial timer control register STCR R/W H'00 H'FFC3 DDC switch register DDCSWR R/W H'0F H'FEE6 Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 Channel Name 0 I C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register 2 1 I C bus control register I C bus status register I C bus data register Common 1 2 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2 2. The register that can be written or read depends on the ICE bit in the I C bus control 2 register. The slave address register can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the I C bus mode register can be accessed when ICE = 1. 2 The I C bus interface registers are assigned to the same addresses as other registers. Register selection is performed by means of the IICE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 459 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.2 Register Descriptions 16.2.1 I C Bus Data Register (ICDR) 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICDR7 ICDR6 ICDR5 ICDR4 ICDR3 ICDR2 ICDR1 ICDR0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 • ICDRR Bit ICDRR7 ICDRR6 ICDRR5 ICDRR4 ICDRR3 ICDRR2 ICDRR1 ICDRR0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Read/Write R R R R R R R R 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 • ICDRS Bit ICDRS7 ICDRS6 ICDRR5 ICDRS4 ICDRS3 ICDRS2 ICDRS1 ICDRS0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Read/Write — — — — — — — — 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 • ICDRT Bit ICDRT7 ICDRT6 ICDRT5 ICDRT4 ICDRT3 ICDRT2 ICDRT1 ICDRT0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Read/Write W W W W W W W W • TDRE, RDRF (internal flags) Bit — — TDRE RDRF Initial value 0 0 Read/Write — — Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 460 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read or written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF. If IIC is in transmit mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from ICDRT to ICDRS. If IIC is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset. The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 461 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] TDRE Description 0 The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot be started (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] • When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1) • When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is 2 issued with the I C bus format or serial format selected • When a stop condition is detected with the I C bus format selected • In receive mode (TRS = 0) 2 (A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an acknowledge bit) 1 The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT) [Setting conditions] • In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line state 2 after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I C bus format or serial format selected • At the first transmit mode setting (TRS = 1) (first transmit mode setting only) after 2 the mode is switched from I C bus mode to formatless mode. • When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS (Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS is empty) • When detecting a start condition and then switching from slave receive mode (TRS = 0) state to transmit mode (TRS = 1) (first transmit mode switching only). RDRF Description 0 The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid (Initial value) [Clearing condition] When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode 1 The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read [Setting condition] When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR (Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0 and RDRF = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 462 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 1—Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0, 2 differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I C bus. Bit 0—Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. • I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit 2 • Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only • Formatless mode (channel 0 only): non-addressing format with or without acknowledge bit, slave mode only, start/stop conditions not detected The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 463 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] DDCSWR Bit 6 SAR Bit 0 SARX Bit 0 SW FS FSX Operating Mode 0 0 0 I C bus format 2 • 1 I C bus format • SAR slave address recognized • SARX slave address ignored 0 I C bus format • SAR slave address ignored • SARX slave address recognized Synchronous serial format • 16.2.3 * SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored 0 0 Formatless mode (start/stop conditions not detected) 0 1 • 1 0 1 1 Acknowledge bit used Formatless mode* (start/stop conditions not detected) • Note: (Initial value) 2 1 1 SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized 2 1 No acknowledge bit 2 Do not set this mode when automatic switching to the I C bus format is performed by means of the DDCSWR setting. Second Slave Address Register (SARX) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SVAX6 SVAX5 SVAX4 SVAX3 SVAX2 SVAX1 SVAX0 FSX Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is assigned to the same address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR. SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 464 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bits 7 to 1—Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0): Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to 2 SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I C bus. Bit 0—Format Select X (FSX): Used together with the FS bit in SAR and the SW bit in DDCSWR to select the communication format. • I C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit 2 • Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode only • Formatless mode: non-addressing format with or without acknowledge bit, slave mode only, start/stop conditions not detected The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in SAR. 16.2.4 2 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MLS WAIT CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 BC2 BC1 BC0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency and the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR. ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or LSB-first. If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1. 2 Do not set this bit to 1 when the I C bus format is used. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 465 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 7 MLS Description 0 MSB-first 1 LSB-first (Initial value) Bit 6—Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data 2 and the acknowledge bit, in master mode with the I C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins (with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait inserted. The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the WAIT setting. The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode. Bit 6 WAIT Description 0 Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively 1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits (Initial value) Bits 5 to 3—Serial Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the IICX1 (channel 1) or IICX0 (channel 0) bit in the STCR register, select the serial clock frequency in master mode. They should be set according to the required transfer rate. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 466 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] STCR Bit 5 or 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Transfer Rate IICX CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Note: * φ= 5 MHz φ= 8 MHz φ= 10 MHz φ= 16 MHz φ= 20 MHz 0 φ/28 179 kHz 286 kHz 357 kHz 571 kHz* 1 φ/40 125 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 400 kHz 714 kHz* 500 kHz* 0 φ/48 104 kHz 167 kHz 208 kHz 333 kHz 417 kHz* 1 φ/64 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 156 kHz 250 kHz 313 kHz 0 φ/80 62.5 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 1 φ/100 50.0 kHz 80.0 kHz 100 kHz 160 kHz 200 kHz 0 φ/112 44.6 kHz 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz 143 kHz 179 kHz 1 φ/128 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 156 kHz 0 φ/56 89.3 kHz 143 kHz 179 kHz 286 kHz 357 kHz 1 φ/80 62.5 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 0 φ/96 52.1 kHz 83.3 kHz 104 kHz 167 kHz 208 kHz 1 φ/128 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz 125 kHz 156 kHz 0 φ/160 31.3 kHz 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 1 φ/200 25.0 kHz 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz 80.0 kHz 100 kHz 0 φ/224 22.3 kHz 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz 1 φ/256 19.5 kHz 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz 2 Outside the I C bus interface specification range (normal mode: max. 100 kHz; highspeed mode: max. 400 kHz). Bits 2 to 0—Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be 2 transferred next. With the I C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting should be made while the SCL line is low. The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 467 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 BC2 BC1 BC0 Synchronous Serial Format I C Bus Format 0 0 0 8 9 1 1 2 0 2 3 1 3 4 0 4 5 1 5 6 0 6 7 1 7 8 1 1 0 1 Bits/Frame 2 (Initial value) 2 16.2.5 I C Bus Control Register (ICCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ICE IEIC MST TRS ACKE BBSY IRIC SCP Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/(W)* W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2 ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I C bus interface, enables or disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or disables 2 acknowledgement, confirms the I C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions, and performs interrupt flag confirmation. ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 2 2 Bit 7—I C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not the I C bus interface is to be used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer 2 operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, the I C bus interface module is disabled and the internal state is cleared. The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers can be accessed when ICE is 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 468 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 7 ICE Description 0 I C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function (Initial value) 2 2 Internal state initialization of I C bus interface module SAR and SARX can be accessed 2 1 I C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SCA are driving the bus) ICMR and ICDR can be accessed 2 2 Bit 6—I C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I C bus interface to the CPU. Bit 6 IEIC Description 0 Interrupts disabled 1 Interrupts enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—Master/Slave Select (MST) Bit 4—Transmit/Receive Select (TRS) 2 MST selects whether the I C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode. 2 TRS selects whether the I C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode. 2 In master mode with the I C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition. Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer. MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 469 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 5 Bit 4 MST TRS Operating Mode 0 0 Slave receive mode 1 Slave transmit mode 0 Master receive mode 1 Master transmit mode 1 (Initial value) Bit 5 MST Description 0 Slave mode (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2 2. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master mode 1 Master mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition 2) 2. When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition 2) Bit 4 TRS Description 0 Receive mode (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition 3) 2. When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of clearing condition 3) 2 3. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I C bus format master mode 4. When the SW bit in DDCSWR changes from 1 to 0 1 Transmit mode [Setting conditions] 1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions 3 and 4) 2. When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions 3 and 4) 2 3. When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I C bus format slave mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 470 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 3—Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE): Specifies whether the value of the 2 acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when using the I C bus format is to be ignored and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be aborted and error handling, etc., performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is 0, the value of the received acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always 0. In the H8S/2138 Group, the DTC can be used to perform continuous transfer. The DTC is activated when the IRTR interrupt flag is set to 1 (IRTR is one of two interrupt flags, the other being IRIC). When the ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission, regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 0, and the IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 1. When the DTC is activated, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are cleared to 0 after the specified number of data transfers have been executed. Consequently, interrupts are not generated during continuous data transfer, but if data transmission is completed with a 1 acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is set to 1, the DTC is not activated and an interrupt is generated, if enabled. Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no significance. Bit 3 ACKE Description 0 The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed (Initial value) 1 If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 471 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Bit 2—Bus Busy (BBSY): The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I C bus (SCL, SDA) is busy or free. In master mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions. A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition, clearing BBSY to 0. To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to 2 write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I C bus interface must be set to master transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS should both be set to 1 before writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. Bit 2 BBSY Description 0 Bus is free (Initial value) [Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected 1 Bus is busy [Setting condition] When a start condition is detected 2 2 Bit 1—I C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost in master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is detected. IRIC is set at different times depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 16.3.6, IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR. IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC. When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously without CPU intervention. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 472 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 1 IRIC Description 0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1 2. When ICDR is written or read by the DTC (When the TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared to 0) (This is not always a clearing condition; see the description of DTC operation for details) 1 Interrupt requested [Setting conditions] • I2C bus format master mode 1. When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission) 2. When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1 3. At the end of data transfer (when a wait is not inserted (WAIT=0), at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock pulse, or when a wait is inserted (WAIT=1), at the fall of the 8th transmit/receive clock pulse) 4. When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost (when the AL flag is set to 1) 5. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) • I2C bus format slave mode 1. When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches (when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When the general call address is detected (when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 3. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1 (when the ACKB bit is set to 1) 4. When a stop condition is detected (when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1) • Synchronous serial format, and formatless mode 1. At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1) 2. When a start condition is detected with serial format selected 3. When the SW bit is set to 1 in DDCSWR Except for above, when the condition to set the TDRE or RDRF internal flag to 1 is generated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 473 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 When, with the I C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer. When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. The IRTR flag (the DTC start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address 2 match in I C bus format slave mode. Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set. The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in continuous transfer using the DTC. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed. Table 16.3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states. Table 16.3 Flags and Transfer States MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB State 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Idle state (flag clearing required) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start condition issuance 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Start condition established 1 1/0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Master mode wait 1 1/0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 Master mode transmit/receive end 0 0 1 0 0 0 1/0 1 1/0 1/0 0 Arbitration lost 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 SAR match by first frame in slave mode 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 General call address match 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 SARX match 0 1/0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Slave mode transmit/receive end (except after SARX match) 0 1/0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Slave mode transmit/receive end (after SARX match) 0 1/0 0 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Stop condition detected Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 474 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 0—Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored. Bit 0 SCP Description 0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag 1 Reading always returns a value of 1 (Initial value) Writing is ignored 16.2.6 2 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flags. ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge confirmation and control. ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 475 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 7—Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP): Indicates that a stop condition has been 2 detected during frame transfer in I C bus format slave mode. Bit 7 ESTP Description 0 No error stop condition (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 • 2 In I C bus format slave mode Error stop condition detected [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer • In other modes No meaning Bit 6—Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP): Indicates that a stop condition has been 2 detected after completion of frame transfer in I C bus format slave mode. Bit 6 STOP Description 0 No normal stop condition [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 • 2 In I C bus format slave mode Normal stop condition detected [Setting condition] When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer • In other modes No meaning Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 476 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Bit 5—I C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag 2 (IRTR): Indicates that the I C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception for which DTC activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1 at the same time. IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared automatically when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. Bit 5 IRTR Description 0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1 2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 1 Continuous transfer state [Setting conditions] • 2 In I C bus interface slave mode When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1 • In other modes When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 2 Bit 4—Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in SARX. AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 477 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 4 AASX Description 0 Second slave address not recognized (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1 2. When a start condition is detected 3. In master mode 1 Second slave address recognized [Setting condition] When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0 Bit 3—Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The 2 I C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at 2 nearly the same time, if the I C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master. AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 3 AL 0 Description Bus arbitration won (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1 1 Arbitration lost [Setting conditions] 1. If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode 2. If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode 2 Bit 2—Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the general call address (H'00) is detected. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 478 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 2 AAS Description 0 Slave address or general call address not recognized (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1 3. In master mode 1 Slave address or general call address recognized [Setting condition] When the slave address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode while FS = 0 2 Bit 1—General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): In I C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00). ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive mode. Bit 1 ADZ Description 0 General call address not recognized (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode) 2. When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1 3. In master mode 1 General call address recognized [Setting condition] When the general call address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0 or FS =0 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 479 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 0—Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the transmitting device. When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line (returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal software is read. When this bit is written to, the acknowledge data transmitted at the receipt is rewritten regardless of the TRS value. The data loaded from the receiving device is retained, therefore take care of using bit-manipulation instructions. Bit 0 ACKB Description 0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value) Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (signal is 0) 1 Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data (signal is 1) 16.2.7 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 2 STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the I C interface operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory (F-ZTAT versions), 2 and selects the TCNT input clock source. For details of functions not related to the I C bus interface, see section 3.2.4, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), and the descriptions of the relevant modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 480 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Bits 6 and 5—I C Transfer Select 1 and 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR of IIC1, select the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 16.2.4, 2 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR). 2 2 Bit 4—I C Master Enable (IICE): Controls CPU access to the I C bus interface data and control registers (ICCR, ICSR, ICDR/SARX, ICMR/SAR). Bit 4 IICE Description 0 CPU access to I C bus interface data and control registers is disabled 2 (Initial value) 2 1 CPU access to I C bus interface data and control registers is enabled Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Controls the operation of the flash memory in F-ZTAT versions. For details, see section 21, ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT), and section 22, ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version). Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Source Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICSK0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR, select the clock input to the timer counters (TCNT). For details, see section 12.2.4, Timer Control Register (TCR). 16.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SWE SW IE IF CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/(W)*1 1 W*2 1 W*2 1 W*2 1 W*2 R/W R/W Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 2. Always read as 1. DDCSWR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the IIC channel 0 automatic format switching function. DDCSWR is initialized to H'0F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 481 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 7—DDC Mode Switch Enable (SWE): Selects the function for automatically switching IIC 2 channel 0 from formatless mode to the I C bus format. Bit 7 SWE Description 0 Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I C bus format is disabled (Initial value) 1 Automatic switching of IIC channel 0 from formatless mode to I C bus format is enabled 2 2 2 Bit 6—DDC Mode Switch (SW): Selects either formatless mode or the I C bus format for IIC channel 0. Bit 6 SW Description 0 IIC channel 0 is used with the I C bus format 2 (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1. When 0 is written by software 2. When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 1 IIC channel 0 is used in formatless mode [Setting condition] When 1 is written in SW after reading SW = 0 Bit 5—DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Enable Bit (IE): Enables or disables an interrupt request to the CPU when automatic format switching is executed for IIC channel 0. Bit 5 IE Description 0 Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is disabled 1 Interrupt when automatic format switching is executed is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 482 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Bit 4—DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Flag (IF): Flag that indicates an interrupt request to the CPU when automatic format switching is executed for IIC channel 0. Bit 4 IF Description 0 No interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed (Initial value) [Clearing condition] When 0 is written in IF after reading IF = 1 1 An interrupt is requested when automatic format switching is executed [Setting condition] When a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin when SWE = 1 Bits 3 to 0—IIC Clear 3 to 0 (CLR3 to CLR0): These bits control initialization of the internal state of IIC0 and IIC1. These bits can only be written to; if read they will always return a value of 1. When a write operation is performed on these bits, a clear signal is generated for the internal latch circuit of the corresponding module(s), and the internal state of the IIC module(s) is initialized. The write data for these bits is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. When clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to in accordance with the setting. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 Description 0 0 — — Setting prohibited 1 0 0 Setting prohibited 1 IIC0 internal latch cleared 0 IIC1 internal latch cleared 1 IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared — Invalid setting 1 1 — — Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 483 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTP4 or MSTP3 bit is set to 1, operation of the corresponding IIC channel is halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRL Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTP4): Specifies IIC channel 0 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 4 MSTP4 Description 0 IIC channel 0 module stop mode is cleared 1 IIC channel 0 module stop mode is set (Initial value) MSTPCRL Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTP3): Specifies IIC channel 1 module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 3 MSTP3 Description 0 IIC channel 1 module stop mode is cleared 1 IIC channel 1 module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 484 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3 Operation 16.3.1 I C Bus Data Format 2 2 2 The I C bus interface has serial and I C bus formats. 2 The I C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in (a) and (b) in figure 16.3. The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. IIC channel 0 only is capable of formatless operation, as shown in figure 16.4. The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure 16.5. 2 Figure 16.6 shows the I C bus timing. The symbols used in figures 16.3 to 16.6 are explained in table 16.4. (a) I2C bus format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0) S SLA R/W A DATA A A/A P 1 7 1 1 n 1 1 1 1 transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m ≥ 1) m (b) I2C bus format (start condition retransmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0) S SLA R/W A DATA A/A S SLA R/W A DATA A/A P 1 7 1 1 n1 1 1 7 1 1 n2 1 1 1 m1 1 m2 transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m1 and m2 ≥ 1) 2 2 Figure 16.3 I C Bus Data Formats (I C Bus Formats) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 485 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] IIC0 only, FS = 0 or FSX = 0 DATA A 8 1 DATA n A A/A 1 1 1 transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) m transfer frame count (m ≥ 1) Note: This mode applies to the DDC (Display Data Channel) which is a PC monitoring system standard. Figure 16.4 Formatless FS = 1 and FSX = 1 S DATA DATA P 1 8 n 1 1 m transfer bit count (n = 1 to 8) transfer frame count (m ≥ 1) 2 Figure 16.5 I C Bus Data Format (Serial Format) SDA SCL S 1-7 8 9 SLA R/W A 1-7 8 DATA 2 9 A Figure 16.6 I C Bus Timing Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 486 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 1-7 DATA 8 9 A/A P 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Table 16.4 I C Bus Data Format Symbols Legend S Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high SLA Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device R/W Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0 A Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the master in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer DATA Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first or LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR P Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high 16.3.2 Master Transmit Operation 2 In I C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowlede signal. The transmission procedure and operations by which data is sequentially transmitted in synchronization with ICDR write operations, are described below. [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to l. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX in STCR, according to the operation mode. [2] Read the BBSY flag to confirm that the bus is free. [3] Set the MST and TRS bits to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode. [4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This switches SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and generates the start condition. [5] When the start condition is generated, the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to l, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. [6] Write data to ICDR (slave address + R/W) 2 With the I C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. Then clear the IRIC flag to indicate the end of transfer. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 487 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Writing to ICDR and clearing of the IRIC flag must be executed continuously, so that no interrupt is inserted. If a period of time that is equal to transfer one byte has elapsed by the time the IRlC flag is cleared, the end of transfer cannot be identified. The master device sequentially sends the transmit clock and the data written to ICDR with the timing shown in figure 16.7. The selected slave device (i.e. , the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. [7] When one frame of data has been transimitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [8] Read the ACKB bit to confirm that ACKB is 0. When the slave device has not returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB remains 1, execute the transmit end processing described in step [12] and perfrom transmit operation again. [9] Write the next data to be transmitted in ICDR. To indicate the end of data transfer, clear the IRIC flag to 0. As described in step [6] above, writing to ICDR and clearing of the IRIC flag must be executed continuously so that no interrupt is inserted. The next frame is transmitted in synchronization with the internal clock. [10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted, SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written. [11] Read the ACKB bit of ICSR. Confirm that the slave device has returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB is 0. When more data is to be transmitted, return to step [9] to execute next transmit operation. If the slave device has not returned an acknowledge signal and ACKB is 1, execute the transmit end processing described in step [12]. [12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. Write BBSY and SCP of ICCR to 0. By doing so, SDA is changed from low to high while SCL is high and the transmit stop condition is generated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 488 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Start condition generation SCL (master output) 1 SDA (master output) bit 7 2 bit 6 3 bit 5 4 bit 4 5 bit 3 6 bit 2 bit 1 8 1 9 2 bit 7 bit 0 R/W Slave address SDA (slave output) 7 [7] bit 6 Data 1 A [5] IRIC IRTR ICDR address + R/W Note: Data write timing in ICDR ICDR Writing prohibited Data 1 ICDR Writing enable User processing [4] Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 (start condition issuance) [6] ICDR write [6] IRIC clear [9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear Figure 16.7 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0) 16.3.3 Master Receive Operation In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an acknowledge signal. The slave device transrnits data. The receive procedure and operations by which data is sequentially received in synchronization with ICDR read operations, are described below. [1] Clear the TRS bit of ICCR to 0 and switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Set the WAIT bit to 1 and clear the ACKB bit of ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). [2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started and the receive clock is output, and data is received, in synchronization with the internal clock. To indicate the wait, clear the IRIC flag to 0. Reading from ICDR and clearing of the IRIC f1ag must be executed continuously so that no interrupt is inserted. If a period of time that is equal to transfer one byte has elapsed by the time the IRIC flag is cleared, the end of transfer cannot be identified. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 489 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] [3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th clock of a one-frame reception clock. At this point, if the IEIC bit of ICCR is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. If the first frame is the final reception frame, execute the end processing as described in [10]. [4] Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release from the wait state. The master device outputs the 9th receive clock pulse, sets SDA to low, and returns an acknowledge signal. [5] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. The master device continues to output the receive clock for the next receive data. [6] Read the ICDR receive data. [7] Clear the IRIC flag to indicate the next wait. From clearing of the IRIC flag to completion of data reception as described in steps [5], [6], and [7], must be performed within the time taken to transfer one byte because releasing of the wait state as described in step [4] (or [9]). [8] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed low in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag is cleared. If this frame is the final reception frame, execute the end processing as described in [10]. [9] Clear the IRIC flag to 0 to release from the wait state. The master device outputs the 9th reception clock pulse, sets SDA to low, and returns an acknowledge signal. By repeating steps [5] to [9] above, more data can be received. [10] Set the ACKB bit of ICSR to 1 and set the acknowledge data for the final reception. Set the TRS bit of ICCR to 1 to change receive mode to transmit mode. [11] Clear the IRIC flag to release from the wait state. [12] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th reception clock pulse. [13] Clear the WAIT bit of ICMR to 0 to cancel wait mode. Read the ICDR receive data and clear the IRIC flag to 0. Clear the IRIC flag only when WAIT = 0. (If the stop-condition generation command is executed after clearing the IRIC flag to 0 and Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 490 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] then clearing the WAIT bit to 0, the SDA line is fixed low and the stop condition cannot be generated.) [14] Write 0 to BBSY and SCP. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. Master transmit mode Master receive mode SCL (master output) 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDA (slave output) A Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Data 1 9 [3] SDA (master output) 1 2 Bit7 Bit6 3 4 5 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Data 2 [5] A IRIC IRTR ICDR Data 1 User processing [2] IRIC clear [1] TRS cleared to 0 [2] ICDR read (dummy read) WAIT set to 1 ACKB cleared to 0 [4] IRIC clear [6] ICDR read (Data 1) [7] IRIC clear Figure 16.8 (a) Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) SCL (master output) 8 SDA (slave output) Bit0 Data 2 9 [8] SDA (master output) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Data 3 [5] 9 1 2 Bit7 [8] A Bit6 Data 4 [5] A IRIC IRTR ICDR User processing Data 1 [9] IRIC clear Data 2 [6] ICDR read (Data 2) [7] IRIC clear Data 3 [9] IRIC clear [6] ICDR read (Data 3) [7] IRIC clear Figure 16.8 (b) Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) (cont) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 491 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.4 Slave Receive Operation In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are described below. [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR according to the operating mode. [2] When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set to 1. [3] When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the TRS bit in ICCR remains cleared to 0, and slave receive operation is performed. [4] At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low and returns an acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the RDRF internal flag has been cleared to 0, it is set to 1, and the receive operation continues. If the RDRF internal flag has been set to 1, the slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the receive clock until data is read into ICDR. [5] Read ICDR and clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0. Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. When SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 492 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Start condition generation SCL (master output) 1 2 3 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 4 5 6 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 7 8 9 1 2 SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) Slave address SDA (slave output) Bit 1 Bit 0 R/W Bit 7 Bit 6 Data 1 [4] A RDRF IRIC Interrupt request generation ICDRS Address + R/W ICDRR User processing Address + R/W [5] ICDR read [5] IRIC clear Figure 16.9 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 493 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] SCL (master output) 7 8 Bit 1 Bit 0 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 SCL (slave output) SDA (master output) Data 1 SDA (slave output) Bit 7 Bit 6 [4] Data 2 A [4] A RDRF IRIC ICDRS Data 1 ICDRR Data 1 User processing Interrupt request generation Interrupt request generation [5] ICDR read Data 2 Data 2 [5] IRIC clear Figure 16.10 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 494 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below. [1] Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR according to the operating mode. [2] When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition, the slave device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. .If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit in ICCR is set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The TDRE internal flag is set to 1. The slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until ICDR data is written. [3] After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write data to ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0. The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write the next data to ICDR. The slave device sequentially sends the data written into ICDR in accordance with the clock output by the master device at the timing shown in figure 16.11. [4] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. If the TDRE internal flag has been set to 1, this slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. The master device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse, and returns an acknowledge signal. As this acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, this bit can be used to determine whether the transfer operation was performed normally. When the TDRE internal flag is 0, the data written into ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, transmission is started, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. [5] To continue transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write the next data to be transmitted into ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0. Transmit operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. To end transmission, write H'FF to ICDR to release SDA on the slave side. When SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 495 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Slave receive mode SCL (master output) 8 Slave transmit mode 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 9 1 2 SCL (slave output) SDA (slave output) SDA (master output) R/W Bit 7 Data 1 [2] Bit 6 Data 2 A TDRE Interrupt request generation IRIC [3] Interrupt request generation Interrupt request generation Data 1 ICDRT ICDRS Data 2 Data 2 Data 1 User processing [3] IRIC [3] ICDR write clearance [3] ICDR write [5] IRIC clear [5] ICDR write Figure 16.11 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0) 16.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the internal clock. Figure 16.12 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 496 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] (a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait) SCL 7 8 9 1 SDA 7 8 A 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) (b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted) SCL 8 9 1 SDA 8 A 1 IRIC Clear IRIC User processing Clear Write to ICDR (transmit) IRIC or read ICDR (receive) (c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format) SCL 7 8 1 SDA 7 8 1 IRIC User processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or read ICDR (receive) Figure 16.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 497 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.7 2 Automatic Switching from Formatless Mode to I C Bus Format Setting the SW bit to 1 in DDCSWR enables formatless mode to be selected as the IIC0 operating 2 mode. Switching from formatless mode to the I C bus format (slave mode) is performed automatically when a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin. The following four preconditions are necessary for this operation: • A common data pin (SDA) for formatless and I C bus format operation 2 • Separate clock pins for formatless operation (VSYNCI) and I C bus format operation (SCL) 2 • A fixed 1 level for the SCL pin during formatless operation (the SCL pin does not output a low level) • Settings of bits other than TRS in ICCR that allow I C bus format operation 2 2 Automatic switching is performed from formatless mode to the I C bus format when the SW bit in DDCSWR is automatically cleared to 0 on detection of a falling edge on the SCL pin. Switching 2 from the I C bus format to formatless mode is achieved by having software set the SW bit in DDCSWR to 1. 2 In formatless mode, bits (such as MSL and TRS) that control the I C bus interface operating mode 2 must not be modified. When switching from the I C bus format to formatless mode, set the TRS bit to 1 or clear it to 0 according to the transmit data (transmission or reception) in formatless 2 mode, then set the SW bit to 1. After automatic switching from formatless mode to the I C bus format (slave mode), in order to wait for slave address reception, the TRS bit is automatically cleared to 0. 2 If a falling edge is detected on the SCL pin during formatless operation, I C bus interface 2 operating mode is switched to the I C bus format without waiting for a stop condition to be detected. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 498 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.8 Operation Using the DTC 2 The I C bus format provides for selection of the slave device and transfer direction by means of the slave address and the R/W bit, confirmation of reception with the acknowledge bit, indication of the last frame, and so on. Therefore, continuous data transfer using the DTC must be carried out in conjunction with CPU processing by means of interrupts. Table 16.5 shows some examples of processing using the DTC. These examples assume that the number of transfer data bytes is known in slave mode. Table 16.5 Examples of Operation Using the DTC Master Transmit Mode Master Receive Mode Slave Transmit Mode Slave Receive Mode Slave address + R/W bit transmission/ reception Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) Transmission by CPU (ICDR write) Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Dummy data read — Processing by CPU (ICDR read) — — Actual data transmission/ reception Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) Reception by DTC (ICDR read) Transmission by DTC (ICDR write) Reception by DTC (ICDR read) Dummy data (H'FF) write — — Processing by DTC (ICDR write) — Last frame processing Not necessary Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Not necessary Reception by CPU (ICDR read) Transfer request processing after last frame processing 1st time: Clearing by CPU Not necessary 2nd time: End condition issuance by CPU Automatic clearing Not necessary on detection of end condition during transmission of dummy data (H'FF) Setting of number of DTC transfer data frames Transmission: Reception: Actual Actual data count data count + 1 (+1 equivalent to slave address + R/W bits) Transmission: Actual data count + 1 (+1 equivalent to dummy data (H'FF)) Item Reception: Actual data count Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 499 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.9 Noise Canceler The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched internally. Figure 16.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit. The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA) input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held. Sampling clock C SCL or SDA input signal D C Q Latch D Q Match detector Latch Internal SCL or SDA signal System clock period Sampling clock Figure 16.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler 16.3.10 Sample Flowcharts 2 Figures 16.14 to 16.17 show sample flowcharts for using the I C bus interface in each mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 500 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Start [1] Initialize Initialize [2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines. Read BBSY in ICCR No BBSY = 0? Yes [3] Select master transmit mode. Set MST = 1 and TRS = 1 in ICCR [4] Start condition issuance Write BBSY = 1 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [5] Wait for a start condition generation Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC = 1? Yes [6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave address + R/W). (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No [7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR ACKB = 0? No [8] Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from slave device. Yes Transmit mode? No Master receive mode Yes Write transmit data in ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [9] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. (After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately) Read IRIC in ICCR No [10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR [11] Test for end of transfer No End of transmission or ACKB = 1? Yes Clear IRIC in ICCR [12] Stop condition issuance Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR End Figure 16.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 501 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Master receive mode Set TRS = 0 in ICCR [1] Select receive mode Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR [2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. After reading ICDR, please clear IRIC immediately. Read ICDR Clear IRIC in ICCR [3] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (8th clock falling edge) Read IRIC in ICCR No IRIC=1? Yes Last receive ? Yes No No Clear IRIC in ICCR [4] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock. (to end the wait insertion) Read IRIC in ICCR [5] Wait for 1 byte to be received. (9th clock rising edge) IRIC = 1? Yes [6] Read the received data. Read ICDR No Clear IRIC in ICCR [7] Clear IRIC Read IRIC in ICCR [8] Wait for the next data to be received. (8th clock falling edge) IRIC = 1? Yes Yes Last receive ? No Clear IRIC in ICCR Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR Set TRS = 1 in ICCR Clear IRIC in ICCR [9] Clear IRIC (to end the wait insertion) [10] Set ACKB = 1 so as to return no acknowledge, and set TRS = 1 so as not to issue extra clock. [11] Clear IRIC (to end the wait insertion) Read IRIC in ICCR No [12] Wait for 1 byte to be received. IRIC = 1? Yes Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR Read ICDR [13] Set WAIT = 0. Read ICDR. Clear IRIC. (Note: After setting WAIT = 0, IRIC should be cleared to 0) Clear IRIC in ICCR Write BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0 in ICCR [14] Stop condition issuance. End Figure 16.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 502 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Start Initialize Set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 in ICCR [1] Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR Read IRIC in ICCR [2] No IRIC = 1? Yes Read AAS and ADZ in ICSR AAS = 1 and ADZ = 0? No General call address processing * Description omitted Yes Read TRS in ICCR No TRS = 0? Slave transmit mode Yes Last receive? No Read ICDR Yes [3] [1] Select slave receive mode. [2] Wait for the first byte to be received (slave address). Clear IRIC in ICCR [3] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read. Read IRIC in ICCR No [4] Wait for the transfer to end. [4] IRIC = 1? [5] Set acknowledge data for the last receive. [6] Start the last receive. Yes [7] Wait for the transfer to end. Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR [5] Read ICDR [6] [8] Read the last receive data. Clear IRIC in ICCR Read IRIC in ICCR No [7] IRIC = 1? Yes Read ICDR [8] Clear IRIC in ICCR End Figure 16.16 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 503 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Slave transmit mode Clear IRIC in ICCR Write transmit data in ICDR [1] [1] Set transmit data for the second and subsequent bytes. [2] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted. Clear IRIC in ICCR [3] Test for end of transfer. [4] Select slave receive mode. Read IRIC in ICCR No [2] [5] Dummy read (to release the SCL line). IRIC = 1? Yes Read ACKB in ICSR No [3] End of transmission (ACKB = 1)? Yes Set TRS = 0 in ICCR [4] Read ICDR [5] Clear IRIC in ICCR End Figure 16.17 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 504 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 16.3.11 Initialization of Internal State The IIC has a function for forcible initialization of its internal state if a deadlock occurs during communication. Initialization is executed in accordance with the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 in the DDCSWR register or clearing ICE bit. For details of CLR3 to CLR0 bits setting, see section 16.2.8, DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR). Scope of Initialization: The initialization executed by this function covers the following items: • TDRE and RDRF internal flags • Transmit/receive sequencer and internal operating clock counter • Internal latches for retaining the output state of the SCL and SDA pins (wait, clock, data output, etc.) The following items are not initialized: • Actual register values (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, DDCSWR, STCR) • Internal latches used to retain register read information for setting/clearing flags in the ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, and DDCSWR registers • The value of the ICMR register bit counter (BC2 to BC0) • Generated interrupt sources (interrupt sources transferred to the interrupt controller) Notes on Initialization: • Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • Basically, other register flags are not cleared either, and so flag clearing measures must be taken as necessary. • When initialization is executed by DDCSWR register, the write data for bits CLR3 to CLR0 is not retained. To perform IIC clearance, bits CLR3 to CLR0 must be written to simultaneously using an MOV instruction. Do not use a bit manipulation instruction such as BCLR. Similarly, when clearing is required again, all the bits must be written to simultaneously in accordance with the setting. • If a flag clearing setting is made during transmission/reception, the IIC module will stop transmitting/receiving at that point and the SCL and SDA pins will be released. When transmission/reception is started again, register initialization, etc., must be carried out as necessary to enable correct communication as a system. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 505 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] The value of the BBSY bit cannot be modified directly by this module clear function, but since the stop condition pin waveform is generated according to the state and release timing of the SCL and SDA pins, the BBSY bit may be cleared as a result. Similarly, state switching of other bits and flags may also have an effect. To prevent problems caused by these factors, the following procedure should be used when initializing the IIC state. 1. Execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or ICE bit clearing. 2. Execute a stop condition issuance instruction (write 0 to BBSY and SCP) to clear the BBSY bit to 0, and wait for two transfer rate clock cycles. 3. Re-execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0 or ICE bit clearing. 4. Initialize (re-set) the IIC registers. 16.4 Usage Notes • In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not yet have gone low when BBSY is cleared to 0. • Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these conditions when reading or writing to ICDR. Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS) Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR) • Table 16.6 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 506 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Table 16.6 I C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output) Item Symbol Output Timing Unit Notes SCL output cycle time tSCLO 28tcyc to 256tcyc ns SCL output high pulse width tSCLHO 0.5tSCLO ns Figure 25.26 (reference) SCL output low pulse width tSCLLO 0.5tSCLO ns SDA output bus free time tBUFO 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc ns Start condition output hold time tSTAHO 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc ns Retransmission start condition output setup time tSTASO 1tSCLO ns Stop condition output setup time tSTOSO 0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc ns Data output setup time (master) tSDASO 1tSCLLO – 3tcyc ns 1tSCLL – (6tcyc or 12tcyc*) tSDAHO 3tcyc Data output setup time (slave) Data output hold time Note: * ns 6tcyc when IICX is 0, 12tcyc when 1. • SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing 2 therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in I C bus Timing in section 25, 2 Electrical Characteristics. Note that the I C bus interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz. • The I C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for high2 speed mode). In master mode, the I C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds 2 the time determined by the input clock of the I C bus interface, the high period of SCL is extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in the table below. 2 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 507 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Table 16.7 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tSr) Values Time Indication 2 IICX tcyc Indication 0 7.5tcyc 1 17.5tcyc I C Bus Specification φ = (Max.) 5 MHz φ= 8 MHz φ= φ= φ= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz Normal mode 1000 ns 1000 ns 937 ns 750 ns 468 ns 375 ns High-speed mode 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns Normal mode 1000 ns 1000 ns 1000 ns 1000 ns 1000 ns 875 ns High-speed mode 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns • The I C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns 2 and 300 ns. The I C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tcyc, as shown in 2 table 16.6. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I C bus interface specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 16.8 shows output timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of rise and fall times. 2 2 tBUFO fails to meet the I C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a) to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 µs) between issuance of a stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing 2 permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I C bus. 2 tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I C bus interface specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices whose input 2 timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I C bus. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 508 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] 2 Table 16.8 I C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf) Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] 2 Item tSCLHO tSCLLO tBUFO tSTAHO tSTASO tSTOSO tcyc Indication φ= 8 MHz φ= φ= φ= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz –1000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 High-speed –300 mode 600 950 950 950 950 950 Standard mode –250 4700 4750 4750 4750 4750 4750 High-speed –250 mode 1300 1 1 1 1 1 1000* 1000* 1000* 1000* 1000* 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc ( –tSr ) Standard mode 4700 1 1 1 1 1 3800* 3875* 3900* 3938* 3950* High-speed –300 mode 1300 750* 825* 850* 888* 900* 0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc (–tSf ) Standard mode 4000 4550 4625 4650 4688 4700 High-speed –250 mode 600 800 875 900 938 950 1tSCLO (–tSr ) Standard mode 4700 9000 9000 9000 9000 9000 High-speed –300 mode 600 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200 Standard mode 4000 4400 4250 4200 4125 4100 600 1350 1200 1150 1075 1050 –1000 250 3100 3325 3400 3513 3550 –300 100 400 625 700 813 850 –1000 250 1300 2200 2500 2950 3100 –300 100 1 1 1 –1400* –500* –200* 250 0.5tSCLO (–tSr) 0.5tSCLO (–tSf ) 0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc (–tSr ) Standard mode I C Bus SpecifitSr/tSf Influence cation φ = (Max.) (Min.) 5 MHz –1000 –250 –1000 –1000 High-speed –300 mode 3 tSDASO 1tSCLLO* – Standard (master) 3tcyc mode (–tSr ) High-speed mode 3 tSDASO 1tSCLL* – Standard 2 (slave) 12tcyc* mode (–tSr ) High-speed 1 1 1 1 1 400 mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 509 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns] 2 Item tcyc Indication tSDAHO 3tcyc I C Bus SpecifitSr/tSf Influence cation φ = (Max.) (Min.) 5 MHz φ= 8 MHz φ= φ= φ= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz 0 0 600 375 300 188 150 High-speed 0 mode 0 600 375 300 188 150 Standard mode 2 Notes: 1. Does not meet the I C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate; (d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing. The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the 2 maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I C bus interface specifications are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions. 2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (tSCLL – 6tcyc). 2 3. Calculated using the I C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; highspeed mode: 1300 ns min.). • Note on ICDR Read at End of Master Reception To halt reception at the end of a receive operation in master receive mode, set the TRS bit to 1 and write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition. After this, receive data can be read by means of an ICDR read, but if data remains in the buffer the ICDRS receive data will not be transferred to ICDR, and so it will not be possible to read the second byte of data. If it is necessary to read the second byte of data, issue the stop condition in master receive mode (i.e. with the TRS bit cleared to 0). When reading the receive data, first confirm that the BBSY bit in the ICCR register is cleared to 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the bus has been released, then read the ICDR register with TRS cleared to 0. Note that if the receive data (ICDR data) is read in the interval between execution of the instruction for issuance of the stop condition (writing of 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR) and the actual generation of the stop condition, the clock may not be output correctly in subsequent master transmission. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 510 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Clearing of the MST bit after completion of master transmission/reception, or other modifications of IIC control bits to change the transmit/receive operating mode or settings, must be carried out during interval (a) in figure 16.18 (after confirming that the BBSY bit has been cleared to 0 in the ICCR register). Stop condition Start condition (a) SDA Bit 0 A SCL 8 9 Internal clock BBSY bit Master receive mode ICDR reading prohibited Execution of stop condition issuance instruction (0 written to BBSY and SCP) Confirmation of stop condition generation (0 read from BBSY) Start condition issuance Figure 16.18 Points for Attention Concerning Reading of Master Receive Data • Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission Figure 16.19 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. After retransmission start condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit data to ICDR, as shown below. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 511 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] [1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer IRIC=1 ? No [1] [2] Determine wheter SCL is low Yes Clear IRIC in ICSR Start condition issuance? [3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission No Other processing [4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not Yes Read SCL pin SCL=Low ? [2] [5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W) No Note: Program so that processing instruction from [3] to [5] is Yes executed continuously. Write BBSY=1, SCP=0 (ICSR) [3] [4] IRIC=1 ? No Yes Write transmit data to ICDR [5] Start condition (retransmission) SCL SDA 9 ACK bit 7 Data output IRIC [5] ICDR write (next transmit data) [4] IRIC determination [3] Start condition instruction issuance [2] Determination of SCL=Low [1] IRIC determination Figure 16.19 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for Retransmission Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 512 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Note on I C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance 2 If the rise time of the 9th SCL clock exceeds the specification because the bus load capacitance is large, or if there is a slave devices of the type that drives SCL low to effect a wait, after rising of the 9th SCL clock, issue the stop condition after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as shown below. 9th clock VIH High period secured SCL As waveform rise is late, SCL is detected as low SDA Stop condition generation IRIC [2] Stop condition instruction issuance [1] Determination of SCL=Low Figure 16.20 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 513 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Notes on WAIT Function Conditions to cause this phenomenon When both of the following conditions are satisfied, the clock pulse of the 9th clock could be outputted continuously in master mode using the WAIT function due to the failure of the WAIT insertion after the 8th clock fall. (1) Setting the WAIT bit of the ICMR register to 1 and operating WAIT, in master mode (2) If the IRIC bit of interrupt flag is cleared from 1 to 0 between the fall of the 7th clock and the fall of the 8th clock. Error phenomenon Normally, WAIT State will be cancelled by clearing the IRIC flag bit from 1 to 0 after the fall of the 8th clock in WAIT State. In this case, if the IRIC flag bit is cleared between the 7th clock fall and the 8th clock fall, the IRIC flag clear- data will be retained internally. Therefore, the WAIT State will be cancelled right after WAIT insertion on 8th clock fall. Restrictions Please clear the IRIC flag before the rise of the 7th clock (the counter value of BC2 through BC0 should be 2 or greater), after the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rise of the 9th clock. If the IRIC flag-clear is delayed due to the interrupt or other processes and the value of BC counter is turned to 1 or 0, please confirm the SCL pins are in L’ state after the counter value of BC2 through BC0 is turned to 0, and clear the IRIC flag. (See figure 16.21.) ASD A SCL 9 BC2–BC0 0 Transmit/receive data 1 2 7 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 3 Transmit/receive data A 7 2 1 8 SCL = ‘L’ confirm 9 0 1 2 7 IRIC clear IRIC (operation example) IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear unavailable Figure 16.21 IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 514 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 3 6 5 When BC2-0 ≥ 2 IRIC clear 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode 2 In a transmit operation in the slave mode of the I C bus interface, do not read the ICDR register or read or write to the ICCR register during the period indicated by the shaded portion in figure 16.22. Normally, when interrupt processing is triggered in synchronization with the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle, the period in question has already elapsed when the transition to interrupt processing takes place, so there is no problem with reading the ICDR register or reading or writing to the ICCR register. To ensure that the interrupt processing is performed properly, one of the following two conditions should be applied. (1) Make sure that reading received data from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the ICCR register, is completed before the next slave address receive operation starts. (2) Monitor the BC2 to BC0 counter in the ICMR register and, when the value of BC2 to BC0 is 000 (8th or 9th clock cycle), allow a waiting time of at least 2 transfer clock cycles in order to involve the problem period in question before reading from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the ICCR register. Waveforms if problem occurs SDA SCL TRS R/W 8 Bit 7 A 9 Address received Data transmission Period when ICDR reads and ICCR reads and writes are prohibited (6 system clock cycles) ICDR write Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Figure 16.22 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 515 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode From the detection of the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or of a stop condition to when the rising edge of the next SCL pin signal is detected (the period indicated as (a) in figure 16.23) 2 in the slave mode of the I C bus interface, the value set in the TRS bit in the ICCR register is effective immediately. However, at other times (indicated as (b) in figure 16.23) the value set in the TRS bit is put on hold until the next rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or stop condition is detected, rather than taking effect immediately. This results in the actual internal value of the TRS bit remaining 1 (transmit mode) and no acknowledge bit being sent at the 9th clock cycle address receive completion in the case of an address receive operation following a restart condition input with no stop condition intervening. When receiving an address in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the period indicated as (a) in figure 16.23. To cancel the holding of the SCL bit low by the wait function in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 and then perform a dummy read of the ICDR register. Restart condition (b) (a) A SDA SCL TRS 8 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Address reception Data transmission TRS bit setting hold time ICDR dummy read TRS bit set Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Detection of 9th clock cycle rising edge Figure 16.23 TRS Bit Setting Timing in Slave Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 516 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode 2 The I C bus interface recognizes the data in transmit/receive frame as an address when arbitration is lost in master mode and a transition to slave receive mode is automatically carried out. When arbitration is lost not in the first frame but in the second frame or subsequent frame, transmit/receive data that is not an address is compared with the value set in the SAR or SARX register as an address. If the receive data matches with the address in the SAR or SARX 2 register, the I C bus interface erroneously recognizes that the address call has occurred. (See figure 16.24.) 2 In multi-master mode, a bus conflict could happen. When The I C bus interface is operated in master mode, check the state of the AL bit in the ICSR register every time after one frame of data has been transmitted or received. When arbitration is lost during transmitting the second frame or subsequent frame, take avoidance measures. • Arbitration is lost • The AL flag in ICSR is set to 1 I2 C bus interface (Master transmit mode) S SLA A R/W DATA1 Transmit data match Transmit timing match Other device (Master transmit mode) S SLA A R/W Transmit data does not match DATA2 A DATA3 A Data contention I2C bus interface (Slave receive mode) S SLA A R/W • Receive address is ignored SLA R/W A DATA4 A • Automatically transferred to slave receive mode • Receive data is recognized as an address • When the receive data matches to the address set in the SAR or SARX register, the I2C bus interface operates as a slave device Figure 16.24 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost 2 Though it is prohibited in the normal I C protocol, the same problem may occur when the MST bit is erroneously set to 1 and a transition to master mode is occurred during data transmission or reception in slave mode. In multi-master mode, pay attention to the setting of the MST bit when a bus conflict may occur. In this case, the MST bit in the ICCR register should be set to 1 according to the order below. (a) Make sure that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 and the bus is free before setting the MST bit. (b) Set the MST bit to 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 517 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] (c) To confirm that the bus was not entered to the busy state while the MST bit is being set, check that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 immediately after the MST bit has been set. • Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception Conditions to cause this failure The IRIC flag is set to 1 when both of the following conditions are satisfied. • 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data and the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1 • Rising edge of the 9th transmit/receive clock is input to the SCL pin When the above two conditions are satisfied in slave receive mode, an unnecessary interrupt occurs. Figure 16.25 shows the note on interrupt occurrence in slave mode after receiving 1 as the acknowledge bit (ACKB = 1). (1) For the last transmit data in master transmit mode or slave transmit mode, 1 is received as the acknowledge bit. If the ACKE bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this time, the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1. (2) After switching to slave receive mode, the start condition is input, and address reception is performed next. (3) Even if the received address does not match the address set in SAR or SARX, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock, thus causing an interrupt to occur. Note that if the slave address matches, an interrupt is to be generated at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock as normal operation, so this is not erroneous operation. Restriction 2 In a transmit operation of the I C bus interface module, carry out the following countermeasures. (1) After 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data, clear the ACKE bit in ICCR to 0 to clear the ACKB bit to 0. (2) To enable acknowledge bit reception afterwards, set the ACKE bit to 1 again. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 518 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Master transmit mode or slave transmit mode Stop condition Slave reception mode Start condition (2) Address that does not match is received. SDA N SCL 8 Address 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A Data 9 1 2 ACKB bit IRIC flag Stop condition detection (1) Acknowledge bit is received and the ACKB bit is set to 1. Countermeasure: Clear the ACKE bit to 0 to clear the ACKB bit. (3) Unnecessary interrupt occurs (received address is invalid). Figure 16.25 Note on Interrupt Occurrence in Slave Mode after ACKB = 1 Reception Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 519 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] • Notes on TRS Bit Setting and ICDR Register Access Conditions to cause this failure Low-fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled incorrectly when the following conditions are satisfied. Master mode Figure 16.26 shows the notes on ICDR reading (TRS = 1) in master mode. (1) When previously received 2-bytes data remains in ICDR unread (ICDRS are full). (2) Reads ICDR register after switching to transmit mode (TRS = 1). (RDRF = 0 state) (3) Sets to receive mode (TRS = 0), after transmitting Rev.1 frame of issued start condition by master mode. Slave mode Figure 16.27 shows the notes on ICDR writing (TRS = 0) in slave mode. (1) Writes ICDR register in receive mode (TRS = 0), after entering the start condition by slave mode (TDRE = 0 state). Address match with Rev.1 frame, receive 1 by R/W bit, and switches to transmit mode (TRS = 1). When these conditions are satisfied, the low fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled without ICDR register access after Rev.1 frame is transferred. • Restriction Please carry out the following countermeasures when transmitting/receiving via the IIC bus interface module. (1) Please read the ICDR registers in receive mode, and write them in transmit mode. (2) In receiving operation with master mode, please issue the start condition after clearing the internal flag of the IIC bus interface module, using CLR3 to CLR0 bit of the DDCSWR register on bus-free state (BBSY = 0). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 520 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer Stop condition SDA Cancel condition of SCL = Low fixation is set. Start condition Address A SCL 8 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A Data 9 1 2 3 (3) TRS = 0 TRS bit (2) RDRF = 0 RDRF bit ICDRS data full (1) ICDRS data full TRS = 0 setting ICDR read Detection of 9th clock rise (TRS = 1) Figure 16.26 Notes on ICDR Reading with TRS = 1 Setting in Master Mode Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer Stop condition Cancel condition of SCL = Low fixation Start condition Address A SDA SCL 8 1 9 2 3 4 A 5 6 8 7 9 Data 1 2 3 4 (2) TRS = 1 TRS bit TDRE bit (1) TDRE = 0 ICDR write TRS = 0 setting Automatic TRS = 1 setting by receiving R/W = 1 Figure 16.27 Notes on ICDR Writing with TRS = 0 Setting in Slave Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 521 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 2 Section 16 I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option] Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 522 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Provided in the H8S/2138 Group; not provided in the H8S/2134 Group. 17.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group has an on-chip host interface (HIF) that enables connection to an ISA bus, widely used as the internal bus in personal computers. The host interface provides a dual-channel parallel interface between the on-chip CPU and a host processor. The host interface is available only when the HI12E bit is set to 1 in SYSCR2. This mode is called slave mode, because it is designed for a master-slave communication system in which the H8S/2138 Group chip is slaved to a host processor. 17.1.1 Features The features of the host interface are summarized below. The host interface consists of 4-byte data registers, 2-byte status registers, a 1-byte control register, fast A20 gate logic, and a host interrupt request circuit. Communication is carried out via five control signals from the host processor (CS1, CS2 or ECS2, HA0, IOR, and IOW), four output signals to the host processor (GA20, HIRQ1, HIRQ11, and HIRQ12), and an 8-bit bidirectional command/data bus (HDB7 to HDB0). The CS1 and CS2 (or ECS2) signals select one of the two interface channels. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 523 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the host interface. (Internal interrupt signals) IBF2 CS1 CS2/ECS2 IOR IOW HA0 HDB7 to HDB0 Control logic IDR1 STR1 IDR2 ODR2 STR2 HICR Port 4, Port 8 HIFSD Internal data bus Bus interface Legend: IDR1: Input data register 1 IDR2: Input data register 2 ODR1: Output data register 1 ODR2: Output data register 2 STR1: Status register 1 STR2: Status register 2 HICR: Host interface control register Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of Host Interface Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 524 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Module data bus Fast A20 gate control Host data bus ODR1 Host interrupt request HIRQ1 HIRQ11 HIRQ12 GA20 IBF1 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 17.1 lists the input and output pins of the host interface module. Table 17.1 Host Interface Input/Output Pins Name Abbreviation Port I/O Function I/O read IOR P93 Input Host interface read signal I/O write IOW P94 Input Host interface write signal Chip select 1 CS1 P95 Input Host interface chip select signal for IDR1, ODR1, STR1 Chip select 2* CS2 P81 Input ECS2 P90 Host interface chip select signal for IDR2, ODR2, STR2 HA0 P80 Input Host interface address select signal. Command/data In host read access, this signal selects the status registers (STR1, STR2) or data registers (ODR1, ODR2). In host write access to the data registers (IDR1, IDR2), this signal indicates whether the host is writing a command or data. Data bus HDB7 to HDB0 P37 to I/O P30 Host interface data bus Host interrupt 1 HIRQ1 P44 Output Interrupt output 1 to host Host interrupt 11 HIRQ11 P43 Output Interrupt output 11 to host Host interrupt 12 HIRQ12 P45 Output Interrupt output 12 to host Gate A20 GA20 P81 Output A20 gate control signal output HIF shutdown HIFSD P82 Input Host interface shutdown control signal Note: * Selection of CS2 or ECS2 is by means of the CS2E bit in SYSCR and the FGA20E bit in HICR. Host interface channel 2 and the CS2 pin can be used when CS2E = 1. When CS2E = 1, CS2 is used when FGA20E =0, and ECS2 is used when FGA20E = 1. In this manual, both are referred to as CS2. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 525 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.1.4 Register Configuration Table 17.2 lists the host interface registers. Host interface registers HICR, IDR1, IDR2, ODR1, ODR2, STR1, and STR2 can only be accessed when the HIE bit is set to 1 in SYSCR. Table 17.2 Host Interface Registers R/W Master Address*4 Abbreviation Slave Host Initial Value System control register SYSCR R/W* — H'09 H'FFC4 — — — System control register 2 SYSCR2 R/W — H'00 H'FF83 — — — Host interface control register HICR R/W — H'F8 H'FFF0 — — — Input data register 1 IDR1 R W — H'FFF4 0 1 0/1*5 Output data register 1 ODR1 R/W R — H'FFF5 0 1 0 Status register 1 STR1 R/(W)*2 R H'00 H'FFF6 0 1 1 Input data register 2 IDR2 R W — H'FFFC 1 0 0/1*5 Output data register 2 ODR2 R/W R — H'FFFD 1 0 0 Status register 2 STR2 R/(W)*2 R H'00 H'FFFE 1 0 1 Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W — H'3F H'FF86 — — — MSTPCRL R/W — H'FF H'FF87 — — — Name 1 Slave Address*3 CS1 CS2 HA0 Notes: 1. Bits 5 and 3 are read-only bits. 2. The user-defined bits (bits 7 to 4 and 2) are read/write accessible from the slave processor. 3. Address when accessed from the slave processor. The lower 16 bits of the address are shown. 4. Pin inputs used in access from the host processor. 5. The HA0 input discriminates between writing of commands and data. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 526 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.2 Register Descriptions 17.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register which controls H8S/2138 Group chip operations. Of the host interface registers, HICR, IDR1, ODR1, STR1, IDR2, ODR2, and STR2 can only be accessed when the HIE bit is set to 1. The host interface CS2 and ECS2 pins are controlled by the CS2E bit in SYSCR and the FGA20E bit in HICR. See section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR), and section 5.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), for information on other SYSCR bits. SYSCR is initialized to H'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—CS2 Enable Bit (CS2E): Used together with the FGA20E bit in HICR to select the pin that performs the CS2 function. SYSCR Bit 7 HICR Bit 0 CS2E FGA20E Description 0 0 CS2 pin function halted (CS2 fixed high internally) (Initial value) 1 1 0 CS2 pin function selected for P81/CS2 pin 1 CS2 pin function selected for P90/ECS2 pin Bit 1—Host Interface Enable (HIE): Enables or disables CPU access to the host interface registers. When enabled, the host interface registers (HICR, IDR1, ODR1, STR1, IDR2, ODR2, and STR2) can be accessed. Bit 1 HIE Description 0 Host interface register (HICR, IDR1, ODR1, STR1, IDR2, ODR2, STR2), CPU access is disabled (Initial value) 1 Host interface register (HICR, IDR1, ODR1, STR1, IDR2, ODR2, STR2), CPU access is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 527 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.2.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 KWUL1 KWUL0 P6PUE — SDE CS4E CS3E HI12E Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W SYSCR2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register which controls chip operations. Host interface functions are enabled or disabled by the HI12E bit in SYSCR2. SYSCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6—Key Wakeup Level 1 and 0 (KWUL1, KWUL0): The port 6 input level can be set and changed by software. For details see section 8, I/O Ports. Bit 5—Port 6 Input Pull-Up Extra (P6PUE): Controls and selects the current specification for the port 6 MOS input pull-up function connected by means of KMPCR settings. For details see section 8, I/O Ports. Bit 4—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bit 3—Shutdown Enable (SDE): Enables or disables the host interface pin shutdown function. When this function is enabled, host interface pin functions can be halted, and the pins placed in the high-impedance state, according to the state of the HIFSD pin. Bit 3 SDE Description 0 Host interface pin shutdown function disabled 1 Host interface pin shutdown function enabled (Initial value) Bit 2—CS4 Enable (CS4E): Reserved. Do not write 1 to this bit. Bit 1—CS3 Enable (CS3E): Reserved. Do not write 1 to this bit. Bit 0—Host Interface Enable Bit (HI12E): Enables or disables host interface functions in single-chip mode. When the host interface functions are enabled, slave mode is entered and processing is performed for data transfer between the slave and host. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 528 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 0 HI12E Description 0 Host interface functions are disabled 1 Host interface functions are enabled 17.2.3 (Initial value) Host Interface Control Register (HICR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 — — — — — IBFIE2 0 1 IBFIE1 FGA20E Initial value 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Slave Read/Write — — — — — R/W R/W R/W Host Read/Write — — — — — — — — HICR is an 8-bit readable/writable register which controls host interface interrupts and the fast A20 gate function. HICR is initialized to H'F8 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 3—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 2—Input Data Register Full Interrupt Enable 2 (IBFIE2): Enables or disables the IBF2 interrupt to the internal CPU. Bit 2 IBFIE2 Description 0 Input data register (IDR2) receive complete interrupt is disabled 1 Input data register (IDR2) receive complete interrupt is enabled (Initial value) Bit 1— Input Data Register Full Interrupt Enable 1 (IBFIE1): Enables or disables the IBF1 interrupt to the internal CPU. Bit 1 IBFIE1 Description 0 Input data register (IDR1) receive complete interrupt is disabled 1 Input data register (IDR1) receive complete interrupt is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 529 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 0—Fast Gate A20 Enable (FGA20E): Enables or disables the fast A20 gate function. When the fast A20 gate is disabled, a regular-speed A20 gate signal can be implemented by using firmware to manipulate the P81 output. Bit 0 FGA20E Description 0 Fast A20 gate function is disabled 1 Fast A20 gate function is enabled 17.2.4 (Initial value) Input Data Register 1 (IDR1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IDR7 IDR6 IDR5 IDR4 IDR3 IDR2 IDR1 IDR0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Slave Read/Write R R R R R R R R Host Read/Write W W W W W W W W IDR1 is an 8-bit read-only register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit write-only register to the host processor. When CS1 is low, information on the host data bus is written into IDR1 at the rising edge of IOW. The HA0 state is also latched into the C/D bit in STR1 to indicate whether the written information is a command or data. The initial values of IDR1 after a reset and in standby mode are undetermined. 17.2.5 Output Data Register 1 (ODR1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ODR7 ODR6 ODR5 ODR4 ODR3 ODR2 ODR1 ODR0 — — — — — — — — Slave Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Host Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial value ODR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit read-only register to the host processor. The ODR1 contents are output on the host data bus when HA0 is low, CS1 is low, and IOR is low. The initial values of ODR1 after a reset and in standby mode are undetermined. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 530 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.2.6 Status Register 1 (STR1) Bit Initial value 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DBU DBU DBU DBU C/D DBU IBF OBF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slave Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R R/(W)* Host Read/Write R R R R R R R R Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. STR1 is an 8-bit register that indicates status information during host interface processing. Bits 3, 1, and 0 are read-only bits to both the host and slave processors. STR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 4 and Bit 2—Defined by User (DBU): The user can use these bits as necessary. Bit 3—Command/Data (C/D D): Receives the HA0 input when the host processor writes to IDR1, and indicates whether IDR1 contains data or a command. Bit 3 C/D D Description 0 Contents of input data register (IDR1) are data 1 Contents of input data register (IDR1) are a command (Initial value) Bit 1—Input Buffer Full (IBF): Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR1. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor. IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR1. The IBF flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 17.8, Fast A20 Gate Output Signals. Bit 1 IBF Description 0 [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR1 1 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 531 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 0—Output Buffer Full (OBF): Set to 1 when the slave processor writes to ODR1. Cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR1. Bit 0 OBF Description 0 [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR1 or the slave writes 0 in the OBF bit (Initial value) 1 [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR1 Table 17.3 shows the conditions for setting and clearing the STR1 flags. Table 17.3 Set/Clear Timing for STR1 Flags Flag Setting Condition Clearing Condition C/D Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when HA0 is high Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when HA0 is low IBF* Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when writing to IDR1 Falling edge of slave’s internal read signal (RD) when reading IDR1 OBF Falling edge of slave’s internal write signal (WR) when writing to ODR1 Rising edge of host’s read signal (IOR) when reading ODR1 Note: 17.2.7 * The IBF flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 17.8, Fast A20 Gate Output Signals. Input Data Register 2 (IDR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IDR7 IDR6 IDR5 IDR4 IDR3 IDR2 IDR1 IDR0 Initial value — — — — — — — — Slave Read/Write R R R R R R R R Host Read/Write W W W W W W W W IDR2 is an 8-bit read-only register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit write-only register to the host processor. When CS2 is low, information on the host data bus is written into IDR2 at the rising edge of IOW. The HA0 state is also latched into the C/D bit in STR2 to indicate whether the written information is a command or data. The initial values of IDR2 after a reset and in standby mode are undetermined. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 532 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.2.8 Output Data Register 2 (ODR2) Bit Initial value 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ODR7 ODR6 ODR5 ODR4 ODR3 ODR2 ODR1 ODR0 — — — — — — — — Slave Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Host Read/Write R R R R R R R R ODR2 is an 8-bit readable/writable register to the slave processor, and an 8-bit read-only register to the host processor. The ODR2 contents are output on the host data bus when HA0 is low, CS2 is low, and IOR is low. The initial values of ODR2 after a reset and in standby mode are undetermined. 17.2.9 Status Register 2 (STR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DBU DBU DBU DBU C/D DBU IBF OBF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Slave Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R R/(W)* Host Read/Write R R R R R R R R Initial value Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. STR2 is an 8-bit register that indicates status information during host interface processing. Bits 3, 1, and 0 are read-only bits to both the host and slave processors. STR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 4 and Bit 2—Defined by User (DBU): The user can use these bits as necessary. Bit 3—Command/Data (C/D D): Receives the HA0 input when the host processor writes to IDR2, and indicates whether IDR2 contains data or a command. Bit 3 C/D D Description 0 Contents of input data register (IDR2) are data 1 Contents of input data register (IDR2) are a command (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 533 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Bit 1—Input Buffer Full (IBF): Set to 1 when the host processor writes to IDR2. This bit is an internal interrupt source to the slave processor. IBF is cleared to 0 when the slave processor reads IDR2. The IBF flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 17.8, Fast A20 Gate Output Signals. Bit 1 IBF Description 0 [Clearing condition] When the slave processor reads IDR2 1 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When the host processor writes to IDR2 Bit 0—Output Buffer Full (OBF): Set to 1 when the slave processor writes to ODR2. Cleared to 0 when the host processor reads ODR2. The IBF flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 17.8, Fast A20 Gate Output Signals. Bit 0 OBF Description 0 [Clearing condition] When the host processor reads ODR2 or the slave writes 0 in the OBF bit (Initial value) 1 [Setting condition] When the slave processor writes to ODR2 Table 17.4 shows the conditions for setting and clearing the STR2 flags. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 534 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Table 17.4 Set/Clear Timing for STR2 Flags Flag Setting Condition Clearing Condition C/D Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when HA0 is high Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when HA0 is low IBF* Rising edge of host’s write signal (IOW) when writing to IDR2 Falling edge of slave’s internal read signal (RD) when reading IDR2 OBF Falling edge of slave’s internal write signal (WR) when writing to ODR2 Rising edge of host’s read signal (IOR) when reading ODR2 Note: * The IBF flag setting and clearing conditions are different when the fast A20 gate is used. For details see table 17.8, Fast A20 Gate Output Signals. 17.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP2 bit is set to 1, the host interface halts and enters module stop mode. See section 24.5, Module Stop Mode, for details. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRL Bit 2—Module Stop (MSTP2): Specifies host interface module stop mode. MSTPCRL Bit 2 MSTP2 Description 0 Host interface module stop mode is cleared 1 Host interface module stop mode is set (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 535 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.3 Operation 17.3.1 Host Interface Operation The host interface is activated by setting the HI12E bit (bit 0) to 1 in SYSCR2 in single-chip mode, establishing slave mode. Activation of the host interface (entry to slave mode) appropriates the related I/O lines in port 3 (data), port 8 or 9 (control), and port 4 (host interrupt requests) for interface use. Table 17.5 shows HIF host interface channel selection and pin operation. Table 17.5 Host Interface Channel Selection and Pin Operation HI12E CS2E Operation 0 — Host interface functions halted 1 0 Host interface channel 1 only operating Operation of channel 2 halted (No operation as CS2 or ECS2 input. Pins P43, P81, and P90 operate as I/O ports.) 1 Host interface channel 1 and 2 functions operating For host read/write timing, see section 25.6.4, Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules. 17.3.2 Control States Table 17.6 indicates the slave operations carried out in response to host interface signals from the host processor. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 536 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Table 17.6 Host Interface Operation CS2 CS1 IOR IOW HA0 Operation 1 0 0 0 0 Setting prohibited 1 Setting prohibited 1 0 Data read from output data register 1 (ODR1) 1 Status read from status register 1 (STR1) 0 0 Data write to input data register 1 (IDR1) 1 Command write to input data register 1 (IDR1) 0 Idle state 1 Idle state 0 0 Setting prohibited 1 Setting prohibited 1 0 Data read from output data register 2 (ODR2) 1 Status read from status register 2 (STR2) 0 Data write to input data register 2 (IDR2) 1 Command write to input data register 2 (IDR2) 0 Idle state 1 Idle state 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 17.3.3 A20 Gate The A20 gate signal can mask address A20 to emulate an addressing mode used by personal computers with an 8086*-family CPU. In slave mode, a regular-speed A20 gate signal can be output under firmware control, or a fast A20 gate signal can be output under hardware control. Fast A20 gate output is enabled by setting the FGA20E bit (bit 0) to 1 in HICR (H'FFF0). Note: * Intel microprocessor. Regular A20 Gate Operation: Output of the A20 gate signal can be controlled by an H'D1 command followed by data. When the slave processor receives data, it normally uses an interrupt routine activated by the IBF1 interrupt to read IDR1. If the data follows an H'D1 command, software copies bit 1 of the data and outputs it at the gate A20 pin. Fast A20 Gate Operation: When the FGA20E bit is set to 1, P81/GA20 is used for output of a fast A20 gate signal. Bit P81DDR must be set to 1 to assign this pin for output. The initial output from this pin will be a logic 1, which is the initial value. Afterward, the host processor can manipulate the output from this pin by sending commands and data. This function is available Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 537 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] only when register IDR1 is accessed using CS1. Slave logic decodes the commands input from the host processor. When an H'D1 host command is detected, bit 1 of the data following the host command is output from the GA20 output pin. This operation does not depend on firmware or interrupts, and is faster than the regular processing using interrupts. Table 17.7 lists the conditions that set and clear GA20 (P81). Figure 17.2 shows the GA20 output in flowchart form. Table 17.8 indicates the GA20 output signal values. Table 17.7 GA20 (P81) Set/Clear Timing Pin Name Setting Condition Clearing Condition GA20 (P81) Rising edge of the host’s write signal (IOW) when bit 1 of the written data is 1 and the data follows an H'D1 host command Rising edge of the host’s write signal (IOW) when bit 1 of the written data is 0 and the data follows an H'D1 host command Also, when bit FGA20E in HICR is cleared to 0 Start Host write No H'D1 command received? Yes Wait for next byte Host write No Data byte? Yes Write bit 1 of data byte to DR bit of P81/GA20 Figure 17.2 GA20 Output Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 538 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Table 17.8 Fast A20 Gate Output Signals Internal CPU Interrupt Flag (IBF) GA20 (P81) Remarks 0 Q Turn-on sequence 0 H'D1 command 1 1 data* 0 1 1 H'FF command 0 Q (1) 1 0 Q 0 H'D1 command 2 0 data* 0 0 1 H'FF command 0 Q (0) 1 H'D1 command 1 1 data* 0 Q 0 1 1/0 Command other than H'FF and H'D1 1 Q (1) 1 H'D1 command 2 0 data* 0 Q 0 0 1/0 Command other than H'FF and H'D1 1 Q (0) 1 H'D1 command 0 Q 1 Command other than H'D1 1 Q 1 H'D1 command 0 Q 1 H'D1 command 0 Q 1 H'D1 command 0 Q 0 Any data 0 1/0 1 H'D1 command 0 Q(1/0) HA0 Data/Command 1 0 0 Turn-off sequence Turn-on sequence (abbreviated form) Turn-off sequence (abbreviated form) Cancelled sequence Retriggered sequence Consecutively executed sequences Notes: 1. Arbitrary data with bit 1 set to 1. 2. Arbitrary data with bit 1 cleared to 0. 17.3.4 Host Interface Pin Shutdown Function Host interface output can be placed in the high-impedance state according to the state of the HIFSD pin. Setting the SDE bit to 1 in the SYSCR2 register enables the HIFSD pin is slave mode. The HIF constantly monitors the HIFSD pin, and when this pin goes low, places the host interface output pins (HIRQ1, HIRQ11, HIRQ12, and GA20) in the high-impedance state. At the same time, the host interface input pins (CS1, CS2 or ECS2, IOW, IOR, and HA0) are disabled (fixed at the high input state internally) regardless of the pin states, and the signals of the multiplexed Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 539 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] functions of these pins (input block) are similarly fixed internally. As a result, the host interface I/O pins (HDB7 to HDB0) also go to the high-impedance state. This state is maintained while the HIFSD pin is low, and when the HIFSD pin returns to the highlevel state, the pins are restored to their normal operation as host interface pins. Table 17.9 shows the scope of HIF pin shutdown in slave mode. Table 17.9 Scope of HIF Pin Shutdown in Slave Mode Abbreviation Port Scope of Shutdown in Slave Mode I/O Selection Conditions IOR P93 O Input Slave mode IOW P94 O Input Slave mode CS1 P95 O Input Slave mode CS2 P81 ∆ Input Slave mode and CS2E = 1 and FGA20E = 0 ECS2 P90 ∆ Input Slave mode and CS2E = 1 and FGA20E = 1 HA0 P80 O Input Slave mode HDB7 to HDB0 P37 to P30 O I/O Slave mode HIRQ11 P43 ∆ Output Slave mode and CS2E = 1 and P43DDR = 1 HIRQ1 P44 ∆ Output Slave mode and P44DDR = 1 HIRQ12 P45 ∆ Output Slave mode and P45DDR = 1 GA20 P81 ∆ Output Slave mode and FGA20E = 1 HIFSD P82 — Input Slave mode and SDE = 1 Notes: Slave mode: Single-chip mode and HI12E = 1 O: Pins shut down by shutdown function The IRQ2/ADTRG input signal is also fixed in the case of P90 shutdown, the TMCI1/HSYNCI signal in the case of P43 shutdown, and the TMRI/CSYNCI in the case of P45 shutdown. ∆: Pins shut down only when the HIF function is selected by means of a register setting —: Pin not shut down Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 540 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] 17.4 Interrupts 17.4.1 IBF1, IBF2 The host interface can issue two interrupt requests to the slave CPU: IBF1 and IBF2. They are input buffer full interrupts for input data registers IDR1 and IDR2 respectively. Each interrupt is enabled when the corresponding enable bit is set. Table 17.10 Input Buffer Full Interrupts Interrupt Description IBF1 Requested when IBFIE1 is set to 1 and IDR1 is full IBF2 Requested when IBFIE2 is set to 1 and IDR2 is full 17.4.2 HIRQ11, HIRQ1, and HIRQ12 In slave mode (single-chip mode, with HI12E = 1 in SYSCR2), bits P45DR to P43DR in the port 4 data register (P4DR) can be used as host interrupt request latches. These three P4DR bits are cleared to 0 by the host processor’s read signal (IOR). If CS1 and HA0 are low, when IOR goes low and the host reads ODR1, HIRQ1 and HIRQ12 are cleared to 0. If CS2 and HA0 are low, when IOR goes low and the host reads ODR2, HIRQ11 is cleared to 0. To generate a host interrupt request, normally on-chip firmware writes 1 in the corresponding bit. In processing the interrupt, the host’s interrupt handling routine reads the output data register (ODR1 or ODR2), and this clears the host interrupt latch to 0. Table 17.11 indicates how these bits are set and cleared. Figure 17.3 shows the processing in flowchart form. Table 17.11 HIRQ Setting/Clearing Conditions Host Interrupt Signal Setting Condition Clearing Condition HIRQ11 (P43) Slave CPU reads 0 from bit P43DR, then writes 1 Slave CPU writes 0 in bit P43DR, or host reads output data register 2 HIRQ1 (P44) Slave CPU reads 0 from bit P44DR, then writes 1 Slave CPU writes 0 in bit P44DR, or host reads output data register 1 HIRQ12 (P45) Slave CPU reads 0 from bit P45DR, then writes 1 Slave CPU writes 0 in bit P45DR, or host reads output data register 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 541 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 17 Host Interface [H8S/2138 Group] Slave CPU Master CPU Write to ODR Write 1 to P4DR No HIRQ output high Interrupt initiation HIRQ output low ODR read P4DR = 0? Yes No All bytes transferred? Yes Hardware operations Software operations Figure 17.3 HIRQ Output Flowchart HIRQ Setting/Clearing Contention: If there is contention between a P4DR read/write by the CPU and P4DR (HIRQ11, HIRQ1, HIRQ12) clearing by the host, clearing by the host is held pending during the P4DR read/write by the CPU. P4DR clearing is executed after completion of the read/write. 17.5 Usage Note The host interface provides buffering of asynchronous data from the host and slave processors, but an interface protocol must be followed to implement necessary functions and avoid data contention. For example, if the host and slave processors try to access the same input or output data register simultaneously, the data will be corrupted. Interrupts can be used to design a simple and effective protocol. Also, if CS1 and CS2 or ECS2 are driven low simultaneously in attempting IDR or ODR access, signal contention will occur within the chip, and a through-current may result. This usage must therefore be avoided. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 542 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 18 D/A Converter Section 18 D/A Converter 18.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group have an on-chip D/A converter module with two channels. 18.1.1 Features Features of the D/A converter module are listed below. • Eight-bit resolution • Two-channel output • Maximum conversion time: 10 µs (with 20-pF load capacitance) • Output voltage: 0 V to AVCC • D/A output retention in software standby mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 543 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 18 D/A Converter 18.1.2 Block Diagram Module data bus Bus interface Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the D/A converter. DACR 8-bit D/A DA1 DADR1 DA0 DADR0 AVCC AVSS Control circuit Legend: DACR: D/A control register DADR0: D/A data register 0 DADR1: D/A data register 1 Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of D/A Converter Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 544 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Internal data bus Section 18 D/A Converter 18.1.3 Input and Output Pins Table 18.1 lists the input and output pins used by the D/A converter module. Table 18.1 Input and Output Pins of D/A Converter Module Name Abbreviation I/O Function Analog supply voltage AVCC Input Power supply for analog circuits Analog ground AVSS Input Ground and reference voltage for analog circuits Analog output 0 DA0 Output Analog output channel 0 Analog output 1 DA1 Output Analog output channel 1 18.1.4 Register Configuration Table 18.2 lists the registers of the D/A converter module. Table 18.2 D/A Converter Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* D/A data register 0 DADR0 R/W H'00 H'FFF8 D/A data register 1 DADR1 R/W H'00 H'FFF9 D/A control register DACR R/W H'1F H'FFFA Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 545 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 18 D/A Converter 18.2 Register Descriptions 18.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 and 1 (DADR0, DADR1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W D/A data registers 0 and 1 (DADR0 and DADR1) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store data to be converted. When analog output is enabled, the value in the D/A data register is converted and output continuously at the analog output pin. The D/A data registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 18.2.2 D/A Control Register (DACR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAOE1 DAOE0 DAE — — — — — Initial value 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W — — — — — DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the D/A converter module. DACR is initialized to H'1F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—D/A Output Enable 1 (DAOE1): Controls D/A conversion and analog output. Bit 7 DAOE1 Description 0 Analog output DA1 is disabled 1 D/A conversion is enabled on channel 1. Analog output DA1 is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 546 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 18 D/A Converter Bit 6—D/A Output Enable 0 (DAOE0): Controls D/A conversion and analog output. Bit 6 DAOE0 Description 0 Analog output DA0 is disabled 1 D/A conversion is enabled on channel 0. Analog output DA0 is enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—D/A Enable (DAE): Controls D/A conversion, in combination with bits DAOE0 and DAOE1. D/A conversion is controlled independently on channels 0 and 1 when DAE = 0. Channels 0 and 1 are controlled together when DAE = 1. Output of the converted results is always controlled independently by DAOE0 and DAOE1. Bit 7 DAOE1 Bit 6 DAOE0 Bit 5 DAE D/A conversion 0 0 * Disabled on channels 0 and 1 1 0 Enabled on channel 0 Disabled on channel 1 1 Enabled on channels 0 and 1 0 Disabled on channel 0 Enabled on channel 1 1 Enabled on channels 0 and 1 * Enabled on channels 0 and 1 1 0 1 *: Don’t care If the H8S/2138 Group chip enters software standby mode while D/A conversion is enabled, the D/A output is retained and the analog power supply current is the same as during D/A conversion. If it is necessary to reduce the analog power supply current in software standby mode, disable D/A output by clearing both the DAOE0, DAOE1 and DAE bits to 0. Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 547 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 18 D/A Converter 18.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP10 bit is set to 1, the D/A converter halts and enters module stop mode at the end of the bus cycle. See section 24.5, Module Stop Mode, for details. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 10—Module Stop (MSTP10): Specifies D/A converter module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 2 MSTP10 Description 0 D/A converter module stop mode is cleared 1 D/A converter module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 548 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 18 D/A Converter 18.3 Operation The D/A converter module has two on-chip D/A converter circuits that can operate independently. D/A conversion is performed continuously whenever enabled by the D/A control register (DACR). When a new value is written in DADR0 or DADR1, conversion of the new value begins immediately. The converted result is output by setting the DAOE0 or DAOE1 bit to 1. An example of conversion on channel 0 is given next. Figure 18.2 shows the timing. • Software writes the data to be converted in DADR0. • D/A conversion begins when the DAOE0 bit in DACR is set to 1. After the elapse of the conversion time, analog output appears at the DA0 pin. Output of the converted result begins after the conversion time. The output value is AVcc × (DADR value)/256. • This output continues until a new value is written in DADR0 or the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0. • If a new value is written in DADR0, conversion begins immediately. Output of the converted result begins after the conversion time. • When the DAOE0 bit is cleared to 0, DA0 becomes an input pin. DADR0 write cycle DACR write cycle DADR0 write cycle DACR write cycle φ Address Conversion data (1) DADR0 Conversion data (2) DAOE0 Conversion result (1) DA0 High-impedance state Conversion result (2) t DCONV t DCONV Legend: t DCONV: D/A conversion time Figure 18.2 D/A Conversion (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 549 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 18 D/A Converter Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 550 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Section 19 A/D Converter 19.1 Overview The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group incorporate a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter that allows up to eight analog input channels to be selected. In addition to the eight analog input channels, up to 8 channels of digital input can be selected for A/D conversion. Since the conversion precision falls to the equivalent of 6-bit resolution when digital input is selected, digital input is ideal for use by a comparator identifying multi-valued inputs, for example. 19.1.1 Features A/D converter features are listed below. • 10-bit resolution • Eight (analog) or 8 (digital) input channels • Settable analog conversion voltage range The analog conversion voltage range is set using the analog power supply voltage pin (AVcc) as the analog reference voltage • High-speed conversion Minimum conversion time: 6.7 µs per channel (at 20-MHz operation) • Choice of single mode or scan mode Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels • Four data registers Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel • Sample and hold function • Three kinds of conversion start Choice of software or timer conversion start trigger (8-bit timer), or ADTRG pin • A/D conversion end interrupt generation An A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request can be generated at the end of A/D conversion Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 551 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter. Internal data bus AVSS AN5 AN6/CIN0 to CIN7 AN7 ADCR ADCSR ADDRD ADDRC ADDRB + – Multiplexer AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 AN4 ADDRA 10-bit D/A Successive approximations register AVCC Bus interface Module data bus Comparator φ/8 Control circuit Sample-andhold circuit φ/16 ADI interrupt signal ADTRG Legend: ADCR: ADCSR: ADDRA: ADDRB: ADDRC: ADDRD: Conversion start trigger from 8-bit timer A/D control register A/D control/status register A/D data register A A/D data register B A/D data register C A/D data register D Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 552 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 19.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The AVCC and AVSS pins are the power supply pins for the analog block in the A/D converter. Table 19.1 A/D Converter Pins Pin Name Symbol I/O Function Analog power supply pin AVCC Input Analog block power supply Analog ground pin AVSS Input Analog block ground and A/D conversion reference voltage Analog input pin 0 AN0 Input Analog input channel 0 Analog input pin 1 AN1 Input Analog input channel 1 Analog input pin 2 AN2 Input Analog input channel 2 Analog input pin 3 AN3 Input Analog input channel 3 Analog input pin 4 AN4 Input Analog input channel 4 Analog input pin 5 AN5 Input Analog input channel 5 Analog input pin 6 AN6 Input Analog input channel 6 Analog input pin 7 AN7 Input Analog input channel 7 A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG Input External trigger input for starting A/D conversion Expansion A/D input pins 0 to 7 CIN0 to CIN7 Input Expansion A/D conversion input (digital input pin) channels 0 to 7 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 553 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.1.4 Register Configuration Table 19.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter. Table 19.2 A/D Converter Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 1 Address* A/D data register AH ADDRAH R H'00 H'FFE0 A/D data register AL ADDRAL R H'00 H'FFE1 A/D data register BH ADDRBH R H'00 H'FFE2 A/D data register BL ADDRBL R H'00 H'FFE3 A/D data register CH ADDRCH R H'00 H'FFE4 A/D data register CL ADDRCL R H'00 H'FFE5 A/D data register DH ADDRDH R H'00 H'FFE6 A/D data register DL ADDRDL R H'00 H'FFE7 A/D control/status register ADCSR 2 R/(W)* H'00 H'FFE8 A/D control register ADCR R/W H'3F H'FFE9 Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'3F H'FF86 MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FF87 KBCOMP R/W H'00 H'FEE4 Keyboard comparator control register Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 554 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.2 Register Descriptions 19.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 — — — — — — Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers, ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of A/D conversion. The 10-bit data resulting from A/D conversion is transferred to the ADDR register for the selected channel and stored there. The upper 8 bits of the converted data are transferred to the upper byte (bits 15 to 8) of ADDR, and the lower 2 bits are transferred to the lower byte (bits 7 and 6) and stored. Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0. The correspondence between the analog input channels and ADDR registers is shown in table 19.3. The ADDR registers can always be read by the CPU. The upper byte can be read directly, but for the lower byte, data transfer is performed via a temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 19.3, Interface to Bus Master. The ADDR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Table 19.3 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers Analog Input Channel Group 0 Group 1 A/D Data Register AN0 AN4 ADDRA AN1 AN5 ADDRB AN2 AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 ADDRC AN3 AN7 ADDRD Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 555 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADF ADIE ADST SCAN CKS CH2 CH1 CH0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. ADCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls A/D conversion operations. ADCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bit 7—A/D End Flag (ADF): Status flag that indicates the end of A/D conversion. Bit 7 ADF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • When 0 is written in the ADF flag after reading ADF = 1 • When the DTC is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read (Initial value) [Setting conditions] • Single mode: When A/D conversion ends • Scan mode: When A/D conversion ends on all specified channels Bit 6—A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt (ADI) requests at the end of A/D conversion. Bit 6 ADIE Description 0 A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request is disabled 1 A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 556 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 19 A/D Converter Bit 5—A/D Start (ADST): Selects starting or stopping of A/D conversion. Holds a value of 1 during A/D conversion. The ADST bit can be set to 1 by software, a timer conversion start trigger, or the A/D external trigger input pin (ADTRG). Bit 5 ADST Description 0 A/D conversion stopped 1 Single mode: A/D conversion is started. Cleared to 0 automatically when conversion on the specified channel ends (Initial value) Scan mode: A/D conversion is started. Conversion continues sequentially on the selected channels until ADST is cleared to 0 by software, a reset, or a transition to standby mode or module stop mode Bit 4—Scan Mode (SCAN): Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D conversion operating mode. See section 19.4, Operation, for single mode and scan mode operation. Only set the SCAN bit while conversion is stopped. Bit 4 SCAN Description 0 Single mode 1 Scan mode (Initial value) Bit 3—Clock Select (CKS): Sets the A/D conversion time. Only change the conversion time while ADST = 0. Bit 3 CKS Description 0 Conversion time = 266 states (max.) 1 Conversion time = 134 states (max.) (Initial value) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 557 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Bits 2 to 0—Channel Select 2 to 0 (CH2 to CH0): Together with the SCAN bit, these bits select the analog input channel(s). One analog input channel can be switched to digital input. Only set the input channel while conversion is stopped. Group Selection Channel Selection Description CH2 CH1 CH0 Single Mode Scan Mode 0 0 0 AN0 AN0 1 AN1 AN0, AN1 0 AN2 AN0 to AN2 1 AN3 AN0 to AN3 0 AN4 AN4 1 AN5 AN4, AN5 0 AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 1 AN7 AN4, AN5, AN6 or CIN0 to CIN7 1 1 0 1 (Initial value) AN7 19.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRGS1 TRGS0 — — — — — — Initial value 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Read/Write R/W R/W — — — — — — Bit ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of A/D conversion operations. ADCR is initialized to H'3F by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 558 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Bits 7 and 6—Timer Trigger Select 1 and 0 (TRGS1, TRGS0): These bits select enabling or disabling of the start of A/D conversion by a trigger signal. Only set bits TRGS1 and TRGS0 while conversion is stopped. Bit 7 Bit 6 TRGS1 TRGS0 Description 0 0 Start of A/D conversion by external trigger is disabled 1 Start of A/D conversion by external trigger is disabled 0 Start of A/D conversion by external trigger (8-bit timer) is enabled 1 Start of A/D conversion by external trigger pin is enabled 1 (Initial value) Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: Should always be written 1. Note: Some of these bits are readable/writable in products other than the HD64F2138, HD64F2134, HD64F2132R, HD6432132, and HD6432130, however, when writing, be sure to write 1 here for software compatibility. 19.2.4 Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IrE IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 KBADE KBCH2 KBCH1 KBCH0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W KBCOMP is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the SCI2 IrDA function and selects the CIN input channels for A/D conversion. KBCOMP is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 to 4—IrDA Control: See the description in section 15.2.11, Keyboard Comparator Control Register (KBCOMP). Bit 3—Keyboard A/D Enable: Selects either analog input pin (AN6) or digital input pin (CIN0 to CIN7) for A/D converter channel 6 input. If digital input pins are selected, input on A/D converter channel 7 will not be converted correctly. Bits 2 to 0—Keyboard A/D Channel Select 2 to 0 (KBCH2 to KBCH0): These bits select the channels for A/D conversion from among the digital input pins. Only set the input channel while A/D conversion is stopped. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 559 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 KBADE KBCH2 KBCH1 KBCH0 A/D Converter Channel 6 Input A/D Converter Channel 7 Input 0 — — — AN6 AN7 1 0 0 0 CIN0 Undefined 1 CIN1 Undefined 0 CIN2 Undefined 1 CIN3 Undefined 0 CIN4 Undefined 1 CIN5 Undefined 1 1 0 1 19.2.5 0 CIN6 Undefined 1 CIN7 Undefined Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) MSTPCRH Bit 7 6 5 4 3 MSTPCRL 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0 Initial value Read/Write 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control. When the MSTP9 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCR is initialized to H'3FFF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. MSTPCRH Bit 1—Module Stop (MSTP9): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode. MSTPCRH Bit 1 MSTP9 Description 0 A/D converter module stop mode is cleared 1 A/D converter module stop mode is set Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 560 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 19 A/D Converter 19.3 Interface to Bus Master ADDRA to ADDRD are 16-bit registers, but the data bus to the bus master is only 8 bits wide. Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is accessed via a temporary register (TEMP). A data read from ADDR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the upper byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU. When reading ADDR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. Figure 19.2 shows the data flow for ADDR access. Upper byte read Bus master (H'AA) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Lower byte read Bus master (H'40) Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'40) ADDRnH (H'AA) ADDRnL (H'40) (n = A to D) Figure 19.2 ADDR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 561 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.4 Operation The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. It has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 19.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) Single mode is selected when A/D conversion is to be performed on a single channel only. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. On completion of conversion, the ADF flag is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated. The ADF flag is cleared by writing 0 after reading ADCSR. When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. Typical operations when channel 1 (AN1) is selected in single mode are described next. Figure 19.3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Single mode is selected (SCAN = 0), input channel AN1 is selected (CH1 = 0, CH0 = 1), the A/D interrupt is enabled (ADIE = 1), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1). 2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRB. At the same time the ADF flag is set to 1, the ADST bit is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter becomes idle. 3. Since ADF = 1 and ADIE = 1, an ADI interrupt is requested. 4. The A/D interrupt handling routine starts. 5. The routine reads ADCSR, then writes 0 to the ADF flag. 6. The routine reads and processes the conversion result (ADDRB). 7. Execution of the A/D interrupt handling routine ends. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 562 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Set* ADIE ADST A/D conversion starts Set* Set* Clear* Clear* ADF State of channel 0 (AN0) Idle State of channel 1 (AN1) Idle State of channel 2 (AN2) Idle State of channel 3 (AN3) Idle A/D conversion 1 Idle A/D conversion 2 Idle ADDRA ADDRB Read conversion result A/D conversion result 1 Read conversion result A/D conversion result 2 ADDRC ADDRD Note: * Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. Figure 19.3 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Single Mode, Channel 1 Selected) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 563 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1) Scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or by timer or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0; AN4 when CH2 = 1). When two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (AN1 or AN5) starts immediately. A/D conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the ADST bit is cleared to 0. The conversion results are transferred for storage into the ADDR registers corresponding to the channels. When the operating mode or analog input channel must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the ADST bit to 0 in ADCSR to halt A/D conversion. After making the necessary changes, set the ADST bit to 1 to start A/D conversion again. The ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or input channel is changed. Typical operations when three channels (AN0 to AN2) are selected in scan mode are described next. Figure 19.4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. Scan mode is selected (SCAN = 1), scan group 0 is selected (CH2 = 0), analog input channels AN0 to AN2 are selected (CH1 = 1, CH0 = 0), and A/D conversion is started (ADST = 1) 2. When A/D conversion of the first channel (AN0) is completed, the result is transferred to ADDRA. Next, conversion of the second channel (AN1) starts automatically. 3. Conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (AN2). 4. When conversion of all the selected channels (AN0 to AN2) is completed, the ADF flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (AN0) starts again. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested after A/D conversion ends. 5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops. After that, if the ADST bit is set to 1, A/D conversion starts again from the first channel (AN0). Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 564 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Continuous A/D conversion execution Clear*1 Set*1 ADST Clear*1 ADF A/D conversion time State of channel 0 (AN0) State of channel 1 (AN1) State of channel 2 (AN2) Idle Idle A/D conversion 1 Idle Idle A/D conversion 2 Idle Idle A/D conversion 4 A/D conversion 5 *2 Idle A/D conversion 3 State of channel 3 (AN3) Idle Idle Transfer ADDRA A/D conversion result 1 ADDRB A/D conversion result 4 A/D conversion result 2 ADDRC A/D conversion result 3 ADDRD Notes: 1. Vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 2. Data currently being converted is ignored. Figure 19.4 Example of A/D Converter Operation (Scan Mode, Channels AN0 to AN2 Selected) 19.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time The A/D converter has an on-chip sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog input at a time tD after the ADST bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. Figure 19.5 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 19.4 indicates the A/D conversion time. As indicated in figure 19.5, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 19.4. In scan mode, the values given in table 19.4 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when CKS = 0 or 128 states when CKS = 1. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 565 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter (1) φ Address (2) Write signal Input sampling timing ADF tD tSPL tCONV Legend: (1): ADCSR write cycle (2): ADCSR address tD: A/D conversion start delay tSPL: Input sampling time tCONV: A/D conversion time Figure 19.5 A/D Conversion Timing Table 19.4 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode) CKS = 0 CKS = 1 Item Symbol Min Typ Max Min Typ Max A/D conversion start delay tD 10 — 17 6 — 9 Input sampling time tSPL — 63 — — 31 — A/D conversion time tCONV 259 — 266 131 — 134 Note: Values in the table are the number of states. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 566 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing A/D conversion can be externally triggered. When the TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits are set to 11 in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as when the ADST bit is set to 1 by software. Figure 19.6 shows the timing. φ ADTRG Internal trigger signal ADST A/D conversion Figure 19.6 External Trigger Input Timing 19.5 Interrupts The A/D converter generates an interrupt (ADI) at the end of A/D conversion. The ADI interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the ADIE bit in ADCSR. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 567 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter 19.6 Usage Notes The following points should be noted when using the A/D converter. Setting Range of Analog Power Supply and Other Pins: 1. Analog input voltage range The voltage applied to the ANn analog input pins during A/D conversion should be in the range AVSS ≤ ANn ≤ AVCC (n = 0 to 7). 2. Digital input voltage range The voltage applied to the CINn digital input pins should be in the range AVSS ≤ CINn ≤ AVCC and VSS ≤ CINn ≤ VCC (n = 0 to 7). 3. Relation between AVCC, AVSS and VCC, VSS As the relationship between AVCC, AVSS and VCC, VSS, set AVSS = VSS. If the A/D converter is not used, the AVCC and AVSS pins must on no account be left open. If conditions 1 to 3 above are not met, the reliability of the device may be adversely affected. Notes on Board Design: In board design, digital circuitry and analog circuitry should be as mutually isolated as possible, and layout in which digital circuit signal lines and analog circuit signal lines cross or are in close proximity should be avoided as far as possible. Failure to do so may result in incorrect operation of the analog circuitry due to inductance, adversely affecting A/D conversion values. Also, digital circuitry must be isolated from the analog input signals (AN0 to AN7), and analog power supply (AVCC) by the analog ground (AVSS). Also, the analog ground (AVSS) should be connected at one point to a stable digital ground (VSS) on the board. Notes on Noise Countermeasures: A protection circuit connected to prevent damage due to an abnormal voltage such as an excessive surge at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) should be connected between AVCC and AVSS as shown in figure 19.7. Also, the bypass capacitors connected to AVCC and the filter capacitor connected to AN0 to AN7 must be connected to AVSS. If a filter capacitor is connected as shown in figure 19.7, the input currents at the analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) are averaged, and so an error may arise. Also, when A/D conversion is performed frequently, as in scan mode, if the current charged and discharged by the capacitance of the sample-and-hold circuit in the A/D converter exceeds the current input via the input impedance Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 568 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter (Rin), an error will arise in the analog input pin voltage. Careful consideration is therefore required when deciding the circuit constants. AVCC 100 Ω Rin*2 AN0 to AN7 *1 0.1 µF AVSS Notes: Figures are reference values. 1. 10 µF 0.01 µF 2. Rin: Input impedance Figure 19.7 Example of Analog Input Protection Circuit Table 19.5 Analog Pin Specifications Item Min Max Unit Analog input capacitance — 20 pF — 10* kΩ Permissible signal source impedance Note: * When VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V and φ ≤ 12 MHz 10 kΩ AN0 to AN7 To A/D converter 20 pF Note: Values are reference values. Figure 19.8 Analog Input Pin Equivalent Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 569 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter A/D Conversion Precision Definitions: H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group A/D conversion precision definitions are given below. • Resolution The number of A/D converter digital output codes • Offset error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value B'0000000000 (H'000) to B'0000000001 (H'001) (see figure 19.10). • Full-scale error The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic when the digital output changes from B'1111111110 (H'3FE) to B'111111111 (H'3FF) (see figure 19.10). • Quantization error The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 19.9). • Nonlinearity error The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristic between the zero voltage and the full-scale voltage. Does not include the offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error. • Absolute precision The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes the offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 570 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic H'3FF H'3FE H'3FD H'004 H'003 H'002 Quantization error H'001 H'000 1 2 1024 1024 1022 1023 FS 1024 1024 Analog input voltage Figure 19.9 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (1) Full-scale error Digital output Ideal A/D conversion characteristic Nonlinearity error Actual A/D conversion characteristic FS Offset error Analog input voltage Figure 19.10 A/D Conversion Precision Definitions (2) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 571 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 19 A/D Converter Permissible Signal Source Impedance: H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group analog input is designed so that conversion precision is guaranteed for an input signal for which the signal source impedance is 10 kΩ (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, when φ ≤ 12 MHz or CKS = 0) or less. This specification is provided to enable the A/D converter’s sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 kΩ (Vcc = 4.0 to 5.5 V, when φ ≤ 12 MHz or CKS = 0), charging may be insufficient and it may not be possible to guarantee the A/D conversion precision. However, if a large capacitance is provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. But since a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µsec or greater). When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted. Influences on Absolute Precision: Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely affect absolute precision. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND such as AVSS. Care is also required to insure that filter circuits do not communicate with digital signals on the mounting board, so acting as antennas. Sensor output impedance, up to 10 kΩ H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group A/D converter chip equivalent circuit 10 kΩ Sensor input Low-pass filter C to 0.1 µF Cin = 15 pF Note: Values are reference values. Figure 19.11 Example of Analog Input Circuit Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 572 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 20 pF Section 20 RAM Section 20 RAM 20.1 Overview The H8S/2138, H8S/2134, and H8S/2133 have 4 kbytes of on-chip high-speed static RAM, and the H8S/2137, H8S/2132, and H8S/2130 have 2 kbytes. The on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte data and word data to be accessed in one state. This makes it possible to perform fast word data transfer. The on-chip RAM can be enabled or disabled by means of the RAM enable bit (RAME) in the system control register (SYSCR). 20.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'FFE080 H'FFE081 H'FFE082 H'FFE083 H'FFE084 H'FFE085 H'FFEFFE H'FFEFFF H'FFFF00 H'FFFF01 H'FFFF7E H'FFFF7F Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2138, H8S/2134, H8S/2133) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 573 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 20 RAM 20.1.2 Register Configuration The on-chip RAM is controlled by SYSCR. Table 20.1 shows the register configuration. Table 20.1 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFC4 Note: 20.2 * Lower 16 bits of the address. System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS2E IOSE INTM1 INTM0 XRST NMIEG HIE RAME Initial value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 Read/Write R/W R/W R R/W R R/W R/W R/W The on-chip RAM is enabled or disabled by the RAME bit in SYSCR. For details of other bits in SYSCR, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset state is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME Description 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 574 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 20 RAM 20.3 Operation 20.3.1 Expanded Mode (Modes 1, 2, and 3 (EXPE = 1)) When the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to H8S/2138, H8S/2134, and H8S/2133 addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, and H8S/2137, H8S/2132, and H8S/2130 addresses H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the on-chip RAM. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, accesses to addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the off-chip address space. Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus, it can be written to and read in byte or word units. Each type of access is performed in one state. Even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. 20.3.2 Single-Chip Mode (Modes 2 and 3 (EXPE = 0)) When the RAME bit is set to 1, accesses to H8S/2138, H8S/2134, and H8S/2133 addresses H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, and H8S/2137, H8S/2132, and H8S/2130 addresses H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF and H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F, are directed to the on-chip RAM. When the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is not accessed. Undefined values are read from these bits, and writing is invalid. Since the on-chip RAM is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus, it can be written to and read in byte or word units. Each type of access is performed in one state. Even addresses use the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses use the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 575 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 20 RAM Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 576 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.1 Overview The H8S/2138 and H8S/2134 have 128 kbytes of on-chip ROM, the H8S/2133 has 96 kbytes, the H8S/2137 and H8S/2132 have 64 kbytes, and the H8S/2130 has 32 kbytes. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The CPU accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher processing speed. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM. The lineups for the H8S/2138, H8S/2134, and H8S/2132 include flash memory versions which can be erased and programmed on-board as well as by a general-purpose PROM programmer. 21.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'000003 H'01FFFE H'01FFFF Figure 21.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2138, H8S/2134) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 577 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.1.2 Register Configuration The H8S/2138 Group and H8S/2134 Group on-chip ROM is controlled by the operating mode and register MDCR. The register configuration is shown in table 21.1. Table 21.1 ROM Register Register Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Mode control register MDCR R/W Undefined Depends on the operating mode H'FFC5 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 21.2 Register Descriptions 21.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXPE — — — — — MDS1 MDS0 —* R/W* 0 0 0 0 0 —* —* — — — — — R R Note: * Determined by the MD1 and MD0 pins. MDCR is an 8-bit register used to set the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group operating mode and monitor the current operating mode. The EXPE bit is initialized in accordance with the mode pin states by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, EXPE is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, EXPE has an initial value of 0 and can be read or written. Bit 7 EXPE Description 0 Single-chip mode selected 1 Expanded mode selected Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 578 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 1 and 0—Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate values that reflects the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to pins MD1 and MD0, respectively. These are read-only bits, and cannot be modified. When MDCR is read, the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 are latched in these bits. 21.3 Operation The on-chip ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, and both byte and word data is accessed in one state. Even addresses are connected to the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses to the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM, as shown in table 21.2. In normal mode, the maximum amount of ROM that can be used is 56 kbytes. Table 21.2 Operating Modes and ROM Operating Mode MCU Operating Mode CPU Operating Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Note: * Mode Pins MDCR Description MD1 MD0 EXPE On-Chip ROM Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled 0 1 1 Disabled Advanced Single-chip mode 1 0 0 Enabled* Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Normal Single-chip mode Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled 1 1 0 1 Enabled (max. 56 kbytes) 128 kbytes in the H8S/2138 and H8S/2134, 96 kbytes in the H8S/2133, 64 kbytes in the H8S/2137 and H8S/2132, and 32 kbytes in the H8S/2130. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 579 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.4 Overview of Flash Memory 21.4.1 Features The features of the flash memory are summarized below. • Four flash memory operating modes Program mode Erase mode Program-verify mode Erase-verify mode • Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase (in single-block units). When erasing multiple blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 8-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 28kbyte, and 32-kbyte blocks. • Programming/erase times The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming, equivalent to 300 µs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. • Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. • On-board programming modes There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: Boot mode User program mode • Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, the bit rate of the H8S/2138 Group or H8S/2134 Group chip can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. • Protect modes There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. • Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 580 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.4.2 Block Diagram Internal address bus Module bus Internal data bus (16 bits) FLMCR1 * FLMCR2 * EBR1 EBR2 Bus interface/controller Operating mode Mode pins * * Flash memory (128 kbytes/64 kbytes) Legend: FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Note: * These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. Figure 21.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 581 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes Mode Transitions: When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 21.3. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer mode. Reset state MD1 = 1 RES = 0 User mode with on-chip ROM enabled SWE = 1 RES = 0 *2 SWE = 0 RES = 0 *1 RES = 0 Programmer mode User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. MD1 = MD0 = 0, P92 = P91 = P90 = 1 2. MD1 = MD0 = 0, P92 = 0, P91 = P90 = 1 Figure 21.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 582 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) On-Board Programming Modes • Boot mode 1. Initial state The flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. The description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. SCI communication check When boot mode is entered, the boot program in the chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, an SCI communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Host Programming control program Programming control program New application program New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host Host Programming control program New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Flash memory RAM Programming control program Boot program area Flash memory erase SCI Boot program New application program Program execution state Figure 21.4 Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 583 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) • User program mode 1. Initial state (1) The program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. Programming/erase control program transfer Executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to RAM. Host Host Programming/ erase control program New application program New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI Boot program Flash memory Transfer program RAM Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host Host New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Transfer program SCI Boot program RAM Flash memory Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Flash memory erase Programming/ erase control program New application program Program execution state Figure 21.5 User Program Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 584 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode User Program Mode Yes Yes Block erase No Yes Programming control program* Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify Entire memory erase Program/program-verify Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Block Configuration: The flash memory is divided into two 32-kbyte blocks (128-kbyte version only), two 8-kbyte blocks, one 16-kbyte block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks. Address H'00000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte Address H'00000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 28 kbytes 128 kbytes 64 kbytes 16 kbytes 28 kbytes 16 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes Address H'0FFFF 32 kbytes 32 kbytes Address H'1FFFF (a) 128-kbyte version (b) 64-kbyte version Figure 21.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 585 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.4.4 Pin Configuration The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 21.3. Table 21.3 Flash Memory Pins Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function Reset RES Input Reset Mode 1 MD1 Input Sets MCU operating mode Mode 0 MD0 Input Sets MCU operating mode Port 92 P92 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Port 91 P91 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Port 90 P90 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Transmit data TxD1 Output Serial transmit data output Receive data RxD1 Input Serial receive data input 21.4.5 Register Configuration The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 21.4. In order for these registers to be accessed, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 in STCR. Table 21.4 Flash Memory Registers Initial Value Address* R/W* 3 R/W* 3 H'80 4 H'00* H'FF80* 2 H'FF81* Erase block register 2 EBR1* 5 EBR2* R/W* 3 R/W* H'00* 4 H'00* H'FF82* 2 H'FF83* Serial timer control register STCR R/W H'00 H'FFC3 Register Name Abbreviation R/W Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1* 5 FLMCR2* Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 5 5 3 4 1 2 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Flash memory registers share addresses with other registers. Register selection is performed by the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). 3. In modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. 4. The SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00. 5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states. These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 586 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.5 Register Descriptions 21.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FWE SWE — — EV PV E P Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1. Program mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the P bit. Erase mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the E bit. FLMCR1 is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Writes to the EV and PV bits in FLMCR1 are enabled only when SWE=1; writes to the E bit only when SWE = 1, and ESU = 1; and writes to the P bit only when SWE = 1, and PSU = 1. Bit 7—Flash Write Enable (FWE): Controls programming and erasing of the on-chip flash memory. This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6—Software Write Enable (SWE): Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, P, and EB9 to EB0, and should not be cleared at the same time as these bits. Bit 6 SWE Description 0 Writes disabled 1 Writes enabled (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 587 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Bit 3—Erase-Verify (EV): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 3 EV Description 0 Erase-verify mode cleared 1 Transition to erase-verify mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 2—Program-Verify (PV): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 2 PV Description 0 Program-verify mode cleared 1 Transition to program-verify mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 1—Erase (E): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 E Description 0 Erase mode cleared 1 Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 588 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Bit 0—Program (P): Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, PSU, ESU, EV, PV, or E bit at the same time. Bit 0 P Description 0 Program mode cleared 1 Transition to program mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 21.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLER — — — — — ESU PSU Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R — — — — — R/W R/W FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register that monitors the presence or absence of flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) and performs setup for flash memory program/erase mode. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 589 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Bit 7 FLER Description 0 Flash memory is operating normally (Initial value) Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode 1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [Setting condition] See section 21.8.3, Error Protection Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: Always write 0 when writing to these bits. Bit 1—Erase Setup (ESU): Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 ESU Description 0 Erase setup cleared 1 Erase setup (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 0—Program Setup (PSU): Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 0 PSU Description 0 Program setup cleared 1 Program setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 590 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EBR1 — — — — — — EB9/—* EB8/—* Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write — — — — — — 0 0 1 2 1 2 * * R/W R/W* * Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write 1 R/W* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W EBR2 2 2 Notes: 1. In normal mode, these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. 2. Bits EB8 and EB9 are not present in the 64-kbyte versions; These bits must not be set to 1. EBR1 and EBR2 are registers that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; bits 1 and 2 in EBR1 (128 kB versions only) and bits 7 to 0 in EBR2 are readable/writable bits. EBR1 and EBR2 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, and the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 or EBR2 is set, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are eraseprotected. Set only one bit in EBR1 or EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set). When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 21.5. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 591 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks Block (Size) 128-kbyte Versions 64-kbyte Versions Address EB0 (1 kbyte) EB0 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0000 to H'(00)03FF EB1 (1 kbyte) EB1 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0400 to H'(00)07FF EB2 (1 kbyte) EB2 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0800 to H'(00)0BFF EB3 (1 kbyte) EB3 (1 kbytes) H'(00)0C00 to H'(00)0FFF EB4 (28 kbytes) EB4 (28 kbytes) H'(00)1000 to H'(00)7FFF EB5 (16 kbytes) EB5 (16 kbytes) H'(00)8000 to H'(00)BFFF EB6 (8 kbytes) EB6 (8 kbytes) H'(00)C000 to H'(00)DFFF EB7 (8 kbytes) EB7 (8 kbytes) H'00E000 to H'00FFFF EB8 (32 kbytes) — H'010000 to H'017FFF EB9 (32 kbytes) — H'018000 to H'01FFFF 21.5.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory control (in F-ZTAT versions), and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details on functions not related to on-chip flash memory, see section 3.2.4, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), and descriptions of individual modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. 2 Bits 6 to 4—I C Control (IICX1, IICX0, IICE): When the on-chip IIC option is included, these 2 2 bits control the operation of the I C bus interface. For details, see section 16, I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option]. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 592 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents are retained. Bit 3 FLSHE Description 0 Flash memory control registers deselected 1 Flash memory control registers selected (Initial value) Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits control 8-bit timer operation. See section 12, 8-Bit Timers, for details. 21.6 On-Board Programming Modes When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 21.6. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 21.3. Only advanced mode setting is possible for boot mode. In the case of user program mode, established in advanced mode or normal mode, depending on the setting of the MD0 pin. In normal mode, only programming of a 56-kbyte area of flash memory is possible. Table 21.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes Mode Mode Name CPU Operating Mode MD1 MD0 P92 P91 P90 1* 1* Boot mode Advanced mode 0 0 1* User program mode Advanced mode 1 0 — — — 1 — — — Normal mode Note: * Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 593 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.6.1 Boot Mode When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode. When a reset-start is executed after the H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group MCU’s pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program built into the MCU is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially transmitted to the MCU via the SCI. In the MCU, the programming control program received via the SCI is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is performed). The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the programming algorithm given later. The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 21.7, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 21.8. The chip Flash memory Host Write data reception Verify data transmission RxD1 SCI1 TxD1 Figure 21.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 594 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 On-chip RAM Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Start Set pins to boot program mode and execute reset-start Host transfers data (H'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate MCU measures low period of H'00 data transmitted by host MCU calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register After bit rate adjustment, transmits one H'00 data byte to host to indicate end of adjustment Host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (H'00), and transmits one H'55 data byte After receiving H'55, MCU transfers part of boot program to RAM Check flash memory data, and if data has already been written, erase all blocks After confirming that all flash memory data has been erased, MCU transmits one H'AA data byte to host Host transmits number of user program bytes (N), upper byte followed by lower byte MCU transmits received number of bytes to host as verify data (echo-back) n=1 Host transmits user program sequentially in byte units MCU transmits received user program to host as verify data (echo-back) n+1→n Transfer received programming control program to on-chip RAM No n = N? Yes End of transmission Transmit one H'AA data byte to host, and execute programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations are halted. Figure 21.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 595 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) D7 Stop bit High period (1 or more bits) Figure 21.9 RxD1 Input Signal When Using Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment When boot mode is initiated, the H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group MCU measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The MCU calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the MCU. If reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. Depending on the host’s transmission bit rate and the MCU’s system clock frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the MCU. To ensure correct SCI operation, the host’s transfer bit rate should be set to (2400, 4800, or 9600) bps. Table 21.7 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of the MCU’s bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system clock range. Table 21.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group Bit Rate Is Possible Host Bit Rate System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment of H8S/2138 or H8S/2134 Group Bit Rate Is Possible 9600 bps 8 MHz to 20 MHz 4800 bps 4 MHz to 20 MHz 2400 bps 2 MHz to 18 MHz Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 596 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 128-byte area from H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 21.10. The area to which the programming control program is transferred is H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)EFFF (3968 bytes) in the 128-kbyte versions including H8S/2132, except for H8S/2132R or H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF)EFFF (1920 bytes) in the 64-kbyte versions including H8S/2132R, except for H8S/2132. The boot program area can be used when the programming control program transferred into RAM enters the execution state. A stack area should be set up as required. H'(FF)E080 Programming control*1 program area (3,968 bytes) H'(FF)EFFF H'(FF)FF00 H'(FF)FF7F H'(FF)E880 Programming control program area (1,920 bytes) H'(FF)EFFF Boot program area*2 (128 bytes) (a) 128-kbyte versions (including H8S/2132) H'(FF)FF00 H'(FF)FF7F Boot program area*1 (128 bytes) (b) 64-kbyte versions (except for H8S/2132) Notes: 1. In H8S/2132 F-ZTAT (Mask ROM version), H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)E87F is a reserved area that is used only for boot mode operation. Do not use this area for other purpose. 2. The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot program remains stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming control program. Figure 21.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode Notes on Use of User Mode: • When the chip comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI’s RxD1 pin. The reset should end with RxD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for the chip to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD1 input. • In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 597 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) • Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. • The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on the board. • Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H'(FF)E080 (128-kbyte versions including H8S/2132, except for H8S/2132R or H'(FF)E880 (64-kbyte versions, including H8S/2132R, except for H8S/2132)), the chip terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The transmit data output pin, TxD1, goes to the high-level output state (P84DDR = 1, P84DR = 1). The contents of the CPU’s internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program. The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed. • Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 21.6 and executing a reset-start. 1 When the chip detects the boot mode setting at reset release* , P92, P91, and P90 can be used as I/O ports. Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting 1 the mode pins, and executing reset release* . Boot mode can also be cleared by a WDT overflow reset. The mode pin input levels must not be changed in boot mode. • If the mode pin input levels are changed (for example, from low to high) during a reset, the state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, WR) 2 will change according to the change in the microcomputer’s operating mode* . Therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to prevent these pins from becoming output signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with signals outside the microcomputer. Notes: 1. Mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states) with respect to the reset release timing. 2. Ports with multiplexed address functions will output a low level as the address signal if mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. The bus control output signals will output a high level if mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 598 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.6.2 User Program Mode When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing on-board supply of programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. To select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory (mode 2 or 3). In this mode, on-chip supporting modules other than flash memory operate as they normally would in mode 2 and 3. The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip RAM or external memory. Figure 21.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when transferred to on-chip RAM. Write the transfer program (and the program/ erase control program if necessary) beforehand MD1, MD0 = 10, 11 Reset-start Transfer program/erase control program to RAM Branch to program/erase control program in RAM area Execute program/erase control program (flash memory rewriting) Branch to flash memory application program Note: The watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Figure 21.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 599 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR2, and the P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR1. The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory. Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR1, and the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. 21.7.1 Program Mode Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 21.12 to write data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a time. The wait times (x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of writes (N) are shown in section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics. Following the elapse of (x) µs or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. Thirty-two consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + α + β) µs as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P bit in Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 600 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) FLMCR1. The time during which the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) µs. 21.7.2 Program-Verify Mode In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the P bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the PSU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later). The watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to programverify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 21.12) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After 32 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least (η) µs, then clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on the same bits. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 601 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Start Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) µs *5 Store 32-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area *4 n=1 m=0 Write 32-byte data in RAM reprogram data area consecutively to flash memory *1 n←n+1 Enable WDT Set PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) µs Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) µs Clear P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (α) µs *5 Start of programming *5 End of programming *5 Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (β) µs *5 Disable WDT Set PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (γ) µs *5 Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00, H'20, H'40, H'60, H'80, H'A0, H'C0, or H'E0. A 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. 3. If a bit for which programming has been completed in the 32-byte programming loop fails the following verify phase, additional programming is performed for that bit. 4. An area for storing program data (32 bytes) and reprogram data (32 bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the latter are rewritten as programming progresses. 5. See section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, and N. H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (ε) µs *5 Read verify data *2 Program data = verify data? NG Increment address OK Reprogram data computation Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area NG m=1 Program Data 0 Verify Data 0 Reprogram Data 1 0 1 0 Programming incomplete; reprogram 1 0 1 — 1 1 1 Still in erased state; no action Comments Reprogramming is not performed if program data and verify data match *3 RAM *4 Program data storage area (32 bytes) End of 32-byte data verification? OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs m = 0? OK Reprogram data storage area (32 bytes) *5 NG n ≥ N? *5 NG OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 End of programming Programming failure Figure 21.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 602 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.7.3 Erase Mode Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 21.13. The wait times (x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of erases (N) are shown in section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics. To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least (x) µs after setting the SWE bit to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + α + β) ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the E bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 21.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the E bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least (η) µs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks, clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting in EBR1 or EBR2 for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 603 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Start *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) µs *5 n=1 Set EBR1, EBR2 *3 Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) µs *5 Start of erase Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) ms *5 Clear E bit in FLMCR1 n←n+1 Halt erase Wait (α) µs *5 Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (β) µs *5 Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (γ) µs *5 Set block start address to verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address Increment address Wait (ε) µs *5 Read verify data *2 Verify data = all 1? NG OK NG Last address of block? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs NG Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. *4 End of erasing of all erase blocks? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 *5 Wait (η) µs *5 *5 n ≥ N? Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 End of erasing Erase failure NG Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units. Set only one bit in EBR1or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. See section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, and N. Figure 21.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 604 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.8 Flash Memory Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 21.8.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 21.8.) Table 21.8 Hardware Protection Functions Item Description Program Erase Reset/standby protection • In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset), software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. Yes Yes • In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. 21.8.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1 and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 21.9.) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 605 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.9 Software Protection Functions Item Description Program Erase SWE bit protection • Yes Yes — Yes Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the program/erase-protected state for all blocks. (Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory.) Block specification protection 21.8.3 • Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). • Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state. Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. FLER bit setting conditions are as follows: • When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) • Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing • When a SLEEP instruction (transition to software standby, sleep, subactive, subsleep, or watch mode) is executed during programming/erasing • When the bus is released during programming/erasing Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 606 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Figure 21.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. Program mode Erase mode RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Reset or hardware standby (hardware protection) RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 Error occurrence*2 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Error occurrence*1 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch mode Error protection mode RD VF*4 PR ER FLER = 1 Software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch mode release FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2 initialization state Error protection mode (software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch ) RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2 initialization state*3 Legend: RD: VF: PR: ER: Memory read possible Verify-read possible Programming possible Erasing possible RD: VF: PR: ER: Memory read not possible Verify-read not possible Programming not possible Erasing not possible Notes: 1. When an error occurs other than due to a SLEEP instruction, or when a SLEEP instruction is executed for a transition to subactive mode 2. When an error occurs due to a SLEEP instruction (except subactive mode) 3. Except sleep mode 4. VF in subactive mode Figure 21.14 Flash Memory State Transitions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 607 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.9 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including NMI input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased 1 (when the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot mode* , to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this: 1. Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. 2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would 2 not be read correctly* , possibly resulting in MCU runaway. 3. If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal erasing and programming or MCU operation. All interrupt requests, including NMI input, must therefore be disabled inside and outside the MCU when programming or erasing flash memory. Interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state while the P or E bit remains set in FLMCR1. Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until the programming control program has completed programming. 2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons: • If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be returned). • If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 608 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10 Flash Memory Programmer Mode 21.10.1 Programmer Mode Setting Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board programming modes. In programmer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using a PROM programmer that supports Renesas Technology microcomputer device types with 1281 3 2 3 kbyte* * or 64-kbyte* * on-chip flash memory. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation. Table 21.10 shows programmer mode pin settings. Notes: 1. Applies to the H8S/2138 and H8S/2134 2. Applies to the H8S/2132. 3. Use products other than the A-mask version of the H8S/2138, H8S/2134, and H8S/2132 (in either 5-V or 3-V version) with the writing voltage for the PROM programmer set to 5.0 V. Do not use the A-mask version with a 5.0-V PROM programmer setting. Table 21.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings Pin Names Setting/External Circuit Connection Mode pins: MD1, MD0 Low-level input to MD1, MD0 STBY pin High-level input (Hardware standby mode not set) RES pin Power-on reset circuit XTAL and EXTAL pins Oscillation circuit Other setting pins: P97, P92, P91, P90, P67 Low-level input to P92, P67, high-level input to P97, P91, P90 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 609 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the writer programmer to match the package concerned. Socket adapters are available for each writer manufacturer supporting Renesas Technology microcomputer device types with 128-kbyte or 64-kbyte on-chip flash memory. Figure 21.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode. For pin names in programmer mode, see section 1.3.2, Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode. MCU mode H8S/2138 H8S/2134 H'000000 Programmer mode H'00000 MCU mode H8S/2132 Programmer mode H'00000 H'000000 On-chip ROM area On-chip ROM area H'01FFFF H'00FFFF H'0FFFF Undefined value output H'1FFFF H'1FFFF Figure 21.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode 21.10.3 Programmer Mode Operation Table 21.11 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and table 21.12 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below. • Memory Read Mode Memory read mode supports byte reads. • Auto-Program Mode Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. • Auto-Erase Mode Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. • Status Read Mode Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 610 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.11 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode Pin Names Mode CE OE WE FO7 to FO0 FA17 to FA0 Read L L H Data output Ain* Output disable L H H Hi-Z X Command write 1 Chip disable* L H L Data input Ain* H X X Hi-Z X 2 2 Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. Table 21.12 Programmer Mode Commands 1st Cycle 2nd Cycle Command Name Number of Cycles Mode Address Data Mode Address Data Memory read mode 1+n Write X H'00 Read RA Dout Auto-program mode 129 Write X H'40 Write WA Din Auto-erase mode 2 Write X H'20 Write X H'20 Status read mode 2 Write X H'71 Write X H'71 Notes: 1. In auto-program mode, 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. 2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n). 21.10.4 Memory Read Mode • After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by means of a command write before the read is executed. • Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state. • Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed. • After power-on, memory read mode is entered. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 611 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs CE hold time tceh 0 — ns CE setup time tces 0 — ns Data hold time tdh 50 — ns Data setup time tds 50 — ns Write pulse width twep 70 — ns WE rise time tr — 30 ns WE fall time tf — 30 ns Command write Memory read mode FA17 to FA0 Address stable CE OE WE FO7 to FO0 twep tceh tnxtc tces tf tr Data Data tdh tds Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE. Figure 21.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 612 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.14 AC Characteristics When Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs CE hold time tceh 0 — ns CE setup time tces 0 — ns Data hold time tdh 50 — ns Data setup time tds 50 — ns Write pulse width twep 70 — ns WE rise time tr — 30 ns WE fall time tf — 30 ns Memory read mode FA17 to FA0 Other mode command write Address stable CE twep tnxtc OE tces WE FO7 to FO0 tceh tf Data tr H'XX tdh Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time. tds Figure 21.17 Timing Waveforms When Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 613 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Table 21.15 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Access time tacc — 20 µs CE output delay time tce — 150 ns OE output delay time toe — 150 ns Output disable delay time tdf — 100 ns Data output hold time toh 5 — ns FA17 to FA0 Address stable Address stable CE VIL OE VIL tacc WE VIH tacc toh toh Data FO7 to FO0 Data Figure 21.18 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE CE OE Enable State Read FA17 to FA0 Address stable Address stable tacc CE tce tce OE toe toe WE FO7 to FO0 Data Data toh Figure 21.19 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE CE OE Clocked Read Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 614 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 tdf tdf tacc toh VIH Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10.5 Auto-Program Mode AC Characteristics Table 21.16 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs CE hold time tceh 0 — ns CE setup time tces 0 — ns Data hold time tdh 50 — ns Data setup time tds 50 — ns Write pulse width twep 70 — ns Status polling start time twsts 1 — ms Status polling access time tspa — 150 ns Address setup time tas 0 — ns Address hold time tah 60 — ns Memory write time twrite 1 3000 ms WE rise time tr — 30 ns WE fall time tf — 30 ns Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 615 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Address stable FA17 to FA0 tceh CE tas tah tnxtc OE tnxtc twep WE FO7 Data transfer 1 byte to 128 bytes tces twsts tspa twrite (1 to 3000 ms) Programming operation end identification signal tr tf tds tdh Programming normal end identification signal FO6 Programming wait FO7 to FO0 H'40 Data Data FO5 to FO0 = 0 Figure 21.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms Notes on Use of Auto-Program Mode • In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. • A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. • The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. • Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 21.20). Do not perform transfer after the second cycle. • Do not perform a command write during a programming operation. • Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. • Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end identification pin). • The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 616 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10.6 Auto-Erase Mode AC Characteristics Table 21.17 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs CE hold time tceh 0 — ns CE setup time tces 0 — ns Data hold time tdh 50 — ns Data setup time tds 50 — ns Write pulse width twep 70 — ns Status polling start time tests 1 — ms Status polling access time tspa — 150 ns Memory erase time terase 100 40000 ms WE rise time tr — 30 ns WE fall time tf — 30 ns FA17 to FA0 tceh tces CE tspa OE WE tnxtc twep tf tests tr terase (100 to 40000 ms) tds FO7 tdh Erase normal end confirmation signal FO6 FO7 to FO0 tnxtc Erase end identification signal CLin DLin H'20 H'20 FO5 to FO0 = 0 Figure 21.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 617 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Notes on Use of Erase-Program Mode • Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. • Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. • Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking FO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose (FO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end identification pin). • The status polling FO6 and FO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE. 21.10.7 Status Read Mode • Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode when an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode. • The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is performed. Table 21.18 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C Item Symbol Min Max Unit Command write cycle tnxtc 20 — µs CE hold time tceh 0 — ns CE setup time tces 0 — ns Data hold time tdh 50 — ns Data setup time tds 50 — ns Write pulse width twep 70 — ns OE output delay time toe — 150 ns Disable delay time tdf — 100 ns CE output delay time tce — 150 ns WE rise time tr — 30 ns WE fall time tf — 30 ns Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 618 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) FA17 to FA0 CE tnxtc tce OE WE tnxtc twep tf tf tr toe tdf tr tds tds FO7 to FO0 tceh tces tceh tces tnxtc twep tdh tdh H'71 H'71 Data Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined. Figure 21.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms Table 21.19 Status Read Mode Return Commands Pin Name FO7 FO6 Attribute Normal Command end error identification Initial value 0 0 Indications Normal end: 0 Command error: 1 Abnormal end: 1 FO5 FO4 FO3 FO2 FO1 FO0 Programming error Erase error — — Programming or erase count exceeded Effective address error 0 0 0 0 0 0 — Count Effective exceeded: 1 address Otherwise: 0 error: 1 Erase — Programerror: 1 ming Otherwise: 0 Otherwise: 0 error: 1 Otherwise: 0 Otherwise: 0 Note: FO2 and FO3 are undefined. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 619 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10.8 Status Polling • The FO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase mode. • The FO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-erase mode. Table 21.20 Status Polling Output Truth Table Pin Names Internal Operation in Progress Abnormal End — Normal End FO7 0 1 0 1 FO6 0 0 1 1 FO0 to FO5 0 0 0 0 21.10.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. Table 21.21 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications Item Symbol Min Max Unit Standby release (oscillation stabilization time) tosc1 20 — ms PROM mode setup time tbmv 10 — ms VCC hold time tdwn 0 — ms VCC RES tosc1 tbmv tdwn Memory read Auto-program mode mode Auto-erase mode Command wait state Command Don't care wait state Normal/ abnormal end identification Command reception Figure 21.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time, Programmer Mode Setup Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 620 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) 21.10.10 Notes on Memory Programming • When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out autoerasing before auto-programming. • When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto-programming. Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas. For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that autoerasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block. 21.11 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions Precautions concerning the use of on-board programming mode and programmer mode are summarized below. Use the specified voltages and timing for programming and erasing: Applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. For a PROM programmer, use Renesas Technology microcomputer device types with 128-kbyte or 64-kbyte on-chip flash memory that support a 5.0 V programming voltage. Do not select the HN28F101 or use a programming voltage of 3.3 V for the PROM programmer, and only use the specified socket adapter. Incorrect use will result in damaging the device. Powering on and off: When applying or disconnecting VCC, fix the RES pin low and place the flash memory in the hardware protection state. The power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and subsequent recovery. Use the recommended algorithm when programming and erasing flash memory: The recommended algorithm enables programming and erasing to be carried out without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. When setting the P or E bit in FLMCR1, the watchdog timer should be set beforehand as a precaution against program runaway, etc. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 621 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 21 ROM (Mask ROM Version, H8S/2138 F-ZTAT, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT, and H8S/2132 F-ZTAT) Do not set or clear the SWE bit during program execution in flash memory: Clear the SWE bit before executing a program or reading data in flash memory. When the SWE bit is set, data in flash memory can be rewritten, but flash memory should only be accessed for verify operations (verification during programming/erasing). Do not use interrupts while flash memory is being programmed or erased: All interrupt requests, including NMI, should be disabled to give priority to program/erase operations. Do not perform additional programming. Erase the memory before reprogramming. In onboard programming, perform only one programming operation on a 32-byte programming unit block. In programmer mode, too, perform only one programming operation on a 128-byte programming unit block. Programming should be carried out with the entire programming unit block erased. Before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the PROM programmer. Overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the PROM programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. Do not touch the socket adapter or chip during programming. Touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. 21.12 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version The mask ROM version dose not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 21.22 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 21.22 is read in the mask ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure that the registers in table 21.22 have no effect. Table 21.22 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version Register Abbreviation Address Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 H'FF80 Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 H'FF81 Erase block register 1 EBR1 H'FF82 Erase block register 2 EBR2 H'FF83 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 622 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.1 Overview H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-mask version and H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-mask version have 128 kbytes of on-chip flash memory. The flash memory is connected to the bus master by a 16-bit data bus. The bus master accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher processing speed. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM. The flash memory version of this group can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a general-purpose PROM programmer. 22.1.1 Block Diagram Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM. Internal data bus (upper 8 bits) Internal data bus (lower 8 bits) H'000000 H'000001 H'000002 H'000003 H'01FFFE H'01FFFF Figure 22.1 ROM Block Diagram Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 623 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.1.2 Register Configuration This group on-chip ROM is controlled by the operating mode and register MDCR. The register configuration is shown in table 22.1. Table 22.1 ROM Register Register Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Mode control register MDCR R/W Undefined Depends on the operating mode H'FFC5 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 22.2 Register Descriptions 22.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) Bit Initial value Read/Write 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXPE — — — — — MDS1 MDS0 —* R/W* 0 0 0 0 0 —* —* — — — — — R R Note: * Determined by the MD1 and MD0 pins. MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register used to set this group operating mode and monitor the current operating mode. The EXPE bit is initialized in accordance with the mode pin states by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Expanded Mode Enable (EXPE): Sets expanded mode. In mode 1, EXPE is fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. In modes 2 and 3, EXPE has an initial value of 0 and can be read or written. Bit 7 EXPE Description 0 Single-chip mode selected 1 Expanded mode selected Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 624 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Bits 1 and 0—Mode Select 1 and 0 (MDS1, MDS0): These bits indicate values that reflects the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS1 and MDS0 correspond to pins MD1 and MD0, respectively. These are read-only bits, and cannot be modified. When MDCR is read, the input levels of mode pins MD1 and MD0 are latched in these bits. 22.3 Operation The on-chip flash memory is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, and both byte and word data is accessed in one state. Even addresses are connected to the upper 8 bits, and odd addresses to the lower 8 bits. Word data must start at an even address. The mode pins (MD1 and MD0) and the EXPE bit in MDCR can be set to enable or disable the on-chip ROM, as shown in table 22.2. In normal mode, the maximum amount of ROM that can be used is 56 kbytes. Table 22.2 Operating Modes and ROM Operating Mode MCU Operating Mode CPU Operating Mode Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode Pins MDCR Description MD1 MD0 EXPE On-Chip ROM Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM disabled 0 1 1 Disabled Advanced Single-chip mode 1 0 0 Advanced Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled Enabled (128 kbytes) Normal Single-chip mode Normal Expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled 1 1 0 1 Enabled (56 kbytes) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 625 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.4 Overview of Flash Memory 22.4.1 Features The features of the flash memory are summarized below. • Four flash memory operating modes Program mode Erase mode Program-verify mode Erase-verify mode • Programming/erase methods The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase (in single-block units). When erasing multiple blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. Block erasing can be performed as required on 1-kbyte, 28-kbyte, 16-kbyte, 8kbyte, and 32-kbyte blocks. • Programming/erase times The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 128-byte programming, equivalent to approximately 80 µs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. • Reprogramming capability The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. • On-board programming modes There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: Boot mode User program mode • Automatic bit rate adjustment With data transfer in boot mode, the bit rate of the chip can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host. • Protect modes There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. • Programmer mode Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 626 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.4.2 Block Diagram Internal address bus Internal data bus (16 bits) Module bus FLMCR1 FLMCR2 EBR1 EBR2 * * Bus interface/controller Operating mode Mode pins * * Flash memory (128 kbytes) Legend: FLMCR1: FLMCR2: EBR1: EBR2: Flash memory control register 1 Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 Erase block register 2 Note: * These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. Figure 22.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 627 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes Mode Transitions: When the mode pins are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 22.3. In user mode, flash memory can be read but not programmed or erased. Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer mode. Reset state MD1 = 1 RES = 0 User mode with on-chip ROM enabled SWE = 1 RES = 0 *2 SWE = 0 RES = 0 *1 RES = 0 Programmer mode User program mode Boot mode On-board programming mode Notes: Only make a transition between user mode and user program mode when the CPU is not accessing the flash memory. 1. MD0 = MD1 = 0, P92 = P91 = P90 = 1 2. MD0 = MD1 = 0, P92 = 0, P91 = P90 = 1 Figure 22.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 628 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) On-Board Programming Modes • Boot mode 1. Initial state The flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. The description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. The user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. Programming control program transfer When boot mode is entered, the boot program in the chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, an SCI communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot program area. Host Host Programming control program Programming control program New application program New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Boot program area Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The erase program in the boot program area (in RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. Programming control program 4. Writing new application program The programming control program transferred from the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. Host Host New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory Flash memory RAM Programming control program RAM Boot program area Boot program area Flash memory erase SCI Boot program New application program Programming control program Program execution state Figure 22.4 Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 629 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) • User program mode 1. Initial state (1) the program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip RAM should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) The programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. Programming/erase control program transfer The transfer program in the flash memory is executed, and the programming/erase control program is transferred to RAM. Host Host Programming/ erase control program New application program New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM RAM Transfer program Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Application program (old version) Application program (old version) 3. Flash memory initialization The programming/erase program in RAM is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF). Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. Writing new application program Next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to unerased blocks. Host Host New application program The chip The chip SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Transfer program SCI Boot program Flash memory RAM Transfer program Programming/ erase control program Flash memory erase Programming/ erase control program New application program Program execution state Figure 22.5 User Program Mode (Example) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 630 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode Boot Mode User Program Mode Yes Yes Block erase No Yes Programming control program* Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify Entire memory erase Program/program-verify Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm. Block Configuration: The flash memory is divided into two 32-kbyte blocks, two 8-kbyte blocks, one 16-kbyte block, one 28-kbyte block, and four 1-kbyte blocks. Address H'00000 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 1 kbyte 28 kbytes 16 kbytes 128 kbytes 8 kbytes 8 kbytes 32 kbytes 32 kbytes Address H'1FFFF Figure 22.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 631 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.4.4 Pin Configuration The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 22.3. Table 22.3 Flash Memory Pins Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function Reset RES Input Reset Mode 1 MD1 Input Sets MCU operating mode Mode 0 MD0 Input Sets MCU operating mode Port 92 P92 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Port 91 P91 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Port 90 P90 Input Sets MCU operating mode when MD1 = MD0 = 0 Transmit data TxD1 Output Serial transmit data output Receive data RxD1 Input Serial receive data input 22.4.5 Register Configuration The registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 22.4. In order for these registers to be accessed, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 in STCR. Table 22.4 Flash Memory Registers Initial Value Address* R/W* 3 R/W* 3 H'80 4 H'00* H'FF80* 2 H'FF81* Erase block register 2 EBR1* 5 EBR2* R/W* 3 R/W* H'00* 4 H'00* H'FF82* 2 H'FF83* Serial timer control register STCR R/W H'00 H'FFC3 Register Name Abbreviation R/W Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1* 5 FLMCR2* Flash memory control register 2 Erase block register 1 5 5 3 4 1 2 2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Flash memory registers share addresses with other registers. Register selection is performed by the FLSHE bit in the serial timer control register (STCR). 3. In modes in which the on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. 4. When the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00. 5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are valid for these registers, the access requiring 2 states. These registers are used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version, a read at any of these addresses will return an undefined value, and writes are invalid. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 632 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.5 Register Descriptions 22.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FWE SWE — — EV PV E P Initial value 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. Program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1. Program mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the P bit. Erase mode is entered by setting SWE to 1, then setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and finally setting the E bit. FLMCR1 is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Writes to the EV and PV bits in FLMCR1 are enabled only when SWE=1; writes to the E bit only when SWE = 1, and ESU = 1; and writes to the P bit only when SWE = 1, and PSU = 1. Bit 7—Flash Write Enable (FWE): Sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. Bit 6—Software Write Enable (SWE): Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE should be set before setting bits ESU, PSU, EV, PV, E, P, and EB7 to EB0, and should not be cleared at the same time as these bits. Bit 6 SWE Description 0 Writes disabled 1 Writes enabled (Initial value) Bit 5 and 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 633 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Bit 3—Erase-Verify (EV): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 3 EV Description 0 Erase-verify mode cleared 1 Transition to erase-verify mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 2—Program-Verify (PV): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 2 PV Description 0 Program-verify mode cleared 1 Transition to program-verify mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 1—Erase (E): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, ESU, PSU, EV, PV, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 E Description 0 Erase mode cleared 1 Transition to erase mode [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and ESU = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 634 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Bit 0—Program (P): Selects program mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE, PSU, ESU, EV, PV, or E bit at the same time. Bit 0 P Description 0 Program mode cleared 1 Transition to program mode (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1, and PSU = 1 22.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FLER — — — — — ESU PSU Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R — — — — — R/W R/W FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register that monitors the presence or absence of flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) and performs setup for flash memory program/erase mode. FLMCR2 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The ESU and PSU bits are cleared to 0 in software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00 and writes are invalid. Bit 7—Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 635 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Bit 7 FLER Description 0 Flash memory is operating normally (Initial value) Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled [Clearing condition] Reset or hardware standby mode 1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled [Setting condition] See section 22.8.3, Error Protection Bits 6 to 2—Reserved: Should always be written with 0. Bit 1—Erase Setup (ESU): Prepares for a transition to erase mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, PSU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 1 ESU Description 0 Erase setup cleared 1 Erase setup (Initial value) [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Bit 0—Program Setup (PSU): Prepares for a transition to program mode. Set this bit to 1 before setting the P bit to 1 in FLMCR1. Do not set the SWE, ESU, EV, PV, E, or P bit at the same time. Bit 0 PSU Description 0 Program setup cleared 1 Program setup [Setting condition] When SWE = 1 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 636 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 (Initial value) Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.5.3 Erase Block Registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EBR1 — — — — — — EB9 EB8 0 2 —* 0 2 —* 0 2 —* 0 2 —* 0 2 —* 0 2 —* 0 0 1 R/W* R/W* 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write 1 R/W* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value Read/Write Bit EBR2 1 Notes: 1. In normal mode, these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0. 2. This bit must not be set to 1. EBR1 and EBR2 are registers that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; bits 1 and 0 in EBR1 and bits 7 to 0 in EBR2 are readable/writable bits. EBR1 and EBR2 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, and when the SWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set. When a bit in EBR1 and EBR2 is set, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2 (more than one bit cannot be set). When on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 22.5. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 637 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Table 22.5 Flash Memory Erase Blocks Block (Size) Address EB0 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0000 to H'(00)03FF EB1 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0400 to H'(00)07FF EB2 (1 kbyte) H'(00)0800 to H'(00)0BFF EB3 (1 kbytes) H'(00)0C00 to H'(00)0FFF EB4 (28 kbytes) H'(00)1000 to H'(00)7FFF EB5 (16 kbytes) H'(00)8000 to H'(00)BFFF EB6 (8 kbytes) H'(00)C000 to H'(00)DFFF EB7 (8 kbytes) H'00E000 to H'00FFFF EB8 (32 kbytes) H'010000 to H'017FFF EB9 (32 kbytes) H'018000 to H'01FFFF 22.5.4 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — ICKS1 ICKS0 Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Read/Write R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls register access, the IIC operating mode (when the on-chip IIC option is included), and on-chip flash memory, and also selects the TCNT input clock. For details on functions not related to on-chip flash memory, see section 3.2.4, Serial Timer Control Register (STCR), and descriptions of individual modules. If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7—Reserved: Do not set to 1. 2 2 Bits 6 to 4—I C Control (IICX1, IICX0, IICE): These bits control the operation of the I C bus 2 interface. For details, see section 16, I C Bus Interface [H8S/2138 Group Option]. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 638 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Bit 3—Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents are retained. Bit 3 FLSHE Description 0 Flash memory control registers deselected 1 Flash memory control registers selected (Initial value) Bit 2—Reserved: Do not write 1 to this bit. Bits 1 and 0—Internal Clock Select 1 and 0 (ICKS1, ICKS0): These bits control 8-bit timer operation. See section 12, 8-Bit Timers, for details. 22.6 On-Board Programming Modes When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 22.6. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 22.3. Only advanced mode setting is possible for boot mode. In the case of user program mode, established in advanced mode or normal mode, depending on the setting of the MD0 pin. In normal mode, only programming of a 56-kbyte area of flash memory is possible. Table 22.6 Setting On-Board Programming Modes Mode Mode Name CPU Operating Mode MD1 MD0 P92 P91 P90 1* 1* Boot mode Advanced mode 0 0 1* User program mode Advanced mode 1 0 — — — 1 — — — Normal mode Note: * Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 639 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.6.1 Boot Mode When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode. When a reset-start is executed after the chip’s pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program built into the chip is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially transmitted to the chip via the SCI. In the chip, the programming control program received via the SCI is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is performed). The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the programming algorithm given later. The system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 22.7, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 22.8. The chip Flash memory Host Write data reception Verify data transmission RxD1 SCI1 TxD1 Figure 22.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 640 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 On-chip RAM Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Start Set pins to boot mode and execute reset-start Host transfers data (H'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate The chip measures low period of H'00 data transmitted by host The chip calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register After bit rate adjustment, transmits one H'00 data byte to host to indicate end of adjustment Host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (H'00), and transmits one H'55 data byte After receiving H'55, trransmit one H'AA data byte to host Host transmits number of user program bytes (N), upper byte followed by lower byte The chip transmits received number of bytes to host as verify data (echo-back) n=1 Host transmits programming control program sequentially in byte units The chip transmits received programming control program to host as verify data (echo-back) n+1→n Transfer received programming control program to on-chip RAM No n = N? Yes End of transmission Check flash memory data, and if data has already been written, erase all blocks Confirming that all flash memory data has been erased Check ID code at begining of user program transfer area ID code match No Yes Transmit one H'AA byte to host Execute programming control program transferred to on-chip RAM Transfer 1-byte of H'FF data as an ID code error indicator and halt other operations Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations are halted. Figure 22.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 641 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment Start bit D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) Stop bit High period (1 or more bits) Figure 22.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment When boot mode is initiated, the chip measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The chip calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. Depending on the host’s transmission bit rate and the chip’s system clock frequency, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the chip. To ensure correct SCI operation, the host’s transfer bit rate should be set to (4800, 9600, or 19200) bps. Table 22.7 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of the chip’s bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this system clock range. Table 22.7 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of the Chip's Bit Rate Is Possible Host Bit Rate System Clock Frequency for which Automatic Adjustment of Bit Rate Is Possible 19200 bps 8 MHz to 20 MHz 9600 bps 4 MHz to 20 MHz 4800 bps 2 MHz to 18 MHz On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 1920-byte area from H'(FF)E880 to H'(FF) EFFF and the 128-byte area from H'(FF)FF00 to H'(FF)FF7F is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 22.10. The area to which the programming control program is transferred is H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)E87F (2048 bytes). However, the 8-byte area from H'(FF)E080 to H'(FF)E087 is reserved for ID codes as shown in figure 22.10. The boot program Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 642 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) area can be used when the programming control program transferred into the RAM enters the execution state. A stack area should be set up as required. H'(FF)E080 ID code area H'(FF)E088 Programming control program area (2040 bytes) H'(FF)E880 Boot program area* (1920 bytes) H'(FF)EFFF H'(FF)FF00 Boot program area* (128 bytes) H'(FF)FF7F Note: * The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the programming control program transferred to the RAM. Note that the boot program remains stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming control program. Figure 22.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode In the boot mode of this chip, the content in the 8-byte ID code area shown below is confirmed so that whether or not there is a programming control program that corresponds to the chip can be checked. H'(FF)E080 40 FE 64 66 32 31 34 39 ↑ (Product identification code) H'(FF)E088 ~ Instruction code for programming control program When a new programming-control program for use in boot mode is created, add the 8-byte ID code described above to the head of the program. Notes on Use of Boot Mode: • When the chip comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the SCI’s RxD1 pin. The reset should end with RxD1 high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for the chip to get ready to measure the low period of the RxD1 input. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 643 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) • In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. • Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. • The RxD1 and TxD1 pins should be pulled up on the board. • Before branching to the programming control program (RAM area H'(FF)E080), the chip terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The transmit data output pin, TxD1, goes to the high-level output state (P84DDR = 1, P84DR = 1). The contents of the CPU’s internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program. In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the programming control program. The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed. • Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 22.6 and executing a reset-start. 1 When the chip detects the boot mode setting at reset release* , P92, P91, and P90 can be used as I/O ports. Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting 1 the mode pins, and executing reset release* . Boot mode can also be cleared by a WDT overflow reset. The mode pin input levels must not be changed in boot mode. • If the mode pin input levels are changed (for example, from low to high) during a reset, the state of ports with multiplexed address functions and bus control output pins (AS, RD, HWR) 2 will change according to the change in the microcomputer’s operating mode* . Therefore, care must be taken to make pin settings to prevent these pins from becoming output signal pins during a reset, or to prevent collision with signals outside the microcomputer. Notes: 1. Mode pins input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4 states) with respect to the reset release timing. 2. Ports with multiplexed address functions will output a low level as the address signal if mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. The bus control output signals will output a high level if mode pin setting is for mode 1 is entered during a reset. In other modes, the port pins go to the high-impedance state. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 644 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.6.2 User Program Mode When set to user program mode, the chip can program and erase its flash memory by executing a user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing an on-board means of supplying programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as necessary. To select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip flash memory (mode 2 or 3). In this mode, on-chip supporting modules other than flash memory operate as they normally would in mode 2 and 3. The flash memory itself cannot be read while the SWE bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing, so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip RAM or external memory. Figure 22.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when transferred to on-chip RAM. Write the transfer program (and the program/erase control program if necessary) beforehand MD1, MD0 = 10, 11 Reset-start Transfer program/erase control program to RAM Branch to program/erase control program in RAM area Execute program/erase control program (flash memory rewriting) Branch to flash memory application program Note: The watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or overerasing due to program runaway, etc. Figure 22.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 645 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. Transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU and ESU bits in FLMCR2, and the P, E, PV, and EV bits in FLMCR1. The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory. Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE, EV, PV, E, and P bits in FLMCR1, and the ESU and PSU bits in FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. 22.7.1 Program Mode Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 22.12 to write data or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. The wait times (x, y, z1, z2, z3, α, ß, γ, ε, η, θ) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of writes (N) are shown in section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics. Following the elapse of (x) µs or more after the SWE bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), 128-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 128-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be H'00 or H'80. 128 consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z2 + α + β) µs as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup) is carried out by setting the PSU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the P bit in Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 646 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) FLMCR1. The time during which the P bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z1), (z2) or (z3) µs. 22.7.2 Program-Verify Mode In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the P bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the PSU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later). The watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to programverify mode by setting the PV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 22.12) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After 128 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least (η) µs. If the programming count is less than 6, the 128-byte data in the additional program data area should be written consecutively to the write addresses, and additional programming performed. Next clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1, and wait at least (θ) µs . If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times on the same bits. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 647 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Write pulse application subroutine Sub-routine write pulse Start of programming Start Enable WDT Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Set PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (x) µs Wait (y) µs Store 128-byte program data in program data area and reprogram data area Set P bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z1) µs, (z2) µs or (z3) µs m=0 Wait (α) µs Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram data *1 area consecutively to flash memory Sub-routine-call Write pulse See Note 7 for pulse width (z1) µs or (z2) µs Clear PSU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (β) µs Disable WDT Set PV bit in FLMCR1 End sub Wait (γ) µs Note 7: Write Pulse Width Number of Writes n Write Time (z) µs z1 1 Increment address 2 z1 3 z1 4 z1 5 z1 6 z1 7 z2 8 z2 9 z2 10 z2 z2 11 z2 12 13 z2 .. .. . . 998 z2 z2 999 z2 1000 Note: Use a (z3) µs write pulse for additional programming. H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (ε) µs Read verify data Program data = verify data? *2 n←n+1 NG m=1 OK 6 ≥ n? NG OK Additional program data computation Transfer additional program data to additional program data area *4 Reprogram data computation *3 Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area *4 NG Program data storage area (128 bytes) End of 128-byte data verification? OK Clear PV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs Reprogram data storage area (128 bytes) Additional program data storage area (128 kbytes) *4 n=1 *5 Clear P bit in FLMCR1 RAM Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on previously programmed addresses. 6 ≥ n? NG OK Write 128-byte data in additional program data area in RAM consecutively to flash memory *1 Additional write pulse (z3) µs Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be NG NG H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be m = 0? n ≥ 1000? performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes; in this OK OK case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses. Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units. Wait (θ) µs 3. Even bits for which programming has been completed Wait (θ) µs in the 128-byte programming loop will be subjected to End of programming Programming failure additional programming if they fail the subsequent verify operation. 4. A 128-byte area for storing program data, a 128-byte area for storing reprogram data, and a 128-byte area for storing additional program data must be provided in RAM. The reprogram and additional program data contents are modified as programming proceeds. 5. The write pulse of (z1) µs or (z2) µs is applied according to the progress of the programming operation. See Note 7 for the pulse widths. When writing of additional program data is executed, a (z3) µs write pulse should be applied. Reprogram data X' means reprogram data when the write pulse is applied. 6. See section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z1, z2, z3, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, and N. Program Data Computation Chart Original Data Verify Data Reprogram Comments (D) (V) Data (X) 1 Programming completed 0 0 0 Programming incomplete; reprogram 1 1 1 0 1 Still in erased state; no action 1 Additional Program Data Computation Chart Reprogram Verify Data Additional Program Comments Data (X') (V) Data (Y) 0 0 0 Additional programming executed 1 1 Additional programming not executed 1 0 1 1 1 Additional programming not executed Figure 22.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 648 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.7.3 Erase Mode Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 22.13. The wait times (x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ) after setting/clearing individual bits in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and the maximum number of erase (N) are shown in section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics. To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least (x) µs after setting the SWE bit to 1 in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in the event of program runaway, etc. Set a value greater than (y + z + α + β) ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase setup) is carried out by setting the ESU bit in FLMCR2, and after the elapse of (y) µs or more, the operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the E bit in FLMCR1. The time during which the E bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 22.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the E bit in FLMCR1 is cleared, then the ESU bit in FLMCR2 is cleared at least (α) µs later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of (β) µs or more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EV bit in FLMCR1. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of (γ) µs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least (ε) µs after the dummy write before performing this read operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/eraseverify sequence is not repeated more than (N) times. When verification is completed, exit eraseverify mode, and wait for at least (η) µs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks, clear the SWE bit in FLMCR1, and wait (θ) µs. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting in EBR1 or EBR2 for the flash memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 649 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Start *1 Set SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (x) µs *5 n=1 Set EBR1, EBR2 *3 Enable WDT Set ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (y) µs *5 Start of erase Set E bit in FLMCR1 Wait (z) ms *5 Clear E bit in FLMCR1 n←n+1 Halt erase Wait (α) µs *5 Clear ESU bit in FLMCR2 Wait (β) µs *5 Disable WDT Set EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (γ) µs *5 Set block start address to verify address H'FF dummy write to verify address Wait (ε) µs *5 Read verify data Increment address Verify data = all 1? *2 NG OK NG Last address of block? OK Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Clear EV bit in FLMCR1 Wait (η) µs Wait (η) µs *5 *5 NG Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. *4 End of erasing of all erase blocks? OK *5 n ≥ N? Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 OK Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1 Wait (θ) µs Wait (θ) µs End of erasing Erase failure NG Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary. Verify data is read in 16-bit (W) units. Set only one bit in EBR1or EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially. See section 25, Electrical Characteristics, Flash Memory Characteristics, for the values of x, y, z, α, β, γ, ε, η, θ, and N. Figure 22.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart (Single-Block Erase) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 650 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.8 Flash Memory Protection There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 22.8.1 Hardware Protection Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1 and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 22.8.) Table 22.8 Hardware Protection Functions Item Description Program Erase Reset/standby protection • In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in hardware standby mode, software standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state is entered. Yes Yes • In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC Characteristics section. 22.8.2 Software Protection Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE bit in FLMCR1 and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (See table 22.9.) Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 651 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Table 22.9 Software Protection Functions Item Description Program Erase SWE bit protection • Yes Yes — Yes Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the program/erase-protected state for all blocks. (Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory.) Block specification protection 22.8.3 • Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). • Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in the erase-protected state. Error Protection In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the MCU malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. FLER bit setting conditions are as follows: • When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction fetch) • Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing • When a SLEEP instruction (including software standby, sleep, subactive, subsleep and watch mode) is executed during programming/erasing • When the bus is released during programming/erasing Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 652 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Figure 22.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. Normal operation mode Program mode Erase mode RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Reset or hardware standby (hardware protection) RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 RD VF PR ER FLER = 0 Error occurrence*2 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Error occurrence*1 RES = 0 or STBY = 0 Software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch mode Error protection mode RD VF*4 PR ER FLER = 1 Software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch mode release FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2 initialization state Error protection mode (software standby, sleep, subsleep, and watch ) RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2 initialization state*3 Legend: RD: VF: PR: ER: Memory read possible Verify-read possible Programming possible Erasing possible RD: VF: PR: ER: Memory read not possible Verify-read not possible Programming not possible Erasing not possible Notes: 1. When an error occurs other than due to a SLEEP instruction, or when a SLEEP instruction is executed for a transition to subactive mode 2. When an error occurs due to a SLEEP instruction (except subactive mode) 3. Except sleep mode 4. VF in subactive mode Figure 22.14 Flash Memory State Transitions Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 653 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.9 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory All interrupts, including NMI input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased 1 (when the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), and while the boot program is executing in boot mode* , to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three reasons for this: 1. Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured. 2. In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would 2 not be read correctly* , possibly resulting in MCU runaway. 3. If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the normal boot mode sequence. For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal erasing and programming or MCU operation. All interrupt requests, including NMI input, must therefore be disabled inside and outside the MCU when programming or erasing flash memory. Interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state while the P or E bit remains set in FLMCR1. Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until the programming control program has completed programming. 2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons: • If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is set in FLMCR1), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined values will be returned). • If the interrupt entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 654 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.10 Flash Memory Programmer Mode 22.10.1 Programmer Mode Setting Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board programming modes. In programmer mode, the on-chip ROM can be freely programmed using a PROM programmer that supports Renesas Technology microcomputer device types with 128kbyte on-chip flash memory*. For precautions concerning the use of programmer mode, see section 22.10.10, Notes on Memory Programming and section 22.11, Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions. Flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode, auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode, detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation. Table 22.10 shows programmer mode pin settings. Note: * Use products of the H8S/2138 A-mask version (in either 5-V or 3-V version) with the writing voltage for PROM programmer set to 3.3 V. Do not use products other than the A-mask version with 3.3-V PROM programmer setting. Table 22.10 Programmer Mode Pin Settings Pin Names Setting/External Circuit Connection Mode pins: MD1, MD0 Low-level input to MD1, MD0 STBY pin High-level input (Hardware standby mode not set) RES pin Power-on reset circuit XTAL and EXTAL pins Oscillation circuit Other setting pins: P97, P92, P91, P90, P67 Low-level input to p92, p67, high-level input to P97, P91, P90 Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 655 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) 22.10.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the writer programmer to match the package concerned. Socket adapters are available for each writer manufacturer supporting Renesas Technology microcomputer device types with 128-kbyte on-chip flash memory. Figure 22.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode. For pin names in programmer mode, see section 1.3.2, Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode. H8S/2138 A-mask version H8S/2134 A-mask version MCU mode Programmer mode H'000000 H'00000 On-chip ROM area H'01FFFF H'1FFFF Figure 22.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode 22.10.3 Programmer Mode Operation Table 22.11 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and table 22.12 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below. • Memory Read Mode Memory read mode supports byte reads. • Auto-Program Mode Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. • Auto-Erase Mode Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. • Status Read Mode Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the FO6 signal. In status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. Rev. 4.00 Jun 06, 2006 page 656 of 1004 REJ09B0301-0400 Section 22 ROM (H8S/2138 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version, H8S/2134 F-ZTAT A-Mask Version) Table 22.11 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode Pin Names Mode CE OE WE FO7 to FO0 FA17 to FA0 Read L L H Data output Ain* Output disable L H H Hi-Z X Command write 1 Chip disable* L H L Data input Ain* H X X Hi-Z X 2 2 Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. Table 22.12 Programmer Mode Commands 1st Cycle 2nd Cycle Command Name Number of Cycles Mode Address Data Mode Address Data Memory read mode 1+n Write X H'00 Read RA Dout Auto-program mode 129 Write X H'40 Write WA Din Auto-erase mode 2 Write X H'20 Write X H'20 Status read mode 2 Write X H'71 Write X H'71 Notes: 1. In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. 2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write cycles (n). 22.10.4 Memory Read Mode • After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by means of a command write before the read is executed. • Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state